2009 C300sport C300sport4matic C300lux C300lux4matic C350sport 1

C-Class
Operator’s Manual
Symbols X This symbol points to instructions
for you to follow.
Trademarks®:
RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of
X A number of these symbols
appearing in succession indicates
Bluetooth SIG Inc. a multiple-step procedure.
RESP® is a registered trademark of Daimler. Y page This symbol tells you where to look
RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of for further information on a topic.
Prince, a Johnson Controls Company. YY This continuation symbol marks a
RLOGIC7®
warning or procedure which is
is a registered trademark of
continued on the next page.
Harman International Industries,
Incorporated. Display Text in displays, such as the control
system, are printed in the type
RSIRIUS and related marks are trademarks shown here.
of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.
The following symbols are found in this
Operator’s Manual:
G Warning!
Warning notices draw your attention to
hazards that may endanger your health or
life, or the health or life of others.
! Highlights hazards that may result in

damage to your vehicle.
i Helpful hints or further information you

may find useful.
Our company and staff congratulate you on
the purchase of your new Mercedes-Benz.
Your selection of our product is a
demonstration of your trust in our company
name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your desire
to own an automobile that will be as easy as
possible to operate and provide years of
service.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts of
many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To
help assure your driving pleasure, and also
the safety of you and your passengers, we ask
you to make a small investment of time:
RPlease read this manual carefully, then
return it to your vehicle where it will be
handy for your reference.
RPlease follow the recommendations
contained in this manual. They are
designed to acquaint you with the
operation of your Mercedes-Benz.
RPlease pay attention to the warnings and
cautions contained in this manual. They are
designed to help improve the safety of the
vehicle operator and occupants.
We extend our best wishes for many miles of
safe, pleasurable driving.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A Daimler Company
Contents
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
At a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Safety and security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Controls in detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Practical hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
2
Index
1, 2, 3 ... Emergency call upon deployment . 241 Anti-theft systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Front, driver and passenger . . . . . . . 46 Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . 73
4-ETS Front passenger front air bag off Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
see ETS/4-ETS indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . 36, 52, 348 Aquaplaning
4MATIC Messages in the multifunction see Hydroplaning
see All-wheel drive (4MATIC) display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
911 Emergency calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Pelvic air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Aspect ratio (tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Safety guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Audio menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
A Side impact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
ABS (Antilock Brake System) . . . . . . . 67 Window curtain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Audio and telephone operation . . . 152
Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Air conditioning refrigerant and Audio AUX mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Messages in the multifunction lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Bluetooth® settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317, 318 Air distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 CD mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Accessory weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Air pressure Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Accidents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 see Tire inflation pressure MP3 mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Active head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Air pressure (tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Operating safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Air bag deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Air recirculation mode . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Radio operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Emergency calls (Tele Aid) . . . . . . . 241 Air volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Satellite radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Emergency calls (Telephone) . . . . . 196 Alarm system System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Active Bi-Xenon headlamps see Anti-theft systems Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
see Headlamps All-wheel drive (4MATIC) . . . . . . . . . 207 Auto-dimming rear view mirrors . . . . 95
Active head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Automatic central locking . . . . . 80, 150
Resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Messages in the multifunction Automatic climate control
Adaptive Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 see Climate control system
Additives AMG menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Automatic headlamp mode . . . . . . . 100
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Anticorrosion/antifreeze . . . . . . . . . 398 Automatic interior lighting control . 105
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Antiglare, Interior rear view mirror . . 94 Automatic locking when driving . . . 150
Address change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Antilock Brake System Automatic shift program . . . . . . . . . 124
Air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 see ABS Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . 121
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Automatic shift program . . . . . . . . 124
3
Index
Emergency operation (limp-home Bar (air pressure unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Bulbs

mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 BAS (Brake Assist System) . . . . . . . . . 67 see Replacing bulbs
Gear range indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Batteries, SmartKey
Gear ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Checking condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 C
Gear selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
CAC (Customer Assistance Center) . . 22
Gearshifting malfunctions (limp- Battery, Vehicle
California retail buyers and
home mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Hill start assist system . . . . . . . . . . 207 lessees, important notice for . . . . . . . 19
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Kickdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Calls (phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142, 189
Messages in the multifunction
Kickdown (manual shift program) . 128 Can holders
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Manual shift program . . . . . . . . . . . 127 see Cup holders
Bead (tire) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
One-touch gearshifting . . . . . . . . . 125 Capacities and recommended
Beverage holders
Program mode indicator . . . . . . . . 125 fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
see Cup holders
Program mode selector switch Carpets, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Bluetooth® settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124, 125, 127 CD player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Brake fluid
Shifting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Center console
Steering wheel gearshift control . . 126 Lower part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Transmission position indicator . . . 122 Upper part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Brake lamps
Transmission positions . . . . . . . . . 122 Central locking
Cleaning lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
AUX socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 150
High-mounted brake lamp . . . . . . . 355
Axle oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Locking/unlocking from inside . . . . 81
Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Central locking/unlocking switch . . . 81
Brake pads
B Certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Children in the vehicle
Back button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Backrest Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Blocking of rear window operation . . 65
see Seats High-performance brake system . . 288
Child safety locks (rear doors) . . . . . 64
Backup lamps Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Child seat anchors – LATCH-type . . 63
Messages in the multifunction Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Indicator lamp, front passenger
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Break-in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
front air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
4
Index
Infant and child restraint systems . . 60 Cold tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . 281 Convenience submenu
Occupant Classification System Collapsible wheel chock . . . . . . . . . . 302 Easy-entry/exit feature . . . . . . . . . 151
(OCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 COMAND system Coolant
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 see separate COMAND system Anticorrosion/antifreeze . . . . . . . . 398
Tether anchorage points . . . . . . . . . 62 operating instructions Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Top tether . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Combination gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Checking level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Child safety Combination switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Messages in the multifunction
see Children in the vehicle Comfort submenu display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324, 325, 326
Child seat anchors – LATCH-type Fold-in function for exterior rear Temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
see Children in the vehicle view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Chrome-plated exhaust tip, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . 31
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Corner-illuminating front fog lamps 104
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Clear button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Multifunction steering wheel . . . . . 131 Last stored speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Climate control Resetting to factory settings . . . . . 145 Resume function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
see Climate control system Control system menus . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . 210 AMG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Air conditioning, cooling . . . . . . . . 216 Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Customer Assistance Center (CAC) . . 22
Air conditioning refrigerant . . . . . . 395 Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Air distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 D
Air recirculation mode . . . . . . . . . . 221 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Dashboard
Air volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Automatic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 see Instrument cluster
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Deactivating system . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Data recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Control system submenus
Front defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Date, Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Maximum cooling MAX COOL . . . . 220 Daytime running lamp mode . . 101, 148
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Residual engine heat (REST) . . . . . 221 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Deep water
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Time/Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 see Standing water
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 147 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Defogging (windshield) . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
5
Index
Defroster Locking/unlocking from outside . . . 76 Driving systems

Rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Messages in the multifunction All-wheel drive (4MATIC) . . . . . . . . 207
Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Delayed shut-off Opening from inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Dynamic handling package with
Exterior lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) . . . . 245 sport driving mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Interior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Unlocking (Mechanical key) . . . . . . 350 Hill start assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Department of Transportation DOT (Department of Driving tips, automatic
see DOT Transportation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Difficulties Drinking and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Dynamic handling package with
While driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Driving sport driving mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
With starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Digital clock Hydroplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 E
see Clock Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113, 286
E85 (ethanol fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Dimensions (vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 In winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Easy-entry/exit feature . . . . . . . 93, 151
Direction of rotation (tires) . . . . . . . 262 Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
EBP (Electronic Brake
Displays Safety systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Proportioning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Maintenance service indicator . . . . 291
Through standing water . . . . . . . . . 289 Electrical system
Driving and parking Improper work on or modifications . 21
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Power outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Driving off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115, 289 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Text messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Driving safety systems . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Electronic Stability Program
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Vehicle status message memory . . 144 ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 see ESP®
Vehicle system settings . . . . . . . . . 145 Adaptive Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Electronic Traction System
Door control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 BAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 see ETS/4-ETS
Door handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 EBP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Emergency, in case of
Doors ESP® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Battery, jump starting . . . . . . . . . . 366
Child safety locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 ETS/4-ETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 First aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Locking/unlocking (KEYLESS-GO) . . 77 Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) . . . . 76 Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . 103
6
Index
Roadside Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Engine coolant Exterior view of vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 see Coolant
Emergency calls Engine oil F
Tele Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Fastening the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
First aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Emergency operations Checking level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Gear selector lever, unlocking . . . . 352 Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Limp-home mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Lowering the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Locking/unlocking the vehicle . . . 350 Recommended engine oils and oil Mounting the spare wheel . . . . . . . 361
Remote door unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Preparing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Trunk lid, emergency release . . . . . . 83 Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360, 386
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) . 68
Trunk lid, unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Flexible Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
ETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Emergency Tensioning Device Floormats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
see ETD Fluids
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307, 317
Emission control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Automatic transmission fluid . . . . . 392
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
ETD (Emergency Tensioning
System warranties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Device) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Engine Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Safety guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Brake-in recommendations . . . . . . 252 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Ethanol fuel (E85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Manual transmission oil . . . . . . . . . 391
ETS/4-ETS (Electronic Traction
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . 345 Washer and headlamp cleaning
Express operation
Maximum engine speed . . . . . . . . . 379 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Panorama roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Messages in the multifunction Fog lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Messages in the multifunction
Tilt/sliding sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Exterior lamp switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Exterior rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . 95
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Fold-in function for exterior rear
Fold-in function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Turning off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Parking position . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 98
Power folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
7
Index
Four-wheel drive Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 130 Generator

see All-wheel drive (4MATIC) Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. see Alternator
Front air bags Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Global locking/unlocking
see Air bags Fuel tank see Key, SmartKey
Front axle oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Front lamps Fuel filler flap and cap . . . . . . . . . . 254 Gross Axle Weight Rating
see Headlamps Refueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 see GAWR
Front passenger front air bag . . . . . . 46 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Gross Vehicle Weight
Messages in the multifunction see GVW
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 G Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
Front passenger front air bag off see GVWR
Garage door opener . . . . . . . . . . 38, 246
indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 47, 348 GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) . . . . . . 281
Gasoline
Front seat head restraints GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
see Fuel
see Head restraints Rating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) . . 281
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Gear range
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 H
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . 124
Capacity, fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Halogen headlamps
Ethanol fuel (E85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Limiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 see Headlamps
Fuel consumption (Flexible Fuel
Shifting into optimal . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Hard plastic trim items, cleaning . . 297
Vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Gear selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Fuel consumption statistics . . . . . . 135
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Headlamp cleaning system . . . . . . . 103
Fuel filler flap and cap . . . . . . . . . . 254
Gearshift pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Headlamps
Fuel tank reserve warning lamp . . . 344
Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114, 121 Active Bi-Xenon headlamps . . . . . . . 99
Premium unleaded gasoline
Shifting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Automatic headlamp mode . . . . . . 100
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253, 393, 395
Transmission position indicator . . . 122 Bi-Xenon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99, 355
Refueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Transmission positions . . . . . . . . . 122 Cleaning lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Unlocking in an emergency . . . . . . 352 Cleaning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Switching (Flexible Fuel Vehicle) . . 396
Gearshift lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Delayed shut-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Fuel filler flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Gearshift pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Halogen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Opening manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
8
Index
High-beam flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 I Interior rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . 94

High-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . 102 Auto-dimming rear view mirrors . . . . 95
Low-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . 100 Identification labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Interior storage spaces
Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Identification number, vehicle see Storage compartments
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Intermittent wiping
Headliner and shelf below rear Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 86, 113, 114 Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
window, cleaning and care of . . . . . 298 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Infant and child restraint systems J
Active head restraints . . . . . . . 57, 353 see Children in the vehicle
Inflation pressure Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Folding back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 see Tires, Inflation pressure Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Rear seat, removing and installing . . 90 Inside door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 129 K
Height adjustment Illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Key, Mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Seat belt outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Loss of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Valet locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
High-beam flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Instrument lighting Key, SmartKey
High-beam headlamps . . . . . . . 102, 355 see Instrument cluster, Illumination Battery check lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Instrument panel Checking batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
High-mounted brake lamp . . . . . . . . 355 see Instrument cluster Factory setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 79
Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Instruments and controls Global locking (KEYLESS-GO)
High-performance brake system . . . 288 see Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Hill start assist system . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Interior lighting Global locking (SmartKey) . . . . . . . . 77
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Delayed shut-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Global unlocking (KEYLESS-GO)
Messages in the multifunction Emergency lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Global unlocking (SmartKey) . . . . . . 77
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Front reading lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Important notes on KEYLESS-GO . . . 78
Hydroplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Locking/unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Rear reading lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Loss of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
9
Index
Messages in the multifunction Lamps, indicator and warning Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 337 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Opening, Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Battery (SmartKey) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Limp-home mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Opening and closing the power Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Loading
tilt/sliding sunroof or panorama Center console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 see Vehicle loading
roof with power tilt/sliding panel . 111 Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 346 Locator lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Opening and closing the windows . 111 Engine malfunction . . . . . . . . . 31, 345 Locking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 77
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 ESP® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 343 Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Replacing batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Fog lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Loss of
Restoring to factory setting . . . . 77, 79 Front passenger front air bag off Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Selective setting . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 79 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 47, 348 Service and Warranty Information
Starter switch positions . . . . . . . . . . 84 Fuel tank reserve . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 344 booklet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
KEYLESS-GO Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Low-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Starter switch positions . . . . . . . . . . 85 Low tire pressure/TPMS Exterior lamp switch . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Kickdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 malfunction telltale . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Kickdown (manual shift program) . . 128 Seat belt telltale . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 340 Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Kilopascal (air pressure unit) . . . . . . 281 SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 43, 342 Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
L LATCH-type child seat anchors
see Children in the vehicle M
Labels
License plate lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Emission control information . . . . . 378 Maintenance System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Lamps, exterior Service indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Exterior lamp switch . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Service indicator, resetting . . . . . . 292
Light alloy wheels, cleaning . . . . . . . 297
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Service indicator display . . . . . . . . 292
Lighter
Messages in the multifunction Service indicator message . . . . . . . 291
see Cigarette lighter
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Service indicator message,
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 clearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Daytime running lamp mode . . . . . 101
Switching on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Service term exceeded . . . . . . . . . 292
10
Index
Manual headlamp mode (Low- Multifunction display messages SmartKey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

beam headlamps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317, 318 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO . . . . . 320
Manual shift program . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Tele Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Gearshift lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314, 334
Hill start assist system . . . . . . . . . . 207 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Tire pressure monitor . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Maximum loaded vehicle weight . . . 281 Brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314, 334
Maximum load rating (tires) . . . . . . . 281 Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324, 325, 326 TPMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Maximum permissible tire Corner-illuminating front fog Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Multifunction steering wheel
Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 98 Display malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Menus Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
see Control system menus EBP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Minispare wheel ESP® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307, 317 Easy-entry/exit feature . . . . . . 93, 151
see Spare wheel Fog lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Gearshift control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Mirrors Front passenger front air bag . . . . 309 Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors . . . . 95 Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Exterior rear view mirror parking High-beam lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 98 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 N
Exterior rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . 95 License plate lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Navigation menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Interior rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . 94 Light sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Nets, parcel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Low-beam lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Night security illumination . . . 102, 149
MON (Motor Octane Number) . . . . . 396 Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Normal occupant weight . . . . . . . . . 282
Motor Octane Number Parking lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Number, vehicle identification
see MON Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
(VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Reserve fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Reverse lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Text messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Run Flat Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Vehicle status messages . . . . . . . . 305 Side marker lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
11
Index
O P Power assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Power outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Occupant Classification System Paintwork, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Power seats
see OCS Paintwork code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 see Seats
Occupant distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Panic alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Power steering
Occupant safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Panorama roof with power tilt/ messages in the multifunction
Air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 sliding panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Children and air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Children in the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Child seat anchors – LATCH-type . . 63 Roller sunblinds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Synchronizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Fastening the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . 55 Synchronizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Power washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Front passenger front air bag off Parcel nets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 348 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Infant and child restraint systems . . 60 Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
OCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Messages in the multifunction Rear door window, Blocking
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 53 display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
OCS (Occupant Classification Parking position Synchronizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Exterior rear view mirrors . . . . . 97, 98 Practical hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Self-test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Transmission position . . . . . . . . . . 122 Problems
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Parts service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 While driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Oil PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp With vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
see Engine oil see Front passenger front air bag Product information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Oil level off indicator lamp Production options weight . . . . . . . . 282
see Engine oil, Checking level Passenger safety Program mode selector switch
On-board computer see Occupant safety Automatic shift program . . . . 124, 125
see Control system Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Manual shift program . . . . . . . . . . . 127
One-touch gearshifting . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Pelvic air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Proximity key
Operating safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Phone see Key, SmartKey
Ornamental moldings, cleaning . . . . 295 see Telephone PSI (air pressure unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Overhead control panel . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Plastic parts, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
12
Index
Push-start Refueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 S

see Tow-start Regular checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Reminder, Seat belt Safety
see Seat belts, Telltale Driving safety systems . . . . . . . . . . . 66
R
Remote control Occupant safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
RACETIMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Reporting defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
see Key, SmartKey
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Safety belts
Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) . . . . . 245
Satellite radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 see Seat belts
Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Selecting stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Satellite radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . 22
Radio transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Seat belt force limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Research Octane Number
Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
see RON
Rear axle oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Children in the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Reserve fuel
Rear center console ashtray Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
see Ashtrays Fastening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Rear doors Height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Child safety locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Proper use of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Restraint systems
Rear door window Safety guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
see Occupant safety
Blocking operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Retaining hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Rear fog lamp Telltale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282, 382
see Fog lamps Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Roadside Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 20, 243
Rear lamps Seating capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
RON (Research Octane Number) . . . 396
see Tail lamps Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Rear seat head restraints Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 87
Route guidance
see Head restraints Easy-entry/exit feature . . . . . . . . . . 93
see Navigation system
Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Rubber parts, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Recommended tire inflation Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Run Flat Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266, 282 Split rear seat bench . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Recovery services, Stolen vehicle Securing cargo
(Tele Aid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Cargo tie-down rings . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Refrigerant, air conditioning . . . . . . 395
13
Index
Selective setting Side marker lamps Steering wheel

see Key, SmartKey Cleaning lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 see Multifunction steering wheel
Selector lever Messages in the multifunction Steering wheel gearshift control . . . 126
see Gear selector lever display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Stolen Vehicle Recovery services . . 245
Self-test Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Storage compartments . . . . . . . . 32, 233
OCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Sidewall (tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Storing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Tele Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Side windows Sunroof
Service see Power windows see Power tilt/sliding sunroof
see Maintenance SmartKey Sunshade, rear window . . . . . . . . . . 236
Service, parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 see Key, SmartKey Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Service and warranty information . . . 19 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
Service intervals see Key, SmartKey T
see Maintenance System, Service Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Snow tires Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 130
indicator
Service life (tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 see Winter tires Overspeed range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304, 382 Tail lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Service menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Cleaning lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Settings
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Tar stains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Factory setting (SmartKey) . . . . 77, 79 SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Technical data
Individual (vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 342
Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Messages in the multifunction Air conditioning refrigerant . . 393, 395
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392, 395
Selective setting (SmartKey) . . . 77, 79 Standing water, driving through . . . 289 Capacities fuels, coolants,
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 lubricants etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Starter switch positions . . . . . . . . 84, 85
Shelf below rear window, cleaning . 298 Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392, 397
Starting difficulties (engine) . . . . . . 115
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Side impact air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Steering column
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
see Multifunction steering wheel,
Engine oil additives . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Adjusting
Engine oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391, 394
14
Index
Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 Phone book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143, 197 Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Gasoline additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Redialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Identification labels . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Temperature Messages in the multifunction
Premium unleaded gasoline . . . . . . 395 Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Rims and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Interior temperature . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260, 382
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Air pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Washer and headlamp cleaning Tether anchorage points Care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . 261
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393, 400 see Children in the vehicle Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Tie-down rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Direction of rotation, spinning . . . . 262
Tele Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Tightening torque Important notes on tire inflation
Emergency calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Information button . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . 267, 268
Initiating an emergency call Time setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Information placard . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 TIN (Tire Identification Number) . . . 282 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Messages in the multifunction Tire and Loading Information Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Placard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Load rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Remote door unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Tire and loading terminology . . . . . . 280 Messages in the multifunction
Roadside Assistance button . . . . . 243 Tire Identification Number display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314, 334
SOS button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 see TIN Ply composition and material used 282
Stolen Vehicle Recovery services . 245 Tire inflation pressure Problems under-/overinflation . . . . 267
System self-test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Retreads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 189 Important notes on . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Rims and tires (technical data) . . . 382
Answering/ending a call . . . . . . . . 143 Placard on driver’s door B-pillar . . . 262 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Call lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Tire labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Run Flat Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Emergency calls “911” . . . . . . . . . . 196 Tire load rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Service life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Hands-free microphone . . . . . . . . . . 38 Tire ply composition and material Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Making calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Speed rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275, 282
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267, 280
15
Index
Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Tread depth (tires) . . . . . . . . . . 261, 284 Unlocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 76, 77
Tire Identification Number . . . . . . . 282 Treadwear indicators (tires) . . . 261, 283 Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Trip computer menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Upholstery, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
(TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Trunk Useful features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
TPMS low tire pressure/ Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
malfunction telltale . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 V
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279, 282 Messages in the multifunction
Tread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Valet locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261, 284 Vehicle
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Treadwear indicators . . . . . . . 261, 283 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Tie-down rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Vehicle maximum load on . . . . . . . 283 Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Trunk lid emergency release . . . . . . 83
Wear pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Unlocking in an emergency . . . . . . 350
Winter tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284, 382 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Valet locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Tire speed rating . . . . . . . . . . . . 275, 282 Individual settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Turning off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Top tether Locking/unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 77
Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
see Children in the vehicle Locking/unlocking manually . . . . . 350
Additional in mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Total load limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Lowering (wheel change) . . . . . . . . 363
Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Towing eye bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Modifications and alterations,
Cleaning lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Operating safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Tow-start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366, 368 Messages in the multifunction
Vehicle jack
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
see Jack
Transmission Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Vehicle lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
see Automatic transmission or
Vehicle loading
Manual transmission U
Cargo tie-down rings . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Transmission fluid level . . . . . . . . . . 258
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Transmission gear selector lever
Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279, 283 Load limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
see Gear selector lever
Units, Settings Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Transmission positions . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Split rear seat bench . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Traveling abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Unleaded gasoline, premium . . . . . . 395 Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Tread (tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
16
Index
Vehicle maximum load on the tire . . 283 Window curtain air bags . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Vehicle Recovery services, Stolen Windows
(Tele Aid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 see Power windows
Vehicle status message memory . . . 144 Windows, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Windshield
Vehicle washing Cleaning wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . 296
see Vehicle care Defogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108, 400
W Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Windshield wipers
Warning sounds
Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Driver’s or passenger’s seat belt . . . 56
Replacing wiper blades . . . . . . . . . 359
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Winter driving
Seat belt telltale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Warranty coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Washer and headlamp cleaning
Winter driving instructions . . . . . . . 285
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Winter tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284, 382
Washer fluid
Wood trims, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Mixing ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Refilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Wiping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Wear pattern (tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Wheel
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Wheels, sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Wheels, Tires and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
17
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Product Information Operator’s Manual Vehicle equipment
Notes Your vehicle may have some or all of the
Please observe the following in your own best
equipment described in this manual.
interest: This Operator’s Manual contains a great deal Therefore, you may find explanations for
We recommend using Genuine Mercedes- of useful information. We urge you to read it optional equipment not installed in your
Benz Parts as well as conversion parts and carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehicle. If you have any questions about
accessories explicitly approved by us for your vehicle before driving. operating any equipment, any authorized
vehicle model. For your own safety and longer service life of Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to
We have tested these parts to determine their the vehicle, we urge you to follow the demonstrate the proper procedures.
reliability, safety and special suitability for instructions and warnings contained in this Optional equipment is also described in this
Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Operator’s Manual. Ignoring them could manual, including operating instructions
We are unable to make an assessment for result in damage to the vehicle or personal wherever necessary. Since they are special-
other products and therefore cannot be held injury to you or others. Vehicle damage order items, the descriptions and illustrations
responsible for them, even if in individual caused by failure to follow instructions is not herein may vary slightly from the actual
cases an official approval or authorization by covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited equipment of your vehicle.
governmental or other agencies should exist. Warranty.
If there are any equipment details that are not
Use of such parts and accessories could We continuously strive to improve our shown or described in this Operator’s
adversely affect the safety, performance or product, and ask for your understanding that Manual, any authorized Mercedes-Benz
reliability of your vehicle. Please do not use we reserve the right to make changes in Center will be glad to inform you of correct
them. design and equipment. Therefore, care and operating procedures. The
Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts and pre- information, illustrations and descriptions in Operator’s Manual and Maintenance Booklet
approved conversion parts and accessories this Operator’s Manual might differ from your are important documents and should be kept
are available at any authorized Mercedes- vehicle. with the vehicle.
Benz Center. In addition, you will receive
comprehensive information on permissible
technical modifications and expert
installations.
18
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Service and warranty information Important notice for California retail category (1) has been subject to repair
buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz four or more times and you have directly
The Service and Warranty Information notified us in writing of the need for its
automobiles
booklet contains detailed information about repair, or
the warranties covering your Mercedes-Benz, Under California law you may be entitled to a
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of
including: replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the
repair of the same or different substantial
RNew Car Limited Warranty purchase price or lease price, if after a
defects or malfunctions for a cumulative
reasonable number of repair attempts
REmission System Warranty total of more than 30 calendar days.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its
REmission Performance Warranty authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix Written notification should not be sent to a
RCalifornia,
one or more substantial defects or dealer, it should be addressed to
Connecticut, Maine,
malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,
by its express warranty. During the period of Customer Assistance Center
Rhode Island, and Vermont Emission
18 months from original delivery of the
Control System Warranty One Mercedes Drive
vehicle or the accumulation of 18 000 miles
RState Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon (approximately 29 000 km) on the odometer Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
Laws) of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a
reasonable number of repair attempts is Maintenance
presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or
more of the following occurs: The Maintenance Booklet describes all the
necessary maintenance work which should
(1) the same substantial defect or be performed at regular intervals.
malfunction results in a condition that is
Always have the Maintenance Booklet with
likely to cause death or serious bodily
you when you take the vehicle to an
injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
or malfunction has been subject to repair
service. The service advisor will record each
two or more times, and you have directly
service in the booklet for you.
notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in
writing of the need for its repair,
(2) the same substantial defect or Z
malfunction of a less serious nature than
19
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Roadside Assistance Change of address or ownership Operating your vehicle outside the
USA or Canada
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance If you change your address, be sure to send
Program provides factory-trained technical in the “Change of Address Notice” found in If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign
help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the the Service and Warranty Information countries, please be aware that:
toll-free Roadside Assistance number Booklet, or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Rservice facilities or replacement parts may
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at not be readily available,
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada) 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service
Runleaded gasoline for vehicles with
will be answered by Mercedes-Benz (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. This will
assist us in contacting you in a timely manner catalytic converters may not be available;
Customer Assistance Representatives the use of leaded fuels will damage the
24 hours a day, 365 days a year. should the need arise.
catalysts,
For additional information refer to the If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all
literature with the vehicle to make it available Rgasoline may have a considerably lower
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
to the next operator. octane rating, and improper fuel can cause
Program brochure (in the USA) or the
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to engine damage.
Roadside Assistance section of the Service
and Warranty Information Booklet (in send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used Car” Certain Mercedes-Benz models are available
Canada) in your vehicle literature portfolio. found in the Service and Warranty for delivery in Europe under our European
Information Booklet, or call the Mercedes- Delivery Program. For details, consult an
Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to:
USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer In the USA:
Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
European Delivery Department
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
European Delivery Department
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
20
Introduction
Operating safety
Operating safety may cause serious damage and impair the to make you and others aware of various
operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel risks. You should not remove any of these
G Warning! a sudden significant vibration or ride warning labels unless explicitly instructed
Work improperly carried out on electronic disturbance, or you suspect that damage to to do so by information on the label itself.
components and associated software your vehicle has occurred, you should turn Removal of any of these labels may cause
could cause them to cease functioning. on your hazard warning flashers, carefully you and others to be unaware of certain
Because the vehicle’s electronic slow down, and drive with caution to an risks which may result in an accident and/
components are interconnected, any area which is a safe distance from the road. or personal injury.
modifications made may produce an Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires/
undesired effect on other systems. wheels for possible damage. If the vehicle
Electronic malfunctions could seriously appears unsafe, have it towed to the
impair the operating safety of your vehicle. nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz or other qualified maintenance or repair
Center for repairs or modifications to facility for further inspection or repairs.
electronic components.
Other improper work or modifications on Proper use of the vehicle
the vehicle could also have a negative
Proper use of the vehicle requires that you are
impact on the operating safety of the
familiar with the following information and
vehicle.
rules:
Some safety systems only function while
Rthe safety precautions in this manual
the engine is running. You should therefore
never turn off the engine while driving. Rthe “Technical data” section in this manual
Rtraffic rules and regulations

G Warning!
Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody Rmotor vehicle laws and safety standards
or tires/wheels, for example when running G Warning!
over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole,
Various warning labels are attached to your
Z
vehicle. These warning labels are intended
21
Introduction
Reporting safety defects

Problems with your vehicle Reporting safety defects 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, West Building,
Washington, DC 20590.
If you should experience a problem with your For the USA only: You can also obtain other information about
vehicle, particularly one that you believe may The following text is published as required of motor vehicle safety from
affect its safe operation, we urge you to manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. www.safercar.gov.
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
immediately to have the problem diagnosed “National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act
and corrected if required. If the matter is not of 1966”.
handled to your satisfaction, please discuss
the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center
management or, if necessary, contact us at Reporting safety defects
one of the following addresses: If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
In the USA: which could cause a crash or could cause
Customer Assistance Center injury or death, you should immediately
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
One Mercedes Drive
notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
In Canada: open an investigation, and if it finds that a
Customer Relations Department safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. may order a recall and remedy campaign.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 individual problems between you, your
dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA Headquarters,
22
Introduction
Vehicle data recording

Vehicle data recording information that may be recorded or
transmitted via that system.
Information regarding electronic
recording devices
(Including notice pursuant to California Code
§ 9951)
Please note that your vehicle is equipped with
devices that can record vehicle systems data
and, if equipped with the Tele Aid system, may
transmit some data in certain accidents.
This information helps, for example, to
diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and
to continuously improve vehicle safety.
Daimler may access the information and
share it with others
Rfor safety research or vehicle diagnosis
purposes
Rwith the consent of the vehicle owner or
lessee
Rin response to an official request by law
enforcement or other government agency
Rfor use in dispute resolution involving
Daimler, its affiliates or sales/service
organization and/or
Ras otherwise required or permitted by law.
Please check the Tele Aid subscription
Z
service agreement for details regarding the
23
24
At a glance
Exterior view ....................................... 26

Cockpit ................................................. 28
Instrument cluster .............................. 30
Storage compartments ....................... 32
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 34
Center console .................................... 36
Overhead control panel ...................... 38
Door control panel, seat adjust-
ment ..................................................... 39
25
At a glance
Exterior view
Exterior view
26
At a glance
Exterior view
i This Operator’s Manual describes all features, standard or optional, potentially available for your vehicle at the time of purchase. Please
be aware that your vehicle might not be equipped with all features described in this manual.
Function Page Function Page Function Page
1 Trunk: Panorama roof with power a Hood 255
tilt/sliding panel 226
Locking and unlocking 76, Engine oil 256
350 7 Windshield:
Coolant 258
Opening and closing 81, Front window, defrosting 220
82 b Front lamps 355
Cleaning with washer fluid 108
Valet locking 83 c Headlamp cleaning system 103
Cleaning 296
2 Rear lamps 356 d Front towing eye 369
8 Doors:
3 Rear window defroster 222 e Tires and wheels 260,
Locking and unlocking 76 382
4 Fuel filler flap 253 Opening 80 Checking tire inflation
Fuel requirements 396 Unlocking/locking pressure 268
5 Exterior rear view mirrors 95 manually 350 Spare wheel 304
Parking position 97 9 Wipers 106 Flat tire 360
Power folding, Canada only 96 Wiper blades, replacing 359 f Rear towing eye 369
6 Power tilt/sliding sunroof 223 Wiper blades, cleaning 296
27
At a glance
Cockpit
Cockpit
28
At a glance
Cockpit
1 Steering wheel gearshift 9 Center console 36 Wipers 106
control 125
a Starter switch 84 High beam 102
2 Cruise control lever 204
KEYLESS-GO start/stop e Parking brake pedal 118
3 Instrument cluster 30, button 85
f Parking brake release 118
129
b Steering wheel release
4 Multifunction steering 34, handle (manual) 93 g On-board diagnostics
wheel 131 (OBD) socket
c Steering wheel adjustment
5 Horn stalk (electrical) 93 h Hood lock release 255
Overhead control panel d Combination switch 102 j Exterior lamp switch 100
6 38
Glove box Turn signals 103 k Door control panel and seat
7 233
adjustment/memory 39
8 Glove box lock 233
29
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
30
At a glance
Instrument cluster
1 Combination gauge with: 3 v ESP® warning lamp 343 < Seat belt telltale 56,
340
4 Speedometer
Fuel gauge 8 Outside temperature
5 Multifunction display 133 (manual transmission) 130
4 Fuel tank reserve
warning lamp 344 6 K Right turn signal Outside temperature/
indicator lamp 103 additional speedometer 130,
Coolant temperature gauge (automatic transmission) 147
7 Tachometer with:
Ì Coolant temperature
9 Outside temperature 130,
warning lamp 346 ¯ ESP OFF warning 70, (automatic transmission) 147
lamp, C 63 AMG only 343
Indicator/warning lamps:
a Program mode indicator
H Combination low tire
A High-beam headlamp (automatic transmission) 124
pressure/TPMS
indicator lamp 102
malfunction telltale, USA 270, b Transmission position
B Low-beam headlamp only 347 indicator/ gear range
indicator lamp 100 indicator 122,
= Supplemental
(automatic transmission) 124
± Engine malfunction Restraint System (SRS) 43,
indicator lamp 345 indicator lamp 342 Additional speedometer
(manual transmission) 146
; Brake warning lamp, - Antilock Brake
USA only 339 System (ABS) indicator c Digital clock 147
lamp 337
3 Brake warning lamp, d Instrument cluster
Canada only 339 illumination 129
2 L Left turn signal

indicator lamp 103 Z
31
At a glance
Storage compartments
32
At a glance
Function Page Function Page
1 Glove box 233 c Parcel net in front
passenger footwell 230
Power outlet 238
d Ashtray 237
Aux socket 188
Cigarette lighter 238
2 Door pocket
e Cup holder 235
3 Storage bag on front
passenger seat backrest 234 f Right storage compartment
in front center armrest 233
4 Door pocket
g Left storage compartment
5 Hooks on left and right side in front center armrest 233
in trunk 231
h Ashtray in rear passenger
6 Parcel net on left side in compartment 237
trunk 230
Power outlet 238
7 Storage space for
Minispare wheel and 304, j Cup holder in rear center
vehicle tool kit in trunk 302 armrest 235
8 Door pocket k Rear center armrest with
storage compartment 234
9 Storage bag on driver’s seat
backrest 234
a Door pocket
b Document holder in sun
visor 236 Z
33
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel

Multifunction steering wheel Function Page Function Page
1 Multifunction display 133 4 Press button L briefly
2 Press button æ or ç • to go to the next higher
menu level 132
• to set the volume 140
• to confirm display
• to operate the message 132
RACETIMER1 138
• to cancel the Voice
Press button s Control System3
• to take a call 143 Press and hold button
• to dial2 L to select the standard
143
display 132
• to redial2 143 5 Press button ( or & 132
Press button t • to call up line for menus
• to end a call 143 • to scroll to the left or
• to reject an incoming right to select menus
call 143
Press button F to mute
3 Press button ! to
activate the Voice Control
System3
1 AMG vehicles only.
2 Function only available in telephone menu.
3 The Voice Control System is only available with the COMAND system. Refer to separate operating instructions.
34
At a glance

Function Page Function Page
Press button $ or % available) within Audio
briefly 132 menu
• to select submenus • to start the quick

search in the phone
• to scroll up or down book within Tel menu 142
through lists
Press button #
• to select previous or
next track, scene, or • to confirm selection or
stored station within message 133
Audio menu 140 • to switch to the phone
• to switch to the phone book2 142
book and select a name
• to dial a selected phone
or number within Tel
number2 143
menu 142
Press and hold button
$ or % 132
• to select previous or
next track or scene with
quick search or to
select previous or next
station in waveband (if
no station list is 140
Z
35
At a glance
Center console
Center console Function Page Function Page
Upper part 1 Audio display cover 156 a Dual-zone automatic
climate control 211
2 Hazard warning flasher
switch 103 3-zone automatic climate
control, Canada only 213
3 Alarm system indicator
lamp 73 Rear window defroster 222
4 Front passenger front air 49, b Seat heating, driver’s side 92

bag off indicator lamp 348
5 Electronic Stability
Program (ESP®) switch 69
6 Audio system 153
or
COMAND system, see
separate operating
instructions
7 Seat heating, front
passenger side 92
8 Rear window sunshade
switch 236
9 Sport driving mode on/off
button, Canada only 208
36
At a glance
Center console
Lower part Function Page Function Page
1 Ashtray 237 COMAND controller (see
separate operating
Cigarette lighter 238 instructions)
2 Gear shift lever for manual 6 Program mode selector
transmission 119 switch for automatic
Gear selector lever for transmission 124
automatic transmission 121
3 Cup holder 235
4 Split storage compartment,
left and right side of the
center armrest 233
5 Audio controller 157
37
At a glance
Overhead control panel

Overhead control panel Function Page Function Page
1 Rear interior lighting on/off 105 b Roadside Assistance
button 243
2 Interior lighting control 105
c Left reading lamp on/off 105
3 Right reading lamp on/off 105
d Front interior lighting on/
4 Power tilt/sliding sunroof off 105
switch 223
or
Power tilt/sliding panel
switch 226
5 Information button 244
6 Tele Aid (emergency call
system) button 242
7 Interior rear view mirror 94
8 Integrated electronic
compass 239
9 Garage door opener 246
a Hands-free microphone for
Tele Aid (emergency call
system), telephone and
Voice Control System4
38
At a glance
Door control panel, seat adjustment

Door control panel, seat adjustment Function Page
1 Inside door handle 80
2 Central unlocking switch 81
3 Seat adjustment 87
4 Memory function for
storing seat, exterior
mirror, and steering wheel
settings 98
5 Exterior rear view mirrors
adjustment 95
Power-folding exterior rear
view mirrors, Canada only 96
6 Switches for opening/
closing front and rear door
windows 109 Seat adjustment, vehicles without memory
function
7 Rear door window override
Door control panel, with memory function
switch 65
8 Remote trunk opening
switch 81
9 Central locking switch 81
39
40
Safety and security
Vehicle equipment .............................. 42

Occupant safety .................................. 42
Panic alarm .......................................... 65
Driving safety systems ....................... 66
Anti-theft systems .............................. 73
41
Safety and security
Occupant safety
Vehicle equipment Occupant safety Although the systems are independent, their
protective functions work in conjunction with
i This Operator’s Manual describes all Introduction each other.
features, standard or optional, potentially In this section you will learn the most G Warning!
available for your vehicle at the time of important facts about the restraint system Modifications to or work improperly
purchase. Please be aware that your components of the vehicle. conducted on restraint system
vehicle might not be equipped with all The restraint systems are components or their wiring, as well as
features described in this manual. tampering with interconnected electronic
RSeat belts
systems, can lead to the restraint systems
RChild restraints no longer functioning as intended.
RLower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren Air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices
(LATCH) (ETDs), for example, could deploy
Additional protection potential is provided by: inadvertently or fail to deploy in accidents
RSupplemental
although the deceleration threshold for air
Restraint System (SRS) with
bag deployment is exceeded. Therefore,
- Air bags never modify the restraint systems. Do not
- Air bag control unit (with crash sensors) tamper with electronic components or their
software.
- Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD) for
seat belts
i For information on infants and children
- Seat belt force limiter traveling with you in the vehicle and
RActive head restraints restraint systems for infants and children,
see “Children in the
RAir bag system components with vehicle” (Y page 59).
- Front passenger front air bag off
indicator lamp
- Front passenger seat with Occupant
Classification System (OCS)
42
Safety and security
Occupant safety
SRS indicator lamp SRS may not deploy when needed in an Air bags
accident, which could result in serious or
The SRS system conducts a self-test when
fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly G Warning!
the ignition is switched on and in regular Air bags are designed to reduce the
and unnecessarily which could also result
intervals while the engine is running. This potential of injury and fatality in certain
in injury.
facilitates detection of system malfunctions. frontal impacts (front air bags), side
In addition, improper work on the SRS
The = indicator lamp in the instrument impacts (side impact air bags, window
creates a risk of rendering the SRS
cluster comes on when the ignition is curtain air bags and pelvic air bags), or
inoperative or causing unintended air bag
switched on and goes out no later than a few rollovers (window curtain air bags).
deployment. Work on the SRS must
seconds after the engine has been started. However, no system available today can
therefore only be performed by qualified
The SRS components are in operational technicians. Contact an authorized completely eliminate injuries and fatalities.
readiness if the = indicator lamp is not lit Mercedes-Benz Center. The deployment of the air bags temporarily
when the engine is running. If it is necessary to modify an air bag system releases a small amount of dust from the
A malfunction in the system has been to accommodate a person with disabilities, air bags. This dust, however, is neither
detected if the = indicator lamp contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz injurious to your health, nor does it indicate
Rfails to go out after approximately Center or call our Customer Assistance a fire in the vehicle. The dust might cause
4 seconds after the engine is started Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes some temporary breathing difficulty for
(1-800-367-6372) for details. people with asthma or other breathing
Rdoes not come on at all
trouble. To avoid this, you may wish to get
Rcomes on after the engine was started or out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
while driving so. If you have any breathing difficulty but
cannot get out of the vehicle after the air
G Warning!
bag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
In the event that the = indicator lamp window or door.
comes on while driving or does not come
on at all, the SRS self-check has detected G Warning!
a malfunction. For your safety, we strongly To reduce the risk of injury when the front
recommend that you contact an authorized air bags inflate, it is very important for the
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to driver and front passenger to always be in Z
have the system checked; otherwise the
43
Safety and security
Occupant safety
a properly seated position and to wear their the seat and steering wheel. If you have Failure to follow these instructions can
respective seat belt. any difficulties, please contact an result in severe injuries to you or other
For maximum protection in the event of a authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. occupants.
collision always be in normal seated RDo not lean your head or chest close to If you sell your vehicle, it is important that
position with your back against the seat the steering wheel or dashboard. you make the buyer aware of this safety
backrest. Fasten your seat belt and make RKeep hands on the outside of the steering
information. Be sure to give the buyer this
sure it is properly positioned on your body. Operator’s Manual.
wheel rim. Placing hands and arms inside
Since the air bag inflates with considerable
speed and force, a proper seating position
the rim can increase the risk and G Warning!
potential severity of hand/arm injury
and correct positioning of the hands on the Accident research shows that the safest
when the driver front air bag inflates.
steering wheel will help to keep you at a place for children in an automobile is in the
RAdjust the front passenger seat as far as rear seat.
safe distance from the air bag. Occupants
who are not wearing their seat belt, are not possible rearward from the dashboard There is a possibility for a side impact air
seated properly or are too close to the air when the seat is occupied. bag-related injury if occupants, especially
bag can be seriously injured or killed by an ROccupants, especially children, should children, are not properly seated or
air bag as it inflates with great force never place their bodies or lean their restrained when next to a side impact air
instantaneously: heads in the area of the door where the bag which needs to deploy rapidly in a side
RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in side impact air bag inflates. This could impact in order to do its job.
a position that is as upright as possible result in serious injuries or death should To help avoid the possibility of injury,
with your back against the seat backrest. the side impact air bag be deployed. please follow these guidelines:
Always sit as upright as possible, wear
RMove the driver seat as far back as (1) Always sit as upright as possible,
the seat belt properly and use an
possible, still permitting proper properly use the seat belts, and
appropriately sized infant restraint,
operation of vehicle controls. The for children 12 years old and
toddler restraint, or booster seat
distance from the center of the driver’s under, use an appropriately
recommended for the size and weight of
chest to the center of the air bag cover sized infant restraint, toddler
the child.
on the steering wheel must be at least restraint, or booster seat
10 inches (25 cm) or more. You should
be able to accomplish this by adjusting
44
Safety and security
Occupant safety
recommended for the size and It is important to your safety and that of your RAir bags and ETDs are designed to
weight of the child. passengers that you replace deployed air function on a one-time-only basis. An air
(2) Always wear seat belts properly. bags and repair any malfunctioning air bags bag or ETD that is deployed must be
to make sure the vehicle will continue to replaced.
Air bags are designed to deploy only in certain provide supplemental crash protection for RDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges.
frontal impacts (front air bags), side impacts occupants.
They could tear.
(side impact air bags, pelvic air bags and
Safety guidelines for the seat belt, RDo not make any modification that could
window curtain air bags) which exceed preset
deployment thresholds, and in certain Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD) change the effectiveness of the seat
rollovers (window curtain air bags). Only in and air bag belts.
the event of such a situation will they provide RDo not bleach or dye seat belts as this
their supplemental protection. G Warning! may severely weaken them. In a crash
RDamaged seat belts or seat belts that
The driver and passengers should always they may not be able to provide adequate
wear their seat belts. Otherwise it is not have been subjected to stress in an protection.
possible for the air bags to provide their accident must be replaced and their
RNo modifications of any kind may be
supplemental protection. anchoring points must also be checked.
Only use seat belts installed or supplied made to any components or wiring of the
In case of other types of impacts and impacts by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. SRS. This includes changing or removing
below air bag deployment thresholds, air any component or part of the SRS, the
RAir bags and pyrotechnic Emergency
bags will not deploy. The driver and installation of additional trim material,
passengers will then be protected to the Tensioning Devices (ETDs) contain seat covers, badges, etc. over the
extent possible by a properly fastened seat perchlorate material, which may require steering wheel hub, front passenger front
belt. A properly fastened seat belt is also special handling and regard for the air bag cover, outboard sides of the seat
needed to provide the best possible environment. Check with your local backrests, door trim panels, or door
protection in a rollover. government’s disposal guidelines. frame trims, and installation of additional
Air bags are not a substitute for seat belts. California residents, see electrical/electronic equipment on or
Always wear your seat belt, regardless of www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/ near SRS components and wiring. Keep
whether or not your vehicle is equipped with Perchlorate/index.cfm. area between air bags and occupants
air bags.
Z
45
Safety and security
Occupant safety
free of objects (e.g. packages, purses, from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Front air bags
umbrellas, etc.). Center.
G Observe Safety notes, see
RDo not hang items such as coat hangers RGiven the considerable deployment page 45.
from the coat hooks or handles over the speed, required inflation volume, and the
door. These items may be thrown around material of the air bags, there is the
in the vehicle and cause head and other possibility of abrasions or other,
injuries when the window curtain air bag potentially more serious injuries
is deployed. resulting from air bag deployment.
RAir bag system components will be hot
If you sell your vehicle, we strongly
after an air bag has inflated. Do not touch
recommend that you inform the subsequent
them.
owner that the vehicle is equipped with SRS
RNever place your feet on the instrument and refer them to the applicable section in the
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always Operator’s Manual.
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
1 Driver front air bag
seat.
2 Front passenger front air bag
RIn addition, improper repair work on the
SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS The front air bags are designed to provide
inoperative or causing unintended air bag increased protection for the driver and front
deployment. Work on the SRS must passenger against the risk of injuries to the
therefore only be performed by qualified head and thorax.
technicians. Contact an authorized Driver and front passenger front air bags are
Mercedes-Benz Center. deployed
RFor your protection and the protection of Rin the event of certain frontal impacts
others, when scrapping the air bag unit Rif impact exceeds a preset deployment
or ETD, our safety instructions must be threshold
followed. These instructions are available
46
Safety and security
Occupant safety
Rif the system determines that air bag longitudinal deceleration or acceleration Side impact air bags
deployment can offer additional protection exceeds the preset deployment threshold for
to that provided by the seat belt the front air bags. G Observe Safety notes, see
page 45.
Rdepending on whether the seat belt is in The front passenger front air bag 2 will only
use be deployed if
Rindependently of the side impact air bags, Rthe system, based on OCS weight sensor
pelvic air bags and/or the window curtain readings, detects that the front passenger
air bags seat is occupied
The front air bags in this vehicle have been Rthe 5/ indicator lamp in the center
designed to inflate in two stages. This allows console is not lit (Y page 52)
the air bags to have different rates of inflation Rthe impact exceeds a preset deployment
that are based on the vehicle deceleration threshold
rate as assessed by the air bag control unit.
On the front passenger side, front air bag
1 Side impact air bag
2 deployment is additionally influenced by
the passenger’s weight category as identified When deployed, side impact air bags 1 are
by the Occupant Classification System (OCS) designed to provide increased protection for
(Y page 49). the thorax (but not the head, neck and arms)
The lighter the front passenger side of the driver or front passenger on the side of
occupant, the higher the vehicle deceleration the vehicle on which the impact occurs.
rate required for second stage inflation of The side impact air bags 1 are deployed
front air bag 2. Ron the impacted side of the vehicle
The air bags will not deploy in impacts which Rin side impacts exceeding a preset
do not exceed the system’s preset
deployment threshold
deployment thresholds. You will then be
Rregardless of whether the seat belt is in use
protected by the fastened seat belts.
The front air bags will not deploy in the event Rindependently of the front air bags Z
of a rollover unless the vehicle’s rate of Rindependently of the ETDs
47
Safety and security
Occupant safety
The front passenger side impact air bag will Pelvic air bags Rindependently of the front air bags
not deploy if the OCS senses that the front Rindependently of the ETDs
passenger seat is empty and the front G Observe Safety notes, see
passenger seat belt is not fastened (latch page 45. The front passenger pelvic air bag 1 will not
plate is not inserted into the buckle). With an Pelvic air bags are not available on C 63 AMG. deploy if the OCS senses that the front
empty front passenger seat and the seat belt passenger seat is empty and the front
fastened (latch plate properly inserted into passenger seat belt is not fastened (latch
buckle) the front passenger side impact air plate is not inserted into the buckle). With an
bag will deploy independently of the empty empty front passenger seat and the seat belt
seat. fastened (latch plate properly inserted into
Side impact air bags 1 are not deployed in buckle) the front passenger pelvic air bag
1 will deploy independently of the empty
side impacts which do not exceed the
system’s deployment threshold. seat.
Side air bags 1 will not deploy in the event Pelvic air bags 1 are not deployed in side
of a rollover unless the vehicle’s rate of lateral impacts which do not exceed the system’s
deceleration or acceleration exceeds the deployment threshold.
1 Pelvic air bag (except C 63 AMG) Pelvic air bags 1 will not deploy in the event
preset deployment threshold for side air
bags 1. When deployed, pelvic air bags 1 are of a rollover unless the vehicle’s rate of lateral
designed to provide increased protection for deceleration or acceleration exceeds the
G Warning! preset deployment threshold for pelvic air
the pelvis of the occupants on the side of the
Only use seat covers which have been vehicle on which the impact occurs. bags 1.
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz for
your vehicle model. Using other seat covers
Pelvic air bags 1 are deployed G Warning!
may interfere with or prevent the Rin side impacts exceeding a preset Only use seat covers which have been
deployment of the side impact air bags deployment threshold tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz for
and/or pelvic air bags. Contact an Ron
your vehicle model. Using other seat covers
the impacted side of the vehicle
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for may interfere with or prevent the
Rindependently of whether the seat belt is in deployment of the side impact air bags
availability.
use and/or pelvic air bags. Contact an
48
Safety and security
Occupant safety
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for Rindependently of the front air bags upright as possible with their back against the
availability. Rregardless of whether the front passenger seat backrest and feet on the floor to be
seat is occupied correctly classified. If the occupant’s weight
is transferred to another object in the vehicle
Window curtain air bags Rregardless of whether the seat belt is in use
(e.g. by leaning on armrests), the OCS may
G Observe Safety notes, see Rin certain vehicle rollovers, if the system not be able to properly approximate the
page 45. determines that air bag deployment can occupant’s weight category.
offer additional protection to that provided i If your seat, including the trim cover and
by the seat belt cushion, needs to be serviced in any way,
Window curtain air bags 1 are not deployed take the vehicle to an authorized
in impacts which do not exceed the system’s Mercedes-Benz Center.
deployment threshold. Only seat accessories approved by
Window curtain air bags 1 deploy in the area Mercedes-Benz may be used.
indicated by the arrows. Both the driver and the front passenger
should always use the 5/ indicator
Occupant Classification System lamp as an indication of whether or not the
front passenger is properly positioned.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
1 Window curtain air bag
automatically turns the front passenger front G Warning!
When deployed, window curtain air bags 1 air bag on or off based on the classified If the 5/ indicator lamp illuminates
are designed to provide increased protection occupant weight category determined by when an adult or someone larger than a
for the head (but not the chest or arms) of the weight sensor readings from the front small individual is in the front passenger
occupants on the side of the vehicle on which passenger seat. seat, have the front passenger re-position
the impact occurs. The system does not deactivate the front himself or herself in the seat until the
Window curtain air bags 1 are deployed passenger side impact air bag, the pelvic air 5/ indicator lamp goes out.
Ron the impacted side of the vehicle bag, the window curtain air bag and the In the event of a collision, the air bag control
Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs). unit will not allow front passenger front air
Rin side impacts exceeding a preset
Occupants must sit with the seat belt bag deployment when the OCS has Z
deployment threshold
properly fastened in a position that is as
49
Safety and security
Occupant safety
classified the front passenger seat engine is started and then, depending on If the front passenger front air bag is
occupant as weighting as much as or less occupant weight sensor readings from the deployed, the rate of inflation will be
than a typical 12-month-old child in a seat, remain illuminated or go out. With the influenced by
standard child restraint or if the front 5/ indicator lamp illuminated, the Rthe rate of relevant vehicle deceleration
passenger seat is classified as being empty. front passenger front air bag is deactivated. as assessed by the air bag control unit
When the OCS senses that the front With the 5/ indicator lamp out, the
Rthe front passenger’s weight category as
passenger seat occupant is classified as front passenger front air bag is activated.
identified by the OCS
being up to or less than the weight of a When the OCS senses that the front
typical 12-month-old child in a standard passenger seat occupant is classified as an For more information on air bag display
child restraint, the 5/ indicator adult or someone larger than a small messages, see (Y page 309).
lamp will illuminate when the engine is individual, the 5/ indicator lamp
started and remain illuminated, indicating will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds
G Warning!
that the front passenger front air bag is when the engine is started and then go out, According to accident statistics, children
deactivated. indicating that the front passenger front air are safer when properly restrained in the
When the OCS senses that the front bag is activated. rear seating positions than in the front
passenger seat is classified as being empty, seating position. Thus, we strongly
If the 5/ indicator lamp is
the 5/ indicator lamp will illuminate recommend that children be placed in the
illuminated, the front passenger front air
when the engine is started and remain rear seats whenever possible. Regardless
bag is deactivated and will not be deployed.
illuminated, indicating that the front of seating position, children 12 years old
If the 5/ indicator lamp is not and under must be seated and properly
passenger front air bag is deactivated. illuminated, the front passenger front air secured in an appropriate infant restraint,
When the OCS senses that the front bag is activated and will be deployed toddler restraint, or booster seat
passenger seat occupant is classified as recommended for the size and weight of the
Rin the event of certain frontal impacts
being heavier than the weight of a typical child.
12-month-old child seated in a standard Rif impact exceeds a preset deployment
child restraint or as being a small individual threshold The infant or child restraint must be
(such as a young teenager or a small adult), properly secured with the vehicle’s seat
Rindependently of the side impact air bags
the 5/ indicator lamp will illuminate belt, the seat belt and top tether strap, or
or pelvic air bag lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in
for approximately 6 seconds when the
50
Safety and security
Occupant safety
accordance with the child seat only means to completely eliminate this passenger seat, move the seat as far
manufacturer’s instructions. risk is to never place a child in a rear- back as possible, use the proper child
Occupants, especially children, should facing child restraint in the front seat. We restraint recommended for the age, size
always sit as upright as possible, wear the therefore strongly recommend that you and weight of the child, and secure child
seat belt properly and use an appropriately always place a child in a rear-facing child restraint with the vehicle’s seat belt
sized infant restraint, toddler restraint, or restraint in a backseat. according to the child seat
booster seat recommended for the size and RIfyou must install a rear-facing child manufacturer’s instructions. For children
weight of the child. restraint on the front passenger seat larger than the typical 12-month-old
Children can be killed or seriously injured because circumstances require you to do child, the front passenger front air bag
by an inflating air bag. Note the following so, make sure the 5/ indicator may or may not be activated.
important information when circumstances lamp is illuminated, indicating that the Deployment of the driver front air bag does
require you to place a child in the front front passenger front air bag is not mean that the front passenger front air
passenger seat: deactivated. Should the 5/ bag also should have deployed.
RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag indicator lamp not illuminate or go out
The OCS may have determined:
technology designed to deactivate the while the restraint is installed, please
check installation. Periodically check the Rthat the seat was empty or occupied by the
front passenger front air bag in your
vehicle when the system senses the 5/ indicator lamp while driving to weight up to or less than that of a typical
weight of a typical 12-month-old child or make sure the 5/ indicator lamp 12-month-old child seated in a standard
less along with the weight of a standard is illuminated. If the 5/ indicator child restraint – both instances where the
appropriate child restraint on the front lamp goes out or remains out, do not system suppresses deployment of the front
passenger seat. transport a child on the front passenger passenger front air bag even though the
seat until the system has been repaired. impact met the criteria and was of
RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on sufficient severity to deploy the driver front
the front passenger seat will be seriously A child in a rear-facing child restraint on
air bag
injured or even killed if the front the front passenger seat will be seriously
injured or even killed if the front Rthat the seat was occupied by a small
passenger front air bag inflates in a
collision which could occur under some passenger front air bag inflates. individual (such as a young teenager or a
circumstances, even with the air bag RIf
small adult) or a child who weighs more
you have to place a child in a forward-
technology installed in your vehicle. The than the weight of a typical 12-month-old Z
facing child restraint on the front
child in a standard child restraint – both of
51
Safety and security
Occupant safety
which are instances where the system may front passenger front air bag will be twice, the 5/ indicator lamp
suppress deployment of the front deactivated in this case. Have the system illuminates. If an adult occupant is properly
passenger front air bag even though the checked as soon as possible by qualified sitting on the front passenger seat and the
impact met the criteria and was of technicians. Contact an authorized system classifies the occupant as an adult,
sufficient severity to deploy the driver front Mercedes-Benz Center. the 5/ indicator lamp will illuminate
air bag Only have the seat repaired or replaced at and go out after approximately 6 seconds.
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. If the seat is not occupied and the system
In order to ensure proper operation of the classifies the front passenger seat as being
air bag system and OCS: empty, the 5/ indicator lamp will
RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in
illuminate and not go out.
a position that is as upright as possible G Warning!
with your back against the seat backrest. If the 5/ indicator lamp does not
RWhile seated, an occupant should not illuminate, the system is not functioning.
position him/herself in such a way as to You must contact an authorized Mercedes-
cause the occupant’s weight to be lifted Benz Center before seating any child on the
from the seat bottom as this may result front passenger seat.
1 Front passenger front air bag off indicator in the OCS being unable to correctly For more information, see the “Practical
lamp approximate the occupant’s weight hints” section (Y page 348).
The 5/ indicator lamp 1 will be category.
G Warning!
illuminated, except with the SmartKey RRead and observe all warnings in this
Never place anything between seat cushion
removed from the starter switch or with the chapter.
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces
starter switch in position 0.
the effectiveness of the OCS. The bottom
G Warning! Occupant Classification System Self- and back of the child seat must make full
If the = indicator lamp and the test contact with the passenger seat cushion
5/ indicator lamp are lit at the same After turning the SmartKey in the starter and backrest.
time, there is a malfunction in the OCS. The switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the If necessary, adjust the tilt of the passenger
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once or seat backrest.
52
Safety and security
Occupant safety
An incorrectly mounted child seat could Failure to wear and properly fasten and G Warning!
cause injuries to the child in case of an position your seat belt greatly increases Never let more people ride in the vehicle
accident, instead of increasing protection your risk of injuries and their likely severity than there are seat belts available. Make
for the child. in an accident. sure everyone riding in the vehicle is
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for If you are ever in an accident, your injuries correctly restrained with a separate seat
installation of child seats. can be considerably more severe without belt. Never use a seat belt for more than
your seat belt properly buckled. Without one person at a time.
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
Seat belts likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be G Warning!
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured Damaged seat belts or seat belts that have
Safety notes
or killed. been subjected to stress in an accident
The use of seat belts and infant and child In the same crash, the possibility of injury must be replaced and their anchoring
restraint systems is required by law in all 50 or death is lessened if you are properly points must also be checked.
states, the District of Columbia, the U.S. wearing your seat belt. The air bags can Only use seat belts which have been
territories and all Canadian provinces. only protect as intended if the occupants approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Even where this is not the case, all vehicle are properly wearing their seat belts. Do not make any modifications to the seat
occupants should have their seat belts belts. This can lead to unintended
fastened whenever the vehicle is in motion. G Warning! activation of the ETDs or to their failure to
For information on infants and children Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat activate when necessary.
traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint backrest in an excessively reclined position Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
systems for infants and children, see as this can be dangerous. You could slide severely weaken them. In a crash they may
“Children in the vehicle” (Y page 59). under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide not be able to provide adequate protection.
under it, the seat belt would apply force at
G Warning! the abdomen or neck. That could cause
Have all work carried out only by qualified
Always fasten your seat belt before driving technicians. Contact an authorized
serious or even fatal injuries. The seat
off. Always make sure all of your Mercedes-Benz Center.
backrest and seat belt provide the best
passengers are properly restrained. You restraint when the wearer is in a position
and your passengers should always wear that is as upright as possible and the seat
seat belts. belt is properly positioned on the body. Z
53
Safety and security
Occupant safety
Proper use of seat belts certain rollovers (window curtain air bags RMake sure the seat belt is always fitted
and ETDs). snugly. Take special care of this when
G Warning! wearing loose clothing.
RNever wear the shoulder belt under your
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
arm, against your neck or off your RNever use a seat belt for more than one
RSeat belts can only work when used shoulder. In a frontal crash, your body person at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt
properly. Never wear seat belts in any would move too far forward. That would around a person and another person or
other way than as described in this increase the chance of head and neck other objects at the same time.
section, as that could result in serious injuries. The seat belt would also apply RSeat belts should not be worn twisted. In
injuries in case of an accident. too much force to the ribs or abdomen, a crash, you would not have the full width
REach occupant should wear their seat which could severely injure internal of the seat belt to distribute impact
belt at all times, because seat belts help organs such as your liver or spleen. forces. The twisted seat belt against your
reduce the likelihood of and potential Adjust the seat belt so that the shoulder body could cause injuries.
severity of injuries in accidents, including section is located as close as possible to RPregnant women should also always use
rollovers. The integrated restraint system the middle of the shoulder (it should not
includes SRS (driver front air bag, front a lap/shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
touch the neck). Never pass the shoulder
passenger front air bag, side impact air should be positioned as low as possible
portion of the seat belt under your arm.
bags, pelvic air bags, window curtain air on the hips to avoid any possible
For this purpose, you can adjust the
bags for side windows), Emergency pressure on the abdomen.
height of the seat belt outlet.
Tensioning Devices (ETDs), seat belt RPosition
RPlace the seat backrest in a position that
the lap belt as low as possible
force limiters, and front seat knee is as upright as possible.
on your hips and not across the
bolsters. RCheck your seat belt during travel to
abdomen. If the lap belt is positioned
The system is designed to enhance the across your abdomen, it could cause make sure it is properly positioned.
protection offered to properly belted serious injuries in a crash. RNever place your feet on the instrument
occupants in certain frontal (front air
bags and ETDs) and side (side impact air
RNever wear seat belts over rigid or panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
bags, pelvic air bags, window curtain air breakable objects in or on your clothing, keep both feet on the floor in front of the
bags, and ETDs) impacts which exceed such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as seat.
preset deployment thresholds and in these might cause injuries. RWhen using a seat belt to secure infant
restraints, toddler restraints, or children
54
Safety and security
Occupant safety
in booster seats, always follow the child child. For additional information, see X With a smooth motion, pull the seat belt out
seat manufacturer’s instructions. “Children in the vehicle”. of seat belt outlet 1.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is X Place the shoulder portion of the seat belt
G Warning! significantly increased if the child restraints across the top of your shoulder and the lap
Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges. are not properly secured in the vehicle portion across your hips.
They could tear. and/or the child is not properly secured in X Push latch plate 2 into buckle 3 until it
Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in the child restraint. clicks.
the door or in the seat adjustment X If necessary, adjust the seat belt to the
mechanism. This could damage the seat correct height.
belt. X If necessary, tighten the lap portion to a
Never attempt to make modifications to snug fit by pulling shoulder portion up.
seat belts. This could impair the
effectiveness of the seat belts. Seat belt outlet height adjustment
Fastening the seat belts

G Warning!
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front
seating position. Thus, we strongly
recommend that children be placed in the
rear seats whenever possible. Regardless
of seating position, children 12 years old 1 Seat belt outlet
and under must be seated and properly 1 Seat belt height adjuster
2 Latch plate
secured in an appropriately sized infant
3 Buckle 2 Release button
restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat
recommended for the size and weight of the 4 Seat belt release button
Z
55
Safety and security
Occupant safety
X Raising: Slide seat belt height adjuster Damaged seat belts must be replaced. driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt are
1 upward. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz fastened.
Seat belt height adjuster 1 engages in Center. If you and/or your passenger release the
different positions. seat belt during driving, the seat belt
X
Enhanced seat belt reminder system telltale < starts flashing and the
Lowering: Press and hold release button
2. When the engine is started, the seat belt warning chime sounds as described before.
X Slide seat belt height adjuster 1 telltale < will always illuminate for If the driver’s or the front passenger’s seat
downward. 6 seconds to remind you and your passengers belt remains unfastened after 60 seconds,
to fasten your seat belts. the warning chime stops sounding, the seat
X Release button 2 and make sure seat belt
If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened when belt telltale < stops flashing but
height adjuster 1 engages into place. continues to be illuminated.
the engine is started, an additional warning
chime will also sound for a maximum of After a vehicle standstill, the warning chime
Releasing the seat belts is reactivated and the seat belt telltale
6 seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is
X Press seat belt release button 4 fastened. < is flashing again if the vehicle speed
(Y page 55). If after these 6 seconds the driver’s or the once exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h).
Allow the retractor to completely rewind front passenger’s seat belt (with the front The seat belt telltale < will only go out if
the seat belt by guiding latch plate 2 passenger seat occupied) is not fastened with both the driver’s and the front passenger’s
(Y page 55). front doors closed, seat belt (with the front passenger seat
Rthe seat belt telltale < remains occupied) are fastened, or the vehicle is
! Make sure the seat belt retracts fully so
illuminated for as long as either the driver’s standing still and a front door is opened.
that the seat belt and/or latch plate cannot
get caught or pinched in the door or in the or front passenger’s seat belt is not For more information, see “Practical
seat mechanism. This can damage the seat fastened. hints” (Y page 340).
belt and impair its effectiveness, and/or Rand if the vehicle speed once exceeds
cause damage to the door and/or door trim 15 mph (25 km/h), the seat belt telltale Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD),
panel. Such damage is not covered by the < starts flashing and a warning chime seat belt force limiter
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. sounds with increasing intensity for a The seat belts are equipped with ETDs and
maximum of 60 seconds or until the seat belt force limiters.
56
Safety and security
Occupant safety
The ETDs are designed to activate in the For your safety, when disposing of the restraints must be reset. Otherwise, the
following cases: pyrotechnic ETDs always follow our safety active head restraints cannot offer any
Rin frontal or rear-end impacts exceeding instructions. These are available at any additional protection in the event of another
the system’s preset deployment threshold authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. rear-end collision.
Rin
For information on resetting the activated
certain vehicle rollovers
active head restraints, see “Resetting
Rif the restraint systems are operational and Active head restraints (except C 63 activated head restraints” (Y page 353).
functioning correctly, see = indicator AMG) You cannot remove the active head restraint
lamp (Y page 43) The active head restraints are intended to on the driver’s and front passenger’s seats.
The ETDs for the front seats will only activate offer the driver and front passenger increased G Warning!
if the front seat belts are fastened (latch plate protection from whiplash-type injuries. In the
Only use seat or head restraint covers
properly inserted into buckle). event of a rear-end collision, the active head
which have been tested and approved by
The ETDs for the rear seats will activate with restraints on the driver’s and front
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model.
or without the respective seat belts fastened. passenger’s seat are designed to move
forward in the direction of travel, providing Using other seat or head restraint covers
In an impact, the ETDs remove slack from the may interfere with or prevent the activation
seat belts in such a way that the seat belts fit the head with increased support earlier on in
the collision sequence. The active head of the active head restraints and/or the
more snugly against the body. Seat belt force deployment of the front side impact air
limiters, when activated, are employed to restraints move forward whether the seat is
occupied or not. bags.
help reduce the peak force exerted by the Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
seat belts on occupants during a crash. G Warning! Center for availability.
i The ETDs do not correct an incorrect seat Do not attach any objects (e.g. hangers) to
position or incorrectly worn seat belts. the head restraint posts. Otherwise, the G Warning!
active head restraints may not be able to For your protection, drive only with properly
The ETDs do not pull occupants back
function properly or offer the intended positioned head restraints.
toward the seat backrest.
degree of protection they were designed for
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as
G Warning! in the event of a rear-end collision.
close to the head as possible and the center
Pyrotechnic ETDs that were activated must If the active head restraints have been of the head restraint supports the back of
be replaced. the head at eye level. This will reduce the Z
triggered in an accident, the active head
57
Safety and security
Occupant safety
potential for injury to the head and neck in Make sure:
the event of an accident or similar situation. RYou can reach steering wheel 1 with your
For information on head restraint adjustment, arms slightly bent at the elbows.
see “Head restraints” (Y page 89). RYou can move your legs freely.
RAll displays (including malfunction and
Correct driver seat adjustment indicator lamps) on the instrument cluster
are clearly visible.
G Warning! Seat belt
In order to avoid possible loss of vehicle
control, all seat, head restraint, steering page 53.
wheel, and rear view mirror adjustments, as
XFasten and position your seat belt 2
well as fastening of seat belts, must be
done before the vehicle is put into motion. (Y page 55) correctly.
Make sure:
RSeat belt 2 is always fitted snugly.
RAdjust seat belt 2 so that the shoulder
section is located as close as possible to
1 Steering wheel
the middle of the shoulder.
2 Seat belt
RPlace the lap portion of seat belt 2 as low
3 Seat
as possible on your hips.
Steering wheel
Seat and head restraint
page 92. G Observe Safety notes, see
page 86.
X Position steering wheel 1 properly. See
X Position seat 3 (Y page 87) and head
(Y page 93) for manual adjustment and
restraint properly (Y page 89).
(Y page 93) for electrical adjustment.
58
Safety and security
Occupant safety
Observe the following points: Children in the vehicle G Warning!
RAlways be in a properly seated position. When leaving the vehicle, always remove
Safety notes
RThe position should be as far rearward from the SmartKey from the starter switch.
the front air bag in steering wheel 1 as If an infant or child is traveling with you in the Always take the SmartKey with you and
vehicle: lock the vehicle. Do not leave children
possible, while still permitting proper
operation of vehicle controls. X Secure the child using an infant or child unattended in the vehicle, even if they are
restraint appropriate to the age and size of secured in a child restraint system, or with
RAdjust seat 3 to a comfortable seating
the child. access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s
position that still allows you to reach the unsupervised access to a vehicle could
X Make sure the infant or child is properly
accelerator/brake pedal safely. result in an accident and/or serious
secured at all times while the vehicle is in
RSeat 3 must be adjusted so that you can motion. personal injury. The children could
correctly fasten and position your Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicle
seat belt 2. Rbe seriously or fatally injured through
RThe seat backrest must be in a position that excessive exposure to extreme heat or
is as nearly upright as possible. cold
RAdjust the seat cushion so that the front Rinjure themselves or cause an accident
edge of the seat cushion lightly supports with vehicle equipment that can be
your legs. operated even if the SmartKey is
RAdjust the head restraint so that it is as removed from the starter switch or
close to the head as possible and the removed from the vehicle, such as seat
center of the head restraint supports the adjustment, steering wheel adjustment,
back of the head at eye level. or the memory function.
RNever place hands under seat 3 or near If children open a door, they could injure
any moving parts while seat 3 is being other persons or get out of the vehicle and
adjusted. injure themselves or be injured by following
traffic.
Z
59
Safety and security
Occupant safety
Do not expose the child restraint system to All lap/shoulder belts except the driver’s seat The use of infant or child restraints is required
direct sunlight. The child restraint system’s belt have special seat belt retractors for by law in all 50 states, the District of
metal parts, for example, could become secure fastening of child restraints. Columbia, the U.S. territories and all
very hot, and the child could be burned on To fasten a child restraint, follow child Canadian provinces.
these parts. restraint instructions for mounting. Then pull Infants and small children should be seated
the shoulder belt out completely and let it in an appropriate infant or child restraint
G Warning! retract. During seat belt retraction, a system, properly secured in accordance with
Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate the manufacturer’s instructions for the child
passenger compartment or trunk unless that the special seat belt retractor is restraint, that complies with U.S. Federal
they are firmly secured in place. activated. The seat belt is now locked. Push Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225
Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo down on child restraint to take up any slack. and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
increases a child’s risk of injury in the event To deactivate, release the seat belt buckle Standards 213 and 210.2.
of and let the seat belt retract completely. To A statement by the child restraint
Rstrong braking maneuvers deactivate the special seat belt retractor for manufacturer of compliance with these
Rsudden changes of direction the front passenger seat, the front passenger standards can be found on the instruction
seat must be in the most backward position. label on the restraint and in the instruction
Ran accident The seat belt can again be used in the usual manual provided with the restraint.
manner. When using any infant restraint, toddler
For more information on loading, please refer
to the “Loading and storing” (Y page 229) G Warning! restraint, or booster seat, make sure to
chapter. Never release the seat belt buckle while the carefully read and follow all manufacturer’s
vehicle is in motion, since the special seat instructions for installation and use.
Infant and child restraint systems belt retractor will be deactivated. Please read and observe warning labels
affixed to the inside of the vehicle and to
G Observe Safety notes, see i Information on child seats with mounting infant or child restraints.
page 59. fittings for tether anchorages G Warning!
We recommend all infants and children be (Y page 62). According to accident statistics, children
properly restrained at all times while the For information on LATCH-type child seat are safer when properly restrained in the
vehicle is in motion. anchors (Y page 63). rear seating positions than in the front
60
Safety and security
Occupant safety
seating position. Thus, we strongly front passenger front air bag in your check installation. Periodically check the
recommend that children be placed in the vehicle when the system senses the 5/ indicator lamp while driving to
rear seats whenever possible. Regardless weight of a typical 12-month-old child or make sure the 5/ indicator lamp
of seating position, children 12 years old less along with the weight of a standard is illuminated. If the 5/ indicator
and under must be seated and properly appropriate child restraint on the front lamp goes out or remains out, do not
secured in an appropriate infant restraint, passenger seat. transport a child on the front passenger
toddler restraint, or booster seat RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on seat until the system has been repaired.
recommended for the size and weight of the the front passenger seat will be seriously A child in a rear-facing child restraint on
child. injured or even killed if the front the front passenger seat will be seriously
The infant or child restraint must be passenger front air bag inflates in a injured or even killed if the front
properly secured with the vehicle’s seat collision which could occur under some passenger front air bag inflates.
belt, the seat belt and top tether strap, or circumstances, even with the air bag RIf you have to place a child in a forward-
lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in technology installed in your vehicle. The facing child restraint on the front
accordance with the child seat only means to completely eliminate this passenger seat, move the seat as far
manufacturer’s instructions. risk is to never place a child in a rear- back as possible, use the proper child
Occupants, especially children, should facing child restraint in the front seat. We restraint recommended for the age, size
always sit as upright as possible, wear the therefore strongly recommend that you and weight of the child, and secure child
seat belt properly and use an appropriately always place a child in a rear-facing child restraint with the vehicle’s seat belt
sized infant restraint, toddler restraint, or restraint in a backseat. according to the child seat
booster seat recommended for the size and RIfyou must install a rear-facing child manufacturer’s instructions. For children
weight of the child. restraint on the front passenger seat larger than the typical 12-month-old
Children can be killed or seriously injured because circumstances require you to do child, the front passenger front air bag
by an inflating air bag. Note the following so, make sure the 5/ indicator may or may not be activated.
important information when circumstances lamp is illuminated, indicating that the
require you to place a child in the front front passenger front air bag is G Warning!
passenger seat: deactivated. Should the 5/ Infants and small children should never
RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag indicator lamp not illuminate or go out share a seat belt with another occupant.
technology designed to deactivate the while the restraint is installed, please During an accident, they could be crushed Z
between the occupant and seat belt.
61
Safety and security
Occupant safety
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is occupied by passengers, before installing
significantly increased if the child restraints top tether straps, or the extended cargo
are not properly secured in the vehicle compartment is not in use. Make sure that
and/or the child is not properly secured in seat backrests are secured properly by
the child restraint. pushing and pulling on the seat backrests.
Children too big for a toddler restraint must If a seat backrest is not locked properly, the
ride in seats using regular seat belts. seat backrest could fold. The child seat
Position shoulder belt across chest and would no longer be supported properly or
shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat positioned to provide its intended benefit.
may be necessary to achieve proper seat That could cause serious or even fatal
belt positioning for children over 41 lb injuries.
1 Rear seat head restraint
(18 kg) until they reach a height where a
This vehicle is equipped with tether 2 Anchorage ring cover
lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a
anchorages for a top tether strap at each of 3 Anchorage ring
booster.
the rear seating positions.
When the child restraint is not in use, X Move the respective head restraint 1 to
Top tether straps enable an additional
remove it from the vehicle or secure it with its uppermost position (Y page 91).
connection to be made between child
the seat belt to prevent the child restraint X Lift up anchorage ring cover 2 from
restraint systems secured with LATCH-type
from becoming a projectile in the event of
anchors and rear seats. This can further anchorage ring 3.
an accident.
reduce the risk of injury.
Installation of infant and child restraint

systems
page 59.
G Warning!
Always lock the seat backrests in their
upright position when the rear seats are
62
Safety and security
Occupant safety
Once hook 4 is attached, the child restraint where a lap/shoulder belt fits properly
itself can be secured. without a booster.
X Install the child restraint system and Install child seat according to
tighten the top tether strap according to manufacturer’s instructions.
the child restraint manufacturer’s The child seat must be firmly attached to
instructions. the right and left side anchors.
After removing the child restraint system and An incorrectly mounted child seat may
the top tether strap. come loose during an accident which could
result in serious injury or death to the child.
X Pull down and close anchorage ring cover
2 from respective anchorage ring 3. Damaged or impact damaged child seats or
3 Anchorage ring child seat mounting fittings must be
4 Hook replaced.
Child seat anchors – LATCH-type
X Guide the top tether strap between head Non-LATCH-type child seats may also be used
restraint 1 and top of the seat backrest. G Observe Safety notes, see and can be installed using the vehicle’s seat
page 59. belt system. Install child seat according to the
X Make sure the top tether strap is not
twisted. This vehicle is equipped with two LATCH-type manufacturer’s instructions.
anchors (at each of the rear outer seats) for Vehicles with non-foldable rear bench seat:
X Securely fasten hook 4, which is part of
the installation of a LATCH-type child seat The LATCH-type anchors are blended with
the top tether strap, to anchorage ring 3. with matching mounting fittings. covers. Vehicles with split rear bench seat:
X For safety, make sure hook 4 is attached
G Warning! The LATCH-type anchors are located between
to anchorage ring 3 beyond the safety
Children too big for a toddler restraint must the seat cushion and the backrest.
catch, as illustrated.
ride in seats using regular seat belts.
X Lower head restraint 1 if necessary Position shoulder belt across chest and
(Y page 91). shoulder, not face or neck.
Make sure the top tether strap can pass A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
freely between head restraint 1 and top of proper seat belt positioning for children
the seat backrest. over 41 lb (18 kg) until they reach a height Z
63
Safety and security
Occupant safety
injury or an accident. Therefore, secure the
rear doors with the child safety locks
whenever children are riding in the back
seats of the vehicle.
The child safety locks on the rear doors
enable you to secure each rear door
individually. You cannot open a secured rear
door from the inside. You can open the rear
door from the outside when the vehicle is
unlocked.
Non-foldable rear bench seat Split rear bench seat, child seat anchors
1 Indicates the position of the anchors
X Install a LATCH-type child seat according
2 Anchorage ring covers to the manufacturer’s instructions.
3 Anchors A rigid connection between the child seat
and the body of the vehicle is established.
X Remove anchorage ring covers 2 from
anchors 3 by pulling it in direction of ! Make sure the seat belt for the center
arrow. seat can operate freely with a child seat
X Store anchorage ring covers 2, for installed.
example in the storage compartment of the
rear center armrest. Child safety
1 Securing
Child safety locks 2 Releasing
G Observe Safety notes, see X Securing: Press the lever up in direction of
page 59.
arrow 1.
G Warning! X Check to make sure the child safety locks
Children could open a rear door from the are working properly.
inside. This may cause serious personal
64
Safety and security
Panic alarm
X Releasing: Press the lever down in X Activating: Press override switch 1. Panic alarm
direction of arrow 2. Indicator lamp 2 comes on.
The rear door windows can no longer be
Override switch operated using the respective switch
G Observe Safety notes, see located in the rear doors.
page 59. It is still possible to operate the rear door
With the override switch you can disable the windows using the switches located on the
rear door window switches in the rear door door control panel of the driver’s door.
panels. X Deactivating: Press override switch 1
G Warning! again.
Activate the override switch when children The rear door windows can again be
are riding in the back seats of the vehicle. operated using the respective switch
The children may otherwise injure located in the rear doors. 1 Â button
themselves, e.g. by becoming trapped in For more information on power windows, see
the window opening. the “Controls in detail” section i USA only:
(Y page 109). This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
1 Override switch operate the equipment. Z
2 Indicator lamp
65
Safety and security
Driving safety systems

i Canada only: Driving safety systems prevent the natural laws of physics from
This device complies with RSS-210 of acting on the vehicle. They cannot increase
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to Introduction braking or steering efficiency beyond that
the following two conditions: This section contains information about the afforded by the condition of the vehicle
1. This device may not cause interference, following driving safety systems: brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
and RABS (Antilock Brake System) Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
2. this device must accept any prevent accidents.
RAdaptive Brake
interference received, including The capabilities of a vehicle equipped with
RBAS (Brake Assist System) the driving safety systems described in this
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device. REBP (Electronic Brake Proportioning) section must never be exploited in a
RESP®
reckless or dangerous manner which could
Any unauthorized modification to this (Electronic Stability Program) jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
device could void the user’s authority to others.
operate the equipment. i In winter operation, the maximum
effectiveness of most of the driving Always adjust your driving style to the
X Activating: Press and hold button 1 for at systems described in this section is only prevailing road and weather conditions and
least 1 second. achieved with winter tires, or snow chains keep a safe distance to other road users
An audible alarm and flashing exterior as required. and objects on the street.
lamps will operate briefly. If a driving system malfunctions, other
X Deactivating: Press button 1 again. Safety notes driving safety systems may also switch off.
or Observe indicator and warning lamps that
G Warning! may come on as well as messages in the
X Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch.
The following factors increase the risk of multifunction display that may appear.
or accidents:
X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
RExcessive speed, especially in turns
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
RWet and slippery road surfaces
inside the vehicle.
RFollowing another vehicle too closely
The driving safety systems described in this
section cannot reduce these risks or
66
Safety and security

ABS brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is in the For more information, see “What to do
regulating mode. if …?” (Y page 337).
G Observe Safety notes, see X Keep firm and steady pressure on the brake
page 66. pedal while you feel the pulsation. BAS
G Warning! Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure
Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm, yields the advantages provided by the ABS, G Observe Safety notes, see
steady brake pedal pressure instead. namely braking power and the ability to steer page 66.
Pumping the brake pedal defeats the the vehicle. The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in
purpose of the ABS and significantly The pulsating brake pedal can be an emergency situations. If you apply the brakes
reduces braking effectiveness. indication of hazardous road conditions and very quickly, the BAS automatically provides
functions as a reminder to take extra care full brake boost, thereby potentially reducing
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates
while driving. the braking distance.
the brake pressure so that the wheels do not
X Apply continuous full braking pressure until
lock during braking. This allows you to
maintain the ability to steer your vehicle. Emergency brake maneuver the emergency braking situation is over.
The ABS will prevent the wheels from
The ABS is functional above a speed of X Keep continuous full pressure on the brake
locking.
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent pedal.
of road surface conditions. When you release the brake pedal, the brakes
G Warning! function again as normal. The BAS is then
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will If the ABS malfunctions, other driving deactivated.
respond even to light brake pressure. safety systems such as the BAS or the
The - indicator lamp in the instrument G Warning!
ESP® are also switched off. Observe
cluster comes on when you switch on the indicator and warning lamps that may come If the BAS malfunctions, the brake system
ignition. It goes out when the engine is on as well as messages in the multifunction still functions, but without the additional
running. display that may appear. brake boost available that the BAS would
normally provide in an emergency braking
If the ABS malfunctions, the wheels may maneuver. Therefore, the braking distance
Braking lock during hard braking, reducing steering may increase.
At the instant one of the wheels is about to capability and extending the braking
lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the distance. Z
67
Safety and security

Adaptive Brake Adapt your driving style to the changed G Warning!
driving characteristics. Never switch off the ESP® when you see the
Adaptive Brake provides a high level of
braking safety as well as increased braking ESP® warning lamp v flashing in the
comfort. It is coupled with the ABS, the instrument cluster. In this case proceed as
ESP®
ESP® and the BAS. Adaptive Brake takes follows:
driver and vehicle characteristics into G Observe Safety notes, see RWhen driving off, apply as little throttle
consideration, thus achieving an optimal page 66. as possible.
braking effect. The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) is RWhile driving, ease up on the accelerator
For more information on the brake system, operational as soon as the engine is running pedal.
see (Y page 286). and monitors the vehicle’s traction (force of
RAdapt your speed and driving style to the
adhesive friction between the tires and the
road surface) and handling. prevailing road conditions.
EBP
The ESP® recognizes when a wheel is Failure to observe these guidelines could
G Observe Safety notes, see spinning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By cause the vehicle to skid. The ESP® cannot
page 66. applying brakes to individual wheels and by prevent accidents resulting from excessive
The Electronic Brake Proportioning (EBP) limiting the engine output, the ESP® works to speed.
enhances braking effectiveness by allowing stabilize the vehicle. The ESP® is especially
the rear brakes to supply a greater proportion useful while driving off and on wet or slippery ! Vehicles with 4MATIC:
of the braking effort in straight line braking road surfaces. The ESP® also stabilizes the Only conduct operational or performance
without a loss of vehicle stability. vehicle during braking and steering tests on a two-axle dynamometer. If such
tests are necessary, contact an authorized
G Warning! maneuvers.
Mercedes-Benz Center. You could
If the EBP malfunctions, the brake system The ESP® warning lamp v in the
otherwise seriously damage the brake
will still function with full brake boost. instrument cluster comes on when you switch
system or the transfer case which is not
However, the rear wheels could lock up on the ignition. It goes out when the engine
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
during emergency braking situations, for is running.
Warranty.
example. You could lose control of the The ESP® warning lamp v in the
vehicle and cause an accident. instrument cluster flashes when the ESP® is ! Vehicles with 4MATIC:
engaged.
68
Safety and security

Because the ESP® operates automatically, i The cruise control switches off the system will reduce vehicle stability in
the engine and ignition must be shut off automatically when the ESP® engages. driving maneuvers.
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or Do not switch off the ESP® when a spare
1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in Electronic Traction System wheel is mounted.
position 0 or 1) when the parking brake is (ETS/4-ETS)
being tested on a brake test dynamometer. To improve the vehicle’s traction, switch off
Active braking action through the ESP® G Observe Safety notes, see the ESP® in driving situations in which it
page 66. would be advantageous to have the drive
may otherwise seriously damage the brake
system which is not covered by the The ETS (Electronic Traction System) and wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. 4-ETS (four-wheel Electronic Traction better grip such as:
System, vehicles with 4MATIC only) are Rwhen driving with snow chains
! Vehicles without 4MATIC: components of the ESP®. The ETS/4-ETS
Rin deep snow
Because the ESP® operates automatically, improves the vehicle’s ability to utilize
the engine and ignition must be shut off available traction, especially under slippery Rin sand or gravel
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or road conditions by applying the brakes to a
spinning wheel. Vehicles with 4MATIC also G Warning!
1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in
position 0 or 1) when the parking brake is transfer more power to the wheel(s) with Switch on the ESP® immediately if the
being tested on a brake test dynamometer traction. aforementioned circumstances do not
or the vehicle is being towed with the front When you switch off the ESP®, the apply anymore. Otherwise the ESP® will not
axle raised. ETS/4-ETS is still enabled. stabilize the vehicle when it is starting to
skid or a wheel is spinning.
Active braking action through the ESP®
may otherwise seriously damage the brake Switching the ESP® off or on (except When you switch off the ESP®,
system which is not covered by the C 63 AMG)
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Rthe ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle
G Warning! Rthe engine output is not limited, which
! The ESP® will only function properly if you The ESP® should not be switched off during allows the drive wheels to spin and thus cut
use wheels of the recommended tire size normal driving other than in the into surfaces for better grip
as specified in the “Technical data” section circumstances described below. Disabling Rthe ETS will still apply the brakes to a Z
of this Operator’s Manual.
spinning wheel
69
Safety and security

Rthe ESP® continues to operate when you G Warning! C 63 AMG
are braking When the ESP® warning lamp v is Switching ESP® SPORT on or off
Ryou cannot activate the cruise control illuminated continuously, the ESP® is
Rthe switched off or is not operational due to a G Warning!
cruise control switches off if activated
malfunction. Vehicle stability in standard ESP® SPORT should not be switched on
i When the ESP® is switched off and one or driving maneuvers is reduced. during normal driving.
more drive wheels are spinning, the ESP® Adapt your speed and driving to the Switching ESP® SPORT on will result in the
warning lamp v in the instrument prevailing road conditions and to the non- following:
cluster flashes. However, the ESP® will operating status of the ESP®. Rno restriction to engine torque
then not stabilize the vehicle.
Rsystem supported traction control is
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
limited
extended period with the ESP® switched
off. This may cause serious damage to the ESP® SPORT is designed for driving on
drivetrain which is not covered by the closed tracks when the vehicle’s natural
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. oversteer and understeer characteristics
are desired and requires a highly skilled and
X Switching on: Press ESP® switch 1 until experienced driver able to handle these
the ESP® warning lamp v in the critical driving situations.
instrument cluster goes out. You could lose control of your vehicle and
You are now again in normal driving mode cause an accident.
with the ESP® switched on. Please be aware of these limits when you
1 ESP® switch switch on ESP® SPORT.
X Switching off: With the engine running, Do not switch on ESP® SPORT when a spare
press ESP® switch 1 until the ESP® wheel is mounted.
warning lamp v in the instrument
cluster comes on.
The ESP® is switched off.
70
Safety and security

To improve the vehicle’s traction, switch on Ryou cannot activate the cruise control ESP SPORT appears in the multifunction
ESP® SPORT in driving situations in which it Rthe cruise control switches off if activated display.
would be advantageous to have the drive X Switching off: With the engine running,
wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for i When ESP® SPORT is switched on and press ESP® SPORT switch 1 briefly.
better grip such as: one or more drive wheels are spinning, the The ESP® warning lamp v in the
Rwhen driving with snow chains ESP® warning lamp v in the instrument instrument cluster goes out. The message
Rin
cluster flashes. However, the ESP® will ESP On appears in the multifunction
deep snow
then stabilize the vehicle only to a limited display.
Rin sand or gravel extent.
ESP® SPORT switches off automatically when
G Warning! you turn off the engine. When starting the
Switch off ESP® SPORT and switch on the engine, the ESP® is activated automatically.
ESP® immediately if the aforementioned
Switching the ESP® off or on
circumstances do not apply anymore.
Otherwise ESP® SPORT will only stabilize G Warning!
the vehicle to a limited extent when it is The ESP® should not be switched off during
starting to skid or a wheel is spinning. normal driving.
Disabling of the system will result in the
When you switch on ESP® SPORT
following:
Rthe ESP® stabilizes the vehicle only to a Rno restriction to engine torque
limited extent 1 ESP® SPORT switch Rloss of system supported traction control
Rthe engine output is limited, but only to the
X Switching on: With the engine running,
extent that allows the drive wheels to spin “ESP® OFF” is designed for driving on
and thus cut into surfaces for better grip press ESP® SPORT switch 1 briefly. closed tracks when the vehicle’s natural
The ESP® warning lamp v in the oversteer and understeer characteristics
Rthe ETS will still apply the brakes to a
instrument cluster comes on. The message are desired and requires a highly skilled and
spinning wheel
experienced driver able to handle these
Rthe ESP® continues to operate when you critical driving situations.
are braking hard Z
71
Safety and security

You could lose control of your vehicle and Rthe ETS will still apply the brakes to a warning lamp ¯ in the instrument
cause an accident. spinning wheel cluster come on.
Please be aware of these limits when you Rthe ESP® continues to operate when you The message ESP Off appears in the
switch off the ESP®. are braking hard multifunction display.
Do not switch off the ESP® when a spare Ryou cannot activate the cruise control G Warning!
wheel is mounted. Rthe When the ESP® warning lamp v and the
cruise control switches off if activated
ESP OFF warning lamp ¯ are illuminated
To improve the vehicle’s traction, switch off
i When the ESP® is switched off and one or continuously, the ESP® is switched off.
the ESP® in driving situations in which it
more drive wheels are spinning, the ESP® Vehicle stability in standard driving
would be advantageous to have the drive
warning lamp v in the instrument maneuvers is reduced.
wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for
better grip such as: cluster does not flash. The ESP® will then Adapt your speed and driving to the
not stabilize the vehicle. prevailing road conditions and to the non-
Rwhen driving with snow chains operating status of the ESP®.
Rin deep snow
Rin sand or gravel ! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
G Warning! off. This may cause serious damage to the
Switch on the ESP® immediately if the drivetrain which is not covered by the
aforementioned circumstances do not Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
apply anymore. Otherwise the ESP® will not
X Switching on: With the engine running,
stabilize the vehicle when it is starting to
skid or a wheel is spinning. press ESP® SPORT switch 1 briefly.
The ESP® warning lamp v and the ESP
When you switch off the ESP®, 1 ESP® SPORT switch OFF warning lamp ¯ in the instrument
Rthe ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle cluster go out. The message ESP On
X Switching off: With the engine running,
Rthe
appears in the multifunction display.
engine output is not limited, which press ESP® SPORT switch 1 until the
allows the drive wheels to spin and thus cut ESP® warning lamp v and the ESP OFF
into surfaces for better grip
72
Safety and security
Anti-theft systems
Anti-theft systems Anti-theft alarm system mobile phone, power supply and GPS
coverage are available.
Immobilizer Once the alarm system has been armed, a
visual and audible alarm is triggered when
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized someone opens
persons from starting your vehicle. Ra door
When leaving the vehicle, always take the Rthe trunk
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. The
engine can be started by anyone with a valid Rthe hood
SmartKey that is left inside the vehicle. The alarm will stay on even if the activating
element (a door, for example) is immediately
Activating closed.
X With SmartKey: Remove the SmartKey The alarm system will also be triggered when
from the starter switch. Rthe vehicle is opened with the mechanical
1 Indicator lamp
X With KEYLESS-GO: Turn off the engine and key
open the driver’s door. Ra door is opened from the inside X Arming: Lock the vehicle with the
Rthe
SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.
trunk is opened with the emergency
Deactivating The turn signal lamps flash three times and
release button
an acoustic warning sounds three times to
X Switch on the ignition. To cancel the alarm after it has been indicate that the vehicle is locked. Indicator
triggered, see “Canceling the lamp 1 flashes to indicate that the alarm
i Starting the engine will also deactivate alarm” (Y page 74). system is armed.
the immobilizer.
i If the alarm stays on for more than i If the turn signal lamps do not flash three
In the event that the engine cannot be
started (yet the vehicle’s battery is 30 seconds, a call to the Response Center times and the acoustic warning does not
charged), the system is not operational. is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid sound three times, a door or the trunk may
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz system provided that you have subscribed not be properly closed.
Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the to the Tele Aid service and that it has been
USA), or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). activated properly, and that the necessary
Z
73
Safety and security
Anti-theft systems
Close the respective element.
X Disarming: Unlock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.
The turn signal lamps flash once and an
acoustic warning sounds once to indicate
that the alarm system is disarmed.
i The vehicle will lock and the alarm system
will rearm automatically again after
approximately 40 seconds unless you open
a door or the trunk.
Canceling the alarm

To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:
X Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch.
X Press button k or j on the
SmartKey.
In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
X Grasp an outside door handle.
The SmartKey must be within 3 ft (1 m) of
the vehicle.
The SmartKey must be inside the vehicle.
74
Controls in detail
Vehicle equipment .............................. 76 Automatic transmission ................... 121

Locking and unlocking ....................... 76 Instrument cluster ............................ 129
Starter switch positions ..................... 84 Control system .................................. 131
Seats .................................................... 86 Audio system .................................... 152
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 92 Driving systems ................................ 204
Mirrors ................................................. 94 Climate control system .................... 210
Memory function ................................. 98 Rear window defroster ..................... 222
Lighting ................................................ 99 Power tilt/sliding sunroof ............... 223
Wipers ................................................ 106 Panorama roof with power tilt/
Power windows ................................. 109 sliding panel ...................................... 226
Driving and parking .......................... 113 Loading and storing .......................... 229
Manual transmission ........................ 119 Useful features ................................. 235
75
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Vehicle equipment Locking and unlocking RCheck the batteries in the SmartKey and
replace them if necessary.
i This Operator’s Manual describes all Notes RUse the mechanical key to unlock the
features, standard or optional, potentially G Observe Safety notes, see driver’s door and the trunk.
available for your vehicle at the time of page 59. RUse the mechanical key to lock the
purchase. Please be aware that your When unlocking or locking the vehicle with vehicle.
vehicle might not be equipped with all the SmartKey an acoustic signal sounds. The
features described in this manual. RHave the vehicle battery and the vehicle
acoustic signal is activated at the factory. If
battery connections checked at an
you wish to deactivate the feature, or adjust
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
its signal volume, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, contact
When unlocking the vehicle, all turn signal Roadside Assistance or an authorized
lamps flash once, an acoustic signal sounds Mercedes-Benz Center.
once, the locking knobs in the doors move up,
and the anti-theft alarm system is disarmed. SmartKey
When locking the vehicle, all turn signal lamps
Your vehicle comes supplied with two
flash three times, an acoustic signal sounds
SmartKeys, each with remote control and a
three times, the locking knobs in the doors
removable mechanical key.
move down, and the anti-theft alarm system
is armed. The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks:
All doors and the trunk must be closed. Rthe doors
Rthe trunk lid
! If you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle
with the SmartKey, the batteries in the Rthe fuel filler flap
SmartKey are discharged, the SmartKey is
malfunctioning, or the vehicle battery is
drained.
76
Controls in detail

i Canada only: button k only unlocks the driver’s door
This device complies with RSS-210 of and the fuel filler flap.
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to X Switching on/off: Press and hold buttons
the following two conditions: k and j simultaneously for
1. This device may not cause interference, approximately 6 seconds until battery
and check lamp 4 (Y page 77) flashes twice.
2. this device must accept any The SmartKey will then function as follows:
interference received, including X Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
interference that may cause undesired flap: Press button k once.
operation of the device. X Global unlocking: Press button k
1 j Lock button
Any unauthorized modification to this twice.
2 i Unlock button for trunk lid device could void the user’s authority to X Global locking: Press button j.
3 k Unlock button operate the equipment.
4 Battery check lamp
Factory setting KEYLESS-GO
i USA only:
X Global unlocking: Press button k. The KEYLESS-GO feature is available on
This device complies with Part 15 of the
The vehicle will lock again automatically Canada vehicles only.
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: and rearm the anti-theft alarm system Vehicles equipped with KEYLESS-GO come
within approximately 40 seconds of with two SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO, each
1. This device may not cause harmful unlocking if neither door nor trunk is with remote control and a removable
interference, and opened. mechanical key.
2. this device must accept any X Global locking: Press button j. The KEYLESS-GO function is integrated into
interference received, including the SmartKey. The validity of the SmartKey is
interference that may cause undesired checked every time you grasp an outside door
operation. Selective setting handle.
Any unauthorized modification to this If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
device could void the user’s authority to to reprogramm the SmartKey so that pressing Z
operate the equipment.
77
Controls in detail

When the SmartKey is valid, your vehicle - Electronic items such as a mobile phone Find the SmartKey or change its present
unlocks or another SmartKey location immediately (e.g. place it on the
Rthe doors - Metallic objects such as coins or metal front passenger seat or insert it in shirt
foil pocket).
Rthe fuel filler flap
RIfyou have started the engine with the
Rthe trunk lid Doing so could impair the function of the
KEYLESS-GO system. KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, you can
i This device complies with RSS-210 of turn it off again by
RTo lock or unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to - pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
must be located outside the vehicle within
the following two conditions: button
approximately 3 ft (1 m) of a door or the
1. This device may not cause interference, trunk. - inserting the SmartKey into the starter
and RIf
switch when the vehicle is at a standstill
the SmartKey is positioned farther away
and the automatic transmission is in park
2. this device must accept any from the vehicle, the system may no longer
position P
interference received, including recognize the SmartKey. The vehicle
interference that may cause undesired cannot be locked or the engine started via RThe vehicle could be inadvertently
operation of the device. the KEYLESS-GO system. unlocked if the SmartKey is within 3 ft (1 m)
RIf the SmartKey is removed from the vehicle of the vehicle and
Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO (e.g. if a passenger exits the vehicle with - an outside door handle is splashed with
RYou
the SmartKey) water
can also use the SmartKey with
- when pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/ or
KEYLESS-GO like a normal SmartKey
(Y page 76). stop button or trying to lock the vehicle - you attempt to clean an outside door
with the outside door handle the handle
RYou can combine KEYLESS-GO functions message Key Not Detected appears in
with normal SmartKey functions (e.g. the multifunction display RRemember that the engine can be started
unlocking with KEYLESS-GO and locking by anyone with a SmartKey that is left
with button j). - with the engine running, the message
inside the vehicle.
Key Not Detected appears in the
RAlways carry the SmartKey with you. Possibility 1 (One SmartKey in the vehicle,
multifunction display while driving off
RNever store the SmartKey together with: one SmartKey outside the vehicle):
78
Controls in detail

If you leave the SmartKey behind when X Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
exiting and locking the vehicle, no message flap: Pull the driver’s outside door handle.
appears in the multifunction display. X Global unlocking: Pull any outside door
Possibility 2 (One SmartKey in the vehicle, handle other than the driver’s outside door
no SmartKey outside the vehicle): handle.
When exiting and trying to lock the vehicle, X Global locking: Touch outside of door
the message Key Detected In Vehicle handle 1.
appears in the multifunction display. The
vehicle will not be locked.
Checking SmartKey batteries
Factory setting 1 Outside door handle X Press button j or k on the
X
SmartKey.
Global unlocking: Pull an outside door X Global locking: Touch outside of door Battery check lamp 4 (Y page 77) comes
handle. handle 1.
The vehicle will lock again automatically on briefly to indicate that the SmartKey
and rearm the anti-theft alarm system batteries are in order.
Selective setting If the battery check lamp does not come on
within approximately 40 seconds if neither
door nor trunk is opened. If you frequently travel alone, you may wish briefly during check, the SmartKey batteries
to reprogram the SmartKey so when you pull are discharged.
the driver’s outside door handle, only the X Replace the batteries (Y page 353).
driver’s door and the fuel filler flap unlock.
i You can obtain the required batteries at
X Switching on/off: Press and hold buttons
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
k and j simultaneously for
approximately 6 seconds until battery i If the batteries are checked within signal
check lamp 4 (Y page 77) flashes twice. range of the vehicle, pressing button
The SmartKey will then function as follows: j or k will lock or unlock the vehicle
accordingly.
Z
79
Controls in detail

Loss of the SmartKey X Front doors: Pull on inside door handle
2 on the respective front door to open
If you lose your SmartKey or mechanical key, door.
you should do the following: If the door was locked, locking knob 1 will
X Have the SmartKey deactivated by an move up.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. X Rear doors: Pull up locking knob on the
X Report the loss of the SmartKey or the respective rear door to unlock door.
mechanical key to your car insurance X Pull on inside door handle on the respective
company immediately. rear door to open door.
X Have the mechanical lock replaced if
necessary.
Example illustration driver’s door
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be Automatic central locking
1 Locking knob
glad to supply you with a replacement. The doors and the trunk lock automatically
2 Inside door handle
when the vehicle is set into motion.
If the vehicle has previously been locked with
Opening the doors from the inside You can open a locked door from the inside.
the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening
Open door only when conditions are safe to
You can open a locked door from the inside. a door from the inside will trigger the anti-
do so.
Open door only when conditions are safe to theft alarm system.
do so. The doors are designed to unlock
To cancel the alarm, see (Y page 74).
automatically after an accident if the force of
the impact exceeds a preset threshold.
The vehicle locks automatically when the
ignition is switched on and the wheels are
turning at vehicle speeds of approximately
9 mph (15 km/h) or more. You could
therefore lock yourself out when the vehicle
is pushed or towed or is on a test stand.
80
Controls in detail

You can deactivate the automatic central Locking and unlocking from the inside You can open a locked door from inside at any
locking using the control system time. Open door only when conditions are
(Y page 150). G Observe Safety notes, see safe to do so.
page 59. If the vehicle was previously locked with the
Automatic central locking activating/ You can lock or unlock the vehicle from inside central locking switch:
deactivating using the central locking switches. This can Rand the SmartKey is set to factory settings,
be useful, for example, if you want to lock the
the complete vehicle is unlocked when a
vehicle before starting to drive.
door is opened from the inside
The central locking switches do not lock or
Rand the SmartKey is set to selective
unlock the fuel filler flap.
settings, only the door opened from inside
is unlocked
Opening the trunk

G Warning!
Make sure the trunk is closed when the
1 Central unlocking switch engine is running and while driving. Among
2 Central locking switch other dangers, deadly carbon monoxide
(CO) gases may enter vehicle interior
X Activating: Press and hold central locking resulting in unconsciousness and death.
switch 2 until an acoustic signal sounds. 1 Central unlocking switch
X Deactivating: Press and hold central 2 Central locking switch You can open the trunk when the vehicle is
unlocking switch 1 until an acoustic signal stationary.
X Locking: Press central locking switch 2.
sounds. A minimum height clearance of 5.90 ft
If the front passenger door is closed, the (1.80 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
i If you press and hold either switch and no vehicle locks.
acoustic signal sounds, the respective X Unlocking: Press central unlocking switch
setting has already been selected. 1. Z
81
Controls in detail

! The trunk lid swings open upwards Opening the trunk from the inside opening when closing the trunk lid. Be
automatically. Always make sure there is especially careful when small children are
sufficient overhead clearance. around.
Opening the trunk from the outside G Observe Safety notes, see
page 59.
Do not leave the SmartKey in the open trunk.
You may lock yourself out.
If the vehicle was previously centrally locked
with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, the trunk
lid will lock automatically when closed. All
turn signal lamps flash three times and an
1 Remote trunk opening switch acoustic signal sounds three times to confirm
locking.
X Press switch 1 until the trunk begins to
open. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the
1 Handle
trunk lid will open automatically if a SmartKey
X Press and hold button i on the Closing the trunk with KEYLESS-GO is recognized inside the
SmartKey until the trunk unlocks and vehicle or in the trunk.
G Warning!
begins to open. The vehicle is only locked when the turn signal
Make sure the trunk is closed when the lamps flash three times and an acoustic signal
or engine is running and while driving. Among sounds three times. If you are carrying a
X Pull on handle 1. other dangers, deadly carbon monoxide second SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you,
In vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: The (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior you can still lock the vehicle.
vehicle must be unlocked. resulting in unconsciousness and death.
If the trunk does not open, it is still locked
separately (Y page 83). G Warning!
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the trunk
82
Controls in detail

Trunk lid emergency release The emergency release button does not open
the trunk, if the vehicle battery is discharged
With the emergency release button, the trunk or disconnected.
lid can be opened from inside the trunk.
Valet locking
To deny any unauthorized person access to
the trunk, e.g. when you valet park the
vehicle, lock it separately with the mechanical
key. Leave only the SmartKey less its
mechanical key with the vehicle.
1 Handle
2 Handle
X Lower the trunk lid using handle 1 or 2.

X Close trunk lid with hands placed flat on 1 Emergency release button
trunk lid.
X Briefly press emergency release button
1.
The trunk lid unlocks and opens.
The emergency release button unlocks and
opens the trunk while the vehicle is standing
still or in motion.
$ Neutral position
Illumination of the emergency release button:
% Locked
RThe button flashes for 30 minutes after
opening the trunk. X Valet locking: Close the trunk.
RThe X Remove the mechanical key from the
button flashes for 60 minutes after
closing the trunk. SmartKey (Y page 350).
Z
83
Controls in detail
Starter switch positions

X Insert the mechanical key in the trunk lid Starter switch positions and turn signal indicator lamps unless
lock. activated) in the instrument cluster come on.
X Turn the mechanical key clockwise to SmartKey If a lamp in the instrument cluster fails to
come on when the ignition is switched on,
position % and remove the mechanical G Observe Safety notes, see
key in that position to lock the trunk. have it checked and replaced if necessary. If
page 59.
The trunk remains locked even when the a lamp in the instrument cluster remains on
vehicle is centrally unlocked. after starting the engine or comes on while
driving, refer to “Lamps in instrument
You can only cancel the separate trunk cluster” (Y page 336).
locking mode by means of the mechanical
key. If the SmartKey is left in starter switch
position 0 for an extended period of time, it
X Canceling: Insert the mechanical key in
can no longer be turned in the starter switch.
the trunk lid lock. In this case, the steering is locked. To unlock,
X Turn the mechanical key counterclockwise remove SmartKey from the starter switch and
to neutral position $ and remove the reinsert.
mechanical key in that position to unlock The steering is locked when the SmartKey is
the trunk. Starter switch removed from the starter switch.
You can now open the trunk.
} For removing SmartKey ! If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the
Vehicles with automatic transmission: starter switch, the vehicle battery may not
Gear selector lever must be in park be sufficiently charged.
position P. RCheck the vehicle battery and charge it
$ Power supply for some electrical if necessary.
consumers, e.g. radio RGet a jump start.
% Ignition (power supply for all electrical
consumers) and driving position To prevent accelerated vehicle battery
& Starting position
discharge or a completely discharged
vehicle battery, always remove the
When you switch on the ignition, all lamps
(except high-beam headlamp indicator lamp,
84
Controls in detail
Starter switch positions

SmartKey from the starter switch when the i The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button does X Insert KEYLESS-GO start/stop button 1
engine is not in operation. not need to be removed from the starter into starter switch 2 (if not inserted
switch when you leave the vehicle. already).
However, always take the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO you when you leave the vehicle. As long as i When you switch from SmartKey mode
back to KEYLESS-GO mode, the system
G Observe Safety notes, see the SmartKey is in the vehicle, the vehicle’s
electrical systems can be switched on or requires 2 seconds of detection time
page 59.
the engine can be started using the before you can use the KEYLESS-GO button
The KEYLESS-GO feature is available on as usual.
Canada vehicles only. KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
X Make sure the automatic transmission is in
Vehicles equipped with the KEYLESS-GO The function of the SmartKey overrules the
KEYLESS-GO function. park position P.
feature are supplied with a SmartKey with
X Do not depress the brake pedal.
integrated KEYLESS-GO function and a The SmartKey must be located in the vehicle.
removable KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
With the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
inserted in the starter switch and the
SmartKey present in the vehicle, pressing the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
Rwithout the brake pedal depressed
corresponds to the various starter switch
positions (Y page 84)
Rwith the brake pedal firmly depressed will
start the engine (Y page 113)
If you wish or should there be the need to 1 KEYLESS-GO start/stop button KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
insert the SmartKey in the starter switch, the 2 Starter switch
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button can be easily
removed by pulling it out of the starter switch.
Z
85
Controls in detail
Seats
Position 0 is switched on, have it checked and Seats
replaced if necessary. If a lamp in the
Before you press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop Safety notes
instrument cluster remains on after
button, the vehicle’s on-board electronics
starting the engine or comes on while
have status 0 (as with SmartKey removed). G Warning!
driving, refer to “Lamps in instrument
cluster” (Y page 336). In order to avoid possible loss of vehicle
Position 1 control, all seat, head restraint, steering
i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO start/ wheel, and rear view mirror adjustments, as
X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
stop button once, the power supply is again well as fastening of seat belts, must be
once.
switched off. done before the vehicle is put into motion.
This supplies power for some electrical
consumers, such as radio functions. G Warning!
i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO start/ Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving.
stop button Adjusting the seat while driving could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Ronce more, the ignition (position 2) is
switched on Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined position
Rtwice more the power supply is again as this can be dangerous. You could slide
switched off under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the seat belt would apply force at
Ignition (or position 2) the abdomen or neck. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The seat backrest
and seat belts provide the best restraint
twice.
when the wearer is in a position that is as
This supplies power for all electrical
upright as possible and seat belts are
consumers.
properly positioned on the body.
All lamps (except high-beam headlamp
indicator lamp and turn signal indicator
lamps unless activated) in the instrument
cluster come on. If a lamp in the instrument
cluster fails to come on when the ignition
86
Controls in detail
Seats
G Warning! an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised of the head restraint supports the back of
Your seat must be adjusted so that you can access to a vehicle could result in an the head at eye level. This will reduce the
correctly fasten your seat belt. accident and/or serious personal injury. potential for injury to the head and neck in
Observe the following points: the event of an accident or similar situation.
G Warning! Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
RAdjust the seat backrest until your arms According to accident statistics, children head restraints. Head restraints are
are slightly angled when holding the are safer when properly restrained in the intended to help reduce injuries during an
steering wheel. rear seating positions than in the front accident.
RAdjust the seat to a comfortable seating seating position. Thus, we strongly
position that still allows you to reach the recommend that children be placed in the
accelerator/brake pedal safely. The rear seats whenever possible. Regardless Seat adjustment
position should be as far back as possible of seating position, children 12 years old
! When moving the seats, make sure there
with the driver still able to operate the and under must be seated and properly
secured in an appropriately sized infant are no items in the footwell or behind the
controls properly.
restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat seats. Otherwise, you could damage the
RAdjust the head restraint so that it is as seats.
recommended for the size and weight of the
close to the head as possible and the
child. For additional information, see
center of the head restraint supports the Semi-electrical seat adjustment
“Children in the vehicle”.
back of the head at eye level.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is This seat adjustment is only available on
RNever place hands under the seat or near
significantly increased if the child restraints C 63 AMG.
any moving parts while a seat is being are not properly secured in the vehicle
adjusted. and/or the child is not properly secured in
Failure to do so could result in an accident the child restraint.
and/or serious personal injury.
G Warning!
G Warning! For your protection, drive only with properly
The power seats can be operated at any positioned head restraints.
time. Therefore, do not leave children Adjust the head restraint so that it is as
unattended in the vehicle, or with access to close to the head as possible and the center Z
87
Controls in detail
Seats
X Seat fore and aft adjustment: Lift handle 3 Seat fore and aft adjustment
4. 4 Seat backrest tilt
X Slide the seat to the desired position.
X Allow handle 4 to reengage with an i AMG vehicles are equipped with a seat
audible click. with an integrated head restraint. It is
X Check for proper engagement before
therefore not possible to set the height and
angle of the head restraint.
driving.
Power seats
1 Seat backrest tilt The seat adjustment switch is located on the
2 Seat hight
entry side of each front seat base. The seat
adjustment switch for vehicles with memory
3 Handwheel for seat cushion tilt
function are located on the front doors.
4 Handle for seat fore and aft adjustment
i AMG vehicles are equipped with a seat

with an integrated head restraint. It is
therefore not possible to set the height and
Vehicles with memory function
angle of the head restraint.
1 Seat cushion tilt
X Seat backrest tilt: Press the switch 2 Seat height
forward or backward in direction of arrow 3 Seat fore and aft adjustment
1.
4 Seat backrest tilt
X Seat height: Press the switch up or down
5 Head restraint height
in direction of arrow 2.
Vehicles without memory function
X Seat cushion tilt: Turn handwheel 3 i Vehicles without memory function:
1 Seat cushion tilt
forward or backward until your upper legs
2 Seat height
are lightly supported.
88
Controls in detail
Seats
The seats can be adjusted within 5 minutes X Seat cushion tilt: Press the switch up or Head restraint fore and aft adjustment
after either front door has been opened. down in direction of arrow 1 until your
The counter resets each time upper legs are lightly supported.
Ryou open or close a front door X Head restraint height: Press the switch
Ryou
up or down in direction of arrow 5.
insert the SmartKey into the starter
switch Head restraint height adjustment, manual
Ryou remove the SmartKey from the This feature is only available in vehicles
starter switch without memory function.
Ryou switch the ignition on or off
Just like in vehicles with memory function,
the power seats can be operated at any
X Adjust the head restraint to the desired
time when the ignition is switched on.
position by pushing or pulling on the lower
i Vehicles with memory function: edge of the head restraint cushion.
The memory function (Y page 98) lets you
store the settings for the seat position
Lumbar support
together with the settings for the steering
wheel and the exterior rear view mirrors. You can adjust the contour of the front seat’s
lumbar support to help enhance support to
X Seat fore and aft adjustment: Press the 1 Release button
your spine.
switch forward or backward in direction of
X Raising: Adjust the height of the head
arrow 3.
restraint manually by pulling it upward.
X Seat backrest tilt: Press the switch
X Lowering: Push release button 1 and
forward or backward in direction of arrow
push down on the head restraint.
4.
X Seat height: Press the switch up or down
in direction of arrow 2. Z
89
Controls in detail
Seats
Rear seat head restraints
G Warning!
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust the head restraint in such a way that
it is as close to the head as possible and the
center of the head restraint supports the
back of the head at eye level. This will
reduce the potential for injury to the head
and neck in the event of an accident or
1 Adjustment lever 1 Upper back support
similar situation.
2 Lumbar region support
X Move adjustment lever 1 in direction of With a rear seat occupied, make sure to
3 Seat backrest side cushions move the respective head restraint up from
the arrows until you have reached a
comfortable seating position. X Switch on the ignition. the lowest non-use position and have the
occupant adjust the head restraint
X Upper back support: Use button 1 to
properly.
Seat with adaptive backrest adjust the upper back support to the
desired position. Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
This feature is only available on C 63 AMG. head restraints installed when the rear
X Lumbar region support: Use button 2 to
The contour of the front seat backrests can seats are occupied. Head restraints are
adjust the lumbar region support to the intended to help reduce injuries during an
be individually adjusted to provide optimum desired position.
support for your back. accident.
X Lateral support: Use button 3 to adjust
the lateral support to the desired position.
i If, after a period of time, the seat no longer
provides the desired contour, then repeat
the adjustment procedure.
90
Controls in detail
Seats
Rear seat head restraint height Rear seat head restraint fore and aft
adjustment
1 Release button
1 Release button X Removing: Unlock the rear seat backrest
X Adjust the head restraint to the desired and fold it slightly forward.
X Raising: Pull head restraint upward to the
position by pushing or pulling on the lower X Pull head restraint to its highest position.
desired position.
edge of the head restraint cushion. X Push release button 1 and pull out head
X Lowering: Press release button 1 and
push down on head restraint. restraint.
Rear seat head restraints, removing and X Installing: Position the head restraints so
installing (vehicles with split foldable that the notches on the rod are on the left
rear seat) when looking in the direction of travel.
X Insert head restraint and push it down until
i The rear head restraints cannot be
it engages.
removed on vehicles which do not have the
X Fold the rear seat backrest back until it
split foldable rear seat.
engages.
X Push release button 1 and adjust head
restraint to desired position.
Z
91
Controls in detail

Seat heating X Continue pressing switch 1 until desired Multifunction steering wheel
seat heating level is reached.
X Switching off: Press switch 1 repeatedly
Safety notes
until all indicator lamps go out. G Warning!
If one or more of the indicator lamps in seat Do not adjust the steering wheel while
heating switch 1 are flashing, there is driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while
insufficient voltage available since too many driving, or driving without the steering
electrical consumers are turned on. The seat wheel adjustment feature locked could
heating switches off automatically. cause the driver to lose control of the
The seat heating will switch back on again vehicle.
automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is The electrical steering wheel adjustment
available. feature can be operated at any time.
1 Seat heating switch
Therefore, do not leave children
The red indicator lamps in switch 1 come on unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
to show which heating level you have an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised
selected. access to a vehicle could result in an
The seat heating switches from level 3 (high) accident and/or serious personal injury.
to level 2 after approximately 5 minutes.
Make sure
The seat heating switches from level 2 to level
Ryou can reach the steering wheel with your
1 (low) after approximately 10 minutes.
arms slightly bent at the elbows
The seat heating automatically switches off
Ryou can move your legs freely
from level 1 after approximately 20 minutes.
X Switch on the ignition. Rall displays (including malfunction and
X Switching on: Press switch 1. indicator lamps) on the instrument cluster
are clearly visible
Three red indicator lamps in switch 1
come on.
92
Controls in detail

Steering wheel adjustment, manual Steering wheel adjustment, electrical Easy-entry/exit feature
This feature allows the driver an easier entry
into and exit from the vehicle. When entering
and exiting the vehicle, the steering wheel is
in its uppermost position.
The easy-entry/exit feature can be activated
or deactivated in the Convenience submenu
of the control system (Y page 150).
G Warning!
You must make sure no one can become
trapped or injured by the moving steering
1 Release handle 1 Adjusting steering wheel, up or down wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is
2 Adjusting steering wheel, up or down 2 Adjusting steering wheel, in or out activated.
3 Adjusting steering wheel, in or out To stop steering wheel movement do one
X Adjusting steering wheel up or down: of the following:
X Unlocking: Pull release handle 1 out to Move stalk in direction of arrows 1.
RMove steering wheel adjustment stalk.
its stop limit. X Adjusting steering wheel in or out: Move
stalk in direction of arrows 2. RPress one of the memory position
X Move steering wheel to the desired
position. buttons.
i The memory function (Y page 98) lets
X Locking: Push release handle 1 all the RPress memory button M.
you store the settings for the steering
way up until it engages. wheel together with the settings for the Do not leave children unattended in the
X Make sure the steering wheel is securely seat position and the exterior rear view vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
locked by trying to move it up and down as mirrors. vehicle. Children could open the driver’s
well as in and out before driving off. door and unintentionally activate the easy-
entry/exit feature, which could result in an
accident and/or serious personal injury.
Z
93
Controls in detail
Mirrors
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated, G Warning! Mirrors
the steering wheel will return to its last set Let the system complete the adjustment
position when you close the driver’s door with Notes
procedure before setting the vehicle in
the ignition switched on. The steering wheel motion. All steering wheel adjustment must Adjust the interior and exterior rear view
will also return to its last set position when be completed before setting the vehicle in mirrors before driving so that you have a good
you insert the SmartKey into the starter motion. Driving off with the steering wheel view of the road and traffic conditions.
switch or press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop still adjusting could cause the driver to lose
button once with the driver’s door closed. control of the vehicle.
Interior rear view mirror
i The last set steering wheel position is
stored when the ignition is switched off or X Adjust the interior rear view mirror
the position is stored in memory manually.
(Y page 98).
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated, Interior rear view mirror, antiglare
the steering wheel tilts upwards when you position
remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.
The steering wheel also tilts upwards when
you open the driver’s door with the SmartKey
in starter switch position 0 or 1 or the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in position
1.
i When the current position for the steering
wheel is in the uppermost tilt position, the
steering wheel will no longer be able to
move upward when the easy-entry/exit
feature is activated. 1 Lever
The adjustment procedure is briefly
interrupted when the engine is started.
94
Controls in detail
Mirrors
X Tilt the mirror to the antiglare position by can only be made with the indicator lamp
moving lever 1 towards the windshield. for the respective exterior rear view mirror
The interior rear view mirror is dimmed. button illuminated.
For more information, see “Auto-dimming X Press adjustment button 3 up, down, left
rear view mirrors” (Y page 95). or right according to the desired setting.
! If an exterior rear view mirror was forcibly
Exterior rear view mirrors hit from the front, manually snap it back
G Warning! into place.
Exercise care when using the passenger- i At low ambient temperatures, the exterior
side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror 1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror rear view mirrors will be heated
surface is convex (outwardly curved button automatically.
surface for a wider field of view). Objects in 2 Passenger-side exterior rear view mirror
mirror are closer than they appear. Check button
your interior rear view mirror and glance 3 Adjustment button Auto-dimming rear view mirrors
over your shoulder before changing lanes.
The exterior rear view mirror on the driver’s
X Switch on the ignition.
side and the interior rear view mirror will
X Press button 1 for the driver’s side
respond automatically to glare when the
exterior rear view mirror or button 2 for ignition is switched on and incoming light
the passenger-side exterior rear view from headlamps falls on the sensor in the
mirror. interior rear view mirror.
The indicator lamp in the respective button The rear view mirrors will not react if the
comes on. automatic transmission is set to reverse gear
If you do not make adjustments to the R or the interior lighting is switched on.
selected exterior rear view mirror within
15 seconds, the indicator lamp goes out. G Warning!
You will then have to select the desired The auto dimming function does not react
exterior rear view mirror again before if incoming light is not aimed directly at Z
adjustments can be made. Adjustments sensors in the interior rear view mirror.
95
Controls in detail
Mirrors
The interior rear view mirror and the unlocked and the driver’s or front
exterior rear view mirror on the driver’s side passenger door are subsequently opened.
do not react, for example, if the rear window
sunshade is in raised position. Resetting the automatic exterior rear
Light hitting the mirror(s) at certain angles view mirror fold in function
(incident light) could blind you. As a result, You need to reset the automatic exterior rear
you may not be able to observe traffic view mirror fold in function whenever the
conditions and could cause an accident. battery was disconnected or discharged.
Power folding exterior rear view X Briefly press button 1.
1 Button for folding exterior rear view
mirrors
i You need to manually fold in the mirrors mirrors in and out
This feature is only available in Canada once, so that the automatic fold in function X Switch on the ignition.
vehicles. will work, see “Setting fold-in function for
X Folding in: Briefly press button 1.
! Before you drive the vehicle through an exterior rear view mirrors” (Y page 151).
Both exterior rear view mirrors fold in.
automatic car wash, fold in the exterior rear
view mirrors. Otherwise they may get Folding in and out manually i If you are driving at more than
damaged. approximately 9 mph (15 km/h), you will
The exterior rear view mirrors can vibrate if
they are not folded out completely. not be able to fold the exterior mirrors in.
Folding in and out automatically X Folding out: Briefly press button 1.
When the corresponding function in the Both exterior rear view mirrors fold out.
control system is activated (Y page 151):
! If an exterior rear view mirror housing is
RThe exterior rear view mirrors fold in
forcibly pushed forward (hit from the rear),
automatically as soon as the vehicle is reposition it manually by applying firm
locked from the outside. pressure until it snaps back into place.
RThe exterior rear view mirrors fold out If an exterior rear view mirror housing is
automatically as soon as the vehicle is forcibly pushed rearward (hit from the
96
Controls in detail
Mirrors
front), press button 1 to fold mirrors in, in the respective button 1 or 2 comes
then press button 1 again to fold mirrors on.
out. Do not force mirrors by hand as this X Press button 2, to select the front
may damage the adjustment mechanism. passenger side exterior rear view mirror.
The mirror housing is then properly The indicator lamp in button 2 comes on
positioned and you can adjust the mirror in and the passenger-side exterior rear view
the usual manner. mirror will be turned downward to the
stored position.
Activating exterior rear view mirror The exterior rear view mirror returns to its
parking position previously stored driving position:
1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror R10 seconds after you have put the
Follow these steps to activate the mirror button transmission out of reverse
parking position so that the passenger-side
2 Passenger-side exterior rear view mirror Rimmediately
exterior rear view mirror will be turned once your vehicle exceeds a
button speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
downward to the stored position.
3 Adjustment button
Rimmediately when you press button 1 for
X Make sure you have stored a parking driver’s side exterior rear view mirror.
position for the passenger-side exterior
rear view mirror (Y page 98).
X Shift the automatic transmission into
reverse gear R (manual transmission to
reverse gear).
The previously selected exterior rear view
mirror is activated, and the indicator lamp
97
Controls in detail
Memory function
Memory function Recalling positions from memory
Notes X Press and hold desired memory position
button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat has
With the memory function you can store up completely moved to the stored position.
to three different configurations per front On the driver’s side, also wait for the
seat. steering wheel and exterior rear view
Each memory position button on the driver’s mirrors to move to the stored position.
side can store all of the following settings:
RSeat
i Releasing the memory position button
position
stops movement to the stored positions
RSteering wheel position immediately.
M Memory button
RExterior rear view mirrors’ position 1, 2, 3 Memory position button
G Warning! Storing exterior rear view mirror
Do not activate the memory function while parking position
Storing positions into memory
driving. Activating the memory function For easier parking, you can adjust the
X Adjust the seats.
while driving could cause the driver to lose passenger-side exterior rear view mirror so
control of the vehicle. X On the driver’s side, additionally adjust the
that you can see the right rear wheel as soon
steering wheel and exterior rear view as you engage reverse gear R.
Each stored position on the passenger side mirrors to the desired positions.
includes the setting of the seat position. For information on activating the parking
X Press memory button M.
position, see (Y page 97).
X Release memory button M and press
memory position button 1, 2 or 3 within
3 seconds.
When the settings are stored to the
selected position, an acknowledgement
signal sounds.
98
Controls in detail
Lighting
X Press memory button M 4. Lighting
X Within 3 seconds, press one of the arrows
of adjustment button 3. Notes
The parking position is stored if the mirror i If you drive in countries where vehicles
does not move. drive on the other side of the road than the
country where the vehicle is registered, you
i If the mirror does move, repeat the above
must have the headlamps modified for
steps. After the setting is stored, you can
symmetrical low beams. Relevant
move the mirror again.
information can be obtained at any
1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror
i Vehicles equipped with active Bi-Xenon
button
headlamps:
2 Passenger side exterior rear view mirror
button The active Bi-Xenon headlamps monitor the
vehicle’s steering angle and speed, then
3 Adjustment button
automatically shift their beams to either
4 Memory button M side to better follow the curvature of the
X Stop the vehicle. road ahead, increasing usable illumination
over conventional headlamps.
X Press button 2.
The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror is selected.
X Adjust the passenger-side exterior rear
view mirror with adjustment button 3 so
that you see the rear wheel and the road
curb.
99
Controls in detail
Lighting
Exterior lamp switch starter switch or open the driver’s door with RLicense plate lamps
the ignition switched off. RSide marker lamps
When the parking lamps or the rear fog RInstrument panel lamps
lamp are switched on and you remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch and open RGreen indicator lamp B in the
the driver’s door, an acoustic signal instrument cluster
sounds. X Switching off: Turn the exterior lamp
In addition the message Switch Off switch to position M.
Lights appears in the multifunction
display.
Automatic headlamp mode
Switch off the parking lamps or the rear fog
lamp manually. The following lamps come on and go out
$ a Standing lamps, left automatically depending on the brightness of
% g Standing lamps, right ! Failure to switch off the parking lamps the ambient light:
& M Off when leaving the vehicle may result in a RLow-beam headlamps
Daytime running lamp mode discharged battery.
RTail lamps
(* Automatic headlamp mode
Low-beam headlamps RParking lamps
Daytime running lamp mode
)C Parking lamps (also tail lamps, RLicense plate lamps
The low-beam headlamps can be switched on
license plate lamps, side marker and off with the exterior lamp switch. RSide marker lamps
lamps and instrument panel lamps) X Switch on the ignition.
*B Low-beam headlamps or high-beam G Warning!
X Switching on: Turn the exterior lamp
headlamps If the exterior lamp switch is set to *,
switch to position B.
,¥ Front fog lamps the headlamps will not automatically come
The following lamps come on: on under foggy conditions.
.† Rear fog lamp RLow-beam headlamps
To minimize risk to you and to others,
i The exterior lamps go out automatically RTail lamps activate headlamps by turning exterior
when you remove the SmartKey from the RParking lamps lamp switch to B when driving or when
100
Controls in detail
Lighting
traffic and/or ambient lighting conditions Canada only: High-beam headlamps are only Canada only
require you to do so. available in low ambient lighting conditions. You can only switch on the high-beam
In low ambient lighting conditions, only headlamps in low ambient lighting conditions.
switch from position * to B with the Daytime running lamp mode The high-beam flasher is available at all times.
vehicle at a standstill in a safe location. In Canada, the daytime running lamp mode is When the engine is running, and you
Switching from * to B will briefly mandatory and therefore in a constant mode. Rshift from a driving position to park position
switch off the headlamps. Doing so while In the USA, the daytime running lamp mode P with the vehicle at a standstill (vehicles
driving in low ambient lighting conditions is deactivated by default. Activate the with automatic transmission) or the
may result in an accident. daytime running lamp mode using the control parking brake is engaged, the low-beam
The automatic headlamp feature is only an system, see “Setting daytime running lamp headlamps will go out with a delay of 3
aid to the driver. The driver is responsible mode (USA only)” (Y page 148). minutes
for the operation of the vehicle’s lights at X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position Rturn the exterior lamp switch to position
all times. M or *. C, the low-beam headlamps, the tail
X
When the engine is running, the low-beam and parking lamps, the license plate lamps
Switching on: Turn the exterior lamp
headlamps come on. and the side marker lamps come on
switch to position *.
With the SmartKey in starter switch In low ambient lighting conditions, the Rturn the exterior lamp switch to position
position 1 or the KEYLESS-GO start/stop following lamps will come on additionally: B, the manual headlamp mode has
button (Canda only) pressed once, the tail RTail lamps priority over the daytime running lamp
and parking lamps, the license plate lamps RParking lamps mode
and the side marker lamps will come on and The corresponding exterior lamps come on
RLicense plate lamps
go out depending on the brightness of the (Y page 100).
ambient light. RSide marker lamps
When the engine is running the low-beam With the daytime running lamp mode USA only
headlamps, the tail and parking lamps, the activated and the engine running, you cannot You can only switch on the high-beam
license plate lamps and the side marker switch off the low-beam headlamps manually. headlamps in low ambient lighting conditions.
lamps will come on and go out depending The high-beam flasher is available at all times.
on the brightness of the ambient light. Z
When the engine is running, and you turn the
exterior lamp switch to position C or
101
Controls in detail
Lighting
B, the manual headlamp mode has X Switch on the ignition. Combination switch
priority over the daytime running lamp mode. X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
The corresponding exterior lamps come on C or B (Y page 100).
(Y page 100). X Switching on front fog lamps: Pull out the
exterior lamp switch to first stop.
Fog lamps The green indicator lamp ¥ in the
Fog lamps cannot be switched on with the exterior lamp switch comes on.
exterior lamp switch in position *. To X Switching on rear fog lamp: Pull out the
switch on the fog lamps, turn the exterior exterior lamp switch to second stop.
lamp switch to position B first. The rear fog lamp, the front fog lamps and
the yellow indicator lamp † in the
G Warning! exterior lamp switch come on.
In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions, 1 High beam
X Switching off front fog lamps/rear fog
only switch from position * to B 2 High-beam flasher
lamp: Push in the exterior lamp switch to
with the vehicle at a standstill in a safe its stop.
location. High beam
Switching from * to B will briefly X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
Locator lighting and night security
switch off the headlamps. Doing so while illumination B (Y page 100).
driving in low ambient lighting conditions
X Switching on: Push the combination
may result in an accident. Locator lighting and night security
illumination are described in the “Control switch in direction of arrow 1.
Fog lamps will operate with the parking lamps system” section, see “Setting locator lighting The high-beam headlamp indicator lamp
and/or the low-beam headlamps on. Fog and night security illumination (Headlamps A in the instrument cluster comes on.
lamps should only be used in conjunction with delayed shut-off feature)” (Y page 149). X Switching off: Pull the combination switch
low-beam headlamps. Consult your State or in direction of arrow 2 to its original
Province Motor Vehicle Regulations position.
regarding permissible lamp operation.
102
Controls in detail
Lighting
High-beam flasher switch only to point of resistance and left or right turn, only the respective left or
release. The corresponding turn signal right turn signals will operate when the
X Switching on: Pull the combination switch
lamps will flash three times. ignition is switched on.
briefly in direction of arrow 2.
X Switching off: Press hazard warning
Hazard warning flasher flasher switch 1 again.
Turn signals
The hazard warning flasher can be switched i If the hazard warning flasher was
on at all times, even with the SmartKey activated automatically, press hazard
removed from the starter switch. warning flasher switch 1 twice to switch
The hazard warning flasher comes on off the hazard warning flasher. The hazard
automatically when an air bag deploys. warning flasher is switched off
automatically at vehicle speeds of
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher.
Headlamp cleaning system

The headlamps will be cleaned with a high-
1 Turn signals, right pressure water jet automatically when the
2 Turn signals, left engine is running and you have
Rswitched on the headlamps
X Press the combination switch in direction
of arrow 1 or 2. and
The corresponding turn signal indicator 1 Hazard warning flasher switch Rthe windshield wipers have wiped the
lamp L or K in the instrument windshield with washer fluid for the first
cluster flashes. X Switching on: Press hazard warning time
The combination switch resets automatically flasher switch 1.
The headlamps are cleaned every tenth time
after major steering wheel movements. All turn signal lamps are flashing.
the windshield is washed with washer fluid.
i To signal minor directional changes such i With the hazard warning flasher activated When you switch off the headlamps or the
Z
as changing lanes, press combination and the combination switch set for either ignition, the automatic function is reset and
103
Controls in detail
Lighting
will start counting the next time from the X Switch on the left or right turn signal, The corner-illuminating front fog lamp
beginning. depending on whether you are turning left remains lit for a maximum of 3 minutes.
For information on filling up the washer or right. Afterward, it goes out even if the turn signal
reservoir, see “Washer system and headlamp The respective front fog lamp comes on. If is still switched on.
cleaning system” (Y page 259). you have switched on the turn signal for
one side but turn the steering wheel in the Switching off
other direction, the corner-illuminating
Corner-illuminating front fog lamps front fog lamp comes on on the side of the X Switch off the left or right turn signal.
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps turn signal. or
improve illumination of the area in the or X Steer straight ahead.
direction into which you are turning. X Turn steering wheel in the desired
i There may be a brief delay before the
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will direction.
corner-illuminating front fog lamps go out.
only operate Driving forward: The front fog lamp on the
Rin
side of your steering direction comes on.
low ambient lighting conditions
Driving in reverse: The front fog lamp
Rat vehicle speeds below 25 mph opposite to your steering direction comes
(40 km/h) on.
Rwith the front fog lamps switched off The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will
Rwith the engine is running come on automatically depending on the
steering angle, even if you did not switch on
either turn signal. If the corner-illuminating
Switching on
front fog lamps came on automatically, they
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position will also go out automatically depending on
B or *. the steering angle and vehicle speed.
or The corner-illuminating front fog lamps
X Activate the daytime running lamp mode temporarily come on on both sides of the
(Y page 101). vehicle if you turn the steering wheel in one
direction and then again in the other direction
shortly thereafter.
104
Controls in detail
Lighting
Interior lighting in the front Automatic control X Switching on/off front interior
lighting: Press switch ð.
X Activating: Press button ].
X Switching on/off rear interior lighting:
Button ] disengages and sits flush with
Press switch ò.
the other buttons.
The interior lighting comes on in darkness, X Switching on/off front reading lamps:
when you: Press respective button X.
Runlock the vehicle
Rremove the SmartKey from the starter Emergency lighting

switch When the interior lighting is set to automatic
Ropen a door mode, the interior lighting is activated
X
automatically if the vehicle is involved in an
Deactivating: Press button ].
accident.
Button ] engages.
X Switching off: Press button ].
The interior lighting goes out after a preset
time (Y page 150). or
X Press hazard warning flasher switch
i If a door remains open, the interior lamps
1 ò Rear interior lighting on/off (Y page 103).
go out automatically after approximately
2 ] Automatic control on/off 5 minutes.
3 X Right front reading lamp on/off
4 ð Front interior lighting on/off Manual control
5 X Left front reading lamp on/off ! An interior lamp switched on manually
6 Front reading lamps does not go out automatically.
7 Front interior lighting Leaving an interior lamp switch in the ON
position for extended periods of time with
the engine turned off could result in a
discharged battery. Z
105
Controls in detail
Wipers
Interior lighting in the rear X Switching on/off rear reading lamps: Wipers
Press respective reading lamp switch
! An interior lamp switched on manually X. Notes
does not go out automatically.
! Do not operate the wipers when the
Leaving an interior lamp switch in the ON
windshield is dry. Dust that accumulates on
position for extended periods of time with
a windshield might scratch the glass and/
the engine turned off could result in a
or damage the wiper blades when wiping
discharged battery.
occurs on a dry windshield. If it is necessary
The overhead control panel is located above to operate the wipers in dry weather
the rear seat bench. conditions, always operate the wipers with
washer fluid.
! If the windshield wipers leave smears on

the windshield after the car has been driven
through an automatic car wash, then wax
or other residue is on the windshield.
Shortly after washing the car in an
automatic car wash, clean the windshield
with washer fluid.
1 X Right rear reading lamp on/off

2 X Left rear reading lamp on/off
3 Left reading lamp
4 Rear interior lamp
5 Right reading lamp
106
Controls in detail
Wipers
Windshield wipers cleaning. Windshield wipers will operate in
the presence of water sprayed on the
Switching on/off windshield, and windshield wipers may be
damaged as a result.
M Windshield wipers off
! Vehicles with rain sensor: If you have set
U Slow intermittent wiping
intermittent wiping, dirt on the surface of
Rain sensor operation with low
the rain sensor or optical effects may cause
sensitivity.
the windshield wipers to wipe in an
V Fast intermittent wiping undesired fashion. This could then damage
Rain sensor operation with high the windshield wiper blades or scratch the
Combination switch sensitivity. windshield. You should therefore switch off
1 Single wipe the windshield wipers when weather
u Slow continuous wiping conditions are dry.
Wiping with washer fluid
2 Switching on windshield wipers t Fast continuous wiping Vehicles with rain sensor: Intermittent wiping
interval is dependent on wetness of
X Turn the combination switch in direction of windshield. After the initial wipe, pauses
arrow 2 to the desired position, between wipes are controlled by the rain
sensor automatically.
depending on the intensity of the rain.
X Turn the combination switch to position
i When the windshield wipers are switched U or V.
on and you brake the vehicle to a stop, the Intermittent wiping starts with selected
wipers operate more slowly. wiping interval.
Intermittent wiping is interrupted when the
Intermittent wiping vehicle is at a standstill and a front door is
! Vehicles with rain sensor: Do not leave opened. This protects persons getting into or
windshield wipers on an intermittent out of the vehicle from being sprayed.
setting when the vehicle is taken to an Intermittent wiping will be continued when all Z
automatic car wash or during windshield doors are closed and
107
Controls in detail
Wipers
Rthe clutch pedal is depressed (vehicles with For information on filling up the washer before attempting to remove any
manual transmission) reservoir, see “Washer system and headlamp blockage.
or cleaning system” (Y page 259). RRemove blockage.
Rthe automatic transmission is in drive For information on cleaning the headlamps RTurn the windshield wipers on again.
position D or reverse gear R (vehicles with with washer fluid, see “Headlamp cleaning
system” (Y page 103). If the windshield wipers fail to function at
automatic transmission)
all with the combination switch in position
or U or V,
Rthe wiper setting is changed using the Problems with wipers
Rset the combination switch to the next
combination switch ! If anything blocks the windshield wipers higher wiper speed
(leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off Rhave the windshield wipers checked at
Single wipe immediately.
the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
X Press the combination switch briefly in For safety reasons, stop the vehicle in a Center
direction of arrow 1 to the resistance safe location, and
point. R- remove the SmartKey from the starter
The windshield wipers wipe one time switch
without washer fluid. or
- turn off the engine by pressing the
Wiping with washer fluid KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and
X Press the combination switch in direction open the driver’s door (with the
of arrow 1 past the resistance point. driver’s door open, starter switch is in
The windshield wipers operate with washer position 0, same as with SmartKey
fluid. removed from starter switch)
- engage the parking brake
i To prevent smears on the windshield or
noisy/chattering wiper blades, wipe with
washer fluid every now and then even when
it is raining.
108
Controls in detail
Power windows
Power windows “Closing when a door window is blocked” between the window pane and the door
section in this chapter for details. frame and trap it there. If there is a risk of
Opening and closing entrapment, release the switch and pull it
The closing of the door windows can be
The door windows are opened and closed immediately halted by releasing the switch to close the window.
electrically. The switches for all door windows or, if the switch was pulled past the
are located on the driver’s door control panel. resistance point and released, by either i You can also open or close the door
The switches for the respective door windows pressing or pulling the respective switch. windows using the SmartKey, see
are located on the front passenger door and If a door window encounters an obstruction “Summer opening feature” (Y page 111)
on the rear doors. that blocks its path in a circumstance and “Convenience closing
i Operating the rear door windows from where you are closing the door windows by feature” (Y page 111).
the rear is not possible when you activate pressing and holding button j on the
i After switching off the ignition or
the override switch (Y page 65). SmartKey or by pressing and holding the
sensor surface (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO) removing the SmartKey from the starter
G Warning! on an outside door handle, the automatic switch, you can operate the door windows
When opening or closing the door windows, reversal function will not operate. until you open the driver’s or front
make sure there is no danger of anyone passenger door. If no door was opened you
Activate the override switch when children can operate the door windows for up to
being harmed by the opening/closing are riding in the back seats of the vehicle.
procedure. 5 minutes.
The children may otherwise injure
The door windows are equipped with the themselves, e.g. by becoming trapped in
express operation and automatic reversal the door window opening.
function. If in express operation mode a
door window encounters an obstruction G Observe Safety notes, see
that blocks its path, the automatic reversal page 59.
function will stop the door window and G Warning!
open it slightly.
Do not keep any part of your body up
The door windows operate differently when against the window pane when opening a
the switch is pressed and held. See the window. The downward motion of the pane
may pull that part of your body down Z
109
Controls in detail
Power windows
X Express operation: Press or pull switch If the door window is blocked again and opens
1 to 4 past the resistance point and slightly:
release. X Immediately after the door window was
The corresponding door window opens or blocked, pull the respective switch
closes completely. upwards until the door window is fully
X Stopping during express operation: closed.
Press or pull the respective switch again.
G Warning!
Pressing and holding the switch to close the
Closing when a door window is blocked door window immediately after it had been
G Warning! blocked two times will cause the door
1 Left front door window window to close without any reversal
Make sure that nobody can become
2 Right front door window function for as long as you hold the switch.
trapped and be seriously or even fatally
3 Right rear door window
injured when closing a door window with
4 Left rear door window greater force or without automatic reversal Synchronizing door windows
function.
X Switch on the ignition. The door windows must be synchronized if
X Opening/Closing: Press or pull and hold If the upward movement of a door window is they cannot be fully closed (express
switch 1 to 4 to the resistance point. blocked during the closing procedure, the operation).
The corresponding door window will move door window will stop and open slightly. Each door window must be synchronized
downwards or upwards until you release However, the door window will exert greater separately.
the switch. force before reversing than when the door X Close all doors.
window is closed in express operation. Please
exercise caution!
X Pull and hold switch 1, 2, 3 or 4
X Immediately after the door window has (Y page 110) until the respective door
stopped because it was blocked, pull the window is closed.
respective switch upwards until the door The door window opens again slightly.
window is fully closed.
110
Controls in detail
Power windows
X Pull and hold the respective switch once tilt/sliding sunroof have reached the When roller sunblinds are retracted:
more immediately until the door window is desired position. X Press and hold button k on the
completely closed. The vehicle unlocks. SmartKey.
X Hold the respective switch for X Release button k on the SmartKey to The door windows and the tilt/sliding panel
approximately 1 second. interrupt the opening procedure. opens after approximately 1 second.
The door window is synchronized. X Release button k on the SmartKey to
Vehicles with panorama roof interrupt the opening procedure.
Summer opening feature When roller sunblinds are extended:
If the weather is warm, you can ventilate the X Press and hold button k on the Convenience closing feature
vehicle before driving off by simultaneously: SmartKey.
When locking the vehicle, you can
Ropening the door windows The vehicle unlocks.
simultaneously close
The door windows open and the roller
Ropening the tilt/sliding sunroof Rthe door windows
sunblinds begin to retract after
Ropening the panorama roof and roller approximately 1 second. Rthe tilt/sliding sunroof
sunblinds X With the door windows opened and the Rthe panorama roof
The summer opening feature can only be roller sunblinds fully retracted, press and
hold button k on the SmartKey again. Afterward, you can extend the roller
activated via the remote control of the
sunblinds of the panorama roof.
SmartKey. The SmartKey must be in close The tilt/sliding panel opens.
proximity to the driver’s outside door handle. X Release button k on the SmartKey to G Warning!
X Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey at the interrupt the opening procedure. When closing the door windows and the
driver’s outside door handle. tilt/sliding sunroof or panorama roof, make
sure there is no danger of anyone being
harmed by the closing procedure.
Vehicles with tilt/sliding sunroof
X Press and hold button k on the
SmartKey until the door windows and the
Z
111
Controls in detail
Power windows
If potential danger exists, proceed as tilt/sliding sunroof or panorama roof are X Vehicles with panorama roof: Touch and
follows: completely closed. hold the sensor surface once more.
RRelease X Release button j on the SmartKey to The roller sunblinds extend.
button j to stop the closing
interrupt the closing procedure. X Release the sensor surface to interrupt the
procedure. To open, press and hold
button k. To continue the closing X Vehicles with panorama roof: Press and extending procedure.
procedure after making sure that there is hold button j on the SmartKey once
no danger of anyone being harmed by the more.
closing procedure, press and hold button The roller sunblinds extend.
j. X Release button j on the SmartKey to
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: interrupt the extending procedure.

RRelease the sensor surface on the
outside door handle to stop the closing
With KEYLESS-GO
procedure. The KEYLESS-GO feature is available on
RImmediately pull on the same outside Canada vehicles only.
door handle and hold firmly. The door The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof or located outside the vehicle within
panorama roof will open for as long as the approximately 3 ft (1 m) of a door.
door handle is held but the door not X Close all doors.
opened. X Touch and hold the sensor surface on an
outside door handle (Y page 77) until the
With SmartKey door windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof
or panorama roof are completely closed.
The SmartKey must be in close proximity to
the driver’s outside door handle. i Make sure you are only touching the
X Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey at the sensor surface.
driver’s outside door handle. X Release the sensor surface to interrupt the
X Press and hold button j on the closing procedure.
SmartKey until the door windows and the
112
Controls in detail
Driving and parking

Driving and parking Starting the engine Manual transmission
Safety notes G Warning!
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
G Warning!
your health. All exhaust gas contains
Make sure absolutely no objects are carbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can
obstructing the pedals’ range of movement. cause unconsciousness and possible
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all death.
obstacles. If there are any floormats or
Do not run the engine in confined areas
carpets in the footwell, make sure the
(such as a garage) which are not properly
pedals still have sufficient clearance.
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
During sudden driving or braking fumes are entering the vehicle while
maneuvers the objects could get caught driving, have the cause determined and Gearshift pattern for manual transmission
between the pedals. You could then no corrected immediately. If you must drive Â Reverse gear
longer brake or accelerate. This could lead under these conditions, drive only with at
to accidents and injury. $ to * Forward gears
least one window fully open at all times.
For more information, see “Manual
G Warning! transmission” (Y page 119).
With the engine not running, there is no X Depress the brake pedal.
power assistance for the brake and
X Make sure the manual transmission is in
steering systems. In this case, it is
the neutral position (no gear selected).
important to keep in mind that a
X Fully depress the clutch pedal.
considerably higher degree of effort is
necessary to brake and steer the vehicle. Otherwise the engine cannot be started
Adapt your driving accordingly. due to the integrated safety interlock.
X Do not depress the accelerator pedal.
X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 3 (Y page 84) and hold until the
engine starts. Z
113
Controls in detail
Driving and parking

Automatic transmission With KEYLESS-GO
The KEYLESS-GO feature is available on
Canada vehicles only.
G Warning!
As long as the SmartKey is in your vehicle,
the vehicle can be started. Therefore, never
leave children unattended in the vehicle, as
they could otherwise accidentally start the
engine.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Do KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission not leave children unattended in the X Make sure the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
Á Park position with gear selector lever lock vehicle, or with access to an unlocked button is inserted in the starter switch.
vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a
Â Reverse gear
vehicle could result in an accident and/or i If you wish to start the engine with the
À Neutral position serious personal injury. SmartKey instead of the KEYLESS-GO
¿ Drive position function, remove the KEYLESS-GO start/
You can start your vehicle without the stop button from the starter switch and
For more information, see “Automatic SmartKey in the starter switch using the
transmission” (Y page 121). proceed as described in “With
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in the starter SmartKey” (Y page 114).
X Make sure the automatic transmission is in switch.
park position P. X Depress the brake pedal during the starting
The SmartKey must be located in the vehicle.
procedure.
With SmartKey X Do not depress the accelerator pedal.
X Do not depress the accelerator pedal.
X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to once.
position 3 (Y page 84) and release it. The engine starts automatically.
The engine starts automatically.
114
Controls in detail
Driving and parking

Starting difficulties If the engine does not start after several Driving off
starting attempts:
! Remember that extended starting
X
G Warning!
attempts can drain the battery. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or call Roadside Assistance. On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
The engine does not start. You can hear in order to obtain braking action. This could
the starter. The engine does not start. You cannot result in drive wheel slip and reduced
hear the starter. vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
There could be a malfunction in the engine
The battery may not be sufficiently charged. prevent this type of loss of control.
electronics or in the fuel supply system.
Carry out the following steps: X Get a jump start (Y page 366).
! Do not run cold engine at high engine
X If you are starting the engine with the If the engine will not start despite a jump speeds. Running a cold engine at high
SmartKey: Turn the SmartKey in the starter start: engine speeds may shorten the service life
switch to position 0 and repeat the starting X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz of the engine. This is not covered by the
procedure. Center or call Roadside Assistance. Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
X If you are starting the engine with KEYLESS- C 63 AMG: At engine temperatures below
The starter has been exposed to excessive
GO: Close any doors that may be open to temperatures. 68‡ (20†), the engine’s maximum speed
allow for better detection of the SmartKey. is restricted in order to protect it from
X Let the starter cool for about 2 minutes.
or damage. Avoid driving your vehicle at full
X Repeat the starting procedure. speed when the engine is cold to prevent
X Remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button from the starter switch. If the engine does not start after several premature engine wear and/or diminished
starting attempts: comfort.
X Start the engine with the SmartKey as radio
signals from another source may be X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz ! If an acoustic warning sounds and the
interfering with the KEYLESS-GO function. Center or call Roadside Assistance. message Release Parking Brake
X Repeat the starting procedure. appears in the multifunction display when
driving off, you have forgotten to release
the parking brake.
Release the parking brake.
Z
115
Controls in detail
Driving and parking

! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may X Shift the manual transmission into 1st gear when your right foot is firmly on the brake
cause serious damage to the drivetrain or reverse gear R. pedal.
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz X Release the brake pedal.
Limited Warranty. X If engaged, release the parking brake. ! Only shift the automatic transmission into
X Simultaneously slowly release the clutch reverse gear R or park position P when the
! Simultaneously depressing the
pedal and carefully depress the accelerator vehicle is stopped. Otherwise the
accelerator pedal and applying the brakes automatic transmission could be damaged.
reduces engine performance and causes pedal.
premature brake and drivetrain wear which ! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds. X Depress the brake pedal.
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz This may result in serious engine damage The gear selector lever lock is released.
Limited Warranty. that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz X Shift the automatic transmission into drive
Limited Warranty. position D or reverse gear R.
i Once the vehicle is in motion, the
automatic central locking system engages Shift gear in a timely manner.
i Shifting the automatic transmission out of
and the locking knobs in the doors move For more information on driving, see “Driving park position P is only possible with the
down. instructions” (Y page 286). brake pedal depressed.
The automatic door lock feature can be Only depressing the brake pedal releases
deactivated (Y page 150). Automatic transmission the gear selector lever lock.
Manual transmission G Warning! X Wait for the gear selection process to

It is dangerous to shift the automatic complete before setting the vehicle in
X Depress the brake pedal. transmission out of park position P or motion.
X Fully depress the clutch pedal. neutral position N if the engine speed is X Release the brake pedal.
higher than idle speed. If your foot is not
! Only shift the manual transmission into X If engaged, release the parking brake.
firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
reverse gear R when the vehicle is stopped. accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.
Otherwise the manual transmission could You could lose control of the vehicle and hit After a cold start, the automatic transmission
be damaged. someone or something. Only shift into gear shifts at a higher engine revolution. This
when the engine is idling normally and allows the catalytic converter to reach its
operating temperature earlier.
116
Controls in detail
Driving and parking

For more information on driving, see “Driving In case of accident Parking
instructions” (Y page 286).
If the vehicle is leaking fuel: G Warning!
X Do not start the engine under any Do not park this vehicle in areas where
Problems while driving circumstances. combustible materials such as grass, hay
The engine runs erratically and misfires X Exit the vehicle at a safe distance from the or leaves can come into contact with the
roadway. hot exhaust system, as these materials
RAn ignition cable may be damaged. could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
X Notify local fire and/or police authorities.
RThe engine electronics may not be To reduce the risk of serious personal
If the extent of the damage cannot be
operating properly. injury, or damage to the vehicle or the
determined:
RUnburned gasoline may have entered the vehicle drivetrain, as a result of vehicle
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz movement, always do the following before
catalytic converter and damaged it.
Center or call Roadside Assistance. turning off the engine and leaving the
X Give very little gas. If no damage on major assemblies, fuel vehicle:
X Have the problem checked at an authorized system, and engine mount can be RKeep right foot on the brake pedal.
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. determined: REngage the parking brake.
X Start the engine in the usual manner. RManual transmission: Shift the manual
The coolant temperature is above transmission into 1st gear or reverse
248‡ (120†) gear R.
The coolant is too hot and is no longer cooling RAutomatic transmission: Shift the
the engine. automatic transmission into park
X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon position P.
as possible. RSlowly release the brake pedal.
X Turn off the engine immediately.
RWhen parked on an incline, always turn
X Allow the engine and coolant to cool off.
the front wheels towards the road curb.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant if
necessary (Y page 258). Z
117
Controls in detail
Driving and parking

RTurn the SmartKey in the starter switch leave children unattended in the vehicle, or lamp ; (USA only) or 3 (Canada
to position 0 and remove the SmartKey with access to an unlocked vehicle. only) in the instrument cluster goes out.
from the starter switch, or press the Children could release the parking brake X Engaging: Step firmly on parking brake
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button. and/or shift the automatic transmission pedal 2.
RTake the SmartKey with you and lock the out of park position P (manual When the engine is running, the brake
vehicle when leaving. transmission: shift into the neutral warning lamp ; (USA only) or 3
position), either of which could result in an (Canada only) in the instrument cluster
G Warning! accident and/or serious personal injury. comes on.
Manual transmission:
Wait until the vehicle is stationary before
Turning off the engine
removing the SmartKey from the starter
switch. The vehicle cannot be steered when G Warning!
the SmartKey is removed from the starter Do not turn off the engine before the vehicle
switch. has come to a complete stop. With the
engine not running, there is no power
Parking brake assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
G Warning! in mind that a considerably higher degree
Engaging the parking brake while the of effort is necessary to brake and steer the
vehicle is in motion can cause the rear 1 Release handle vehicle.
wheels to lock up. You could lose control of 2 Parking brake pedal
the vehicle and cause an accident. In X Manual transmission: Shift the manual
addition, the vehicle’s brake lights do not X Releasing: Pull on release handle 1. transmission into 1st gear or reverse gear
light up when the parking brake is engaged. When the ignition is switched on or the R.
engine is running, the brake warning X Automatic transmission: Shift the
G Warning!
automatic transmission into park position
When leaving the vehicle, always remove P.
the SmartKey from the starter switch, take
it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not X Engage the parking brake.
118
Controls in detail
Manual transmission
i Always engage the parking brake in If an acoustic warning sounds, you have tried Manual transmission
addition to shifting the automatic to turn off the engine with the KEYLESS-GO
transmission into park position P (manual start/stop button while the automatic Introduction
transmission: shifting into 1st gear or transmission was not in park position P. For information on driving with a manual
reverse gear R). Read and observe messages that may appear transmission, see “Driving and
When parked on an incline, also turn the in the multifunction display (Y page 313). parking” (Y page 113).
front wheels towards the road curb. i In an emergency you can turn off the G Warning!
engine while driving by pressing and Make sure absolutely no objects are
With SmartKey holding the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button obstructing the pedals’ range of movement.
X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to for approximately 3 seconds. Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all
position 0. obstacles. If there are any floormats or
If you have started the engine with the
carpets in the footwell, make sure the
X Remove the SmartKey from the starter KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and cannot
switch. turn it off as described above:
The immobilizer is activated. During sudden driving or braking
X Remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop maneuvers the objects could get caught
Automatic transmission: The SmartKey can button from the starter switch. between the pedals. You could then no
only be removed from the starter switch with X Insert the SmartKey into the starter switch. longer brake or accelerate. This could lead
the automatic transmission in park position The engine turns off. The starter switch is to accidents and injury.
P. in position 0 (Y page 84).
G Warning!
With KEYLESS-GO When working on the vehicle, engage the
The KEYLESS-GO feature is available on parking brake and shift the manual
Canada vehicles only. transmission into 1st gear or reverse gear
R. Otherwise the vehicle could roll away
With the driver’s door closed, the starter which could result in an accident and/or
switch is now in position 1. With the driver’s serious personal injury.
door opened, the starter switch is set to
position 0, same as the SmartKey removed ! Allow engine to warm up under low load Z
from the starter switch (Y page 84). use. Do not place full load on the engine
119
Controls in detail
Manual transmission
until the operating temperature has been G Warning! Shifting into reverse gear R
reached. On slippery road surfaces, never downshift ! Only shift the manual transmission into
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an in order to obtain braking action. This could reverse gear R when the vehicle is stopped.
extended period when driving off on result in drive wheel slip and reduced Otherwise the manual transmission could
slippery road surfaces. vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not be damaged.
This may cause serious damage to the prevent this type of loss of control.
engine and the drivetrain which is not X Stop the vehicle completely.
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited ! When you are shifting the manual X Fully depress the clutch pedal.
Warranty. tranmission into the 5th or 6th gear, make X Shift the manual transmission into the
sure you move the gearshift lever to the neutral position (no gear selected).
right. Otherwise, you could accidentally X Move the gearshift lever to the left until you
Gearshift lever
shift into the 3rd or 4th gear and damage feel a certain resistance.
the manual transmission.
X Push the gearshift lever past this resistance
Downshifting gears leading to overrevving and hold.
the engine can result in engine damge that
X Move the gearshift lever forward to select
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
reverse gear R.
Limited Warranty.
Never hold the vehicle stopped on a hill by
using the clutch pedal. The clutch may be
damaged which is not covered by the
! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds.

Gearshift pattern for manual transmission
This may result in serious engine damage
Â Reverse gear
that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
$ to * Forward gears Limited Warranty.
Shift gear in a timely manner.
120
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Automatic transmission covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited G Warning!
Warranty. It is dangerous to shift the automatic
Introduction
transmission out of park position P or
i During the brief warm-up, transmission
For information on driving with an automatic neutral position N if the engine speed is
transmission, see “Driving and upshifting is delayed. This allows the
higher than idle speed. If your foot is not
parking” (Y page 113). catalytic converter to heat up more quickly
firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
to operating temperature.
G Warning! accelerate quickly forward or in reverse.
Make sure absolutely no objects are You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
obstructing the pedals’ range of movement. Gear selector lever someone or something. Only shift into gear
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all when the engine is idling normally and
obstacles. If there are any floormats or when your right foot is firmly on the brake
carpets in the footwell, make sure the pedal.
! Only shift the automatic transmission into
During sudden driving or braking
reverse gear R or park position P when the
maneuvers the objects could get caught
vehicle is stopped. Otherwise the
between the pedals. You could then no
automatic transmission could be damaged.
longer brake or accelerate. This could lead
to accidents and injury. i Shifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P is only possible with the
! Allow engine to warm up under low load brake pedal depressed.
Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission
use. Do not place full load on the engine
Á Park position with gear selector lever lock Only depressing the brake pedal releases
until the operating temperature has been
Â Reverse gear the gear selector lever lock.
reached.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an À Neutral position i The current gear selector lever position
extended period when driving off on ¿ Drive position corresponds with the current transmission
slippery road surfaces. position.
This may cause serious damage to the
engine and the drivetrain which is not Z
121
Controls in detail
The current transmission position P, R, N, With drive position D selected, you can Transmission positions
or D appears in the multifunction display influence transmission shifting by:
(Y page 122). The current transmission position appears in
Rlimiting the gear range the multifunction display.
There are additional indicators on the cover Rextending the gear range
of the shifting gate showing the current gear
Rchanging the gears manually (C 63 AMG
selector lever position.
only)
The indicators come on when you insert the
SmartKey into the starter switch, and go out C 63 AMG:
when you remove the SmartKey from the Double-clutching is active when downshifting
starter switch. in all program modes. Double-clutching
reduces load-alteration effects and supports
sporty driving. The degree to which you
Shifting procedure perceive double-clutching acoustically varies
The automatic transmission selects individual depending on the selected program mode.
gears automatically, depending on: 1 Transmission position indicator
Rthe selected gear range (Y page 124)
Rthe selected program mode:

C/S (Y page 124)
or
M (C 63 AMG only) (Y page 127)
Rthe position of the accelerator pedal
Rthe vehicle speed
122
Controls in detail
Effect Effect Effect
ì Park position Shift the automatic transmission ë Neutral position
into reverse gear R only when the
Shift the automatic transmission No power is transmitted from the
vehicle is stopped.
into park position P only when the engine to the drive axle. When the
vehicle is stopped. The park brakes are released, the vehicle
position is not intended to serve can be moved freely (pushed or
as a brake when the vehicle is towed).
parked. Rather, the driver should To avoid damage to the
always engage the parking brake transmission, never shift the
in addition to shifting the automatic transmission into
automatic transmission into park neutral position N while driving.
position P to secure the vehicle.
Exception: If the ESP® is
The SmartKey can only be deactivated or malfunctioning,
removed from the starter switch shift the automatic transmission
with the gear selector lever in park into neutral position N if the
position P. With the SmartKey vehicle is in danger of skidding.
removed from the starter switch,
the gear selector lever is locked in ! Coasting the vehicle, or
park position P. driving for any other reason with
the automatic transmission in
If the vehicle’s electrical system is
neutral position N can result in
malfunctioning, the gear selector
transmission damage that is not
lever could remain locked in park
covered by the Mercedes-Benz
position P. To unlock the gear
Limited Warranty.
selector lever manually, see
“Manually unlocking the gear ê Drive position
selector lever” (Y page 352).
í Reverse gear Z
123
Controls in detail
Effect could result in an accident and/or serious Effect
The automatic transmission shifts personal injury.
è With this selection you can use the
automatically. All forward gears braking effect of the engine.
are available. Gear ranges
ç Allows the use of engine’s braking
With the automatic transmission in drive power when driving
Driving tips position D and driving in automatic program Ron steep downgrades
mode C or S, you can limit or extend the gear
Kickdown range, see “One-touch
Rin mountainous regions
Use the kickdown when you want maximum gearshifting” (Y page 125). Runder extreme operating
acceleration. The current gear range appears in the conditions
X Fully depress the accelerator pedal. multifunction display.
æ For maximum use of engine’s
Depending on the engine speed the braking effect on very steep or
automatic transmission shifts into a lower lengthy downgrades.
gear.
Canada vehicles and AMG vehicles only:
Automatic shift program
X Depress the accelerator pedal past the
point of resistance to use the kickdown.
Working on the vehicle

G Warning!
When working on the vehicle, engage the 1 Gear range indicator
parking brake and shift the automatic
transmission into park position P.
Otherwise the vehicle could roll away which
Program mode selector switch
124
Controls in detail
C Comfort For comfort driving The current program mode appears in the Selecting program mode C means:
multifunction display. RThe vehicle starts out more gentle, both
S Sport For standard driving forward and reverse, except when driving
off with full throttle.
RTraction and driving stability are improved
on icy roads.
RUpshifts occur earlier even when you give
more gas. The engine then operates at
lower revolutions and the wheels are less
likely to spin.
Selecting program mode S means that
upshifts occur later.
1 Program mode indicator
You should only change the program mode
Program mode selector switch on C 63 AMG when the automatic transmission is in park One-touch gearshifting
position P. With the automatic transmission in drive
C Comfort For standard driving
i The last selected program mode (C or S) position D and driving in automatic program
S Sport For sporty driving is switched on when the engine is mode C or S, you can limit or extend the gear
restarted. range using the gear selector lever or the
M Manual For manual gearshifting steering wheel gearshift contol.
(Y page 127) X Press the program mode selector switch C 63 AMG: For information on using the gear
repeatedly until the letter of the desired selector lever or the steering wheel gearshift
program mode appears in the multifunction control in manual program mode M, see
display. “Manual shift program” (Y page 127).
125
Controls in detail
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not i If you press on the accelerator pedal
prevent this type of loss of control. when the engine has reached the
revolution limit of the current gear range,
X Briefly press the gear selector lever to the the automatic transmission will upshift
left in the D- direction. beyond any gear range limit selected.
or
X Briefly pull left gearshift control 1. Canceling gear range limit
The automatic transmission will shift into X Press and hold the gear selector lever to
the next lower gear as permitted by the the right in the D+ direction until the gear
shift program. This action simultaneously range indicator disappears from the
Steering wheel gearshift control (example limits the gear range of the automatic multifunction display.
illustration) transmission. or
1 Limiting gear range
i To avoid overrevving the engine when X Pull and hold right gearshift control 2 until
Downshift (in manual program mode M)
downshifting, the automatic transmission the gear range indicator disappears from
2 Extending gear range the multifunction display.
will not shift into a lower gear if the engine’s
Upshift (in manual program mode M) The automatic transmission will shift from
maximum speed would be exceeded.
the current gear range directly into drive
i You cannot shift with the steering wheel
Extending gear range position D.
gearshift control when the automatic
transmission is in park position P, neutral X Briefly press the gear selector lever to the
position N, or reverse gear R. right in the D+ direction.
Shifting into optimal gear range
or X Press and hold the gear selector lever to
Limiting gear range X Briefly pull right gearshift control 2. the left in the D- direction.
G Warning! The automatic transmission will shift into or
the next higher gear as permitted by the X Pull and hold left gearshift control 1.
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could shift program. This action simultaneously The automatic transmission will select the
result in drive wheel slip and reduced extends the gear range of the automatic gear range suited for optimal acceleration
transmission.
126
Controls in detail
and deceleration automatically. This will C Comfort For standard driving automatic program mode (C or S) when the
involve shifting down one or more gears. engine is restarted.
S Sport For sporty driving
Upshifting
Manual shift program M Manual For manual gearshifting
! In manual program mode M, the
The manual shift program is available on
The current program mode appears in the automatic transmission will not upshift,
C 63 AMG only.
multifunction display (Y page 125). even if the engine has reached its
Manual program mode M differs with regard overrevving range. Shift up into the next
to spontaneity, response time, and shifting For information on automatic program mode
(C or S), see “Automatic shift gear before the engine has reached its
smoothness from automatic program mode overrevving range. Make absolutely certain
S. program” (Y page 124) and “One-touch
gearshifting” (Y page 125). that the engine speed does not reach the
In manual program mode M, system- red marking on the tachometer. Otherwise
controlled automatic gearshifting is switched the engine could be damaged which is not
Activating manual shift program
off. You need to change the gears by manually covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
upshifting or downshifting using the gear X Press the program mode selector switch Warranty.
selector lever or the steering wheel gearshift repeatedly until M appears in the
X Briefly press the gear selector lever to the
control. multifunction display.
The automatic transmission switches to right in the D+ direction.
manual program mode M. Automatic or
shifting is switched off. The gear range is X Briefly pull right gearshift control 2
not limited. (Y page 126).
You can change the gears manually with drive The automatic transmission shifts into the
position D selected. You can upshift or next higher gear.
downshift through the gears in succession.
i Manual program mode M will not be
stored. When the engine is turned off with
manual program mode M selected, the
automatic transmission will go to Z
Program mode selector switch
127
Controls in detail
Upshift indicator Downshifting Kickdown
G Warning! Using the kickdown when driving in manual
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift program mode M is not possible.
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced Deactivating manual shift program
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not X Press the program mode selector switch
prevent this type of loss of control. repeatedly until C or S appears in the
multifunction display.
X Briefly press the gear selector lever to the
left in the D- direction. or
XRestart the engine.
or
The automatic transmission will go to
1 Current gear X Briefly pull left gearshift control 1 automatic program mode (C or S).
2 Upshift indicator (Y page 126).
Manual program mode M is not stored.
The automatic transmission shifts into the
In manual program mode M, upshift indicator
next lower gear.
2 in the multifunction display advises you to
upshift before the engine reaches the Emergency operation (limp-home
i For maximum acceleration, press and
overspeed range. Thus you can drive at the mode)
hold the gear selector lever to the left in the
maximum engine speed for each gear without D- direction or pull and hold the left If vehicle acceleration becomes less
overrevving the engine. gearshift control. Depending on the engine responsive or sluggish or the automatic
X Shift the automatic transmission from speed the automatic transmission selects transmission no longer shifts, the automatic
current gear 1 into the next higher gear. the optimal gear for maximum transmission is most likely operating in limp-
The fuel supply will otherwise be acceleration. home (emergency operation) mode. In this
interrupted to prevent the engine from mode only second gear and reverse gear R
overrevving. i When you brake or stop, the automatic can be selected.
transmission shifts down into a gear from X Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
which you can easily accelerate or take off.
X Shift the automatic transmission into park
position P.
128
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
X Turn off the engine. Instrument cluster Activating the instrument cluster
X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting.
Introduction The instrument cluster is activated when you
X Restart the engine.
Ropen the driver’s door
X Shift the automatic transmission into drive For a full view illustration of the instrument
position D (for second gear) or reverse gear cluster, see “Instrument Rswitch on the ignition
R. cluster” (Y page 30). Rswitch on the exterior lamps
X Have the automatic transmission checked G Warning!
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as No messages will be displayed if either the
soon as possible. instrument cluster or the multifunction Adjusting the instrument cluster
display is inoperative. illumination
As a result, you will not be able to see
information about your driving conditions,
such as speed or outside temperature,
warning/indicator lamps, malfunction/
warning messages or the failure of any
systems. Driving characteristics may be
impaired.
If you must continue to drive, please do so
with added caution. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
The language setting for the multifunction 1 Dimmer
display can be changed with the Audio system
(Y page 166) or with the COMAND system. i The instrument cluster illumination is
Vehicles with COMAND system: Refer to dimmed or brightened automatically to suit
separate operating instructions. ambient light conditions.
The instrument cluster illumination will also
be adjusted automatically when you switch
Z
on the vehicle’s exterior lamps.
129
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
X To brighten illumination: Turn dimmer ! Excessive coolant temperature triggers a Outside temperature indicator
1 clockwise. warning in the multifunction display.
The outside temperature indicator is
X To dim illumination: Turn dimmer 1 The engine should not be operated with a displayed in the multifunction display
counterclockwise. coolant temperature above 248‡ (120†), (Y page 133).
i.e. in the red zone of the coolant
temperature gauge. Doing so may cause G Warning!
Coolant temperature gauge serious engine damage which is not The outside temperature indicator is not
The coolant temperature gauge is located on covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited designed to serve as an ice-warning device
the left side in the instrument cluster Warranty. and is therefore unsuitable for that
(Y page 30). purpose.
Indicated temperatures just above the
G Warning! Tachometer
freezing point do not guarantee that the
Driving when your engine is overheated can The red marking on the tachometer road surface is free of ice. The road may still
cause some fluids which may have leaked (Y page 30) denotes excessive engine speed. be icy, especially in wooded areas or on
into the engine compartment to catch fire. bridges.
You could be seriously burned. ! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds,
as it may result in serious engine damage
Steam from an overheated engine can
that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Fuel gauge
cause serious burns which can occur just
Limited Warranty.
by opening the engine hood. Stay away The fuel gauge is on the left-hand side of the
from the engine if you see or hear steam To help protect the engine, the fuel supply is
instrument cluster (Y page 30). Once the fuel
coming from it. interrupted if the engine is operated within
level has fallen below the reserve mark, the
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away the red marking.
yellow fuel tank reserve warning lamp 4
from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get for the fuel reserve comes on.
out of the vehicle and do not stand near the
vehicle until the engine has cooled down.
During severe operating conditions, e.g. stop-
and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may
rise close to 248‡ (120†), i.e close to the
red zone of the temperature gauge.
130
Controls in detail
Control system
Control system The control system relays information to the 1 Multifunction display
Introduction 2 Press button
The control system is activated as soon as the Multifunction steering wheel s to take a call
starter switch is in position 2 (Y page 84). to dial5
The control system enables you to call up The displays in the multifunction display and
the settings in the control system are to redial5
information about your vehicle and to change
vehicle settings. controlled by the buttons on the multifunction t to end a call
steering wheel. to reject an incoming call
For example, you can use the control system
to find out when your vehicle is next due for F to mute
maintenance service, to call up statistical
data on your vehicle, and much more. Press button
æ to set the volume
G Warning!
ç to operate the RACETIMER6
A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
conditions must always be his/her primary
3 Press button
focus when driving.
For your safety and the safety of others, ! to activate the Voice Control
selecting features through the System7
multifunction steering wheel should only be
4 Press button briefly
done by the driver when traffic and road
conditions permit it to be done safely. L to cancel the Voice Control
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph System, back, confirm
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is messages7
covering a distance of 44 feet
Press and hold button
(approximately 14 m) every second.
L to select the standard display
Z
131
Controls in detail
Control system
5 Press button Press and hold button It is helpful to think of the menus, and the
functions within each menu, as being
& to call up line for menus and to $ within Audio menu to select a arranged in a circular pattern.
( select menus % track or scene with quick
In the Settings menu, instead of functions,
search or to select previous or you will find a number of submenus for calling
Press button briefly next station in station list or up and changing settings. For instructions on
$ to select submenu or scroll wave band using these submenus, see “Settings
% through lists within Tel menu to start the menu” (Y page 145).
within Audio menu to select quick search in the phone book The number of menus available in the system
previous or next track, scene or depends on which optional equipment is
stored station Press button
installed in your vehicle.
within Tel menu to switch to # to confirm selection or
the phone book and select a messages Using the control system
name or number
X To select a menu: Press button ( or
Depending on the selected menu, pressing
&.
the buttons on the multifunction steering
X To select a submenu: Press button %
wheel will alter what appears in the
multifunction display. or $.
The information available in the multifunction X To go to the next higher menu level:
display is arranged in menus and Press button L.
accompanying functions and submenus. X To select the standard display: Press
The individual functions are then found within button L repeatedly until the standard
the relevant menu (radio or CD operations
under Audio, for example). These functions
serve to call up relevant information or to
customize the settings for your vehicle.
6 AMG vehicles only.

132
Controls in detail
Control system
display featuring the odometer and Multifunction display 4 Automatic transmission program mode
speedometer appears. indicator
or 5 Transmission position/gear range
X Press and hold button L until the indicator (automatic transmission)
standard display featuring the odometer Additional speedometer (manual
and speedometer appears. transmission)
X To confirm selection: Press button #. 6 Digital clock
X To confirm display message: Press Settings, functions, submenus as well as any
button # or L. malfunctions appear in the text field.
The control system saves certain display For more information on menus displayed in
messages. Calling up display messages the multifunction display, see “Menus and
(Y page 144). 1 Text field submenus” (Y page 134).
For information about warning and 2 Line for main menus
malfunction messages appearing in the
3 Outside temperature indicator
multifunction display (Y page 305).
133
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus and submenus
134
Controls in detail
Control system
RDistance to empty and current fuel or
Function
consumption (Y page 136) X Press and hold button L until the
1 Trip menu (Y page 135) RDigital Speedometer (Y page 137) standard display appears.
2 AMG menu (Y page 137)
Standard display Fuel consumption statistics since start
3 Navi menu (Y page 140)
In the standard display, the trip odometer and X Press ( or & to select the Trip
4 Audio menu (Y page 140) the main odometer appear in the menu.
5 Tel menu (Y page 142) multifunction display. X Press % or $ to select From
Start.
6 Service menu (Y page 144)
7 Settings menu (Y page 145)
Trip menu
In the Trip menu, you can show an additional 1 Trip odometer
display for the speedometer and call up or 2 Main odometer
reset your vehicle’s statistical data. 1 Distance driven since start
The following information is available: If another display appears instead of the 2 Time elapsed since start
standard display: 3 Average speed since start
RStandard display (Y page 135)
X Press ( or & to select the Trip 4 Average fuel consumption since start
RFuel consumption statistics since start menu.
(Y page 135) All statistics stored since the last engine start
or will be reset approximately 4 hours after the
RFuel consumption statistics since last reset X Press button L repeatedly until the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to
(Y page 136) standard display appears. position 0 or removed from the starter switch.
RResetting values (Y page 136)
Z
135
Controls in detail
Control system
Resetting will not occur if you turn the Resetting values Distance to empty and current fuel
SmartKey back to position 1 or 2 within this consumption
You can reset the values for the following
time period.
functions: X Press ( or & to select the Trip
RTrip odometer menu.
Fuel consumption statistics since last
X Press % or $ to select the calculated
reset RFuel consumption statistics since start
remaining driving range and current fuel
X Press ( or & to select the Trip RFuel consumption statistics since last reset
consumption display.
menu. X Press ( or & to select the Trip The calculated remaining driving range
X Press % or $ to select Since based on the current fuel tank level and the
menu.
Reset. X Press % or $ to select the function
current driving style appears in the
you wish to reset.
If only very little fuel is left in the tank, a
X Press #.
vehicle at the fuel pump ¿ appears
instead of the calculated remaining driving
range.
1 Distance driven since last reset

2 Time elapsed since last reset
3 Average speed since last reset Example illustration: Reset fuel consumption
4 Average fuel consumption since last reset statistics since start
X Press % to select Yes. 1 Calculated remaining driving range
X Press # to confirm.
i The fuel consumption statistics reset
automatically to 0 after 99 999 miles or
9 999 hours, whichever occurs first.
136
Controls in detail
Control system
Digital speedometer AMG menu The upshift instruction UP 3 indicates that
X
the engine has reached the overrevving
Press ( or & to select the Trip This function is only available in AMG
range. The upshift instruction UP blocks other
menu. vehicles.
messages in the multifunction display until
X Press % or $ to select the digital X Press button ( or & to select the you have shifted up.
speedometer. AMG menu. Use buttons % or $ to select the
following functions in the AMG menu:
RSETUP (Y page 137)
RRACETIMER (Y page 138)

ROverall analysis (Y page 139)
RLap analysis (Y page 139)
Example illustration for upshift indicator
1 Upshift indicator8 SETUP
2 Digital speedometer X Press button ( or & to select the
The shift indicator is meant as a AMG menu.
1 Digital speedometer
recommendation for an economical driving X Press $ to select SETUP.
2 Gear indicator
style. Always observe traffic conditions, as
your driving style is determined in the first 3 Upshift indicator
instance by the traffic situation. 4 Engine oil temperature indicator
5 Coolant temperature indicator
The engine oil temperature flashes if the
engine oil temperature has not yet reached
176‡ (80†). During this time, avoid driving
at full engine speed.
Z
8 Vehicles with manual transmission only
137
Controls in detail
Control system
X Press button ( or & to select the X Starting: Press button æ.
AMG menu. X Displaying intermediate time: Press
X Press button $ repeatedly until the button ç while the timer is running.
RACETIMER appears in the multifunction The intermediate time is shown for
display. 5 seconds.
X Stopping: Press button æ.
When you stop the vehicle and turn the

SmartKey to position 1 (Y page 84), the
RACETIMER stops timing. Timing is resumed
when you switch the ignition back on or
1 Automatic transmission program mode restart the engine and then press the æ
indicator button.
2 ESP mode indicator
Saving lap time and starting a new lap
RACETIMER You can save up to 16 laps.
X Press button ç while the timer is
G Warning! 1 Digital speedometer running.
The RACETIMER feature is only for use on 2 Gear indicator The intermediate time will be shown for
roads and in conditions where high speed 3 RACETIMER 5 seconds.
driving is permitted. Racing on public roads 4 Lap number X Press button ç within 5 seconds.
is prohibited under all circumstances and The intermediate time shown will be saved
the driver is and must always remain You can start the RACETIMER when the
engine is running or the starter switch is in as a lap time.
responsible for following posted speed
position 2 (Y page 84). The RACETIMER begins timing the new lap.
limits.
While the RACETIMER is being displayed, you The new lap begins to be timed as soon as
The RACETIMER allows you to time and save cannot adjust the audio volume using buttons the intermediate time is called up.
driving stretches. æ or ç.
138
Controls in detail
Control system
X Press button æ while the timer is X Press button ( or & to select the
running. AMG menu.
The timer stops. X Press button $ repeatedly until the
X Press #. overall analysis appears in the
The reset menu appears in the multifunction display.
1 Gear indicator
2 RACETIMER
3 Best lap time
4 Lap number
Resetting current lap

1 Overall analysis of RACETIMER
X Press button æ while the timer is
X Press % to select Yes and confirm with 2 Overall driving time
running.
The timer stops. #. 3 Average speed
X Press button ç.
The saved laps are deleted. 4 Overall distance driven
The lap time is reset to “0”. 5 Maximum speed
Overall analysis
Deleting all laps Lap analysis
This function is only available if you have
It is not possible to delete a single saved lap. saved at least one lap and have stopped the This function is only available if you have
RACETIMER. saved at least two laps and have stopped the
RACETIMER.
Z
139
Controls in detail
Control system
X Press button ( or & to select the Navi menu Audio menu
AMG menu.
The Navi menu contains the functions The functions in the Audio menu operate the
X Press button $ repeatedly until the lap
needed to operate your navigation system. audio equipment which you have currently
analysis appears in the multifunction switched on.
X Press ( or & to select the Navi
display.
menu. The following functions are available:
Each lap is shown in its own submenu. The
The message shown in the multifunction RSelecting radio station (Y page 140)
fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol
display depends on the status of the ROperating
1. audio devices/audio media
navigation system:
(Y page 141)
RWith the COMAND system switched off,
the message Navi Off appears in the
ROperating video DVD (Y page 141)
multifunction display. If the audio system or the COMAND system
RWith the COMAND system switched on is currently switched off, the message Audio
but route guidance not activated, the Off appears in the multifunction display.
direction of travel and, if applicable, the X To adjust the volume: Press æ or
name of the street currently traveled on ç on the multifunction steering wheel.
appear in the multifunction display.
RWith the COMAND system switched on Selecting radio station
and route guidance activated, the
1 Lap number direction of travel and maneuver The SIRIUS Satellite Radio is treated as a
2 Lap time instructions appear in the multifunction radio application.
3 Average speed during lap display. Additional optional satellite radio equipment
and a subscription to satellite radio service
4 Lap length Please refer to seperate COMAND system provider are required for satellite radio
5 Maximum speed during lap operating instructions for instructions on how operation. Contact an authorized Mercedes-
to activate the route guidance system. Benz Center for details and availability for
X Press button % or $ to see other lap
analyses. your vehicle.
140
Controls in detail
Control system
For more information on satellite radio X Select next or previous stored station:
operation, see “Satellite Press button % or $ briefly to select
radio” (Y page 172). a stored station.
Vehicles with COMAND system: X Select next or previous station in wave
Refer to separate COMAND system operating band: Press and hold button % or
instructions. $ to select a station.
X Switch on the audio system (Y page 162) You can only store new stations using the Example illustration
and select radio mode. corresponding feature on the radio 1 Disc number
Vehicles with COMAND system: (Y page 167).
2 Current track
Refer to separate COMAND system Vehicles with COMAND system:
operating instructions. Refer to separate COMAND system operating X Selecting previous or next track: Press
X Press ( or & to select the Audio instructions. button % or $ briefly.
menu. You can also operate the radio in the usual X Selecting a track from the track list
The currently tuned station appears in the manner. (quick search): Press and hold button
multifunction display. % or $.
Operating audio devices/audio media The current track does not appear during
X Switch on the radio and select the CD or Audio AUX mode operation.
MP3 mode (Y page 179).
Vehicles with COMAND system: Operating video DVD
Refer to separate COMAND system X Switch on the COMAND system and select
operating instructions. DVD-Video. Refer to separate COMAND
X Press ( or & to select the Audio system operating instructions.
Example illustration for FM radio
1 Stored memory position menu. The settings for the currently being X Press ( or & to select the Audio
played audio device/audio media appear in menu.
2 Station frequency
the multifunction display.
3 Wave band setting
141
Controls in detail
Control system
telephone while driving, please use the X Switch on the audio system (Y page 152)
hands-free device and only use the or the COMAND system, see separate
telephone when weather, road and traffic COMAND system operating instructions.
conditions permit. X Press button ( or & to select the
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from Tel menu.
using a mobile phone while driving a One of the following messages will appear
vehicle. in the multifunction display:
1 Current scene
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph RNo Service: No network is available.
X Selecting previous or next scene: Press (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is RReady for Bluetooth
button % or $ briefly. covering a distance of 44 feet Telephony...: The telephone has not
X Selecting a scene from the scene list (approximately 14 m) every second. been connected to the audio system or
(quick search): Press and hold button Never operate radio transmitters equipped COMAND system via Bluetooth® yet.
% or $. with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e.
X Connect the telephone to the audio
without being connected to an external
antenna) from inside the vehicle while the system or COMAND system via
TEL menu engine is running. Doing so could lead to a Bluetooth®.
The functions available in the system and the malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic RPhone READY or name of the network
messages in the multifunction display depend system, possibly resulting in an accident provider (if available): The telephone has
on which optional equipment is installed in and/or personal injury. found a network and is ready for use. You
your vehicle. You can connect your telephone to the audio can operate it using the control system.
G Warning! system (Y page 189) or to the COMAND
A driver’s attention to the road must always system via Bluetooth®, see separate
be his/her primary focus when driving. For COMAND system operating instructions.
your safety and the safety of others, we
recommend that you pull over to a safe
location and stop before placing or taking
a telephone call. If you choose to use the
142
Controls in detail
Control system
Answering a call into your audio system’s phone book X Press button s or #.
(Y page 197). If several entries are present for the same
When your telephone is ready to receive calls,
name, they are all shown. Select the
you can answer a call at any time. In the X Press button ( or & to select the desired entry and press button s or
multifunction display you will then see the Tel menu.
following message, or if available, the caller # again.
X Press button % or $ or # to
ID (number or name): The control system dials the selected
switch to the phone book. phone number.
The stored names are displayed in
ascending alphabetical order. If the connection is successful and this
feature is supported by your network
X Press button % or $ to select the
provider, the name of the party (if stored in
desired entry. your phone book) you are calling will
If you press and hold button % or appear in the multifunction display.
$ the system scrolls rapidly through the The control system stores the dialed
list of names (quick search). After holding number in the redial memory.
X Press button s. button % or $ for a short while the or
scrolling speed increases. Release the X Press button t or L if you do not
Ending a call or rejecting an incoming button to stop the quick search. The search
call want to make the call.
stops automatically at the end of the list.
X Press button t.
Dialing a number from the phone book

When your telephone is ready to receive calls,
you may select and dial a number from the
phone book at any time.
1 Selected name from the phone book
i For using the phone book of the audio Redialing
system you can import business cards
The control system stores the most recently Z
(vCards) from external Bluetooth® phones
dialed phone numbers. This eliminates the
143
Controls in detail
Control system
need to search through your entire phone Calling up vehicle malfunction, warning X Press ( or & to select the Service
book. and system status messages stored in menu.
X Press button ( or & to select the memory If conditions have occurred causing status
Tel menu. Use the vehicle status message memory messages to be recorded, the number of
X Press button s. function to scan malfunction and warning messages appears in the multifunction
messages that may be stored in the system. display:
X Press button % or $ to select the
desired number and/or name. Such messages appear in the multifunction
display and are based on conditions or
X Press button s or #.
system status the vehicle’s system has
The control system dials the selected recorded.
phone number.
G Warning!
Malfunction and warning messages are
Service menu only indicated for certain systems and are
intentionally not very detailed. The X Press % or $ to select the
In the Service menu the following functions
are available: malfunction and warning messages are messages function.
simply a reminder with respect to the X Press # to confirm.
RCalling up messages (Y page 144)
operation of certain systems. They do not The stored messages will now be displayed
RRestarting the TPMS (USA only) replace the owner’s and/or driver’s in the order in which they have occurred.
(Y page 272) responsibility to maintain the vehicle’s
For malfunction and warning messages,
RRestarting the Run Flat Indicator (Canada operating safety. Have all required
see “Vehicle status messages in the
only) (Y page 270) maintenance and safety checks performed
multifunction display” (Y page 305).
on the vehicle. Bring the vehicle to an
RCalling up the maintenance service X Use % or $ to scroll through the
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to
indicator display (Y page 292) address the malfunction and warning messages.
messages. If you turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 0 and then back to position 2, all
messages will be deleted from the message
memory.
144
Controls in detail
Control system
Settings menu X Press % or $ to select a submenu.
The submenus are arranged by hierarchy.
Introduction Scroll down with %, scroll up with $.
In the Settings menu there are two With the selection marker on the desired
functions: The function Factory Setting submenu, use the # to access the
(Y page 145), with which you can reset all the individual functions within that submenu.
settings to the original factory settings and a Once within the submenu, you can use $
collection of submenus (Y page 145) with X Press % or $ to select Yes or No. to move to the next function or % to move
which you can make individual settings for Select Yes if you want to reset to factory to the previous function within that submenu.
your vehicle. settings. The following lists show what settings can be
X Press # to confirm. changed within the various menus. Detailed
Resetting to factory settings The confirmation message appears in the instructions on making individual settings can
You can reset most of the functions of the multifunction display. be found on the following pages.
submenus to the factory settings. The functions of all the submenus will be
reset to factory settings. Instrument cluster submenu
For safety reasons, the function Daytime RSelecting speedometer display mode
Running Lamps in the Lights submenu (Y page 146)
cannot be reset while driving. Submenus in the Settings menu
RShowing or hiding additional
X Press ( or & to select the X Press ( or & to select the
speedometer9 (Y page 146)
Settings menu. Settings menu.
RPermanent display10 (speed display or
X Press % or $ to select the Factory outside temperature) (Y page 147)
Setting function.
X Press #. Time/Date submenu
The function Reset All Settings? RSetting the time (Y page 147)
appears in the multifunction display. RSetting the date (Y page 148)
Z
9 Vehicles with manual transmission
10 Vehicles with automatic transmission
145
Controls in detail
Control system
Lighting submenu The following functions are available: X Press # to change the setting.
RSetting daytime running lamp mode (USA RSelecting speedometer display mode Depending on the previous setting the
only) (Y page 148) (Y page 146) Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: wil be
RSetting locator lighting and night security set to miles or km.
RShowing or hiding additional
illumination (Headlamps delayed shut-off The selected display unit is valid for:
speedometer11 (Y page 146)
feature) (Y page 149) ROdometer and trip odometer
RPermanent display12 (speed display or
RSetting interior lighting delayed shut-off RTrip computer
outside temperature) (Y page 147)
(Y page 150) RDigital speedometer in the trip menu
Selecting speedometer display mode
Vehicle submenu RCruise control
X Press % or $ to select the Instr.
RSetting automatic central locking RNavigation
Cluster submenu. displays
(Y page 150)
X Press #.
Showing or hiding additional
Convenience submenu X Press % or $ to select Display speedometer (vehicles with manual
RActivating easy-entry/exit feature Unit Speed-/Odometer: function. transmission)
(Y page 151) The current setting is shown. You can have an additional digital
RSetting fold-in function for exterior rear speedometer shown on the multifunction
view mirrors (Canada only) (Y page 151) display. The speed is shown in the unit of
kilometers/hour (USA) or miles/hour
Instrument cluster submenu (Canada).
X Press % or $ to select the Instr.
Access the Instr. Cluster submenu via
Cluster submenu.
the Settings menu. Use the Instr.
X Press #.
Cluster submenu to change the instrument
cluster display settings. X Press % or $ to select Additional
Speedometer function.
The current setting is shown.
11 Vehicles with manual transmission
12 Vehicles with automatic transmission
146
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting the time
This function is not available if your vehicle is
equipped with the COMAND system and
navigation module.
Vehicles with COMAND system:
For information on setting the time in the
COMAND system, refer to the separate
X Press # to change the current status. X Press # to change the current status. COMAND system operating instructions.
Depending on the previous status, the Depending on the previous status, the X Press % or $ to select the Time/
additional speedometer will be switched Permanent Display: will be switched date submenu.
On or Off. between Outside temperature or X Press #.
Speedometer (km/h) (USA)/
Permanent display (vehicles with X Press % or $ to select the Time
Speedometer (miles) (Canada).
automatic transmission) function.
The selected display is then shown
You can use the Permanent Display function continuously in the lower display. X Press #.
to choose to display either the outside The current time appears in the
temperature or the speed in kilometers (USA) multifunction display.
or miles (Canada) permanently. Time/Date submenu
X To set a new time press # again.
X Press % or $ to select the Instr. Access the Time/Date submenu via the X Press button ( or & to select the
Cluster submenu. Settings menu. Use the Time/Date
setting you wish to change: hours or
X Press #.
submenu to change the time and date display
minutes.
settings.
X Press % or $ to select Permanent
The following functions are available:
Display: function.
The current setting is shown. RSetting the time (Y page 147)
RSetting the date (Y page 148)
147
Controls in detail
Control system
X Press button % or $ to change the Setting daytime running lamp mode (USA
setting which is highlighted. only)
X Press # to store the entry. X Press % or $ to select the Lights
submenu.
Setting the date X Press #.
This function is not available if your vehicle is X Press % or $ to select the Daytime
equipped with the COMAND system and
navigation module. X Press button % or $ to change the Running Lamps: function.
setting which is highlighted. The current setting Enabled or Disabled
Vehicles with COMAND system:
is shown.
For information on setting the date in the X Press # to store the entry.
COMAND system, refer to the separate
COMAND system operating instructions. Lights submenu
X Press % or $ to select the Time/
Access the Lights submenu via the
date submenu.
Settings menu. Use the Lights submenu to
X Press #.
change the lamp and lighting settings on your
X Press % or $ to select the Date vehicle.
function. The following functions are available: X Press # to change the current status.
X Press #.
RSetting daytime running lamp mode (USA Depending on the previous status, the
The current date appears in the only) (Y page 148) daytime running lamps feature will be
multifunction display. Enabled or Disabled.
RSetting locator lighting and night security
X To set a new date press # again.
illumination (Headlamps delayed shut-off With Daytime Running Lamps mode
X Press button ( or & to select the Enabled selected and the exterior lamp
feature) (Y page 149)
setting you wish to change: month, day or switch at position M or *, the low-
RSetting interior lighting delayed shut-off
year. beam headlamps are switched on when the
(Y page 150)
engine is running.
148
Controls in detail
Control system
In low ambient light conditions the following Rthe exterior lamps will come on during X Press % or $ to select the Lights
lamps will come on additionally: darkness when the vehicle is unlocked with submenu.
RParking lamps the SmartKey. X Press #.
RTail
The lamps will go out when the driver’s door X Press % or $ to select the Surround
lamps
is opened.
RLicense plate lamps Lighting: function.
If you do not open the driver’s door after The current setting Enabled or Disabled
RSide marker lamps unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey, is shown.
the lamps will go out automatically after
For more information on the daytime running
approximately 40 seconds.
lamp mode, see “Lighting” (Y page 101).
Rthe exterior lamps will remain on for
i Make sure the light switch is set to ¡
15 seconds during darkness after exiting
or * when you switch off the daytime the vehicle and closing all doors.
running lamps while driving at night.
If, after turning off the engine, you do not
For safety reasons, resetting all the functions open a door or do not close an opened door,
of all submenus to the factory settings while the lamps will automatically go out after
driving (Y page 145) will not deactivate the X Press # to change the current status.
60 seconds.
daytime running lamp mode. Depending on the previous status, the
The following lamps will come on locator lighting feature and the headlamps
The following message appears in the RParking lamps
multifunction display: delayed shut-off feature will be Enabled or
Cannot Be Completely Reset to RTail lamps Disabled.
Factory Settings while Driving.. RLicense plate lamps
Setting locator lighting and night security RSide marker lamps
illumination (Headlamps delayed shut-off RFront fog lamps
feature)
With the Surround Lighting: function
activated and the exterior lamp switch in
position * Z
149
Controls in detail
Control system
You can temporarily deactivate the X Press % or $ to select the Vehicle
headlamps delayed shut-off feature: submenu.
X Before exiting the vehicle, turn the X Press #.
SmartKey in the starter switch to position X Press % or $ to select the
0. Automatic Door Lock: function.
X Then turn it to position 2 and back to The current setting Enabled or Disabled
position 0. is shown.
The headlamps delayed shut-off feature is X Press # to change the current status.
deactivated. It will reactivate as soon as Depending on the previous status, the
you start the engine. interior lighting delayed shut-off feature
will be Enabled or Disabled.
Setting interior lighting delayed shut-off
Use this function to set whether you would Vehicle submenu
like the interior lighting to remain on for
10 seconds during darkness after you have Access the Vehicle submenu via the
removed the SmartKey from the starter Settings menu. Use the Vehicle submenu X Press # to change the current status.
switch. to set the automatic central locking. Depending on the previous status, the
X Press % or $ to select the Lights Setting automatic central locking automatic central locking feature will be
submenu. Enabled or Disabled.
Use this function to activate or deactivate the
X Press #. automatic central locking. With the automatic
X Press % or $ to select the Interior central locking system activated, the vehicle Convenience submenu
Lighting Delay: function. is centrally locked at a vehicle speed of Access the Convenience submenu via the
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h). Settings menu. Use the Convenience
The current setting Enabled or Disabled
is shown. submenu to activate the easy-entry/exit
feature (Y page 151) or to set the fold-in
function for exterior rear view mirrors
(Y page 151).
150
Controls in detail
Control system
Activating easy-entry/exit feature X Press % or $ to select the not fold out when you switch on the ignition.
Use this function to activate and deactivate Convenience submenu. You will then have to fold out the exterior rear
the easy-entry/exit feature (Y page 93). X Press #. view mirrors using the button on the door
control panel (Y page 96).
G Warning! X Press % or $ to select the Easy
Make sure both exterior rear view mirrors are
You must make sure no one can become Entry/Exit: function.
folded out completely before driving off.
trapped or injured by the moving steering The current setting Enabled or Disabled
X Press % or $ to select the
wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is is shown.
activated. Convenience submenu.
To stop steering wheel movement do one X Press #.
of the following: X Press % or $ to select the Fold
RMove steering wheel adjustment stalk. Mirrors in when Locking: function.
RPress
The current setting Enabled or Disabled
one of the memory position
is shown.
buttons.
RPress memory button M.
X Press # to change the current status.
Do not leave children unattended in the Depending on the previous status, the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked easy-entry/exit feature will be Enabled or
vehicle. Children could open the driver’s Disabled.
door and unintentionally activate the easy-
entry/exit feature, which could result in an Setting fold-in function for exterior rear
accident and/or serious personal injury. view mirrors (Canada only)
X Press # to change the current status.
Use this function to set the exterior rear view Depending on the previous status, the
mirrors to be automatically folded in when automatic fold-in function for exterior rear
you lock your vehicle. view mirrors will be Enabled or Disabled.
With this function set to Enabled and the
exterior rear view mirrors folded in using the
button on the door control panel Z
(Y page 96), the exterior rear view mirrors will
151
Controls in detail
Audio system
Audio system Audio system overview
Audio and telephone operation
These instructions are intended to help you
become familiar with your Mercedes-Benz
audio system. They contain useful tips and a
detailed description of the user functions.
G Warning!
In order to avoid distraction which could
lead to an accident, the driver should enter
system settings with the vehicle at a
Item
standstill and operate the system only
when road and traffic conditions permit. 4 Clear button (Y page 159)
Always pay full attention to traffic
conditions first before operating system 5 Audio controller (Y page 157)
controls while driving. 6 Back button (Y page 159)
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
Item
1 Audio display (Y page 156)
2 Opening button (Y page 156)
3 Audio control unit (Y page 153)
152
Controls in detail
Audio system
Operating safety Audio system components In addition, the audio system can also be
operated with the multifunction steering
G Warning! With the audio system you can operate the wheel (Y page 131).
Any alterations made to electronic following main functions:
In these instructions, the keypad (right side
components can cause malfunctions. Raudio function with the radio, Satellite of audio control unit) and the function buttons
The radio, amplifier, CD changer, satellite radio, disc (CD audio or MP3 mode) and are referred to as “buttons”.
radio, and telephone are interconnected. Audio AUX
When one of the components is not Rthe mobile phone with the phone book Audio control unit
operational or has not been removed/ Rvarious system settings With the audio control unit you can:
replaced properly, the function of other
components may be impaired. The audio system consists of the following: Rswitch the audio system on/off
This condition might seriously impair the Raudio control unit Radjust the volume
operating safety of your vehicle. Raudio display Rselect the operating modes
We recommend that you have any service
Raudio controller with í and î button Renter telephone numbers and accept,
work on electronic components carried out
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. reject, initiate and end telephone calls
Rload and eject CDs
153
Controls in detail
Audio system
Audio control unit overview
154
Controls in detail
Audio system
Item 6 Keypad a Tuning to a station via station search
Tuning to a station via the station (Y page 169)
1 Switching to radio mode
(Y page 168) memory (Y page 170) Fast rewind (Y page 187)
Calling up wave bands Storing stations manually Skipping backwards to a track
(Y page 169) (Y page 170) (Y page 187)
Switching on Sat mode Entering a passcode (Y page 194) b Confirming a passcode
(Y page 174) Entering a phone number (Y page 193)
(Y page 201) Accepting a call (Y page 202)
2 Switching to CD audio or MP3 mode Sending DTMF tones (Y page 203)
(Y page 179) Initiating a call (Y page 201)
CD changer: Selecting a CD Redial (Y page 202)
3 Disc slot (Y page 183)
CD: Selecting a track (Y page 186) c Rejecting a call (Y page 202)
4 Load/eject button (Y page 182)
Switching to a popup screen of Ending an active call (Y page 202)
5 Clear button for deleting digits or satellite radio (Y page 177) d Opening system settings menu
entire entries (Y page 201)
7 Tuning to a station via station search (Y page 165)
Entering a passcode (Y page 194)
(Y page 169) e Switching sound on/off
Entering a telephone number
Fast forward (Y page 187) (Y page 163)
(Y page 201)
Skipping forwards to a track Switching hands-free microphone
(Y page 187) on/off (Y page 203)
8 Switching audio system on/off f Switching to telephone mode
(Y page 162) (Y page 189)
9 Adjusting the volume (Y page 163) g Sound settings (Y page 163)
155
Controls in detail
Audio system
Audio display Audio display cover Display
The audio display has a protective cover. The currently selected mode and the
associated menus are shown on the audio
! Do not place any objects on the cover of display. The audio display is divided into
the audio display. This may obstruct the several areas.
movement when the cover is being
opened/closed. The cover could be
damaged. Do not place any objects in front
of the audio display and/or secure any
objects to the audio display itself. The
audio display could be damaged.
Avoid touching the audio display at all
times. The display has a very sensitive high- 1 Opening button
gloss surface, there is a risk of it being
X Opening: Press opening button 1. Example illustration: radio selected
scratched. Do not press directly in the
The audio display cover opens, the audio 1 Menu bar
display face. Otherwise, the audio display
will be damaged. display is visible, and the audio system 2 Main area
switched on. 3 Status line
i For information about cleaning and care X Closing: Press the audio display cover
Status line 3 displays the time and the
of the audio display, see “Audio or down until it engages.
If the audio system is still switched on, you current settings for radio and telephone
COMAND display” (Y page 297).
can continue to listen to the radio or a CD mode.
and operate the device via the buttons on You can request the required function using
the audio control panel as well as the menu bar 1.
buttons on the multifunction steering The selection is made using the audio
wheel. controller.
i You cannot operate the audio system via
the audio controller when the display cover
is closed.
156
Controls in detail
Audio system
Mobile phone readiness is indicated by descriptions and operation of the instrument
additional information being shown in the cluster multifunction display and
status line: multifunction steering wheel buttons as they
RIn the telephone main menu: Name of the relate to audio functions described in this
section.
Bluetooth® device (calls made and
received via the Bluetooth® interface)
(Y page 195). Audio controller
RMobile phone network signal strength
I. This information will only be shown
with suitable mobile phones.
Operating audio controller
RReceiver symbol 4 ö
The audio controller features the following
In this example, the audio main function is set options:
to the FM radio mode and the main area 2
Rpress briefly or press and hold n
is active.
Rrotate to the left or right ymz
i The layout of the menus may vary
depending on your vehicle’s equipment. Rslide to the left or right omp
This manual shows the menus for a fully 1 Audio controller Rslide up or down qmr
equipped vehicle. The menu functions are selected on the audio
display using the audio controller. For this i You cannot operate the audio system via
Instrument cluster multifunction purpose, a selected item is highlighted. the audio controller when the display cover
display is closed.
In this way, you can open menus or lists, move
Please refer to the “Control system” section within menus or lists, and quit menus or lists.
of this manual (Y page 131) for function
157
Controls in detail
Audio system
Symbol How to use the audio controller Function
n X Press briefly. RConfirming the selection of a menu item or list entry.
X Press and hold until the selected action has been carried out. RSaving a station.
ymz X Rotate. RMoving through vertical or horizontal menus or through lists.
RSelecting program settings.

qmr X Slide. RMoving through vertical menus or lists.
RExiting horizontal menus.
omp X Slide. RMoving through horizontal menus.
RExiting vertical menus.
X Slide and hold. RFast forward or reverse for audio CD playback.
158
Controls in detail
Audio system
Back button Clear button Menu
Use clear button î for deleting individual The table below shows the structure of the
digits or an entire phone number modes and their menus. Each mode has a
(Y page 201). basic menu. Each menu item in turn has
several submenu items.
Button Mode/Menu
b Radio mode
Radio (FM/AM)
(Y page 167)
1 Back button í Weather Band (Y page 169)
X Switching to the next highest menu: Satellite radio (Y page 172)

Press button í briefly. Presets (Y page 170)
The audio system switches to the next 1 Clear button î
highest menu level within the currently Sound (Y page 163)
X Deleting an individual digit: Briefly press
active mode. button î. é Disc mode
i You can also exit a menu or list by sliding X Deleting an entire phone number: Press CD/MP3 (Y page 179)
the audio controller omp or qmr. and hold button î until the entry is
deleted. Track list/folder list
X Switching to the main menu: Press and (Y page 187)
hold button í.
The audio system switches to the basic CD Changer (Y page 183)
menu of the currently active mode. Sound (Y page 163)
h Telephone mode
Z
Telephone (Y page 189)
159
Controls in detail
Audio system
X Exiting the menu bar without
Button Mode/Menu
confirming a selection: Slide qm in the
Name (Y page 197) opposite direction of the list orientation.
Call lists (Y page 200) or
X Press button í.
ê System settings menu
System (Y page 165) Vertical submenus
Language (Y page 166) Illustration: radio function basic menu
X Moving to the menu bar: Slide mr.
Calling up an operating mode
X Press the respective button (b, é, Horizontal menus
h, or ê) on the audio control unit.
The basic menu of the selected mode
appears in the audio display. The main area
is active. The active area is highlighted.
X Moving through the menu: Slide qmr or
i The following screens show the audio rotate ymz.
display’s day design. The appearance of the The currently selected item is highlighted.
highlighted items in the menu will vary X Confirming the selected submenu
depending on the display design. item: Press n.
X Moving through the menu bar: Slide X Exiting a menu without confirming a
omp or rotate ymz. selection: Slide omp in the opposite
The currently selected item is highlighted. direction of the list orientation.
X Confirming the selected menu item:
or
Press n. X Press button í.
160
Controls in detail
Audio system
Example of how to use the audio system
Example: direct frequency input,
FM 104.5 MHz.
In the descriptions below, the mode always
serve as the starting point for locating the
individual menu items.
Example:
b £ Radio £ Enter Frequency
X Confirming selection: Press n. i It is not possible to enter a frequency in
The individual steps for the above-mentioned
The Radio menu is selected and a list of the respective wave band which is outside
example are described below.
submenus appears. the frequency range. Frequencies within
X Press button b on audio control unit the current frequency range, but outside
repeatedly until desired wave band FM has the current frequency step width are
been selected. rounded to the next lower allowed
X Switching to the menu bar: Slide mr. frequency.
X Enter 1045 with the keypad on the audio
control unit.
The audio system tunes in to the frequency
entered.
X Enter Frequency is selected.
X Confirming selection: Press n.
The Enter Frequency submenu appears.
X Selecting Radio in the menu bar: Slide

om or rotate ymz.
161
Controls in detail
Audio system
Operation Switching audio system on or off X Switching off: Press push button D.
In the following descriptions, an operation or
step is described as in example below. X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 0 and remove SmartKey from
X b £ Radio £ Enter Frequency starter switch.
is the short for
X Press button b on audio control unit
i Should excessively high temperatures
occur while the audio system is being
repeatedly until desired wave band has
operated, Temperature Too High-
been selected.
Device switching off now. will appear
X Slide mr.
in the audio display, after which the audio
X Slide om or rotate ymz the audio system will be switched off for a cooling-
controller to select Radio. 1 Push button D down period.
X Press the audio controller n. 2 Rotary control
The Radio menu is selected and a list of
i When you switch off the audio system,
X Switching on: Press push button D. you also switch off the currently playing
submenus appears.
or audio source and the telephone operating
X Slide qm or rotate ymz the audio
X
via audio control unit is not possible.
controller to select Enter Frequency. Open the audio display cover.
X Press the audio controller n. or
The Enter Frequency submenu appears X If the audio system was on as you switched
in the audio display. off the ignition, turn the SmartKey in the
starter switch to position 1.
The audio system will come back on with
the last selected function.
i If the audio system is switched on without
the SmartKey in the starter switch, it will
automatically switch off again after
approximately 30 minutes.
162
Controls in detail
Audio system
Adjusting volume pressing the button + or - on the Adjusting bass or treble
multifunction steering wheel X Press button ´ and select Bass or
(Y page 131). Treble.
or
Sound
X Select Sound £ Bass or Treble.
X Switching on/off: Press button F on A longer and brighter bar indicates the
the audio control unit (Y page 154). previously stored setting. The red pointer
The sound of the current audio source is indicates the currently selected setting.
switched on or off.
i When the sound is switched off, the
symbol F appears in the status line.
1 Push button D
If you change the audio source, or alter the
2 Rotary control volume, the sound is automatically
X Adjusting: Turn rotary control 2. switched on again.
The volume will increase or decrease
depending on the direction turned. Selecting sound settings
Example for adjusting bass
For bass and treble, you can select different
Adjusting volume for telephone calls sound settings for each individual audio X Changing setting: Slide rmq or rotate
In hands-free mode, you can adjust the source. The particular Sound menu can be ymz until desired treble or bass setting is
volume of a telephone call while the call is opened from the basic menu for the desired reached.
currently active. operating mode, or by pressing the button X Exiting menu: Press button í or slide
During a telephone call: ´ on the audio control unit. omp.
X Turn rotary control 2. Example: The setting is stored.
The volume will increase or decrease b £ Sound £ Bass
depending on the direction turned.
i The volume of the audio system or a Z
telephone call can also be adjusted by
163
Controls in detail
Audio system
Adjusting balance or fader X Changing setting: Slide rmq or omp until architecture to provide the optimum sound
Balance is used to determine whether the desired balance/fader setting is achieved. experience from all seats. This produces
sound focus should be shifted toward the X Exiting menu: Press n or button í. the sound characteristic as intended by the
driver’s side or the passenger side. The balance/fader setting is stored for all sound engineer during the original
Fader is used to determine whether the sound audio sources. recording.
focus should be shifted toward the front or Harman/kardon LOGIC 7® converts all
rear of the vehicle. Surround sound two-channel stereo sound material into
X Press button ´ repeatedly until Bal/ multi-channel surround sound. The
If your vehicle is equipped with the harman/ surround information stored during the
Fad appears in the audio display. kardon LOGIC 7® Surround Sound system, original recording is read out using
or you can choose between LOGIC 7® On and LOGIC 7® and likewise distributed over the
X Select Sound £ Bal/Fad. LOGIC7® Off for surround sound. 13 channels. No effects are created during
The current setting is indicated by an red Harman/kardon LOGIC 7® Surround Sound is this process; only that which was already
cross-hair symbol. available for the following operating modes: there becomes audible.
RRadio (FM only) In addition, harman/kardon LOGIC 7®
moves the perceived sound source away
RSatellite radio from the individual loudspeakers, thus
RCD audio generating a natural 360° sound
RMP3
experience for each passenger.
RAUX i By selecting LOGIC 7® Off, all compatible

formats are played back as they are
i The LOGIC7® On function of the harman/ present on the medium. Due to the
Adjusting balance and fader kardon LOGIC 7® Surround Sound system vehicle’s spatial characteristics, an optimal
permits the playback of discrete 5.1 and sound experience is not ensured from all
stereo recordings with an optimal surround seats.
sound platform for each passenger.
The LOGIC 7® distributes the 5.1 surround
information over the 13-channel system
164
Controls in detail
Audio system
Adjusting surround sound i Please note the following: SYS menu
With surround sound, you can choose RFor an optimal sound experience from all
System settings menu overview
between LOGIC 7® On and LOGIC 7® Off. seats, the balance and fader should be
X Press button ´ repeatedly until Sound adjusted to the center of the passenger Menu
appears in the audio display. compartment with LOGIC 7® switched
on. System
or
X RThe best sound results are achieved Display (Y page 165)
Select Sound £ Sound.
when playing high-quality audio CDs.
Brightness
RFor MP3 tracks, the bit rate should be at
least 128 kbit/s. Day Mode
RSurround playback cannot be activated Night Mode
in mono-signal sources as AM or
Weatherband. It will not function for Automatic
mono-signal sources as, e. g. mono audio Activate Bluetooth®
tracks on some specific audio CDs. (Y page 166)
A dot R indicates the current setting. RIn the case of poor radio reception
Reset (Y page 166)
X
quality, e. g. in tunnels, LOGIC 7® should
Selecting setting: Slide rmq or rotate
be switched off, as otherwise a dynamic Language (Y page 166)
ymz.
switchover from stereo to mono and thus
X Saving setting: Press n. temporary sound characteristic shifts
The setting is stored and the menu is Display settings
can occur.
exited. RWith You can adapt the brightness of the audio
certain stereo recordings, the
X Exiting menu without saving: Press display to the prevailing light conditions.
resulting sound characteristic may
button í or slide omp. deviate from conventional stereo Setting the display design
i Balance and fader will be set to the default playback.
X ê £ System £ Display.
value (0/0) automatically by activating or X Select Brightness, Day Mode, Night Z
deactivating LOGIC 7®. Mode or Automatic.
165
Controls in detail
Audio system
i When you select Brightness, a scale X ê £ System £ Reset.
appears on which you can set the A prompt appears asking whether you
brightness manually. really want to reset.
In the Automatic setting, the audio system X Select Yes or No.
analyzes the automatic vehicle light sensor If you select Yes another prompt will
and switches between the display designs appear asking whether you really want to
automatically. reset.
X Select Yes or No.
Bluetooth® settings You have activated or deactivated If you select Yes, the audio system will be
Bluetooth®. A checkmark Ç appears when reset and restarted.
General information about Bluetooth® Bluetooth® is activated.
Bluetooth® technology is the standard for Setting the system language
short-range wireless technologies, suitable Reset
for transmitting voice and data. It is possible X ê £ Language.
to connect Bluetooth® devices wirelessly. i You can reset the audio system back to
Bluetooth® can be used to exchange vCards its factory settings. In this case, all personal
or make calls using a hands-free device. data (e. g. address book entries, call lists,
paired mobile phones, and presets) are
Bluetooth® technology uses the freely deleted. We recommend that you reset the
available ISM (Industrial Scientific Medical) values, for example, before selling your
wireless network that works at 2.45 GHz. vehicle.
Ranges of up to ten meters are possible with
Bluetooth®.
Activate or deactivate Bluetooth® The language list appears. A dot R in front
of an entry indicates the current setting.
X ê £ System £ Activate
Bluetooth.
166
Controls in detail
Audio system
X Changing setting: Slide rmq or rotate Before your journey, please familiarize (Y page 153) and (Y page 161). Information
ymz and select desired language. yourself with the radio functions. about sound settings can be found on
X Saving setting: Press n. Only use the audio system when road and (Y page 163).
The setting is stored and the menu is traffic conditions permit you to do so.
exited. Otherwise you could be involved in an
X Exiting menu without saving: Press accident in which you or others could be
button í or slide omp. injured.
i The language selected in the Audio ! Do not attach metallic window tinting film
system is also used for the displays and to the inside or outside of windows which
messages in the multifunction display. are fitted with an aerial. Obstructing the
metallic aerial structure on the window will
interfere with radio reception. Cutting the
Radio operation
film on the window can permanently
G Warning! damage the aerial wires.
Please devote your attention first and
i The radio mode is interrupted by an
foremost to the traffic situation you are in.
incoming call on the mobile phone
(Y page 189).
Menu overview
i The components and operating principles
of the audio system can be found on
167
Controls in detail
Audio system
Radio Presets Channel Sound
(except Weather Band/ (except Weather Band) (only Weather Band)
satellite radio)
Enter frequency Autostore (except satellite radio) List of channels Treble
Station information (in FM wave List of stored stations Bass
band only)
Balance/Fader
Surround Sound
Switching to radio mode seen when the station transmits the name
X
or other information and the function Show
Press button b on audio control unit.
Station Info in the Radio menu is
The radio basic menu appears in the audio
activated.
display once you have switched to radio
mode. You will hear the frequency last X b £ Radio £ Show Station
tuned in the previously selected wave Info
band. In the WB wave band, the audio system
Weather Band will automatically tune to the displays the channel number, e. g.
Illustration: radio mode in FM wave band
strongest station in the area. Channel 6, instead of the station names
1 Status line
and/or frequency.
2 Station name or other information from
the station
3 Store position of station
4 Main area with wave band
i Station name or other information 2,

available for the FM wave band, can only be
168
Controls in detail
Audio system
Information displayed in the status line X Press button b on audio control unit Tuning to a station/channel via station/
(example) repeatedly until desired wave band has channel search function
been selected. i The search function searches for the next
The following information is displayed in the
The FM, AM, and WB wave bands and the
status line: receivable station in the FM or AM wave
satellite radio mode are called up one after
RTime (04:38) band. In Weather Band (WB) the search
another.
function switches to the next channel in the
RStation name (WNYC) The wave band currently selected appears channel list. For tuning to a station/
in the status line of the audio display. The channel you can also use the buttons on
Mobile phone readiness is indicated by
last selected station in the selected wave the multifunction steering wheel, see
additional information being shown:
band is heard. “Audio menu” (Y page 140).
RMobile phone network signal strength
I X Press button b on audio control unit
Selecting a station/channel
RReceiver symbol 4 ö repeatedly until the FM/AM/WB wave
You have the following selection options: band is selected.
RThe station search function X Slide omp or rotate ymz when the main
Calling up wave bands
RThe channel list (Weather Band/satellite area in the basic menu is active.
You can choose from among the FM, AM and radio) Depending on the direction in which the
WB wave bands and then request the Sat controller is being slid or rotated, the
RStation memory (except Weather Band)
mode (Y page 172). Pressing again button system searches upward or downward and
b will switch back to FM radio mode. RThe manual frequency entry (except stops at the next station/channel.
Weather Band/satellite radio) or
Wave band Frequency
For using satellite radio see (Y page 172). X Press button G or H on audio control
WB (Weather Band) Weather channels unit.
The station search proceeds in the following
FM 87.7......107.9 MHz frequency increments: Depending on the pressed button, the
R200
system searches upward or downward and
AM 530.......1710 KHz kHz in FM range
stops at the next station/channel.
R10 kHz in AM range
Z
169
Controls in detail
Audio system
Selecting a station using station memory X b £ Radio £ Enter Frequency R, with the keypad in audio control unit
i This function is not available for Weather The menu for manual frequency entry briefly.
appears. The audio system tunes in to the frequency
Band.
entered.
i It is not possible to enter a frequency in
repeatedly until desired wave band has
the respective wave band which is outside
been selected.
the frequency range.
X Select Presets.
X Exiting menu without making an entry:
or
Press button í in the center console
X Press n when the main area is selected.
(Y page 159).
The memory menu appears. The dot R in
front of a memory position indicates that or Storing stations
the currently selected station is saved
X Press button ó, on the keypad in audio
there. You can store ten AM and ten FM stations in
X Select station in memory by rotating ymz control unit briefly. the memory.
or sliding qmr and press n. i If you select a memory preset which is
or already in use, it will be overwritten by the
X Press desired station button 1 to new station.
R, with the keypad in audio control unit
Storing stations manually with keypad
briefly.
X Tune in desired station.
Tuning to a station by entering the Basic menu is shown in the audio display.
frequency manually X Press and hold desired station button
i This function is not available for Weather X Entering frequency with keypad: Enter 1 to R until a brief signal tone
Band/satellite radio. desired frequency with buttons 1 to sounds.
The station is stored.
170
Controls in detail
Audio system
Storing stations manually with station X Selecting a memory position: Slide X Press button b on audio control unit
memory menu qmr or rotate ymz. repeatedly until desired wave band has
X Tune in desired station. X Storing a station to a selected memory been selected.
Basic menu is shown in the audio display. position: Press and hold n until a brief Basic menu is shown in the audio display.
X Press n when the main area is active. signal tone sounds. X Press n when the main area is active.
or or or
X Select Presets. X Press and hold desired station button X Select Presets.
The station memory display appears in the 1 to R on keypad, until a brief signal The station memory display appears in the
audio display. tone sounds. audio display.
The station is stored. X Slide qmr or rotate ymz to select
Autostore.
Autostore – automatic station memory
X Press n.
i This function is not available for Weather The audio system searches for receivable
Band/satellite radio. The autostore stations. A corresponding message is
function automatically assigns receivable displayed. The available stations are
stations to the memory, sorted according automatically stored in memory. The first
to reception quality at the moment of received station will be automatically
performing the autostore. The stations played.
The dot R in front of a memory position which were stored in the station memory X Canceling storage procedure: Select
indicates that the currently tuned station is manually are completely lost in this
stored there. Cancel and press n while the message
process. If less than ten stations are found,
Rewriting memory... is being displayed.
the remaining entries are left empty.
171
Controls in detail
Audio system
Satellite radio Only use the audio system when road and
traffic conditions permit you to do so.
G Warning! Otherwise you could be involved in an
Please devote your attention first and accident in which you or others could be
foremost to the traffic situation you are in. injured.
Before your journey, please familiarize
yourself with the radio functions. Submenu overview
i The components and operating principles
of the audio system can be found on
(Y page 153) and (Y page 161).
Sat Presets Info Category (Cat.) Sound

Channel List Station presets Show program info All channels Treble
Channel Entry Select category Bass
Service Balance/Fader
Surround Sound
Satellite radio Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz satellites to broadcast 24 hours per day,
Center for details and availability for your coast to coast, in the contiguous U. S. and
i Additional satellite radio equipment and a vehicle. Canada.
subscription to SIRIUS Satellite Radio
SIRIUS Satellite Radio provides over This diverse, satellite-delivered programming
service provider are required for the
130 channels of digital-quality radio, is available for a monthly subscription fee.
satellite radio operation described in this
including 100 % commercial-free music, For more information and service availability
chapter.
sports, news and entertainment. SIRIUS call the SIRIUS Service Center at
Satellite Radio uses a fleet of high-power 1-888-539-7474 (Y page 177), or contact
172
Controls in detail
Audio system
www.sirius.com (USA) or The following conditions are possible: X Closing screen: Press n or button í
www.siriuscanada.com (Canada). RSatellite radio service is not activated or slide omp.
i Note that categories and channels shown (only the preview channel is displayed). X Activating satellite radio service:
in illustrations are dependent on RSatellite radio service is activated. Contact satellite radio service provider at
programming content delivered by the the telephone number displayed in the
service provider. Programming content is i If a satellite receiver is not installed or not service display.
subject to change. Therefore, channels and properly installed: After the connection is made:
categories shown in illustrations and The message Device Unavailable will
X Follow the instructions given by the
descriptions contained in this manual may appear.
differ from the channels and categories operator.
If the satellite radio service is not activated,
delivered by the service provider. The activation process may take up to
the “SIRIUS Preview” display appears.
10 minutes. If it is successful, you will see
i Satellite radio service may be unavailable Satellite radio service is not activated the display with the message Updating
or interrupted from time to time for a The telephone number of the SIRIUS Service Channels... followed by the satellite
variety of reasons, such as environmental Center and the twelve-digit electronic serial radio basic menu.
or topographic conditions and other things number (SIRIUS-ID) of the particular receiver i Activating the satellite radio service might
we cannot control. Service might also not are required when calling the SIRIUS Service
not be available in certain places (e. g., in
be available in certain places (e. g., in Center for an activation request.
tunnels, parking garages, under leafy trees,
tunnels, parking garages, under leafy trees, X b (repeatedly, if necessary) £ Sat or within or next to buildings). If a
or within or next to buildings) or near other
£ Service. subscription is not included with system
technologies. In such situations, the
purchase, credit card information is
satellite radio’s main menu shows the
required to activate your account.
Acquiring Signal... screen. At this
point, the radio’s functions are restricted. The activation process takes
approximately 5 to 10 minutes after calling
Subscribing to satellite radio the SIRIUS Service Center.
If a satellite receiver is not installed or not
X Press button b on audio control unit properly installed: The message Device
repeatedly until satellite radio Sat is Unavailable will appear. Z
selected.
173
Controls in detail
Audio system
i It is also possible to activate the satellite Switching on 8 Channel information
radio service online. To do so please visit 9 Preset options
For important subscription information see
SIRIUS Satellite Radio’s website at a Satellite radio options
“Subscribing to satellite radio” (Y page 173).
www.sirius.com (USA) or
www.siriuscanada.com (Canada). i Main area 1 displays only channels that
repeatedly until satellite radio Sat is
Preview Channel you have subscribed to. Which channels
selected.
are shown depends on the selected
The message Acquiring Signal... will
program category 2. Only the currently
appear when the signal is not available.
selected channel 4 is displayed.
After the audio system acquires the signal,
the satellite radio basic menu will appear. Note that categories and channels shown
The station last tuned to will begin to play. in illustrations are dependent on
programming content delivered by the
Main satellite radio menu service provider. Programming content is
subject to change.
Therefore, channel and categories shown
i If the satellite radio service has not been in illustrations and descriptions contained
subscribed to, only the preview channel is in this manual may differ from the channels
available. You cannot tune in another and categories delivered by the service
channel. If you try to do this, the message provider.
Call SIRIUS to activate: appears.
Selecting program category
Satellite radio service is activated
1 Main area with channel display i The channels are categorized. Categories
The basic satellite radio menu appears. You
2 Selected program category allow you to tune to stations broadcasting
will hear the channel last tuned in, provided
3 Number of selected channel a certain type of program.
that it can be received.
4 Selected channel Satellite radio channels are split up into
5 Sound settings categories such as News, Sports, Rock, or
Country, if available. The category list is
6 Selecting program category
sorted alphabetically.
7 Current artist and title
174
Controls in detail
Audio system
X Calling up category list: b RThe channel list Tuning in channels using manual channel
(repeatedly, if necessary) £ Cat. RThe channel presets number entry
or X b (repeatedly, if necessary) £ Sat
X Slide omp or rotate ymz until Cat. is Tuning in channels using channel search £ Enter Channel.
function The menu for manual channel number entry
highlighted and press n.
The category list appears. X Slide omp or rotate ymz when the main appears.
X Selecting a category: Slide qmr or rotate area in the basic menu is active. or
ymz. Depending on the direction in which the X Press button ó, on the keypad in audio
controller is being slid or rotated, the control unit briefly.
X Setting the selected category: Press n.
system scans upward or downward and
The selected program category X Channel number entry with keypad:
stops at the next subscribed channel.
(alphabetical order) will appear in the audio Enter desired channel number with buttons
or 1 to R, with the keypad in audio
display. The channel last tuned in the new
X Press button G or H on audio control
category will begin to play. control unit briefly.
unit. Further operation depends on whether the
When searching, tuning in, or selecting
Depending on the pressed button, the selected channel number is valid or if the
from the channel list, the All Channels
system searches upward or downward and channel is included in your subscription.
option accesses all of your subscribed
stops at the next receivable channel.
channels. X Exiting menu without making an entry:
i Which channels are available depends on Press button í in the center console
i When you select the category All
which channels you have subscribed to and (Y page 159).
Channels, you have access to all the
the program category you have selected Channel number is valid and channel is
channels you subscribe to, regardless of
(Y page 174). For tuning in channels you included in subscription: The audio system
category.
can also use the buttons on the tunes in the channel entered.
multifunction steering wheel, see “Audio
Tuning in channels Channel number is invalid: The message
menu” (Y page 140).
Invalid Channel appears in the audio
You have the following selection options: display.
RThe channel scan function X The message disappears automatically or
RThe manual channel number entry press n to close the message. Z
175
Controls in detail
Audio system
Channel number is valid, but channel is Tuning in channels using satellite radio The audio system tunes in the corresponding
not included in subscription: The message channel presets channel as long as it is included in your
Call SIRIUS to activate: appears X b (repeatedly, if necessary) £ subscription and is still available.
(Y page 173). Presets. If the channel is not included in your
X Press n to close the message in the audio or subscription, the message Call SIRIUS to
display. X Press n when the main area is selected.
activate: appears.
The preset menu appears. The dot R in If the channel is no longer available, the
Tuning in channels using the satellite message Invalid Channel appears.
radio channel list front of a preset position indicates that this
is the channel currently selected and being X Closing message: Press n.
X b (repeatedly, if necessary) £ Sat listened to.
£ Channel List.
Storing channels
The channel list appears. The dot R in
front of a list entry indicates the currently i There are ten preset positions available.
selected channel.
X Press n when the main area is selected.
X Select channel by rotating ymz or sliding
qmr. or
X b (repeatedly, if necessary) £
X Press n to confirm.
Presets.
i The contents of the channel list depends In both cases, the preset menu will appear in
on which channels are included in your X Select station in memory by rotating ymz the audio display. The dot R in front of a
subscription and which program category or sliding qmr. preset position indicates that the channel
you have selected (Y page 174). The X Press n to confirm. currently selected is stored there.
channel list contains only the preview
channel if the satellite radio service has not or
been subscribed to. X Press desired station button 1 to
R, with the keypad in audio control unit
briefly.
176
Controls in detail
Audio system
You will see a screen that may contain the Calling SIRIUS Service Center
following information (if available):
i It may be necessary to call the SIRIUS
RSelected program category Service Center if, for example:
RSelected channel RYou want to cancel the subscription or
RArtist of the track currently being played re-subscribe at a later date.
RName of current track RYou forget to pay the bill.
RYou sell the car to another person.
i SIRIUS determines what information is
X Selecting a preset position: Slide qmr or
displayed on the screen. The audio system X
rotate ymz. b (repeatedly, if necessary) £ Sat
shows no more than two lines per item of
X Storing a preset position: Press and hold information. If an item of information is too £ Service.
n until you hear a signal. long, the audio system shortens it. The telephone number of the SIRIUS
The channel is stored. Service Center and the twelve-digit
With the telephone keypad button ô you electronic serial number (SIRIUS-ID) of the
or can call up a popup screen, if provided by particular receiver are displayed.
X Press and hold desired channel button SIRIUS, that shows the artist and title of the X Closing screen: Slide omp, press n or
1 to R on keypad, until a brief signal current track being played on the selected press button í.
tone sounds. channel.
The channel is stored. The popup screen disappears automatically.
Channel update
X Closing screen manually: Slide omp,
Show program info rotate ymz, press n or press button The service provider may conduct a channel
X
update.
b (repeatedly, if necessary) £ Info. í.
During the update, the message Updating
i If the program provider does not offer any Channels... will appear on the audio
information, the Info menu item cannot be display.
selected. The channel last tuned will be muted until the
update is completed. You cannot operate the
satellite radio during the update. Z
177
Controls in detail
Audio system
After completion of the update, the satellite Sound settings RBass and treble control (Y page 163)
radio basic menu will appear. The station last RSurround sound (Y page 164)
For sound adjusting see:
tuned to will begin to play. If not available, the
next subscribed channel starts beginning RVolume (Y page 163)
with channel 1. RBalance control and fader (Y page 164)
178
Controls in detail
Audio system
CD and MP3 mode
Submenu overview
CD or MP3 Track list (Audio CD) or Folder Changer Sound

(MP3) (with CD-changer only)
Normal Track Sequence Select track (CD mode only) Select medium Treble
Random Tracks Select folder and/or tracks (MP3 Eject all Bass
mode only)
Random Folders (MP3 mode Fill empty slots Balance/Fader
only)
AUX Surround sound
i The components and operating principles Safety precautions G Warning!

of the audio system can be found on In order to avoid distraction which could
(Y page 153) and (Y page 161). G Warning!
lead to an accident, the driver should insert
The single CD player and the CD changer
The audio system will be fitted with either a or eject CDs with the vehicle at a standstill
are classified as a Class 1 laser product.
single CD drive or a CD changer. and operate the audio system only if
You must not open the casing. There is a
The single CD player and the CD changer can permitted by road, weather and traffic
risk of exposure to invisible laser radiation
play audio CDs as well as CDs with MP3 or conditions.
if you open the casing, or if the casing is
WMA files. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
faulty or damaged.
The available menu options will vary (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
depending on the equipment and the type of The single CD player and the CD changer
CD. do not contain any parts that you are able
to maintain yourself. For safety reasons, all
maintenance work must be carried out by
qualified technicians. Z
179
Controls in detail
Audio system
General notes ! Your CD drive or CD changer has been RAvoid scratches, fingerprints and dust on
designed to play CDs which correspond to the CDs.
i Audio CDs with copy protection are not the IEC 60908 standard. You can therefore RThe CDs must only be labeled using pens
compatible with the CD audio standard and only use CDs with a maximum thickness of
therefore may not be able to be played by specially designed for this purpose.
1.3 mm.
the single CD player and/or the CD RClean CDs from time to time with a
changer. There may be playback problems If you insert thicker discs, e. g. ones that
commercially available cleaning cloth.
when playing copied discs. have data on both sides (one side with DVD
Never wipe the CD in a circular motion;
data, the other side with audio data), they
There is a large variety of discs, disc-writing instead, wipe it in a straight line starting in
cannot be ejected and will damage the
software and writers available. This variety the center and moving outward. Do not use
drive.
means that there is no guarantee that the solvents, anti-static sprays, etc. for
system will be able to play discs that you Do not use CDs with a diameter of 8 cm. cleaning.
have written/copied yourself. Attempting to play CDs with a diameter of RReplace the CD in its case after use.
There may be playback problems if you use 8 cm or playing such CDs with an adapter may
cause damage to the CD drive. Such damage RProtect CDs from heat and direct sunlight.
CD-R or CD-RW type discs you have copied
yourself with a storage capacity of more is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
than 700 MB. These CDs are not Warranty. Notes about MP3 mode
compatible with currently applicable Only use round discs with a diameter of
The single CD player and the CD changer can
standards. 12 cm.
play audio CDs as well as CDs with MP3/
Should excessively high or low temperatures WMA files.
! Do not affix stickers or labels to the CDs, occur while in CD changer mode, a message
they can become warped due to the heat will appear in the display, and the CD will be i Due to the branched data structure,
that develops in the CD drive or CD muted until the temperature has reached an playback of the first track may be delayed
changer. acceptable level for the system to continue slightly.
In certain situations, the CDs can then no operation. Permissible media for MP3/WMA files
longer be ejected and cause damage to the RCD-R
Tips on handling CDs
drive. Such damage is not covered by the
ROnly touch the CDs at the edges. RCD-RW
RHandle CDs carefully to prevent
interference during playback.
180
Controls in detail
Audio system
Permissible file systems 255 folders. Each folder can contain a Example of a correct track name:
RISO9660/Joliet for CDs maximum of 255 tracks and 255 folders. Track1.mp3
A data medium may contain a maximum of The audio system is unable to recognize an
Multisession CDs 500 tracks. MP3/WMA track if:
For multisession CDs, the first session type Rthere
Track and folder names is no period between the track title
of the CD determines how the audio system
When you create an MP3/WMA disc, you can and the extension
will process the CD.
For example, if the first session type is assign names to the MP3/WMA tracks and Rthere is no extension
according to the audio CD standard and the folders.
i The audio system does not support ID3
second session type is according to the data The audio system uses these names for the
corresponding display in MP3 mode. Empty tags.
CD standard containing MP3/WMA tracks,
the audio system will treat the CD as a folders or folders which contain data other Compatible file systems and compression
conventional audio CD. This means that it is than MP3/WMA tracks are not displayed by methods
only possible to access the audio CD tracks. the audio system. The following compression methods are
Access to the MP3/WMA tracks is not If MP3/WMA files are saved in the root compatible:
possible. directory itself (uppermost directory on
RMP3
Similarly, if the first session type is according storage medium), the root directory will also
to the data CD standard containing MP3/ be treated as a folder. The audio system will RWMA
WMA tracks and the second session type is then show the name of the root directory as
the folder name. i If music files created using different
according to the audio CD standard, the audio
You must observe the following when compression methods other than MP3 are
system will treat the CD as a data CD. This
assigning track names: stored together on a disc, the loading
means that it is only possible to access the
process may take longer.
MP3/WMA tracks. Access to the audio CD RTrack names must have at least one
tracks is not possible. character. Permissible MP3 formats
File structure on a disc RTrack names must have the extension The audio system supports the MPEG1 Audio
“mp3” or “wma”. Layer 3 format.
When you create an MP3/WMA disc, the
MP3/WMA tracks can be organized in RThere must be a period between the track i This format is generally known as “MP3”.
folders. A folder can also contain other name and the extension. Z
folders. A disc can contain a maximum of
181
Controls in detail
Audio system
Permissible bit and sampling rates RWMA Pro
RFixed and variable bit rates up to R5.1 Surround
320 kbit/s
Notes on copyright
RSampling rates of 24 kHz – 48 kHz
The music tracks that you create and play
i Only use MP3 tracks with a bit rate of at back in the MP3 and WMA format are
least 128 kbit/s or higher and a sampling generally subject to copyright protection in
rate of at least 44.1 kHz or higher. Smaller accordance with the applicable international
rates can cause a noticeable deterioration and national regulations.
in sound quality. This is especially the case In many countries, reproductions are not
if you have activated the surround sound permitted without the prior consent of the 1 CD slot
function. copyright holder, not even for private use. 2 Load/eject button
WMA (Windows Media Audio) Make sure you know the applicable copyright 3 Forward
regulations and that you comply with these.
Windows Media Audio (WMA) is an audio data 4 Rewind
compression technology developed by If you own these rights yourself, e. g. for your
Microsoft. own compositions and recordings, or the Single CD player
copyright holder has granted you permission, X Switching to CD mode: Press button
The audio system supports the following
these restrictions do not apply. é on the audio control unit.
types of audio files:
Rfixed bit rates of 5 kbit/s up to The CD display appears when you switch to
384 kbit/s Operating the CD player CD mode. CDs start to play automatically
Rsampling The single CD drive and the CD changer have when they are inserted. The following
rates from 8 kHz to 48 kHz
the same controls. message will appear if no CD is inserted.
The audio system does not support the
following WMA files:
RDRM (Digital Rights Management) coded
files
Rvariable bit rates
182
Controls in detail
Audio system
X Ejecting a CD: Press load/eject button CD if it has been inserted correctly and is
2. permissible.
The system ejects the CD. Please Remove
Disc appears in the display. CD changer
X Remove CD from CD slot 1. The CD changer can hold up to a total of six
NO Disc appears in the display. audio CDs.
X Switching to CD mode: Press button
i If you do not take the CD out of the CD é on the audio control unit.
slot 1 within approximately 15 seconds,
G Warning! The CD changer display appears when you
the system automatically pulls the CD back switch to CD changer mode. If there is a CD
In order to avoid distraction which could in and plays it.
lead to an accident, the driver should insert in one of the magazine trays, it will start to
or eject CDs with the vehicle at a standstill If you change modes (e. g. Radio) when the play automatically. The following message
and operate the audio system only if CD is being ejected, the CD will be will appear if no CDs are inserted.
permitted by road, weather and traffic reinserted automatically as well.
conditions. If a CD is pulled back in, press load/eject
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph button 2 again; the CD will then be
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is ejected.
i If the audio CD is printed on one side, this
side must face upwards when loaded. If
neither side is printed, the side to be played
! If a CD is already loaded, it must be
must face downwards.
ejected before inserting a new CD. G Warning!
Inserting a second CD in the slot with If a CD has been inserted incorrectly or
another CD still loaded will cause damage cannot be read, Disc Unreadable In order to avoid distraction which could
to the CD drive not covered by the appears in the display. lead to an accident, the driver should insert
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. or eject CDs with the vehicle at a standstill
X Loading a CD: Insert CD into CD slot 1. and operate the audio system only if
The system automatically pulls the CD into permitted by road, weather and traffic
the CD slot 1 and starts to play the audio Z
conditions.
183
Controls in detail
Audio system
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph i Only insert a CD after the audio system X Filling an empty magazine
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is has prompted you to do so with the compartment: Press load/eject button
covering a distance of 44 feet message Please Insert Disc <X>. Only 2.
(approximately 14 m) every second. insert one CD per magazine compartment. A menu indicates which magazine
compartments are currently loaded. The
X Insert CD into CD slot 1.
i If the audio CD is printed on one side, this first available magazine compartment is
The CD changer automatically pulls the CD indicated by a red number.
side must face upwards when loaded. If
into the CD slot 1 and places it in the
neither side is printed, the side to be played
selected magazine compartment. The
must face downwards.
message Loading Disc <X> appears in
If a CD has been inserted incorrectly or the display.
cannot be read, Disc Unreadable
appears in the display. i The loading process may take a while,
depending on the type of disc. If you do not
X Loading an individual magazine insert a disc, the display will switch back to
compartment: Press load/eject button the CD changer menu after approximately
2. 20 seconds.
A menu indicates which magazine X Slide mr to select the menu bar.
compartments are currently loaded. The X Press button é, or the load/eject X Slide omp or rotate ymz the audio
first available magazine compartment is button 2 on the audio control unit to finish controller to select Fill Empty Slots.
indicated by a red number. the loading process.
X Press the audio controller n.
X Press desired button 1 to 6, in the The CD changer plays the disc if it has been
inserted correctly and is permissible. The message Please Insert Disc <X>
keypad to select a magazine compartment. appears in the display.
or X Interrupting loading procedure: Press
X Slide omp or rotate ymz to select a the load/eject button again. i Only insert a CD after the audio system
magazine compartment. or has prompted you to do so with the
X Press n to confirm. X Press button í in the center console message Please Insert Disc <X>. Only
(Y page 159). insert one CD per magazine compartment.
The CD changer will switch to the selected
magazine compartment. The message
Please Wait... appears in the display.
184
Controls in detail
Audio system
X Insert CD into CD slot 1. Ejecting CDs from CD changer
The CD changer automatically pulls the CD
into the CD slot 1 and places it in an empty G Warning!
magazine compartment. The message In order to avoid distraction which could
Please Wait... appears in the display. If lead to an accident, the driver should insert
the CD is loaded, the CD changer will or eject CDs with the vehicle at a standstill
switch to the next empty magazine and operate the audio system only if
compartment. The message Please permitted by road, weather and traffic
Insert Disc <X> appears in the display. conditions.
X Press desired button 1 to 6, in the
X Repeat the steps until all compartments Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is keypad to select a magazine compartment.
have been loaded.
covering a distance of 44 feet or
X Press load/eject button 2 on the audio
(approximately 14 m) every second. X Slide omp or rotate ymz the audio
control unit to finish the loading process.
controller to select the desired CD.
The CD changer plays the last loaded disc
i If you eject a CD while another is being X Press n to confirm.
if it has been inserted correctly and is
permissible. played, the audio system interrupts X Remove the CD from CD slot.
playback. Playback will continue once the If you do not remove the CD from the CD
X Interrupting loading procedure: Press
CD has been ejected completely. slot, the CD changer will automatically pull
load/eject button 2 again.
X Ejecting one CD: Press load/eject button the CD back in after a short while.
or
X Press button í in the center console 2. i If audio source is changed during eject
(Y page 159). The magazine menu with active main area procedure (e. g. pressing button b) the
The loading process has not been appears in the audio display. The magazine eject procedure will be aborted and any
completed, the audio system will play the compartment with the current CD is CDs being ejected will be drawn back into
last inserted CD. highlighted. the unit.
X Ejecting all CDs: Press load/eject button
2.
The magazine menu with active main area
Z
appears in the audio display. The magazine
185
Controls in detail
Audio system
compartment with the current CD is CDs being ejected will be drawn back into Additional button functions
highlighted. the unit. In CD mode, you can use two additional
X Repeat the last step until the magazine is buttons on the telephone keypad:
empty. ô displays information about the track, if
this has been saved with the track on
Selecting a CD the CD.
ó enables you to enter the track number
X é £ Changer
directly.
The magazine menu with active main area
appears in the audio display. The magazine Example display in audio CD mode
compartment with the current CD is
X Slide mr to select the menu bar. highlighted.
X Slide omp or rotate ymz the audio X Slide omp or rotate ymz the audio
controller to select Eject All. controller to select the desired CD.
X Press n to confirm. X Press n to confirm.
The CDs are ejected one after the other.
X Remove the CD from CD slot. Playing CDs
The CD changer switches to the next
occupied magazine compartment and i The following section is valid for the single 1 Track number
ejects the CD. CD player and the CD changer. The
2 Track name (only if saved on the disc)
illustrations show the audio display of the
If you do not remove the CD from the CD 3 Elapsed track time
CD changer.
slot, the CD changer will automatically pull 4 Disc name (only if saved on the disc)
the CD back in after a short while.
5 Disc number (CD changer)
i If audio source is changed during eject 6 Disc type
procedure (e. g. pressing button b the
eject procedure will be aborted and any
186
Controls in detail
Audio system
Example display in MP3 mode Selecting a track i In MP3 mode, the list shows all the tracks
X Skipping forwards or backwards to a in alphabetical order.
track: Rotate ymz or slide omp. Fast forward/rewind
or X Select main area.
X Briefly press button G or H on audio
X Slide and hold omp until desired place is
control unit. reached.
i Skipping forwards through the tracks or
skips to the next track. Skipping backwards X Press and hold button G or H on
1 Track number through the tracks skips to the beginning audio control unit.
2 File name of the current track if the track has been
3 Elapsed track time playing for more than 8 seconds. If the Selecting a folder
track has been playing for less than i This function is only available in audio
4 Mode
8 seconds, it skips to the start of the
5 Folder name (only if saved on the disc) MP3 mode.
previous track. If you have switched on the
6 Disc number (CD changer) Random Tracks playback option, the order X é £ Folder.
7 Disc type of the tracks is random. or
Pause function X Selecting from the track list: é £ X Press n when the main area is selected.
X Pausing playback: Press button F Track List. The track list of the current folder appears.
or X Move to the superordinate folder: Select
briefly.
X Continuing playback: Press button F X Press n when the main area is selected. the Q symbol.
The track list appears. In MP3 mode, the The display now shows the next higher
again briefly.
track list of the current folder appears. The folder level.
dot R indicates the current track. X Selecting a folder: Slide qmr or rotate
X Select a track by rotating ymz or sliding ymz the audio controller, to select the
qmr. desired folder.
X Press n to confirm. Z
You will see the tracks in the folder.
187
Controls in detail
Audio system
i Due to the large amount of information X Selecting an option: é £ CD/MP3.
found on an MP3 disc it may take a while The option list appears. A dot R indicates
before all folder and track information which option is switched on.
becomes available. During this time the X Select an option and press n.
folder list may be unavailable or slow. The option is switched on. For all options
X Select a track by sliding qmr or rotating except Normal Track Sequence, you will
ymz the audio controller. see a corresponding indicator in the main
X Press n to confirm. area.
The track is played and the corresponding i The Normal Track Sequence option is
folder is now the active folder. automatically activated when you select a
different medium. If an option is activated, 1 AUX socket: Socket for 3.5 mm stereo
Playback options
it remains activated after the audio system jack, for devices with dedicated analog
The following options are available: is switched on/off. audio output or connection via
RNormal Track Sequence headphone port, e. g. MP3 or tape player
Tracks playback in the order on the disc
Audio AUX mode G Warning!
(e. g. track 1, 2, 3, etc.).
Only operate an external audio source
RRandom Tracks An external audio source can be connected
when the vehicle is stationary. There is a
Tracks playback in a random order (e. g. to the AUX socket of the audio system. The
risk of accident by being distracted from
track 3, 8, 5, etc.). AUX socket is located in the glove box. Please
road and traffic conditions if you operate an
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
RRandom Folder (in MP3 mode only) external audio source while the vehicle is in
for more information.
Tracks in the active folder and any motion.
subfolders playback in random order. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
188
Controls in detail
Audio system
Calling up AUX mode i The volume of external audio sources is Telephone
extremely variable. It is possible that a
G Warning! device connected as an external audio Safety precautions
Due to the different volumes of the external source will sound quieter or louder in the
audio sources, system messages of the G Warning!
vehicle or that the usual maximum volume
vehicle may be much louder. You may need cannot be achieved. On certain devices the Please do not forget that your primary
to disable these system messages or adjust volume can be set separately. In this case, responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A
the volume of these messages manually. start at a moderate volume and increase it driver’s attention to the road must always
slowly. In this way, you can determine be his/her primary focus when driving. For
X Selecting audio AUX mode: whether the system is capable of playback your safety and the safety of others, we
Press button é repeatedly until the without distortion, even at high volume. recommend that you pull over to a safe
main menu for AUX operation appears. location and stop before placing or taking
or a telephone call.
Switch back to CD mode
X In CD mode: Select CD/MP3 £ Aux. If you choose to use the mobile phone13
X Press button é. while driving, please use the hands-free
The audio AUX menu appears. The medium in or device and only use the mobile phone when
the external audio source is heard, provided
X Select Back To Disc in the audio AUX road, weather and traffic conditions permit.
it is connected and switched to playback.
menu. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
i Please refer to the relevant operating using a mobile phone while driving a
guide for operation of the external audio vehicle.
source. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
The following settings can be made in the (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
audio AUX mode: covering a distance of 44 feet
RVolume (Y page 163)
RBalance control and fader (Y page 164) G Warning!
RBass and treble control (Y page 163) Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e.
RSurround sound (Y page 164)
Z
13 Observe all legal requirements.
189
Controls in detail
Audio system
without being connected to an external mobile phone you are using. See also - Audio controller
antenna) from inside the vehicle while the separate operating manual of your mobile - Audio control unit
engine is running. Doing so could lead to a phone for instructions on how to use your
mobile phone. Rbuttons s and t on the
malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic
system, possibly resulting in an accident When the mobile phone is connected via the multifunction steering wheel (Y page 131)
and/or serious personal injury. Bluetooth® interface to the audio system, you Rmobile phone keypad
can operate the mobile phone using the Please note that these functions are only
i The functions and services available to following devices: available with Mercedes-Benz approved
you while using the mobile phone depend mobile phones.
Raudio system (Y page 201)
on your service provider and the type of
TEL Menu
Telephone Name Call lists

Microphone off/on
Bluetooth® Phones Phone book Call Lists or Mic On/Mic Off
Receive Business Card(s) (vCards) Delete Call Lists
Delete external data
General notes With a suitable mobile phone, you can use the are available at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
hands-free device and receive electronic Center.
Making calls via Bluetooth® interface business cards (vCards) via the Bluetooth®
The audio system telephone function via the interface.
Bluetooth® interface is available in Further information on suitable mobile
conjunction with a Bluetooth® enabled phones and on connecting Bluetooth®
mobile phone. enabled mobile phones to the audio system
190
Controls in detail
Audio system
Calls disconnected while the vehicle is in When the mobile phone is connected via the The head unit internal Bluetooth® transmitter
motion Bluetooth® interface to the audio system, you must not be co-located or operated in
Interruptions to the connection may occur if can operate the mobile phone using the conjunction with any other antenna or
Rthere
following devices: transmitter.
is insufficient mobile network
coverage. Rbuttons s and t and keypad on This equipment complies with FCC/IC
audio control unit radiation exposure limits set forth for
Ryou move from one mobile network uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC
transmitter/receiver area (mobile network Raudio controller in center console radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in
cell) into another and no channels are free Rmultifunction steering wheel Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the
or the cell is full. IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This
Please note that these functions are only
Ryou are using a SIM card that is not available with Mercedes-Benz approved equipment has very low levels of RF energy
compatible with the available network. mobile phones. Please contact an authorized that it is deemed to comply without testing of
Rwhen using a mobile phone with Mercedes-Benz Center for information on specific absorption ratio (SAR).
“Twincard”, the mobile phone is features available for your mobile phone of Unless otherwise indicated, the descriptions
simultaneously logged into the network choice. and illustrations in this section refer to audio
with the second SIM card. system.
i In order for the functions described in this
Operating options section to work correctly, the Bluetooth® Caller ID
telephone must be linked to the audio The audio system can display the telephone
i The components and operating principles system (Y page 166). Please make sure any number and the name of the caller, e. g. for
of the audio system can be found on other Bluetooth® device linked with the an incoming call and also in other menus or
(Y page 153) and (Y page 161). mobile phone is switched off before you displays.
use the telephone functions with the audio For the telephone number to be displayed,
system. the caller must transmit their telephone
Changes or modifications not expressly number. Otherwise Unknown will be shown on
approved by the party responsible for the audio display.
compliance could void the user’s authority to This is also the case for name displays. For
operate the equipment. this, the telephone number and the name of
Z
191
Controls in detail
Audio system
the caller must also be saved in the telephone Activating the mobile phone i On certain mobile phones, not only do you
book. have to activate the Bluetooth® function
Prerequisites for the mobile phone but your own device must additionally be
Functional restrictions For making calls using the audio system via made “visible” for other devices.
You will not be able to use the mobile phone, the Bluetooth® interface, you will need a Each Bluetooth® device has a Bluetooth®
or you may have to wait a while, in the Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone. device name. It is recommended to give
following situations:
Before attempting to make or receive calls via your mobile phone a personal name, by
RIf the mobile phone is switched off. the Bluetooth® interface, check your mobile which you can clearly recognize your
RIf the mobile phone is not connected via the phone’s hands-free profile. It must support mobile phone.
Bluetooth® interface to the audio system. version 1.0 or higher (see mobile phone
operating instructions). i If the Bluetooth® function on the audio
RThe mobile phone must not be locked. system is disabled, the message
i Not all mobile phones on the market are
RIf the mobile phone has not yet acquired a Bluetooth not activated in system
suitable. Further information on suitable
network signal. settings appears.
mobile phones and on connecting
The mobile phone automatically tries to log Bluetooth® enabled mobile phones to the X Activate Bluetooth® connection on the
into a network. If no network is available, audio system are available from an audio system (Y page 166).
you will also not be able to make a “911” authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. X ê £ System £ Activate
emergency call. If you attempt to make an
outgoing call, the No Service message will Activating Bluetooth® Bluetooth.
appear for a short while. You have activated or deactivated
X Switch on the mobile phone (see mobile
RIf
Bluetooth®. A checkmark appears when
you switch off the audio system in the phone operating instructions).
middle of a call, e. g. by switching off the Bluetooth® is activated.
X Enter the PIN (not necessary with some
ignition, that call will be cut off. You can mobile phones or network).
prevent this from happening as follows: X Activate Bluetooth® connection on the
Registering a mobile phone
- Switch the mobile phone to “private (authorizing)
mobile phone (see mobile phone operating
mode” before switching the audio instructions). When you use your mobile phone in
system off (see mobile phone operating X Press button h on the audio control unit conjunction with the audio system for the first
instructions). time, you must register (authorize) it.
to call up the telephone mode.
192
Controls in detail
Audio system
It is possible to register up to 15 mobile search again. Otherwise a new device you to the instructions in the mobile phone
phone. The connection is always established are looking for will not appear in the list. operating guide.
to the last activated mobile phones in signal If the audio system does not find your On the audio system, you can enter the
range. When you authorize a new mobile mobile phone, external authorization may passcode via the digits in the on-screen menu
phone, it is activated automatically. You can be necessary (Y page 194). bar or via the telephone keypad in the audio
switch between the authorized mobile control unit.
phones. Authorizing a Bluetooth® device
With the audio controller:
X Select the desired unauthorized device
Searching for a mobile phone X Entering passcode: Select the digits in the
from the telephone list by pushing the
X h £ Tel £ Bluetooth Phones menu bar one by one, by sliding omp or
audio controller.
£ Update. or rotating ymz the audio controller.
The audio system searches for suitable X Select Options £ Authorize. X Press n to confirm each digit.
Bluetooth® telephones within range and X Confirming passcode: Select d in the
The input menu for the passcode appears.
enters them in the telephone list.
menu bar and press n to confirm.
Authorized Bluetooth® telephones will be X Deleting digits: Select õ in the menu
identified by a telephone-symbol ¿ in front
bar and briefly press n to delete one digit,
of the list entry once the telephone list has
or press and hold n to delete all entered
been updated (The symbol will be grayed
out if the authorized mobile phone is not digits.
X Canceling entry: Press button í in the
located in the Bluetooth® range.).
center console (Y page 159).
i The duration of the search procedure
depends on the number and type of With keypad on audio control unit:
Bluetooth® telephones. The search may i The passcode is any one- to sixteen-digit X Entering passcode: Press the desired
take a few minutes. number, which you can set yourself. For the numbers on the keypad.
quality of coding of the connection it is X Confirming passcode: Press button
i If the telephone list is already full recommend to use a passcode of at least s or button ô in the audio control
(15 entries), you must de-authorize one of four digits. You must enter the same
unit to confirm.
the authorized devices, and start the number in the audio system and also in the Z
device to be authorized. Please also refer
193
Controls in detail
Audio system
X Deleting digits: Briefly press button External authorization X Select Options £ Details.
î in the audio control unit to delete one If the audio system cannot find your mobile The details screen for the device is shown
number, or press and hold button î to phone, this may be due to special security in the audio display.
delete all entered numbers. settings on your mobile phone. In this case, X Closing details screen: Slide omp, rotate
X Canceling entry: Press button í in the you can check whether, conversely, your ymz or press n, or press button í.
center console (Y page 159). mobile phone can find the audio system. The
audio system’s Bluetooth® device name is De-authorizing a Bluetooth® device
Entering passcode into the mobile “MB Bluetooth”. X h £ Tel £ Bluetooth Phones.
phone X h £ Tel £ Bluetooth Phones X Select authorized device.
£ Update £ Options £ External X Select Options £ De-Authorize.
If a Bluetooth® connection is established
Authorization. A prompt appears asking whether you
successfully, you will be prompted to enter a
The message Ready for External really want to de-authorize this device.
code into the mobile phone (see the operating
Authorization appears. X Select Yes or No.
instructions for the mobile phone).
X Start Bluetooth® search procedure on the
X Enter the same passcode on the mobile If you select Yes, the device will be de-
mobile phone (see the operating authorized.
phone as you did on the audio system.
instructions for the mobile phone).
i You may need to enter a confirmation X Select the audio system (“MB Bluetooth”) i If you de-authorize a device which has
once you have entered the passcode on at your mobile phone. been authorized in the past and which is not
your mobile phone. Check your mobile X When prompted to do so, enter the
detected in the search, this device will no
phone display. passcode on the mobile phone and then on longer be displayed in the device list.
If the message Authorization the audio system. Devices which have been authorized in the
Procedure Unsuccessful appears on the past but which are not detected in the
audio system display, you may have Displaying details on a mobile phone search are either not switched on or not in
exceeded the preset period for X h £ Tel £ Bluetooth Phones. the vehicle.
authorization. Repeat the process. X Select the mobile phone from the list. Activating another mobile phone
The device is authorized. You can now make If you have several authorized mobile phones,
calls via the audio system hands-free device you can switch between the individual mobile
using the authorized mobile phone. phones.
194
Controls in detail
Audio system
i You cannot switch to another authorized When the connected mobile phone is ready RREADY indicates that a call is possible.
mobile phone during a call. for operation, the display will look like this: RNO SERVICE indicates that the mobile
When you authorize a new mobile phone, it is network is not available.
automatically activated. Only one mobile
phone can be active at a time. Setting transmit and receive volume
X h £ Tel £ Bluetooth Phones.
i These settings should normally not be
X Select an authorized mobile phone from
changed as the factory settings are
the list. matched to most mobile phones. Find out
X Press n to confirm. about the optimum settings for your mobile
The selected mobile phone will be searched phone at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
The following information is displayed in the
for and connected if it is located in the Center.
status bar:
Bluetooth® range and Bluetooth® is
activated on the corresponding device. RActual time: 04:38 i Changes may result in significant
The selected mobile phone is activated. RBluetooth® device name of the connected impairments to the transmission quality.
A dot R in front of the entry, indicates the mobile phone, in this case: blue_mobile These settings may not be changed during
an active phone call.
current active mobile phone in the phone RMobile phone network signal strength
list. I. This information will only be shown X h £ Tel £ Bluetooth Phones.
with suitable mobile phones. X Select a mobile phone from the list.
Receiving business cards
The bars indicate the current signal X Select Options £ Reception Volume or
You can import business cards (vCards) into
strength of the mobile phone network for Transmission Volume.
the address book from external Bluetooth® reception. Optimum reception is indicated
devices (Y page 197). X Setting the volume: Slide qmr or rotate
by all bars full. All bars empty indicates very
ymz the audio controller.
poor or no reception.
TEL-Basic display The volume bar moves up or down.
RReceiver symbol s or t. The X Exiting menu: Press n or slide omp the
X Press button h on the audio control unit receiver symbol indicates whether a call is audio controller or press button í.
to call up the telephone mode. being connected or is in progress:
Z
t - not active
195
Controls in detail
Audio system
Emergency calls “911” services and/or telephone functions are call on the mobile phone itself, without the
active. Check with your local service use of the audio control unit.
i The “911” emergency call system is a providers.
public service. Using it without due cause Placing a “911” emergency call with the
is a criminal offense. If you cannot make an emergency call, you mobile phone locked
will have to initiate rescue measures yourself.
i If the mobile phone is locked, you only can
i This function places a call to the local
GSM network phones make an emergency call on the mobile
“911” provider. It does not initiate a Tele
phone itself, without the use of the audio
Aid call.
Placing a “911” emergency call using control unit.
The following describes how to dial a “911” audio control unit with the mobile phone
emergency call using the audio system head unlocked CDMA network phones
unit when a Mercedes-Benz specified mobile
X Press button h to switch to telephone
phone is connected via the Bluetooth® Placing a “911” emergency call using
mode. audio control unit with the mobile phone
interface to the audio system. Unless
X Enter 911 using the number keypad on the unlocked
otherwise specified, the descriptions refer to
the audio system head unit. audio control unit.
X Press button h to switch to telephone
X Press button s.
Consult the separate mobile phone operating mode.
instructions that came with your mobile or X Enter 911 using the number keypad on the
phone for information on how to place a X Press n for dialing to begin. audio control unit.
“911” emergency call on the mobile phone. Connecting... appears in the audio X Press button s.
The following conditions must be met for a display while the mobile phone establishes
or
“911” emergency call via the audio system: the connection.
X Press n for dialing to begin.
RMobile phone must be switched on. X Wait until the emergency call center
answers, then describe the emergency. Connecting... appears in the audio
RThe corresponding mobile display while the mobile phone establishes
communications network must be i If no SIM card is in the mobile phone, with the connection.
available. a few types of mobile phones NO X Wait until the emergency call center
i Emergency calls may not be possible with SERVICE appears in the audio display. In answers, then describe the emergency.
all telephone networks or if certain network that case, you only can make an emergency
196
Controls in detail
Audio system
Placing a “911” emergency call with the operating instructions for the mobile X Ending reception: Press n.
mobile phone locked phone). or
i If the mobile phone is locked, you only can RThe external Bluetooth® phone in the X Press button í in the center console
make an emergency call on the mobile vehicle must be switched on and (Y page 159).
phone itself, without the use of the audio authorized.
control unit. Deleting external Data
i If you switch to a different mode while
vCards are being received (e. g., press X h £ Tel £ Delete External
Phone book button b), reception of vCards will be Data.
You can save telephone numbers in the audio aborted. A prompt appears asking whether the data
system’s phone book. X h £ Tel £ Receive Business should be deleted.
X Select Yes or No.
i These entries are retained even if you use Cards.
the audio system with another mobile X Press n to confirm.
If you select Yes all personal data are then
phone. You should delete these entries deleted from the phone book.
X Wait until the message Ready to Receive
before handing over or selling your vehicle. - Received: 0 appears.
Opening the phone book
X Importing: Start the data transfer on the
Receiving business cards (vCards) X h £ Name.
external Bluetooth® phone (“Export
You can import business cards (vCards) from business cards (vCards)”, see the operating Entries in the phone book are displayed in
external Bluetooth® phones into your audio instructions for the mobile phone). alphabetical order. The search speller is
system’s phone book. To do this: The audio system imports the data for the active when more multiple entries are
RBluetooth® business cards and displays the number of available. The search speller appears on
must be activated on the audio the lower edge of the display.
business cards received.
system and on the external Bluetooth®
You can use the search speller to reduce the
phone (see the operating instructions for i Select Back or switch to a different mode number of entries you need to make.
the mobile phone). to abort reception.
RThe external Bluetooth® phone must be
able to send vCards via Bluetooth® (see the
Z
197
Controls in detail
Audio system
characters or numbers with special X Select the characters for the required entry
characters. one after another.
X Entering characters: Slide omp or rotate As soon as the selection has been
ymz the audio controller to select the narrowed down to a single entry, the audio
characters for the required entry. system will switch to the list automatically.
The first letters you enter determine the X Deleting an individual character: Select
first letters of the word you are looking for. õ and briefly press n.
X Press n to confirm. or
Symbol + indicates that an entry contains The first entry containing the selected X Press button î next to the audio
more than one phone number. You can select initial letters is highlighted in the list. If controller.
these subentries (Y page 199). there are a number of similar entries, the After entering each character or after each
X Switching from the search speller to the next different character is displayed. deletion of a character, the closest
list: Slide qm repeatedly. Example: matching entry is given at the top of the list.
or In the example, the first letters of the names X Deleting an entire entry: Select õ and
X Select d. Fisher, Bob and Fisher, Kim are the press and hold n until the entire entry has
same. The first possible distinct letter is the been deleted.
X Switching from the list to the search
B or the K. or
speller: Press button í.
Therefore, B and K are offered as possibilities. X Press and hold button î until the entire
Selecting an entry entry has been deleted.

X Ending search: Switch from the search
Selecting via search speller speller to the list.
X Switch if necessary from the list to the The top list entry is highlighted
search speller. automatically.
X Switching search speller character
Selecting via list
set: Select #.
X Switch if necessary from the search speller
Depending on the previous setting, this
switches it to letters with special to the list.
198
Controls in detail
Audio system
X Select Details.
A popup screen with the details of the
selected entry appears.
X Closing popup screen: Slide qmr, omp,
rotate ymz, press n, or press button
î or í.
1 Phone book entry with subentries

Deleting entry
Phone book list
Entries with symbol 1 have additional X Select entry.
X Slide qmr or rotate ymz the audio
options available, e. g. more phone numbers. X Slide mp to select Options.
controller until the desired subentry is
X Slide qmr or rotate ymz the audio highlighted. X Press n to confirm.
controller until the desired entry is X Press n to confirm and a call will be X Select Delete.
highlighted. initiated. You will be prompted to confirm that you
X Press n to confirm and a call will be really want to delete the entry.
initiated. Displaying details on an entry X Select Yes or No.
If you select Yes the actual entry is deleted
Selecting subentries The audio system can also fully display an from the phone book.
X Select an entry with the symbol + from abbreviated entry.
the list and press n. X Select entry.
Symbol + changes to / and the X Slide mp to select Options.
subentries appear. X Press n to confirm.
199
Controls in detail
Audio system
Call lists Deleting call lists
The audio system displays the calls received i The saved call lists are retained in the
(including missed calls) or made during phone audio system, even if you use the audio
mode in their own lists. system with another mobile phone. For this
i The particular menu item can only be reason you should delete any call lists
before handing over or selling the vehicle.
selected if calls have already been received
or made from audio system. X In the phone main menu select Call
The display of missed calls in the audio Lists.
i If there is a symbol with a telephone
system display is not possible with all X Select Delete Call Lists.
receiver in front of the phone number or the
mobile phones. You will be prompted to confirm that you
name, then you have missed this call (e. g.
The control system displays the list of in the highlighted line of the following really want to delete the entry. The
dialed numbers in the multifunction figure). question Do you want to delete the
display. call lists appears in the display.
X Select Yes or No.
i The audio system’s call lists are not
synchronized with the call lists on your
mobile phone. If you make a call from your If you select Yes both lists are deleted.
mobile phone and only use the audio
system’s hands-free device, these calls will
not be listed.
Calling up the list

X Slide qmr or rotate ymz the audio
X h £ Call Lists. controller until the desired entry is
X Select Calls Received or Calls highlighted.
Dialed. X Initiating call: Press button n or s.
The appropriate list appears. X To close the lists: Press button í.
200
Controls in detail
Audio system
Making calls character by pressing button ó once X Entering digits: Slide omp or rotate
and then again within approx. 1.5 seconds. ymz the audio controller to select the
X Press button h on the audio control unit
X Initiating a call: Press button s. required digit.
to call up the telephone mode.
X Deleting individual digits: Briefly press X Press n to confirm.
When the mobile phone is ready for
button î in the audio control unit. X Repeat the procedure, until you have select
operation, the display will look like this:
X Deleting an entire entry: Press and hold all digits for the necessary phone number.
button î until the entire entry has been X Deleting individual digits: Slide omp or
deleted. rotate ymz to select õ and briefly press
or n.
X Press button t. or
X Press button î next to the audio
Entering phone number via the audio controller.
controller X Deleting entire phone number: Slide
In addition to the actual menu bar, the omp or rotate ymz to select õ, press
Initiating an outgoing call telephone main menu features a second bar and hold n until the phone number has
containing numbers, the number menu.
Entering phone number via the audio been deleted.
When the bar is active (highlighted), you can
control unit or
select elements.
You can enter numbers and special X Press and hold button î until the entire
characters via the telephone keypad. entry has been deleted.

X Entering: Use R to 9, ô and or
ó to enter characters. X Press button t.
You can enter the * character by pressing X Initiating a call: Slide omp or rotate
button ó once. You can enter the + ymz the audio controller to select ö.
or
X Press button s. Z
201
Controls in detail
Audio system
Initiating a call to a phone book entry X Press button s. i Depending on the mobile phone you are
X h £ Name. or using, the audio system’s ringing tone may
X Select ö and press n. differ from the one you have set on your
X Select entry (Y page 198).
mobile phone. You may hear
X Press button s or n. The dialed calls list appears. The call dialed
last will be at the top of the list. Rthe ringing tone set on the mobile phone
Initiating a call to a call list entry X Selecting a call: Slide qmr or rotate Rthe audio system’s preset ringing tone
X h £ Call Lists. ymz the audio controller until the desired Rthe audio system’s preset ringing tone
X Select Calls Received or Calls entry is highlighted. and the ringing tone set on the mobile
X Initiating call: Press button s or n. phone.
Dialed.
The appropriate list appears. If the caller’s name and number are among
X Select entry (Y page 200). Aborting dialing or ending a call the entries in the audio system’s phone book
X Press button s or n. X h £ 4 and press n. and the caller has not withheld this
or information, it will appear on the display. If
Redialing the caller withholds this information, you will
X Press button t on the audio control unit see:
or on the multifunction steering wheel.
Rejecting or accepting calls

You will be notified of an incoming call by the
ringing tone and a message on the display.
i In order to use the redial function, no

numbers may have been entered.
202
Controls in detail
Audio system
X Accepting: Press button s on audio Functions during a single call X Transmitting individual characters:
control unit or on the multifunction steering During a call select the required
wheel. Switching hands-free microphone on or characters.
or off or
X Press n. The menu bar changes when you make or X Press the corresponding button on the
X Rejecting: Press button t on audio receive a call. Instead of the Call Lists audio control unit.
control unit. menu item, Mic Off or Mic On will appear. Every selected character is transmitted
X Switching off: Select Mic Off. immediately.
or
The following message will flash up on the X Transmitting a phone number of a
X Slide om or rotate ymz the audio
display: The microphone is off. phone book entry as a sequence of
controller to select Reject, and press n characters: Select Name.
to confirm. When the microphone is switched off the
symbol > appears in the main area. X Select the desired phone book entry.
The call is rejected.
X Switching on: Select Mic On.
The entry is transmitted immediately as a
If you have accepted the call using the audio sequence of characters.
control unit, audio controller, or the The following message will flash up on the
X Switching back to call display: Select
multifunction steering wheel, the call will be display: The microphone is on.
conducted via the hands-free system. The Back.
The microphone is switched on and the
volume of the call can be adjusted symbol > disappears in the main area.
(Y page 163).
i You can also switch the microphone on or
Further operating functions can be found in
the “Functions during a single-call” section off by pressing button F.
(Y page 203).
You can also accept a call if the audio display
Sending DTMF tones
is showing a screen other than the telephone i This function is not possible with all
mode screen. After accepting the call, the mobile phones.
display switches to the phone display. Once
the call is over, the display for the previous Answering machines or other devices can be
mode will appear again. controlled via DTMF tones, e. g. for remote
query functions. Z
203
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Driving systems the vehicle maximum speed in the traffic because conditions do not allow
multifunction display are illuminated. safe driving at a constant speed.
Introduction
RThe use of the cruise control can be
This section describes the following driving dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid
systems of your vehicle: changes in tire traction can result in
RCruise control wheel spin and loss of control.
RHill start assist system RDeactivate the cruise control when
RAll-wheel
driving in fog.
drive (4MATIC)
RDynamic
The “Resume” function should only be
handling package with sport
operated if the driver is fully aware of the
driving mode, Canada only
previously set speed and wishes to resume
The ABS, Adaptive Brake, BAS, EBP and this particular preset speed.
ESP® driving safety systems are described in 1 Cruise control speed segments
the “Safety and security” section G Warning!
G Warning!
(Y page 66). The cruise control brakes automatically so
The cruise control is a convenience system
that the set speed is not exceeded. The
designed to assist the driver during vehicle
brake pedal depresses automatically when
Cruise control operation. The driver is and must always
the cruise control engages the brakes.
The cruise control automatically maintains remain responsible for the vehicle’s speed
and for safe brake operation. Keep the driver’s footwell clear at all times,
the speed you set for your vehicle. including the area under the brake pedal.
The use of the cruise control is recommended Only use the cruise control if the road,
Objects stored in this area may impair
for driving at a constant speed for extended traffic, and weather conditions make it
pedal movement which could interfere with
periods of time. advisable to travel at a constant speed.
the braking ability of the cruise control
RThe use of the cruise control can be
The currently set speed or last set speed system.
(“Resume” function) appears in the dangerous on winding roads or in heavy
Do not place your foot under the brake
multifunction display for approximately pedal – your foot could become caught.
5 seconds. The corresponding cruise control
speed segments from the selected speed to
204
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Rwhen the automatic transmission is in park In addition, on longer downhill grades the
position P, reverse gear R, or neutral automatic transmission will downshift
position N automatically.
Rthe ESP® is switched off or has switched off
i Vehicles with manual transmission:
due to a malfunction If you depress the clutch pedal when
The vehicle speed displayed in the shifting into another gear, the engine speed
speedometer can briefly vary from the speed may increase.
setting for the cruise control system. RAlways drive with sufficient, but not
excessive, engine speed.
Setting current speed
1 Setting current or higher speed RShift the gear in a timely manner.
X Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
2 Setting current or lower speed RAvoid shifting down more than one gear
speed.
3 Canceling the cruise control if at all possible.
X Briefly lift the cruise control lever in
4 Activating the cruise control or resuming
direction of arrow 1 or press in direction
to last set speed
of arrow 2.
Canceling cruise control
X Remove your foot from the accelerator X Depress the brake pedal.
Activating cruise control
pedal. or
You can activate the cruise control at a X Briefly push the cruise control lever in
vehicle speed above 20 mph (30 km/h). i On uphill grades, the cruise control may
direction of arrow 3.
not be able to maintain the set speed. Once
You cannot activate the cruise control: The last set speed is stored for later use.
the grade eases, the set speed will be
Rwhen you brake resumed. The last stored speed is deleted from memory
Rwhen you have engaged the parking brake On downhill grades, the cruise control when the engine is turned off.
maintains the set speed by braking with the The cruise control switches off automatically
vehicle’s brake system. when you depress the brake pedal or you
Vehicles with automatic transmission: engage the parking brake. In this case, the
cruise control speed segments in the
multifunction display will go out. Z
205
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The cruise control also switches off Changing the set speed X Briefly lift the cruise control lever up to the
automatically when resistance point in direction of arrow 1 to
G Warning! increase or press the cruise control lever
Rthe vehicle speed falls below 20 mph
Keep in mind that it may take a brief down to the resistance point in direction of
(30 km/h)
moment until the vehicle has made the arrow 2 to decrease.
Rthe ESP® is in operation necessary adjustments. X Release the cruise control lever.
Rthe ESP® is switched off with the ESP® Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed The new speed is set and the vehicle will
switch to a value that the prevailing road accelerate or decelerate.
conditions and legal speed limits permit.
Rthe ESP® has switched off due to a Otherwise, sudden and unexpected Adjustment in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h)
malfunction acceleration or deceleration of the vehicle increments
RVehicles with manual transmission: you could cause an accident and/or serious
i The set speed value is increased or
engage neutral or depress the clutch pedal injury to you and others.
decreased in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h)
for more than 6 seconds during shifting into
You can increase or decrease the set speed increments each time you lift or press the
another gear
in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments or in cruise control lever up or down past the
RVehicles with automatic transmission: you resistance point.
5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) increments.
shift the automatic transmission into
When you use the cruise control lever to X Briefly lift the cruise control lever up past
neutral position N while driving
decelerate, the brake system will brake the the resistance point in direction of arrow
The cruise control speed segments in the vehicle automatically if the engine’s braking 1 to increase or press the cruise control
multifunction display goes out and an power does not brake the vehicle sufficiently. lever down past the resistance point in
acoustic warning will sound. Observe
Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) direction of arrow 2 to decrease.
additional messages in the multifunction
increments X Release the cruise control lever.
display that may appear.
The new speed is set and the vehicle will
Depressing the accelerator pedal does not i The set speed value is increased or
accelerate or decelerate. Keep in mind that
deactivate the cruise control. After a brief decreased in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h)
it may take a brief moment until the vehicle
acceleration (e.g. for passing), the cruise increments each time you lift or press the
has reached the set speed.
control will resume the last set speed. cruise control lever up or down to the
resistance point.
206
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Resume last stored speed Hill start assist system X Automatic transmission: Shift into drive
position D or reverse position R.
G Warning! G Warning! X Release the brake pedal.
The set speed stored in memory should The hill start assist system is not designed X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.
only be set again if prevailing road to function as a parking brake and does not
conditions and legal speed limits permit. prevent the vehicle from moving when The hill start assist system is inactive
Possible acceleration or deceleration parked on an incline. Rwhen starting off on a level road or downhill
differences arising from returning to the Always engage the parking brake in grades
preset speed could cause an accident and/ addition to shifting the automatic Rwith the automatic transmission in neutral
or serious injury to you and others. transmission into park position P (manual position N
transmission: shift into 1st gear or reverse Rwith
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever in the parking brake engaged
gear R).
direction of arrow 4. Rif the ESP® has switched off due to a
If no speed is stored, the current speed is On uphill grades with a gradient angle of more malfunction
set and stored. than 5°, the hill start assist system maintains
X Remove your foot from the accelerator the pressure in the brake system for
pedal. approximately 1 second after you have All-wheel drive (4MATIC)
The last stored speed is deleted from memory released the brake pedal. Therefore, you can
Your vehicle is equipped with all-wheel drive
when the engine is turned off. start off smoothly without the vehicle moving
(4MATIC). Both, the front and rear axles, are
immediately after releasing the brake pedal.
powered at all times when the vehicle is being
X Depress the brake pedal. operated. The 4MATIC improves traction in
X Manual transmission: Shift into 1st gear conjunction with the ESP® (Y page 68) and
or reverse gear R. the Electronic Traction System (ETS/4-ETS)
X Slowly release the clutch pedal, removing (Y page 69).
your foot from the brake pedal at the same
time, and carefully depress the accelerator
pedal.
Z
207
Controls in detail
Driving systems
G Warning! not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited programs” (Y page 124). The automatic
If a drive wheel is spinning due to Warranty. transmission with dynamic handling package
insufficient traction: with sport driving mode contains additional
i In winter operation, the maximum steering wheel gearshift controls, see “One-
RWhile driving off, apply as little throttle as effectiveness of the 4MATIC is only touch gearshifting” (Y page 125).
possible. achieved with winter tires (Y page 284) or
RWhile driving, ease up on the accelerator snow chains as required.
pedal.
RAdapt your speed and driving style to the Dynamic handling package with sport
prevailing road conditions. driving mode
Failure to observe these guidelines could This feature is only available in Canada
cause the vehicle to skid. vehicles.
The 4MATIC cannot prevent accidents The most important part of the dynamic
resulting from excessive speed. handling package with sport driving mode is
the variable damping system. It adjusts
! Do not tow with one axle raised. Doing so damping to the respective driving condition 1 Indicator lamp
could damage the transfer case, which is automatically. 2 Sport driving mode button
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited The damping adjustment depends on
Warranty. All wheels must be on or off the X Start the engine.
Ryour driving style
ground. Observe instructions for towing the The settings remain stored until you turn off
vehicle with all wheels on the ground. Rthe road condition the engine.
Ryour individual selection, see the following
! Only conduct operational or performance Sporty damping adjustment
description
tests on a two-axle dynamometer. If such
tests are necessary, contact an authorized Vehicles with automatic transmission: The The firmer suspension tuning in a sport
Mercedes-Benz Center. You could sport driving mode button selects the driving mode provides enhanced road
otherwise seriously damage the brake automatic shift programs C/S. For contact. Select this mode for sporty driving
system and/or the transfer case which is information on the automatic shift programs, style, for example on winding highways.
see “Automatic shift
208
Controls in detail
Driving systems
X Press button 2. displayed in the multifunction display more comfortable driving style on straight
Indicator lamp 1 comes on. The sporty (Y page 125). freeways.
suspension tuning is selected. Depending X Press button 2.
on engine version, the accelerator pedal Comfort damping adjustment Indicator lamp 1 goes out. The
may respond more immediate. In vehicles comfortable suspension tuning is selected.
with automatic transmission, automatic Vehicle handling in comfort driving mode is
softer. Select this mode when you prefer a In vehicles with automatic transmission,
program mode S is selected and will be automatic program mode C is selected and
will be displayed in the multifunction
display (Y page 125).
209
Controls in detail
Climate control system

Overview of climate control system functions
Your vehicle is equipped with either of the following climate control systems:
Dual-zone automatic climate control 3-zone automatic climate control Rear climate control
Canada only Canada only

The dual-zone automatic climate control The 3-zone automatic climate control The rear climate control allows separate
combines an automatic heating and combines an automatic heating and climate settings for the rear compartment.
ventilation system with a cooling system. You ventilation system with a cooling system. You
can adjust the dual-zone automatic climate can adjust the 3-zone automatic climate
control separately for the driver’s and control separately for each zone in the
passenger side. vehicle.
210
Controls in detail

Control panels
Dual-zone automatic climate control
Function Recommendation/Notes
1 Temperature control, driver’s side i Set the temperature to 72‡ (22†). (Y page 217)
2 ´ Climate control on/off i Switches on the climate control system. Display (Y page 216)
b comes on.
3 MAX COOL on/off (USA only) (Y page 220)
z Adopting driver’s side settings for all zones
(Canada only) Z
211
Controls in detail

4 2 AC cooling on/off i Switches on the air conditioning. The indicator lamp (Y page 216)
in button 2 comes on.
5 y Front defroster i Keep this setting selected only until the windshield (Y page 220)
or the side windows are clear again.
6 Temperature control, passenger side i Set the temperature to 72‡ (22†). (Y page 217)
7 , Air recirculation i Only use this function for a short time, e.g. in a (Y page 221)
tunnel. Otherwise, the windows can fog up due to lack
of fresh air.
8 ¯ Rear window defroster i At very low temperatures, rear window defroster (Y page 222)
operation is delayed until the vehicle interior has
warmed up.
9 Q Increasing air volume (Y page 220)
a ß Decreasing air volume (Y page 220)
b Display
c Z Air distribution (Y page 219)
d U Air distribution and air volume (automatic mode) i Switches on the automatic mode. The indicator (Y page 216)
lamp in button U comes on.
212
Controls in detail

3-zone automatic climate control
Canada only
1 Temperature control, driver’s side i Set the temperature to 72‡ (22†). (Y page 217)
2 U Air distribution and air volume (automatic mode) i Switches on the automatic mode. The indicator (Y page 216)
lamp in button U comes on.
3 ´ Climate control on/off i Switches on the climate control system. Display (Y page 216)
d comes on.
4 z Adopting driver’s side settings for passenger side (Y page 222)
Z
213
Controls in detail

5 2 AC cooling on/off i Switches on the air conditioning. The indicator lamp (Y page 216)
in button 2 comes on.
6 T Residual heat/ventilation i With the engine turned off, it is possible to continue (Y page 221)
to heat or ventilate the interior.
7 y Front defroster i Keep this setting selected only until the windshield (Y page 220)
or the side windows are clear again.
8 Temperature control, passenger side i Set the temperature to 72‡ (22†). (Y page 217)
9 ¯ Rear window defroster i At very low temperatures, rear window defroster (Y page 222)
operation is delayed until the vehicle interior has
warmed up.
a Z Air distribution, passenger side (Y page 219)
b Q Increasing air volume (Y page 220)
c ß Decreasing air volume (Y page 220)
d Display
e Z Air distribution, driver’s side (Y page 219)
f , Air recirculation i Only use this function for a short time, e.g. in a (Y page 221)
tunnel. Otherwise, the windows can fog up due to lack
of fresh air.
214
Controls in detail

Rear climate control Notes on climate control system G Warning!
The climate control system is operational Follow the recommended settings for
whenever the engine is running. You can heating and cooling given on the following
operate the climate control system in either pages. Otherwise the windows could fog
the automatic or manual mode. The system up, impairing visibility and endangering you
cools or heats the interior depending on the and others.
selected interior temperature and the current
X Keep the air intake grille in front of the
outside temperature.
windshield free of snow and debris.
It can only function optimally when you are
driving with the windows and the tilt/sliding Do not obstruct air flow by placing objects on
sunroof closed. the air flow-through exhaust slots below the
rear window.
1Á Temperature control, raising Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and odors
are filtered out before outside air enters the i If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the
2 Display
passenger compartment through the air interior before driving off, see “Summer
3Q Increasing air volume
distribution system. opening feature” (Y page 111). The climate
4· Decreasing air volume control will then adjust the interior
G Warning!
5Â Temperature control, lowering temperature to the set value much faster.
Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution)
may require replacement of the filter before
its scheduled replacement interval. A
clogged filter will reduce the air volume to
the interior and the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you
and others. Have a clogged filter replaced
as soon as possible at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
The air conditioning will not engage (no
cooling) if the A/C mode (Y page 216) is Z
deactivated.
215
Controls in detail

Deactivating the climate control Air conditioning The cooling function switches off after a
system short delay.
The air conditioning is operational while the
G Warning! engine is running and cools the interior air to
Activating
When the climate control system is the temperature set by the operator. In
switched off, the outside air supply and addition, the air conditioning dehumidifies Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
circulation are also switched off. Only the interior air and helps prevent window dehumidify the interior air with the air
choose this setting for a short time. fogging. conditioning.
Otherwise the windows could fog up, G Warning! X Press button 2.
impairing visibility and endangering you If you switch off the cooling function, the The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
and others. vehicle will not be cooled when weather The air conditioning uses the refrigerant
conditions are warm. The windows can fog R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs which
X Deactivating: Press button ´. up more quickly. Window fogging may are harmful to the ozone layer.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on. impair visibility and endanger you and
X Reactivating: Press button ´. others.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out. Automatic mode
The previous settings are once again in i Condensation may drip out from When operating the climate control system in
effect. underneath the vehicle. This is normal and automatic mode, the interior air temperature,
or not an indication of a malfunction. air volume and air distribution are adjusted
X Press button U. automatically.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on. Deactivating In automatic mode, cooling with
Air volume and air distribution are adjusted It is possible to deactivate the air dehumidification is switched on. This function
automatically. conditioning. The interior air will then no can be switched off if necessary.
longer be cooled or dehumidified. G Warning!
X Press button 2. If you switch off the cooling function, the
The indicator lamp in the button goes out. vehicle will not be cooled when weather
conditions are warm. The windows can fog
up more quickly. Window fogging may
216
Controls in detail

impair visibility and endanger you and X Deactivating: Press button U. i If you turn the temperature control fully
others. The indicator lamp in the button goes out. clockwise for one side of the vehicle, you
The automatic operation of air volume and are increasing the temperature for the
Dual-zone automatic climate control air distribution switches off. The symbols of other side of the vehicle as well.
air distribution and air volume appear in If you turn the temperature control fully
X Set the desired temperature display d (Y page 213). counterclockwise for one side of the
(Y page 217).
X Adjust air distribution (Y page 219). vehicle, you are decreasing the
X Activating: Press button U. temperature for the other side of the
X Adjust air volume (Y page 220).
The indicator lamp in the button comes on. vehicle as well.
The air volume and air distribution are
adjusted automatically. Setting temperature Rear climate control panel
X Deactivating: Press button U.
You can adjust the air temperature on each You can adjust the air temperature on each
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
side of the passenger compartment. You side of the rear passenger compartment. You
The automatic operation of air volume and
should raise or lower the temperature setting should raise or lower the temperature setting
air distribution switches off. The symbols of
in small increments, preferably starting at in small increments, preferably starting at
air distribution and air volume appear in
72‡ (22†). 72‡ (22†).
display b (Y page 211).
X Increasing/decreasing: Press button
X Adjust air distribution (Y page 219).
Dual-zone automatic climate control Á or Â until the desired temperature
X Adjust air volume (Y page 220).
X Increasing/decreasing: Turn appears in display 2 (Y page 215).
temperature controls 1 and 6
3-zone automatic climate control (Y page 211) slightly clockwise or
X Set the desired temperature counterclockwise.
(Y page 217).
X Activating: Press button U. 3-zone automatic climate control
The indicator lamp in the button comes on. X Increasing/decreasing: Turn
The air volume and air distribution are
temperature controls 1 and 8
adjusted automatically.
(Y page 213) slightly clockwise or Z
counterclockwise.
217
Controls in detail

Adjusting air vents Center air vents Side air vents
G Warning!
When operating the climate control, the air
that enters the passenger compartment
through the air vents can be very hot or very
cold (depending on the set temperature).
This may cause burns or frostbite to
unprotected skin in the immediate area of
the air vents.
Always keep sufficient distance between
unprotected parts of the body and the air
vents. If necessary, use the air distribution 1 Left center air vent, adjustable Example illustration driver’s side
adjustment to direct the air to air vents in 2 Right center air vent, adjustable 1 Left side defroster air vent, fixed
the vehicle interior that are not in the 3 Thumbwheel for air volume control for 2 Left side air vent, adjustable
immediate area of unprotected skin. adjustable right center air vent 3 Thumbwheel for air volume control for
For best possible performance of the climate 4 Thumbwheel for air volume control for adjustable left side air vent
control: adjustable left center air vent
X Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheel 3
X Keep the air intake grille in front of the X Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheels 3 upward or downward.
windshield free of snow, leaves, sticks, and and 4 upward or downward.
any other debris.
Ventilated glove box
X Always keep all air vents and grilles in the
passenger compartment free from The glove box can be ventilated, for instance
obstruction. to cool its contents, when the climate control
system is activated. The level of airflow to the
i For draft-free ventilation, move the glove box depends on the airflow and air
adjustable center and side air vents to the distribution settings. The temperature of the
middle position. air is approximately the same as that of the
air flowing from the center air vents.
218
Controls in detail

! Close the glove box air vent when heating Rear center console air vents Symbol Function
the vehicle interior. Activate the air
conditioning (cooling function) when the { Directs air through the
outside temperature is high. Otherwise, defroster air vents to the
temperature-sensitive items stored in the windshield and side windows
glove box could be damaged. Example illustration: Rear climate control a Directs air through the center
1 Thumbwheel for air volume control for and side air vents
rear center air vents
2 Right rear center air vent, adjustable
Y Directs air to the footwells
3 Rear climate control panel d Directs air through the center
4 Left rear center air vent, adjustable and side air vents and to the
footwells
Adjusting air distribution Z Directs air into the entire

vehicle interior
The air distribution can be adjusted
separately on each side of the passenger \ Directs air through the center,
compartment14. side and defroster air vents to
1 Thumbwheel
The symbols shown in display b the windshield and side
2 Air vent windows
(Y page 211) or d (Y page 213) on the
X Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheel 1 climate control panel represent the following [ Directs air through the
clockwise or counterclockwise. functions: defroster air vents to the
windshield and side windows
and to the footwells
X Press button Z repeatedly until you

have select the desired setting and the
Z
14 Vehicles with 3-zone automatic climate control
219
Controls in detail

corresponding symbol is shown in display Rair flows onto the windshield and the front b (Y page 211) or d (Y page 213) a
b or d. side windows or Y.
Rthe air recirculation mode is switched off
Adjusting air volume i You can adjust the air distribution when Maximum cooling MAX COOL
X Decrease/increase: Press button · or the front defroster is switched on. MAX COOL is only operational when the
Q. X Deactivating: Press button y again. engine is running.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out. MAX COOL is only available in U.S. vehicles.
The previous settings are once again in You can use this setting to provide the fastest
Front defroster effect. The cooling remains switched on. possible cooling of the vehicle interior (when
You can use this setting to defrost the The air recirculation remains switched off. windows and tilt/sliding sunroof or tilt/
windshield, for example if it is iced up. or sliding panel are closed).
You can also defog the windshield and the X Press button U. X Activating: Press button 3 (Y page 211).
side windows. The indicator lamp in button y goes out. The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
Air volume and air distribution are adjusted The climate control switches automatically to
i Keep this setting selected only until the
automatically. the following functions:
windshield or the side windows are clear
again. i To deactivate defrosting, you can also Rmaximum cooling
X
press button ´, Ï, Q or turn Rmaximum blowing power
Activating: Press button y.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on. temperature controls.
Rthe air recirculation mode is switched on
The climate control switches to the following
Windshield fogged on the outside
functions automatically:
Rcooling X Switch the windshield wipers on
on to dehumidify
(Y page 107).
Rmost efficient blower speed and heating
If the automatic mode of the climate control
power, depending on outside temperature
is switched off:
X Press button Z repeatedly until one of
the following symbols appears in display
220
Controls in detail

X Deactivating: Press button 3 again. i The air recirculation mode is activated Residual heat and ventilation
The indicator lamp in the button goes out. automatically at high outside
The previous settings are once again in temperatures. This feature is only available in Canada
effect. vehicles. With the engine switched off, it is
The indicator lamp in button , is not lit possible to continue to heat or ventilate the
i To switch the maximum cooling function when the air recirculation mode is switched interior for up to 30 minutes. This feature
on automatically. makes use of the residual heat produced by
off, you can also press button ´, U
or y. A quantity of outside air is added after the engine.
approximately 30 minutes.
i If you switch on the residual heat function
X Deactivating: Press button , again. when outside temperatures are high, only
Air recirculation mode
The indicator lamp in the button goes out. the ventilation will be switched on.
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle i The manually selected air recirculation i Regardless of the selected air volume, the
from the outside (e. g. before driving through mode is deactivated automatically: blower operates at low speed when
a tunnel). This setting cuts off the intake of Rafter5 minutes if the outside heating. In case of ventilation the blower
outside air and recirculates the air in the temperature is below approximately operates at higher speed.
passenger compartment. 41‡ (5†)
i How long the system will provide heating
G Warning! Rafter 5 minutes if the air conditioning is depends on the coolant temperature and
Fogged windows impair visibility, turned off the selected temperature.
endangering you and others. If the windows Rafter30 minutes if the outside
begin to fog on the inside, switching off the X Activating: Switch off the ignition.
temperature is above approximately
air recirculation mode immediately should X Press button T.
41‡ (5†)
clear interior window fogging. If interior The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
window fogging persists, make sure the air
conditioning is activated, or press button X Deactivating: Press button T.
y. The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
X Activating: Press button ,.

The indicator lamp in the button comes on. Z
221
Controls in detail
Rear window defroster

The residual heat is deactivated Rear window defroster As soon as the battery has sufficient
automatically: voltage, the rear window defroster
Rwhen the ignition is switched on G Warning! switches back on automatically.
Rafter approximately 30 minutes Any accumulation of snow and ice should
Rif
be removed from the rear window before
the battery voltage drops
driving. Visibility could otherwise be
Rif the coolant temperature is too low impaired, endangering you and others.
The rear window defroster uses a large
Using driver-side settings for amount of power. To keep the battery drain
passenger side to a minimum, switch off the defroster as
soon as the rear window is clear. The
This feature is only available in Canada
defroster is switched off automatically after
vehicles.15 some time of operation depending on the
You can use the settings of the driver’s side, outside temperature.
such as temperature, air volume and air X Switch on the ignition.
distribution, for the passenger side.
X Switching on: Press button ¯ on the
X Activating: Adjust the air temperature, air
respective climate control panel.
volume and air distribution. The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
X Press button ;.
X Switching off: Press button ¯ again.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
The driver-side settings are used for the ! If the rear window defroster switches off
passenger side. too soon and the indicator lamp starts
X Deactivating: Press button ; again. flashing, too many electrical consumers
The indicator lamp in the button goes out. are operating simultaneously and there is
insufficient voltage in the battery. The
system responds automatically by
switching the rear window defroster off.
15 Vehicles with 3-zone automatic climate control
222
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof

Power tilt/sliding sunroof G Observe Safety notes, see ! Please keep in mind that weather
page 59. conditions can sometimes change rapidly.
Opening and closing Make sure to close the tilt/sliding sunroof
G Warning!
when leaving the vehicle. If water enters
G Warning! The tilt/sliding sunroof is made out of the vehicle interior, vehicle electronics
When opening or closing the tilt/sliding glass. In the event of an accident, the glass could be damaged which is not covered by
sunroof, make sure there is no danger of may shatter. This may result in an opening the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
anyone being harmed by the opening/ in the roof.
closing procedure. In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing i You can also open or close the tilt/sliding
The tilt/sliding sunroof is equipped with the their seat belts or not wearing them sunroof using the SmartKey or the
express operation and automatic reversal properly may be thrown out of the opening. KEYLESS-GO function, see “Summer
function. If the movement of the tilt/sliding Such an opening also presents a potential opening feature” (Y page 111) and
sunroof is blocked during the closing for injury for occupants wearing their seat “Convenience closing
procedure, the tilt/sliding sunroof will stop belts properly as entire body parts or feature” (Y page 111).
and open slightly. portions of them may protrude from the
The tilt/sliding sunroof operates differently passenger compartment. i After switching off the ignition or
when the sunroof switch is pressed and removing the SmartKey from the starter
held. See the “Closing when the tilt/sliding ! To avoid damaging the seals, do not switch, you can operate the tilt/sliding
sunroof is blocked” section for details. transport any objects with sharp edges sunroof until you open the driver’s or front
The opening/closing procedure of the tilt/ which can stick out of the tilt/sliding passenger door. If no door was opened you
sliding sunroof can be immediately halted sunroof. can operate the tilt/sliding sunroof for up
by releasing the sunroof switch or, if the to 5 minutes.
Do not open the tilt/sliding sunroof if there
sunroof switch was moved past the is snow or ice on the roof, as this could
resistance point and released, by moving result in malfunctions.
the sunroof switch in any direction. If you cannot open or close the tilt/sliding
sunroof due to a malfunction contact
Roadside Assistance or an authorized
Z
223
Controls in detail

Opening Raising
X Opening manually: Press and hold the X Raising manually: Press and hold the
sunroof switch to the resistance point in sunroof switch to the resistance point in
direction of arrow 2. direction of arrow 1.
X Release the sunroof switch when the X Release the sunroof switch when the
desired position is reached. desired position is reached.
X Express operation: To open the tilt/ X Express operation: To raise the tilt/
sliding sunroof completely, press the sliding sunroof completely, press the
sunroof switch past the resistance point in sunroof switch past the resistance point in
direction of arrow 2 and release. direction of arrow 1 and release.
Sunroof switch
X Stopping during express operation: X Stopping during express operation:
1 Raising
Move the sunroof switch in any direction. Move the sunroof switch in any direction.
2 Opening
3 Closing i Express opening is not available when the i Express raising is not available when the
tilt/sliding sunroof is raised. The tilt/ tilt/sliding sunroof is open. The tilt/sliding
sliding sunroof must be closed first. sunroof must be closed first.
i When the tilt/sliding sunroof is open, Closing

resonance noises may result in addition to
the usual wind noises. They are caused by X Closing manually: Pull and hold the
minimal pressure changes in the passenger sunroof switch to the resistance point in
compartment. To reduce or eliminate these direction of arrow 3.
noises, change the position of the tilt/ X Release the sunroof switch when the
sliding sunroof or open a window slightly. desired position is reached.
X Express operation: To close the tilt/
sliding sunroof completely, pull the sunroof
Sunroof screen
224
Controls in detail

switch past the resistance point in If the tilt/sliding sunroof is blocked again and tilt/sliding sunroof is fully raised at the
direction of arrow 3 and release. opens slightly: rear.
X Stopping during express operation: X Immediately after the tilt/sliding sunroof X Keep holding the sunroof switch in
Move the sunroof switch in any direction. was blocked, pull the sunroof switch in direction of arrow 1 for approximately
direction of arrow 3 until the tilt/sliding 1 second.
Closing when the tilt/sliding sunroof is sunroof is fully closed. X Check the express operation feature
blocked (Y page 224).
G Warning!
G Warning! If the tilt/sliding sunroof opens and closes
Pulling and holding the sunroof switch to
Make sure that nobody can become completely, the roof is synchronized.
close the tilt/sliding sunroof immediately
trapped and be seriously or even fatally Otherwise repeat the above steps.
after it had been blocked two times will
injured when closing the tilt/sliding cause the tilt/sliding sunroof to close
sunroof with greater force or without without any reversal function for as long as
automatic reversal function. you hold the sunroof switch.
If the movement of the tilt/sliding sunroof is
blocked during the closing procedure (e. g. by Synchronizing
ice or pollution), the tilt/sliding sunroof will
stop and open slightly. However, the tilt/ The tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchronized
sliding sunroof will exert greater force before after a malfunction or if it does not open
reversing than when the tilt/sliding sunroof smoothly.
is closed in express operation. Please ! If the tilt/sliding sunroof cannot be closed
exercise caution! or synchronized, contact an authorized
X Immediately after the tilt/sliding sunroof Mercedes-Benz Center or call Roadside
has stopped because it was blocked, pull Assistance.
the sunroof switch in direction of arrow X Switch on the ignition.
3 until the tilt/sliding sunroof is fully
X Press and hold the sunroof switch in
closed.
direction of arrow 1 (Y page 224) until the
Z
225
Controls in detail
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding until the roller sunblinds have reached their
panel desired position.
X Express operation: Move the roof panel
Extending and retracting the roller switch past the resistance point in
sunblinds direction of arrow 1, 2 or 3 and release.
The roller sunblinds only operate with the tilt/ The roller sunblinds retract/extend
sliding panel closed. The front and rear roller completely.
sunblind cannot be operated individually. X Stopping during express operation:
G Warning! Move the roof panel switch in any direction.

When extending the roller sunblinds, make
sure no one is in danger of being injured by Roof panel switch
Opening and closing the panorama
the extending procedure. 1 Retracting
roof with power tilt/sliding panel
The roller sunblinds are equipped with the 2 Retracting
express operation and automatic reversal 3 Extending G Warning!
function. If the movement of the roller When opening or closing the tilt/sliding
sunblinds is blocked during the extending X Switch on the ignition. panel, make sure there is no danger of
procedure, the roller sunblinds will stop and X anyone being harmed by the opening/
Retracting/Extending: Move the roof
retract slightly. closing procedure.
panel switch to the resistance point in the
The extending of the roller sunblinds can be
required direction of arrow 1, 2 or 3 The tilt/sliding panel is equipped with the
immediately halted by releasing the roof
express operation and automatic reversal
panel switch or, if the roof panel switch was
function. If the movement of the tilt/sliding
moved past the resistance point and
panel is blocked during the closing
released, by moving the roof panel switch
procedure, the tilt/sliding panel will stop
in any direction.
and open slightly.
The tilt/sliding panel operates differently
when the roof panel switch is pressed and
held. See the “Closing when the tilt/sliding
226
Controls in detail

panel is blocked” section in this chapter for Do not open the tilt/sliding panel if there is i You can also open or close the tilt/sliding
details. snow or ice on the roof, as this could result panel using the SmartKey, see “Summer
The opening/closing procedure of the tilt/ in malfunctions. opening feature” (Y page 111) or see
sliding panel can be immediately halted by “Convenience closing
! Please keep in mind that weather feature” (Y page 111).
releasing the roof panel switch or, if the roof
conditions can sometimes change rapidly.
panel switch was moved past the X Switch on the ignition.
Make sure to close the tilt/sliding panel
resistance point and released, by moving
when leaving the vehicle. If water enters
the roof panel switch in any direction.
the vehicle interior, vehicle electronics Opening
G Observe Safety notes, see could be damaged which is not covered by
X Opening manually: Press and hold the
page 59. the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
roof panel switch to the resistance point in
G Warning! direction of arrow 2.
The panorama roof with tilt/sliding panel is X Release the roof panel switch when the
made out of glass. In the event of an desired position is reached.
accident, the glass may shatter. This may X Express operation: To open the tilt/
result in an opening in the roof. sliding panel completely, press the roof
In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing panel switch past the resistance point in
their seat belts or not wearing them direction of arrow 2 and release.
properly may be thrown out of the opening. X Stopping during express operation:
Such an opening also presents a potential Move the roof panel switch in any direction.
for injury for occupants wearing their seat
belts properly as entire body parts or i Express opening is not available when the
Roof panel switch
portions of them may protrude from the tilt/sliding panel is raised. The tilt/sliding
1 Raising
passenger compartment. panel must be closed first.
2 Opening
! To avoid damaging the seals, do not 3 Closing i When the tilt/sliding panel is open,
transport any objects with sharp edges resonance noises may result in addition to
The tilt/sliding panel only operates with the
which can stick out of the tilt/sliding panel. the usual wind noises. They are caused by
roller sunblinds retracted. Z
minimal pressure changes in the passenger
227
Controls in detail

compartment. To reduce or eliminate these X Express operation: To close the tilt/ direction of arrow 3 until the tilt/sliding
noises, change the position of the tilt/ sliding panel completely, pull the roof panel panel is fully closed.
sliding panel or open a window slightly. switch past the resistance point in G Warning!
direction of arrow 3 and release.
Pulling and holding the roof panel switch to
Raising X Stopping during express operation:
close the tilt/sliding panel immediately
X Raising manually: Press and hold the roof Move the roof panel switch in any direction. after it had been blocked two times will
panel switch to the resistance point in cause the tilt/sliding panel to close without
Closing when the tilt/sliding panel is
direction of arrow 1. any reversal function for as long as you hold
blocked
X Release the roof panel switch when the the roof panel switch.
desired position is reached. G Warning!
X Express operation: To raise the tilt/
Make sure that nobody can become
trapped and be seriously or even fatally Synchronizing
sliding panel completely, press the roof
panel switch past the resistance point in injured when closing the tilt/sliding panel The tilt/sliding panel and front roller
direction of arrow 1 and release. without automatic reversal function. sunblinds must be synchronized after a
X Stopping during express operation:
malfunction or if the tilt/sliding panel does
If the movement of the tilt/sliding panel is not open smoothly.
Move the roof panel switch in any direction. blocked during the closing procedure (e. g. by
ice or pollution), the tilt/sliding panel will stop ! Do not attempt to open the tilt/sliding
i Express raising is not available when the panel before the tilt/sliding panel is
and open slightly.
tilt/sliding panel is open. The tilt/sliding properly synchronized. The tilt/sliding
panel must be closed first. X Immediately after the tilt/sliding panel has
panel could otherwise lock-up in the open
stopped because it was blocked, pull the
position.
Closing roof panel switch in direction of arrow 3
until the tilt/sliding panel is fully closed. If the tilt/sliding panel cannot be closed or
X Closing manually: Pull and hold the roof synchronized, contact an authorized
panel switch to the resistance point in If the tilt/sliding panel is blocked again and Mercedes-Benz Center or call Roadside
direction of arrow 3. opens slightly: Assistance.
X Release the roof panel switch when the X Immediately after the tilt/sliding panel was
desired position is reached. blocked, pull the roof panel switch in
228
Controls in detail
Loading and storing

X Switch on the ignition. Loading and storing Load distribution
X Pull and hold the roof panel switch in
direction of arrow 3 (Y page 227) until the Loading instructions
roller sunblinds are fully extended. G Warning!
X Keep holding the roof panel switch in Always fasten items being carried as
direction of arrow 3 for approximately securely as possible using fastening
1 second. materials appropriate for the weight and
X Push and hold the roof panel switch in size of the load.
direction of arrow 2 (Y page 227) until the In an accident, during hard braking or
roller sunblinds are fully retracted. sudden maneuvers, loose items will be
X Push and hold the roof panel switch in thrown around inside the vehicle and can
direction of arrow 2 until the tilt/sliding cause injury to vehicle occupants unless
the items are securely fastened in the The total load weight including vehicle
panel is opened approximately 4 inch
vehicle. occupants and luggage/cargo should not
(10 cm).
exceed the total load limit indicated on the
X Pull and hold the roof panel switch in To help avoid personal injury during a
corresponding Tire and Loading Information
direction of arrow 3 until the tilt/sliding collision or sudden maneuver, exercise
placard located on the driver’s door B-pillar
panel is fully closed. care when transporting cargo. Do not pile
(Y page 263).
X Keep holding the roof panel switch in luggage or cargo higher than the seat
backrests. The handling characteristics of a fully loaded
direction of arrow 3 for approximately vehicle depend greatly on the load
1 second. The trunk is the preferred place to carry
distribution. It is therefore recommended to
X Check the express operation feature of the objects. Do not place anything on the rear-
load the vehicle according to the illustration
tilt/sliding panel (Y page 226). window shelf.
shown, with the heaviest items being placed
If the tilt/sliding panel opens completely, Never drive vehicle with the trunk open. towards the front of the vehicle.
the roof is synchronized. Otherwise repeat Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may
the above steps. enter vehicle interior resulting in
unconsciousness and death.
229
Controls in detail
Loading and storing

Please pay attention to and comply with the Do not exceed the maximum roof load of X Flip trim covers 1 open.
following instructions when loading the 220 lb (100 kg). X Only attach the roof rack to the anchorage
vehicle and transporting cargo: Take into consideration that when the roof points under trim covers 1.
RAlways place items being carried against rack is loaded, the handling characteristics X Observe manufacturer’s instructions for
front or rear seat backrests, and fasten are different from those when operating the installation.
them as securely as possible. vehicles without the roof rack loaded.
RThe heaviest portion of the cargo should Make sure Parcel nets
always be kept as low as possible against
Ryou can raise the tilt/sliding sunroof or the
front or rear seat backrests.
panorama roof with tilt/sliding panel G Warning!
i The enlarged cargo area should only be completely The parcel net is intended for storing light-
used for items which do not fit in the trunk weight items only, such as road maps, mail,
Ryou can open the trunk completely
alone. etc.
Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or
fragile objects may not be transported in
Roof rack the parcel net. In an accident, during hard
For information about further roof rack braking, or sudden maneuvers, they could
equipment, contact an authorized Mercedes- be thrown around inside the vehicle and
Benz Center. cause injury to vehicle occupants.
The parcel net cannot protect transported
G Warning!
goods in the event of an accident.
Only use roof racks approved by Mercedes-
Benz for your vehicle model to avoid Parcel nets are located in the front passenger
damage to the vehicle. footwell and on the left trunk side wall.
Follow the manufacturer’s installation 1 Trim cover
instructions. Otherwise, an improperly
attached roof rack system or its load could
become detached from the vehicle.
230
Controls in detail
Loading and storing

Cargo tie-down rings Hooks Split rear seat bench
Vehicles with split rear seat bench are Two retaining hooks can be used to attach To expand the cargo volume, you can fold
equipped with four cargo tie-down rings. cargo items such as bags. down the left and right rear seat backrests.
Carefully secure cargo by applying even load The two sections can be folded down
on all rings 1 with rope of sufficient strength separately.
to hold down the cargo. G Warning!
Always follow loading instructions When expanding the cargo volume, always
(Y page 229). fold the seat cushions fully forward.
Unless you are transporting cargo, the seat
backrests must remain properly locked in
the upright position.
In an accident, during hard braking or
sudden maneuvers, loose items will be
1 Retaining hook thrown around inside the vehicle, and
Use the hooks to secure light-weight items cause injury to vehicle occupants unless
only. The maximum permissible weight per the items are securely fastened in the
hook is 9 lbs (4 kg). vehicle.
! Do not use the retaining hook to tie down

1 Cargo tie-down ring
cargo.
231
Controls in detail
Loading and storing

Folding seat backrest forward ! Make sure that the seat belt is not
pinched.
X Adjust head restraints, if necessary.
X Adjust front seats to desired position.
X Check for secure locking by pushing and
pulling on the seat backrest.
G Warning!
Always lock seat backrest in its upright
position when rear seat bench is occupied,
2 Seat backrests or the extended cargo volume is not in use.
1 Release handle X Fold seat backrests 2 forward. Check for secure locking by pushing and
pulling on the seat backrest.
X Open the trunk. In an accident, during hard braking or
Setting up seat backrest
X Pull on left and/or right release handle sudden maneuvers, loose items will be
1. thrown around inside the vehicle, and
X Fully retract the head restraints cause injury to vehicle occupants unless
(Y page 90). the items are securely fastened in the
vehicle.
X If necessary, pull the driver’s and/or front
passenger seat forward. To help avoid personal injury during a
collision or sudden maneuver, exercise
care when transporting cargo.
i To prevent unauthorized persons from

access to the trunk, always lock seat
1 Seat backrests backrest in its upright position.
X Fold seat backrest 1 rearward until it

engages.
232
Controls in detail
Loading and storing

Storage compartments Glove box
G Warning!
To help avoid personal injury during a
collision or sudden maneuver, exercise
care when storing objects in the vehicle.
Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if possible.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
seat backrests.
Parcel nets cannot secure hard or heavy
objects. $ Unlocking glove box
Keep compartment lids closed. This will % Locking glove box
help to prevent stored objects from being 1 Glove box lid release
thrown about and injuring vehicle 2 Glove box lid
Front armrest storage compartments
occupants during
X Opening: Pull glove box lid release 1.
Rbraking
X Closing: Push glove box lid 2 up until it
Rvehicle maneuvers engages.
Ran accident
Locking and unlocking the glove box
separately
You can lock the glove box separately, e.g.
when the vehicle is in the shop for service.
The glove box can only be locked or unlocked
with the mechanical key.
1 Right button for storage compartments
2 Left button for storage compartments
Z
233
Controls in detail
Loading and storing

X Opening storage compartments: Press Storage bags are located on the back of the X Opening: Pull down the armrest.
button 1 or 2. front seats. X Pull release catch 1 and swing the storage
The armrests opens automatically to the compartment cover upward in direction of
left and the right side. Rear storage compartments arrow.
i There is a small and a large storage Armrest with integrated storage
compartment located underneath the compartment
armrest. The small storage compartment
can be removed for the purpose of ! Before storing the armrest in the seat
emptying. backrest, close the storage compartment
cover.
X Closing storage compartments: Swing
the left and/or right armrest backward ! Do not sit on or lean your body weight
until it engages. against the armrest when it is folded down,
as you could otherwise damage it.
Storage bags
G Warning!
The storage bag is intended for storing
light-weight items only.
Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or
fragile objects may not be transported in
the storage bag. In an accident, during hard
braking, or sudden maneuvers, they could
be thrown around inside the vehicle and
cause injury to vehicle occupants.
The storage bag cannot protect 1 Release catch
transported goods in the event of an
accident.
234
Controls in detail
Useful features
Useful features Cup holder in front center console X Opening: Open armrest storage
compartment (Y page 234).
Cup holders X Press release button 1.
G Warning! X Cup holder 2 swing out and opens
In order to help prevent spilling liquids on automatically.

vehicle occupants and/or vehicle X Close the armrest storage compartment.
equipment, only use containers that fit into X Closing: Open the armrest storage
the cup holder. Use lids on open containers
compartment (Y page 234).
and do not fill containers to a height where
X Swing cup holder 2 backward until it
the contents, especially hot liquids, could
spill during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or engages.
in an accident. Liquids spilled on vehicle ! Do not sit on or lean your body weight
1 Cup holder
occupants may cause serious personal against the armrest when it is folded down,
injury. Liquids spilled on vehicle equipment as you could otherwise damage it.
may cause damage not covered by the Cup holder in rear armrest
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. ! Close the cup holder before folding the
When not in use, keep the cup holder armrest upwards. Otherwise you could
closed. An open cup holder may cause damage the cup holder.
injury to you or others when contacted
during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an
accident.
Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup
holder may come loose during braking,
vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident and be
thrown around in the vehicle interior.
Objects thrown around in the vehicle
1 Release button
interior may cause an accident and/or
serious personal injury. 2 Cup holder
Z
235
Controls in detail
Useful features
Sun visors Glare through a door window Rear window sunshade
G Warning! G Warning!
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving. When operating the rear window sunshade
Keep the vanity mirrors in the sun visors make sure there is no danger of anyone
closed while vehicle is in motion. Reflected being harmed by the extending or
glare can endanger you and others. retracting procedure.
The extending or retracting procedure can
be immediately halted by briefly pressing
rear window sunshade switch. To reverse
direction of movement, press rear window
sunshade switch again.
X Close vanity mirror cover 5 if opened. G Observe Safety notes, see
X Disengage sun visor from mounting 2. page 59.
X Pivot sun visor to the side.
X Adjust sun visor by pushing or pulling in
direction of arrows.
1 Vanity mirror lamp
2 Mounting Vanity mirror
3 Holder, e.g. for gas cards The mirror lamp only functions when the sun
4 Vanity mirror visor is engaged in mounting.
5 Vanity mirror cover X Lift up vanity mirror cover 5.
Vanity mirror lamp 1 comes on.
Glare through the windshield
1 Rear window sunshade switch
X Flip sun visor down when you experience Always extend the sunshade fully for its
glare. support against the window frame.
236
Controls in detail
Useful features
X Switch on the ignition. ! The storage compartment is not heat- Rear center console ashtray
X Extending/Retracting: Press rear proof. Therefore, do not stub cigarettes in
window sunshade switch 1 briefly. the storage compartment.
X Opening: Press cover plate 2 forward
until it engages.
Ashtrays
X Removing ashtray insert: Grab ashtray
Center console ashtray insert 1 on the grooved side and pull it up
and out in the direction indicated by
G Warning! arrows.
Remove front ashtray insert only with X Reinstalling ashtray insert: Push ashtray
vehicle standing still. insert 1 back into the frame until it
engages. 1 Ashtray insert
X Closing: Tap the front of cover plate 2. 2 Cover
3 Button
X Opening: Pull at top of cover 2.

X Removing ashtray insert: Push button
3 to disengage ashtray insert 1 and
remove it.
X Reinstalling ashtray insert: Push ashtray
insert 1 down into the retainer until it
engages.
1 Ashtray insert X Closing: Push at top of cover 2.
2 Cover plate
i A storage compartment is located under

the ashtray insert. Z
237
Controls in detail
Useful features
Cigarette lighter X Switch on the ignition. Power outlets
X Open cover 1 (Y page 237).
G Observe Safety notes, see The power outlets can be used to
X Push in cigarette lighter 2. accommodate 12V DC electrical accessories
page 59.
Cigarette lighter 2 will pop out (e.g. auxiliary lamps, mobile phone chargers)
G Warning! automatically when hot. up to a maximum of 15 A (180 W).
Never touch the heating element or sides X Take out cigarette lighter 2. If the engine is off and the power outlets are
of the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold
X Reinsert cigarette lighter 2 in its socket being used extensively, the vehicle battery
the knob only.
after use. may become discharged.
Make sure any children traveling with you
do not injure themselves or start a fire with ! The lighter socket can be used to
the hot cigarette lighter. accommodate 12V DC electrical
accessories (up to a maximum of 85 W)
If the engine is off and the cigarette lighter is
designed for use with the standard
being used extensively, the vehicle battery
“cigarette lighter” plug type. Keep in mind,
may become discharged.
however, that connecting accessories to
the lighter socket (for example extensive
connecting and disconnecting, or using
plugs that do not fit properly) can damage
the lighter socket. With the socket
damaged, the lighter may not function
properly any longer.
1 Power outlet
1 Cover
2 Cigarette lighter
238
Controls in detail
Useful features
Rear passenger compartment 1 Interior rear view mirror

1 Power outlet 2 Compass display
2 Cover 3 Button
X Calling up the compass: Press button

Compass 3 briefly. Zone map North America
The compass displays the direction into
i In order to receive an accurate reading in which the vehicle is currently traveling: N,
the interior rear view mirror, the compass NE, E, SE, S, SW, W, or NW.
must be calibrated and the magnetic field X Compass adjustment: Determine your
zone set.
location on the basis of the following zone
maps.
239
Controls in detail
Useful features
In order to calibrate the compass properly, Tele Aid
mind the following:
! In order to activate the Tele Aid system, a
RCalibrate the compass in open terrain. subscriber agreement must be completed.
Nearby buildings, bridges, power lines and To ensure your system is activated and
large antenna masts, for example, could operational, please press the } button
impair compass calibration.
to perform the acquaintance call. Failure to
RSwitch off electrical consumers (e.g. complete either of these steps may result
climate control, windshield wipers, or rear in a system that is not activated.
window defroster). If you have any questions regarding
RClose all doors and the trunk. activation, please call the Response Center
at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
X Start the engine
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
X Press button 3 approximately 6 seconds
until symbol C appears in compass display Shortly after the completion of your Tele Aid
2. acquaintance call, you will receive a user ID
and password in the mail. You may use this
Zone map South America X Drive a full circle at a vehicle speed of
password to access the Tele Aid section in
X Press button 3 approximately 3 seconds. between 3 mph (5 km/h) and 6 mph “Owner’s Online” at www.mbusa.com (USA
(10 km/h). only). The “My Tele Aid” section will give you
The currently selected zone appears in
When calibration was successful, the access to account information, remote door
compass display 2.
current direction appears in compass unlock and more.
X Selecting zone: Press button 3 until the
display 2.
desired zone is selected. The Tele Aid system is available if
Do not press the button again until the Rithas been activated and is operational.
direction is indicated. Activation requires a subscription for
X Compass calibration: Make sure you are
in an area where you can drive a full circle
with your vehicle without disturbing traffic
in order to calibrate the compass.
240
Controls in detail
Useful features
monitoring services, connection and location. If either of these signals are If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
cellular air time. unavailable, the Tele Aid system may not above, the system may not operate as
Rvehicle battery power is available. function and if this occurs, assistance must expected. In case of an emergency, help
be summoned by other means. will have to be summoned by other means.
Rthe relevant cellular phone network and
To adjust the speaker volume during a Tele Have the system checked at the nearest
GPS signals are available and pass the
Aid call do the following: Mercedes-Benz Center or contact the
information on to the Response Center.
X Press button æ or ç on the Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in
i Location of the vehicle on a map is only multifunction steering wheel. the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as
possible if the vehicle is able to receive soon as possible.
or
signals from the GPS satellite network and
X Use the audio system rotary control button.
pass the information on to the Response Emergency calls
Center.
System self-test ! In order to activate the Tele Aid system, a
The Tele Aid system subscriber agreement must be completed.
The system performs a self-test after you To ensure your system is activated and
(Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand) have switched on the ignition. operational, please press the ¡ button
The Tele Aid system consists of three types G Warning! to perform the acquaintance call. Failure to
of response: If the indicator lamps in the SOS button, in complete either of these steps may result
RAutomatic and manual emergency the Roadside Assistance button b and/ in a system that is not activated.
RRoadside
or in the Information button } do not If you have any questions regarding
Assistance
come on during the system self-test, or if activation, please call the Response Center
RInformation
any of these indicators remain illuminated at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
The Tele Aid system is operational providing constantly in red and/or the message Tele 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
that the vehicle’s battery is charged, properly Aid Not Activated or Tele Aid An emergency call is initiated automatically
connected, not damaged, and cellular and Inoperative is displayed in the following an accident in which the Emergency
GPS coverage is available. The Tele Aid multifunction display after the system self- Tensioning Devices (ETDs) or air bags deploy.
system utilizes the cellular network for test, a malfunction in the system has been An emergency call can also be initiated
communication and the GPS (Global detected. manually (Y page 242). Z
Positioning System) satellites for vehicle
241
Controls in detail
Useful features
Once the emergency call is in progress, the Response Center will attempt to determine Initiating an emergency call manually
indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin to more precisely the nature of the emergency
flash. The message Connecting Call provided they can speak to an occupant of
appears in the multifunction display and the the vehicle.
COMAND system is muted. When the i If no vehicle occupant responds, an
connection is established, the message Call ambulance will be sent to the vehicle
Connected appears in the multifunction immediately.
display.
All information relevant to the emergency, G Warning!
such as the location of the vehicle If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is
(determined by the GPS satellite location flashing continuously and there was no
system), vehicle model, identification number voice connection to the Response Center
and color are generated. established, then the Tele Aid system could 1 Cover
not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the 2 SOS button
i During the emergency call message
relevant cellular phone network is not
Emergency Call Activated is displayed, available). X Briefly press on cover 1 to open.
operation from audio system or COMAND X Press SOS button 2 briefly.
system is not possible. The automatic The message Call Failed appears in the
multifunction display for approximately The indicator lamp in SOS button 2 will
climate control can be still adjusted using flash until the emergency call is concluded.
the switches on the climate control panel. 10 seconds.
Should this occur, assistance must be X Wait for a voice connection to the
i During the emergency call message is summoned by other means. Response Center.
displayed, operation from audio system or X Close cover 1 after the emergency call is
COMAND system is not possible. The i During the emergency call the telephone concluded.
climate control can be still adjusted using is switched off automatically and must be G Warning!
the switches on the climate control panel. switched back on to make a call. If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in
A voice connection between the Response the vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle,
i The “911” emergency call system is a
Center and the occupants of the vehicle will vehicle in a dangerous road location),
public service. Using it without due cause
be established automatically soon after the please do not wait for voice contact after
is a criminal offense.
emergency call has been initiated. The you have pressed the emergency button.
242
Controls in detail
Useful features
Carefully leave the vehicle and move to a Call will appear in the multifunction i If the indicator lamp in the Roadside
safe location. The Response Center will display and the audio system or the Assistance button b is flashing
automatically contact local emergency COMAND system is muted. continuously and there was no voice
officials with the vehicle’s approximate When the connection is established, the connection to the Response Center
location if they receive an automatic SOS message Call Connected appears in the established, then the Tele Aid system could
signal and cannot make voice contact with multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will not initiate a Roadside Assistance call (e.g.
the vehicle occupants. transmit data generating the vehicle the relevant cellular phone network is not
identification number, model, color and available). The message Call Failed
Roadside Assistance button location (subject to availability of cellular and appears in the multifunction display for
GPS signals). approximately 10 seconds.
A voice connection between the Roadside X Terminating calls: Press button t on
Assistance dispatcher and the occupants of the multifunction steering wheel.
the vehicle will be established.
or
X Describe the nature of the need for
X Press the respective button for ending a
assistance.
telephone call on the audio system or the
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance COMAND system.
dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified
Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to tow
your vehicle to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such as
1 Roadside Assistance button b labor and/or towing, charges may apply.
Refer to the Roadside Assistance manual for
X Press and hold Roadside Assistance button more information.
b for longer than 2 seconds. The following is only available in the USA:
A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside Sign and Drive services: Services such as a
Assistance dispatcher will be initiated. The jump start, a few gallons of fuel or the
indicator lamp in the Roadside Assistance replacement of a flat tire with the vehicle
button b will flash while the call is in spare tire are obtainable at no charge. Z
progress. The message Connecting
243
Controls in detail
Useful features
Information button system. Spoken commands are not X Terminating calls: Press button t on
available. the multifunction steering wheel.
A voice connection between the Customer or
Assistance Center representative and the X Press the respective button for ending a
occupants of the vehicle will be established. telephone call on the audio system or the
Information regarding the operation of your COMAND system.
vehicle, the nearest authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz USA products Call priority
and services is available to you.
For more details concerning the Tele Aid If other service calls such as a Roadside
system, please visit www.mbusa.com (USA Assistance call or Information call are active,
only), log in to “Owner’s Online” and visit the an emergency call is still possible. In this
1 Information button } “My Tele Aid” section to learn more. case, the emergency call will take priority and
override all other active calls.
X Press and hold Information button } for i If the indicator lamp in the Information The indicator lamp in the respective button
longer than 2 seconds. button } is flashing continuously and flashes until the call is concluded. Emergency
A call to the Customer Assistance Center there was no voice connection to the calls can only be terminated by a Response
will be initiated. The indicator lamp in the Response Center established, then the Tele Center or Customer Assistance Center
Information button } will flash while the Aid system could not initiate an Information representative. All other calls can be
call is in progress. The message call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone terminated by pressing button t on the
Connecting Call will appear in the network is not available). The message multifunction steering wheel or the
multifunction display and the audio system Call Failed appears in the multifunction respective button for ending a telephone call
or the COMAND system is muted. display for approximately 10 seconds. on the audio system or the COMAND system.
i The audio system or COMAND system i When a Tele Aid call has been initiated,
display indicates that a Tele Aid call is in the audio system is muted. The optional
progress. While the call is connected you mobile phone (if installed) switches off. If
can change to the navigation menu by you must use this phone, we recommend
pressing the NAV button on the COMAND that you use it only with the vehicle at a
standstill in a safe location. Unplug the
244
Controls in detail
Useful features
telephone, switch it on and place the call. i The remote door unlock feature is When you are inside your vehicle the next
The navigation system (if engaged) will available if the relevant cellular phone time and switch on the ignition, the message
continue to run. The multifunction display network is available. Tele Aid Doors locked by remote
in the instrument cluster is available for The SOS button will flash and the message control will appear on the multifunction
use, but spoken commands are not Connecting Call will appear in the display.
available. multifunction display to indicate receipt of i The remote door lock feature is available
the door unlock command. if the relevant telephone network is
Remote door unlock Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Response available and data connection is possible.
In case you have locked your vehicle Center specialist will attempt to establish
unintentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle), voice contact with the vehicle occupants. Stolen Vehicle Recovery services
and the reserve SmartKey is not available: If the trunk lid handle was pulled for more
In the event your vehicle was stolen:
X Contact the Response Center at than 20 seconds before door unlock
authorization was received by the X Report the incident to the police.
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada). Response Center, you must wait The police will issue a numbered incident
You will be asked to provide your password. 15 minutes before pulling the trunk lid report.
X Then return to your vehicle at the time
handle again. X Pass this number on to the Response
arranged with the Response Center and Center along with your password.
pull the trunk lid handle for a minimum of Remote door lock The Response Center will then attempt to
20 seconds until the indicator lamp in the covertly contact the vehicle’s Tele Aid
If you have forgotten to lock your vehicle and
SOS button is flashing. system. Once the vehicle is located, the
are no longer near it, you can have it locked
The message Connecting Call appears in Response Center will contact the local law
remotely through the Response Center.
the multifunction display. enforcement and you. The vehicle’s
The vehicle can be remotely locked within location will only be provided to law
As an alternative, you may unlock the vehicle 4 days after the ignition has been switched enforcement.
via Internet in the “My Tele Aid” section of off.
“Owner’s Online”, using your ID and password X Contact the Response Center at i If the anti-theft alarm stays on for more
(USA only). 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or than 30 seconds, a call to the Response
The Response Center will then unlock your 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada). Center is initiated automatically by the Tele
vehicle with the remote door unlocking Aid system provided Tele Aid service was Z
You will be asked to provide your password.
feature. subscribed to and properly activated, and
245
Controls in detail
Useful features
that necessary cellular service and GPS does not meet current U.S. federal safety 5 Hand-held remote control (not part
coverage are available. See “Anti-theft standards. of vehicle equipment)
alarm system” (Y page 73). When programming a garage door opener, 6 Hand-held remote control button
park vehicle outside the garage.
Garage door opener Do not run the engine while programming Programming the integrated remote
the integrated remote control. Inhalation of control
The integrated remote control can operate up
exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All X Step 1: Switch on the ignition.
to three separately controlled devices
exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide
compatible with HomeLink® or some other X Step 2: If you have previously programmed
(CO), and inhaling it can cause
systems. unconsciousness and possible death. a signal transmitter button and wish to
G Warning! retain its programming, proceed to step 3.
Before programming the integrated remote or
control to a garage door opener or gate X If you are programming the integrated
operator, make sure people and objects are remote control for the first time, press and
out of the way of the device to prevent hold the two outer signal transmitter
potential harm or damage. When buttons 2 and 4 and release them when
programming a garage door opener, the indicator lamp 1 begins to flash after
door moves up or down. When approximately 20 seconds.
programming a gate operator, the gate Do not hold the button for longer than
opens or closes. 30 seconds.
Do not use the integrated remote control This procedure erases any previous
with any garage door opener that lacks settings for all three channels and
Interior rear view mirror with integrated remote
safety stop and reverse features as control initializes the memory. If you later wish to
required by U.S. federal safety standards 1 Indicator lamp program a second and/or third hand-held
(this includes any garage door opener transmitter to the remaining two signal
234 Signal transmitter button
model manufactured before April 1, 1982). transmitter buttons, do not repeat this step
A garage door that cannot detect an object and begin directly with step 3.
- signaling the door to stop and reverse - X Step 3: Hold the end of hand-held remote
control 5 of the device you wish to train
246
Controls in detail
Useful features
approximately 2 to 12 in (5 to 30 cm) away transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) is pressed the transmitting button, refer to the garage
from the signal transmitter button (2, 3 and released. door opener Operator’s Manual.
or 4) to be programmed, while keeping X Step 9: Press the “training” button on the
indicator lamp 1 in view. i If indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly for
approximately 2 seconds and then turns to garage door opener motor head unit.
X Step 4: Using both hands, simultaneously The “training light” is activated.
a constant light, continue with
press hand-held remote control button 6 You have 30 seconds to initiate the
programming steps 8 through 12 as your
and the desired signal transmitter button garage door opener may be equipped with following two steps.
(2, 3 or 4). Do not release the buttons the “rolling code” feature. X Step 10: Return to the vehicle and firmly
until step 5 is completed. press, hold for 2 seconds and release the
X Step 7: To program the remaining two
Indicator lamp 1 will flash, first slowly and programmed signal transmitter button
then rapidly. signal transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
above starting with step 3. (2, 3 or 4).
i Indicator lamp 1 flashes immediately X Step 11: Press, hold for 2 seconds and
the first time the signal transmitter button Rolling code programming release same signal transmitter button a
is programmed. If this button has already To train a garage door opener (or other rolling second time to complete the training
been programmed, the indicator lamp will code devices) with the rolling code feature, process.
start flashing after 20 seconds. follow these instructions after completing the
i Some garage door openers (or other
X Step 5: After indicator lamp 1 changes “Programming” portion (steps 1 through 6) of
rolling code equipped devices) may require
this text. A second person may make the
from a slow to a rapidly flashing light, you to press, hold for 2 seconds and
following training procedures quicker and
release the hand-held remote control release the same signal transmitter button
easier.
button and the signal transmitter button. a third time to complete the training
X Step 8: Locate the “training” button on the process.
X Step 6: Press and hold the just-trained
signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) and garage door opener motor head unit.
X Step 12: Confirm the garage door
observe indicator lamp 1. i Exact location and color of the button may operation by pressing the programmed
If indicator lamp 1 stays on constantly, vary by garage door opener brand. signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4).
programming is complete and your device Depending on manufacturer, the “training” X Step 13: To program the remaining two
should activate when the respective signal button may also be referred to as “learn”or signal transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
“smart” button. If there is difficulty locating above starting with step 3. Z
247
Controls in detail
Useful features
Gate operator/Canadian programming remote control until the frequency signal X Switch on the ignition.
Canadian radio-frequency laws require has been learned. X Press and hold the desired signal
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) Upon successful training, indicator lamp transmitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not
after several seconds of transmission which 1 will flash slowly and then rapidly after release the button.
may not be long enough for the integrated several seconds. Indicator lamp 1 will begin to flash after
signal transmitter to pick up the signal during X Proceed with programming step 5 and 20 seconds.
programming. Similar to this Canadian law, step 6 to complete. X Without releasing the signal transmitter
some U.S. gate operators are designed to button, proceed with programming starting
“time-out” in the same manner. i Upon completion of programming the
with step 3.
integrated remote control, make sure you
If you live in Canada or if you are having
retain the hand-held remote control that
difficulties programming a gate operator Operation of integrated remote control
came with the garage door opener, gate
(regardless of where you live) by using the
operator or other device. You may need it X Switch on the ignition.
programming procedures, replace step 4 with
for use in other vehicles, for future
the following: X Select and press the appropriate
programming of an integrated remote
X Step 4: Press and hold the signal integrated signal transmitter button (2,
control, or simply for continued use as a
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not 3 or 4) to activate the remote controlled
hand-held remote control to operate the
release this button until it has been respective device in other situations. device.
successfully trained. The integrated remote control transmitter
X While still holding down the signal continues to send the signal as long as the
Reprogramming a single signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4), “cycle” button is pressed – up to 20 seconds.
transmitter button
your hand-held remote control button 6
To program a device using a signal Erasing the integrated remote control
as follows: Press and hold button 6 for
transmitter button previously trained, follow memory
2 seconds, then release it for 2 seconds,
these steps:
and again press and hold it for 2 seconds. i If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes of
Repeat this sequence on the hand-held
all three channels.
X Simultaneously press and hold outer signal
transmitter buttons 2 and 4, for
248
Controls in detail
Useful features
approximately 20 seconds, until indicator RIf another hand-held remote control is 1. This device may not cause harmful
lamp 1 flashes rapidly. Do not hold for available for the same device, try the interference, and
longer than 30 seconds. programming steps again using that other 2. this device must accept any
The codes of all three channels are erased. hand-held remote control. Make sure new interference received, including
batteries are in the hand-held remote interference that may cause undesired
Programming tips control before beginning the procedure. operation.
RStraighten the antenna wire from the
If you are having difficulty programming the Any unauthorized modification to this
garage door opener assembly. This may device could void the user’s authority to
integrated remote control, here are some
help improve transmitting and/or receiving operate the equipment.
helpful tips:
signals.
RCheck the frequency of hand-held remote i Canada only:
control 5 (typically located on the reverse i Certain types of garage door openers are
This device complies with RSS-210 of
side of the remote). The integrated remote incompatible with the integrated remote
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
control is compatible with radio-frequency control. If you should experience further
the following two conditions:
devices operating between 280-390 MHz. difficulties with programming the
integrated remote control, contact an 1. This device may not cause interference,
RPut a new battery in hand-held remote and
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or call
control 5. This will increase the likelihood
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance 2. this device must accept any
of the hand-held remote control sending a Center (in the USA) at interference received, including
faster and more accurate signal to the 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer interference that may cause undesired
integrated remote control. Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. operation of the device.
RWhile performing step 3, hold hand-held
i USA only: Any unauthorized modification to this
remote control 5 at different lengths and
This device complies with Part 15 of the device could void the user’s authority to
angles from the signal transmitter button operate the equipment.
(2, 3 or 4) you are programming. FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
Attempt varying angles at the distance of 2 following two conditions:
to 12 inches (5 to 30 cm) away or the same
angle at varying distances.
Z
249
Controls in detail
Useful features
Floormats
G Warning!
Whenever you are using floormats, make
sure there is enough clearance and that the
floormats are securely fastened.
Floormats should always be securely
fastened using the fastening equipment.
Before driving off, check that the floormats
are securely in place and adjust them if
necessary. A loose floormat could slip and 1 Eyelet
hinder proper functioning of the pedals.
2 Retainer pin
Do not place several floormats on top of
each other as this may impair pedal X Removing: Pull floormat off of retainer pins
movement. 2.
X Installing: Press floormat eyelets 1 onto
i To install or remove the floormat more retainer pins 2.
easily, move the driver’s seat or front
passenger seat as far to the rear as
possible.
250
Operation
Vehicle equipment ............................ 252

The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ....... 252
At the gas station ............................. 253
Engine compartment ........................ 255
Tires and wheels ............................... 260
Winter driving ................................... 284
Driving instructions .......................... 286
Maintenance ...................................... 291
Vehicle care ....................................... 293
251
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)

Vehicle equipment The first 1000 miles (1500 km) After 1 000 miles (1 500 km) you may
gradually increase vehicle and engine speeds
i This Operator’s Manual describes all The more cautiously you treat your vehicle to the permissible maximum.
features, standard or optional, potentially during the break-in period, the more satisfied ! Additional instructions for AMG vehicles:
available for your vehicle at the time of you will be with its performance later on.
RDuring the first 1 000 miles (1 500 km),
purchase. Please be aware that your RDrive your vehicle during the first
vehicle might not be equipped with all do not exceed a speed of 85 mph
1 000 miles (1 500 km) at varying but
features described in this manual. (140 km/h).
moderate vehicle and engine speeds.
RDuring this period, avoid engine speeds
RDuring this period, avoid heavy loads (full
above 4 500 rpm in each gear.
throttle driving) and excessive engine
RShift gears in a timely manner.
speeds (no more than 2/3 of maximum rpm
in each gear). All of the above instructions, as may apply to
RVehicles with automatic transmission: your vehicle type, also apply when driving the
first 1 000 miles (1 500 km) after the engine
- Select C as the preferred shift program
or the rear differential has been replaced.
(Y page 124) for the first 1 000 miles
(1 500 km). i Always obey applicable speed limits.
- Do not attempt to slow the vehicle down
by shifting to a lower gear using the gear
selector lever.
- Select gear ranges 3, 2 or 1
(Y page 124) only when driving at
moderate speeds (for hill driving).
- Avoid accelerating by kickdown.
RVehicles with manual transmission:
Shift gears in a timely manner.
252
Operation
At the gas station

At the gas station Flexible Fuel Vehicles (identified by a label Mercedes-Benz Center to have the fuel
reading Premium gasoline or E85 only! system drained completely.
Refueling on the fuel filler flap):
! To prevent damage to the catalytic
G Warning! Ethanol fuel (E85) and its fumes are highly
converters, only use premium unleaded
Gasoline is highly flammable and flammable, poisonous and burn easily.
gasoline in this vehicle.
poisonous. It burns violently and can cause Ethanol fuel can cause serious injuries if
ignited or if you come into contact with it Any noticeable irregularities in engine
serious personal injury. operation should be repaired promptly.
or inhale fumes of it. Avoid inhalation of
Never allow sparks, flames or smoking Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel may
ethanol fumes and skin contact with
materials near gasoline! reach the catalytic converter, causing it to
ethanol. Extinguish all open flames before
Turn off the engine before refueling. refueling. Never smoke or create sparks overheat and potentially start a fire.
Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid close to ethanol.
inhaling fumes and any skin or clothing i Only use premium unleaded gasoline with
contact. Extinguish all smoking materials. ! Never refuel vehicles with gasoline engine a minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91
Direct skin contact with fuels and the with diesel fuel. Even small amounts of (average of 96 RON/86 MON). Information
inhalation of fuel vapors are damaging your diesel fuel will damage the fuel system and on gasoline quality can normally be found
health. engine. Damage resulting from the use of on the fuel pump. Please contact gas
non-approved fuels or fuel additives or station personnel in case labels on the
G Warning! resulting from mixing gasoline with diesel pump cannot be found.
Overfilling of the fuel tank may create fuel is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz C 300 and C 300 Sport with automatic
pressure in the system which could cause Limited Warranty. transmission:
a gas discharge. This could cause the gas Flexible Fuel Vehicles are identified by a
to spray back out when removing the fuel ! If you have accidentally filled the tank label reading Premium gasoline or E85
pump nozzle, which could cause personal with incorrect or non-approved fuel, do not only! on the fuel filler flap.
injury. switch on the ignition. Otherwise the For more information on gasoline or E85,
incorrect or non-approved fuel will get into see “Premium unleaded
G Warning! the fuel lines. The fuel system must be gasoline” (Y page 395), see “Flexible Fuel
C 300 and C 300 Sport with automatic drained completely. Contact an authorized Vehicles” (Y page 396), see “Fuel
transmission: requirements” (Y page 396), or contact an Z
253
Operation
At the gas station

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or visit i Leaving the engine running and the fuel locking pin prevents closing after you have
www.mbusa.com (USA only). filler cap open can cause the yellow engine locked the vehicle.
The fuel filler flap is located on the right-hand malfunction indicator lamp ± to X Close fuel filler flap 1.
side of the vehicle towards the rear. illuminate.
Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the For more information, see also “Practical
SmartKey automatically locks/unlocks the hints” (Y page 345). Check regularly and before a long trip
fuel filler flap. X Remove the SmartKey from the starter For information on quantities and
i In case the central locking system does switch. requirements of operating agents, see “Fuels,
not release the fuel filler flap, or the KEYLESS-GO: Open the driver’s door (this coolants, lubricants, etc.” (Y page 391).
opening mechanism is clamping, contact puts the starter switch in position 0, same Check the following:
Roadside Assistance or an authorized as with the SmartKey removed from the REngine oil level (Y page 256)
Mercedes-Benz Center. starter switch). The driver’s door then can RTire inflation pressure (Y page 268)
be closed again.
X Opening: Press fuel filler flap 1 at the
RCoolant level (Y page 258)
point indicated by the arrow. RVehicle lighting (Y page 355)
X Turn fuel filler cap 2 counterclockwise. RWasher system and headlamp cleaning
X Take off fuel filler cap 2. system (Y page 259)
X Place fuel filler cap 2 in direction of arrow RBrake fluid (Y page 287), (Y page 316),
into holder 3. (Y page 339)
X Fully insert filler nozzle unit and refuel.
X Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle unit
cuts out – do not top off or overfill.
1 Fuel filler flap
X Closing: Turn fuel filler cap 2 clockwise
2 Fuel filler cap
until it audibly engages.
3 Holder
i Make sure to close the fuel filler flap
X Turn off the engine. before locking your vehicle as the flap
254
Operation
Engine compartment
Engine compartment G Warning!
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear
Hood
of moving parts when the hood is open and
G Warning! the engine is running.
Do not pull the release lever while the The radiator fan may continue to run for
vehicle is in motion. Otherwise the hood approximately 30 seconds or may even
could be forced open by passing air flow. restart after the engine has been turned off.
This could cause the hood to come loose Stay clear of fan blades.
and injure you and/or others.
G Warning!
Opening The engine is equipped with a transistorized 1 Hood lock release lever
ignition system. Because of the high
G Warning! voltage it is dangerous to touch any X Pull release lever 1.
If you see flames or smoke coming from the components (ignition coils, spark plug The hood is unlocked.
engine compartment, or if the coolant sockets, diagnostic socket) of the ignition
! To avoid damage to the windshield wipers
temperature gauge indicates that the system
or hood, never open the hood if the wiper
engine is overheated, do not open the hood. Rwith the engine running arms are folded forward away from the
Move away from vehicle and do not open Rwhile windshield.
starting the engine
the hood until the engine has cooled. If
necessary, call the fire department. Rwhen the ignition is switched on and the
engine is turned manually
G Warning!
You could be injured when the hood is open
– even when the engine is turned off.
Parts of the engine can become very hot.
To prevent burns, let the engine cool off
completely before touching any
components on the vehicle. Comply with all Z
relevant safety precautions.
255
Operation
Engine compartment
otherwise come loose while the vehicle is For further information contact an
in motion and injure you and/or others. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Let the hood drop from a height of Notes on checking engine oil level
approximately 1 ft (30 cm).
When checking the oil level
X Check to make sure the hood is fully
Rthe vehicle must be parked on level ground
closed.
If you can raise the hood at a point above Rwith the engine at operating temperature,
the headlamps, then it is not properly the vehicle must have been stationary for
closed. Open it again and let it drop with at least 5 minutes with the engine turned
2 Handle somewhat greater force. off
Rwith the engine not at operating
X Push handle 2 under the hood upwards. temperature, the vehicle must have been
X Pull up on the hood and then release it. Engine oil stationary for at least 30 minutes with the
The hood will be automatically held open at The amount of oil your engine needs will engine turned off
shoulder height by gas-filled struts. depend on a number of factors, including
driving style. Increased oil consumption can
Closing occur when the vehicle is new or the vehicle
is driven frequently at higher engine speeds.
G Warning! Engine oil consumption checks should only
When closing the hood, use extreme be made after the vehicle break-in period.
caution not to catch hands or fingers. Be
careful that you do not close the hood on ! Do not use any special lubricant additives,
anyone. as these may damage the drive assemblies.
Using special additives not approved by
Make sure the hood is securely engaged
Mercedes-Benz may cause damage not
before driving off. Do not continue driving
if the hood can no longer engage after an
Warranty.
accident, for example. The hood could
256
Operation
Engine compartment
Checking engine oil level The filling quantity between the upper and Maintenance System will result in engine or
lower marks on the oil dipstick is emission control system damage not
X Open the hood (Y page 255).
approximately 2.1 US qt. (2.0 l). covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
C 63 AMG: Warranty.
The filling quantity between the upper and
lower marks on the oil dipstick is
approximately 1.6 US qt. (1.5 l).
X If necessary, add engine oil.
For more information on engine oil, see
“Fuels, coolants, lubricants
etc.” (Y page 391).
For information on messages in the
multifunction display concerning engine oil,
1 Oil dipstick
see the “Practical hints” section
2 Upper (max) mark (Y page 327). 1 Filler cap
3 Lower (min) mark
X Pull out oil dipstick 1. Adding engine oil
X Wipe oil dipstick 1 clean. ! Only use approved engine oils and oil
X Fully insert oil dipstick 1 into the dipstick filters required for vehicles with
guide tube. Maintenance System. For a listing of
X Pull out oil dipstick 1 again after approved engine oils and oil filters, contact
approximately 5 seconds to obtain an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
accurate reading. visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
The oil level is correct when it is between Using engine oils and oil filters of
lower (min) mark 3 and upper (max) mark specification other than those expressly
2 of oil dipstick 1. required for the Maintenance System, or
changing of oil and oil filter at change C 63 AMG Z
i All models (except C 63 AMG): intervals longer than those called for by the 1 Filler cap
257
Operation
Engine compartment
X Unscrew filler cap 1 from filler neck. Coolant level scalding hot fluid and steam will be blown
X Add engine oil as required. Be careful not out under pressure.
The engine coolant is a mixture of water and
to overfill with oil. anticorrosion/antifreeze. RDo not spill antifreeze on hot engine
Be careful not to spill any oil when adding. When checking the coolant level, the vehicle parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene
Avoid environmental damage caused by oil must be parked on level ground, and the glycol which may burn if it comes into
entering the ground or water. coolant temperature must be below 158‡ contact with hot engine parts.
! Excess oil must be siphoned or drained (70†).
off. It could cause damage to the engine G Warning!
and emission control system not covered
In order to avoid any potentially serious
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
burns:
X Screw filler cap 1 back on filler neck. RUse extreme caution when opening the
For more information on engine oil, see the hood if there are any signs of steam or
“Technical data” section (Y page 391) and coolant leaking from the cooling system,
(Y page 394). or if the coolant temperature gauge
indicates that the coolant is overheated.
RDo not remove pressure cap on coolant
Transmission fluid level
reservoir if coolant temperature is above 1 Cap
Vehicles with automatic transmission: 158‡ (70†). Allow engine to cool down
The transmission fluid level does not need to 2 Coolant expansion tank
before removing cap. The coolant
be checked. If you notice transmission fluid reservoir contains hot fluid and is under 3 Marking bar in the expansion tank
loss or gearshifting malfunctions, have an pressure. X Using a rag, turn cap 1 slowly
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center check the
RUsing a rag, slowly open the cap approximately 1/2 turn counterclockwise
transmission.
approximately 1/2 turn to relieve excess to release any excess pressure.
pressure. If opened immediately, X Continue turning cap 1 counterclockwise
and remove it.
258
Operation
Engine compartment
The coolant level is correct if the level ! Only use washer fluid which is suitable for X Opening washer fluid reservoir: Pull tab
Rforcold coolant: reaches marking bar plastic lenses. Improper washer fluid can of cap 1 upwards.
3 in coolant expansion tank 2 damage the plastic lenses of the X Refill the washer fluid reservoir with MB
headlamps. Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB
Rfor warm coolant: is approximately 0.6 in
SummerFit” and water (or commercially
(1.5 cm) higher ! Do not use distilled or deionized water in available premixed washer solvent/
X Add coolant as required. the washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise, the antifreeze, depending on ambient
X Replace and tighten cap 1.
washer fluid level sensor could be temperatures) (Y page 400).
damaged.
For more information on coolant, see the X Closing washer fluid reservoir: Press cap
“Technical data” section (Y page 392) and 1 onto filler hole until it engages.
(Y page 397). For more information, see “Washer system
and headlamp cleaning
system” (Y page 393).
Washer system and headlamp
cleaning system
G Warning!
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly
flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/
antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it
may ignite and burn. You could be seriously 1 Cap for washer fluid reservoir
burned.
Fluid for the washer system and the headlamp
! Always use washer solvent/antifreeze cleaning system is supplied from the washer
where temperatures may fall below fluid reservoir.
freezing point. Failure to do so could result During all seasons, add MB Windshield
in damage to the washer system/fluid Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” to
reservoir. water. Premix the washer fluid in a suitable
container. Z
259
Operation
Tires and wheels

Tires and wheels result in the bolts loosening and possibly an speed with a flat tire will cause excessive
accident. heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Safety notes
Retreaded tires are not tested or
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since
for information on tested and recommended previous damage cannot always be Important guidelines
rims and tires for summer and winter recognized on retreads. The operating ROnly use sets of tires and rims of the same
operation. They can also offer advice safety of the vehicle cannot be assured type and make.
concerning tire service and purchase. when such tires are used. RTires must be of the correct size for the rim.
G Warning!
G Warning! RBreak in new tires for approximately
Replace rims or tires with the same 60 miles (100 km) at moderate speeds.
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
designation, manufacturer and type as
ride disturbance, or you suspect that RRegularly check the tires and rims for
shown on the original part. For further
possible damage to your vehicle has damage. Dented or bent rims can cause tire
information contact an authorized
occurred, you should turn on the hazard inflation pressure loss and damage to the
Mercedes-Benz Center. If incorrectly sized
warning flashers, carefully slow down, and tire beads.
rims and tires are mounted, the wheel
drive with caution to an area which is a safe
brakes or suspension components can be RIf vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire
distance from the road.
damaged. Also, the correct operating inflation pressure and correct as required.
clearance of the wheels and the tires may Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
RDo not allow your tires to wear down too
no longer be correct. for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
appear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are
G Warning! the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz sharply reduced at tread depths of less
Center or tire dealer for repairs. than 1/8 in (3 mm).
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
tire tread is worn to minimum tread depth, RWhen replacing individual tires, you should
or if the tires have sustained damage, G Warning! mount new tires on the front wheels first
replace them. Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects (on vehicles with same-sized wheels all
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You around).
When replacing rims, only use genuine
could lose control of the vehicle. Continued
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for
driving with a flat tire or driving at high
the particular rim type. Failure to do so can
260
Operation
Tires and wheels

Tire care and maintenance Replace the tire if you find any of the above (1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not
conditions. allow your tires to wear down to that level.
G Warning! Make sure you also inspect the spare tire As tread depth approaches 1/8 in (3 mm),
Regularly check the tires for damage. periodically for condition and inflation. Spare the adhesion properties on a wet road are
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation tires will age and become worn over time even sharply reduced.
pressure loss. As a result, you could lose if never used, and thus should be inspected Depending upon the weather and/or road
control of your vehicle. and replaced when necessary. surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the widely.
tire tread is worn to minimum tread depth, Life of tire
or if the tires have sustained damage, Do not allow your tires to wear down too far.
replace them. G Warning! Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply
Tires and spare tire should be replaced reduced at tread depths of less than 1/8 in
Check the tire inflation pressure at least every after 6 years, regardless of the remaining
other week. For more information on (3 mm).
tread. Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
checking tire inflation pressure, see
“Recommended tire inflation The service life of a tire is dependent upon law. These indicators are located in six places
pressure” (Y page 266). varying factors including but not limited to: on the tread circumference and become
visible at a tread depth of approximately
RDriving style 1/ in (1.6 mm), at which point the tire is
Tire inspection 16
RTire inflation pressure considered worn and should be replaced.
Every time you check the tire inflation RDistance driven The recommended minimum tire tread depth
pressure, you should also inspect your tires
for the following: for summer tires is 1/8 in (3 mm). The
Tread depth recommended minimum tire tread depth for
Rexcessive treadwear (Y page 261)
winter tires is 1/6 in (4 mm).
Rcord or fabric showing through the tire’s G Warning!
rubber Although the applicable federal motor
Rbumps,
vehicle safety laws consider a tire to be
bulges, cuts, cracks or splits in the
worn when the treadwear indicators (TWI)
tread or side of the tire
become visible at approximately 1/16 in Z
261
Operation
Tires and wheels

Direction of rotation Loading the vehicle
Unidirectional tires offer added advantages, Two labels on your vehicle show how much
such as better hydroplaning performance. To weight it may properly carry.
benefit, however, you must make sure the (1) The Tire and Loading Information placard
tires rotate in the direction specified. can be found on the driver’s door
An arrow on the sidewall indicates the B-pillar. This placard tells you important
intended direction of rotation (spinning) of information about the number of people
the tire. that can be in the vehicle and the total
Spare wheels may be mounted against the weight that can be carried in the vehicle.
direction of rotation (spinning) even with a It also contains information on the proper
1 TWI (Tread Wear Indicator) unidirectional tire for temporary use only until size and recommended tire inflation
The treadwear indicator appears as a solid the regular drive wheel has been repaired or pressures for the original equipment tires
band across the tread. replaced. Always observe and follow on your vehicle.
applicable temporary use restrictions and (2) The certification label, also found on the
Storing tires speed limitations indicated on the spare driver’s door B-pillar. It tells you about the
wheel. gross weight capacity of your vehicle,
! Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
with as little exposure to light as possible. (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight
Protect tires from contact with oil, grease of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and
and fuels. cargo. The certification label also tells
you about the front and rear axle weight
Cleaning tires capacity, called the Gross Axle Weight
! Never use a round nozzle to power wash Rating (GAWR).
tires. The intense jet of water can result in The GAWR is the total allowable weight
damage to the tire. that can be carried by a single axle (front
Always replace a damaged tire. or rear). Never exceed the GVWR or
GAWR for either the front axle or rear
axle.
262
Operation
Tires and wheels

Tire and Loading Information placard on the Tire and Loading Information
placard.
i Data shown on Tire and Loading
The combined weight of all occupants,
Information placard example are for
cargo/luggage and trailer tongue load (if
illustration purposes only. Load limit data
applicable) should never exceed the weight
are specific to each vehicle and may vary
referenced in that statement.
from data shown in the following
illustration. Refer to Tire and Loading
Information placard on vehicle for actual Seating capacity
data specific to your vehicle. The seating capacity gives you important
information on the number of occupants that
1 Driver’s door B-pillar can be in the vehicle. Observe front and rear
Following is a discussion on how to work with seating capacity. The Tire and Loading
the information contained on the Tire and Information placard showing the seating
Loading Information placard with regards to capacity is located on the driver’s door
loading your vehicle. B-pillar (Y page 263).
Tire and Loading Information Information placard example are for
illustration purposes only. Seating capacity
G Warning! data are specific to each vehicle and may
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the vary from data shown in the following
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire 1 Load limit information on the Tire and illustration. Refer to Tire and Loading
and Loading Information placard on the Loading Information placard Information placard on vehicle for actual
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires The Tire and Loading Information placard data specific to your vehicle.
can overheat them, possibly causing a showing the load limit information is located
blowout. Overloading the tires can also on the driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 263).
result in handling or steering problems, or
X Locate the statement “The combined
brake failure.
weight of occupants and cargo should
Z
never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.”
263
Operation
Tires and wheels

X Step 1: Locate the statement “The X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of
combined weight of occupants and cargo luggage and cargo being loaded on the
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed
on your vehicle’s Tire and Loading the available cargo and luggage load
Information placard. capacity calculated in step 4.
X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of X Step 6 (if applicable): If your vehicle will
the driver and passengers that will be riding be towing a trailer, load from your trailer
in your vehicle. will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult
X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of this manual to determine how this reduces
the driver and passengers from the available cargo and luggage load
XXX kilograms or XXX lbs. capacity of your vehicle (Y page 266).
1 Seating capacity information on the Tire
and Loading Information placard X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the The following table shows examples on how
available amount of cargo and luggage load to calculate total and cargo load capacities
Steps for determining correct load limit capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount with varying seating configurations and
equals 1 400 lbs and there will be five number and size of occupants. The following
The following steps have been developed as 150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the examples use a load limit of 1 500 lbs. This
required of all manufacturers under Title 49, amount of available cargo and luggage load is for illustration purposes only. Make sure
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 capacity is 650 lbs you are using the actual load limit for your
pursuant to the “National Traffic and Motor (1 400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs). vehicle stated on the vehicle’s Tire and
Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”. Loading Information placard (Y page 263).
264
Operation
Tires and wheels

Example Combined weight Number of Seating Occupants weight Combined Available cargo/luggage
limit of occupants occupants configuration weight of all and trailer tongue weight
and cargo from Tire (driver and occupants (total load limit from Tire
and Loading passengers) and Loading Information
Information placard minus combined
placard weight of all occupants)
1 1 500 lbs 5 front: 2 Occupant 1: 150 lbs 750 lbs 1 500 lbs - 750 lbs = 750 lbs
rear: 3 Occupant 2: 180 lbs
Occupant 3: 160 lbs
Occupant 4: 140 lbs
Occupant 5: 120 lbs
2 1 500 lbs 3 front: 1 Occupant 1: 200 lbs 540 lbs 1 500 lbs - 540 lbs = 960 lbs
rear: 2 Occupant 2: 190 lbs
Occupant 3: 150 lbs
3 1 500 lbs 1 front: 1 Occupant 1: 150 lbs 150 lbs 1 500 lbs - 150 lbs = 1 350 lbs
The higher the weight of all occupants, the (Y page 266) as to not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The
less cargo and luggage load capacity is permissible load limit, you must make sure total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all
available. your vehicle never exceeds the Gross Vehicle cargo, and the trailer tongue load (if
For more information, see “Trailer tongue Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle applicable) must never exceed the GVWR.
load” (Y page 266). Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The total
rear axle. You can obtain the GVWR and allowable weight that can be carried by a
Certification label GAWR from the certification label. The single axle (front or rear).
certification label can be found on the driver’s To assure that your vehicle does not exceed
Even after careful determination of the door B-pillar, see the “Technical data” section
combined weight of all occupants, cargo and the maximum permissible weight limits Z
(Y page 377). (GVWR and GAWR for front and rear axle),
the trailer tongue load (if applicable)
265
Operation
Tires and wheels

have the loaded vehicle (including driver, Recommended tire inflation pressure The tire inflation pressure should be checked
passengers and all cargo and, if applicable, regularly and should only be adjusted on cold
trailer fully loaded) weighed on a suitable G Warning! tires. The tires can be considered cold if the
commercial scale. Follow recommended tire inflation vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours
pressures. or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Trailer tongue load Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated Follow recommended cold tire inflation
The tongue load of any trailer is an important tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, pressures listed on Tire and Loading
weight to measure because it affects the load adversely affect handling and fuel Information placard on the driver’s door
you can carry in your vehicle. If a trailer is economy, and are more likely to fail from B-pillar.
towed, the tongue load must be added to the being overheated. Keeping the tires properly inflated provides
weight of all occupants riding and any cargo Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires the best handling, tread life and riding
you are carrying in the vehicle. The tongue can adversely affect handling and ride comfort.
load typically is 10% of the trailer weight and comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping In addition to the Tire and Loading
everything loaded in it. distance, and result in sudden deflation Information placard on the driver’s door
Your Mercedes-Benz has been designed (blowout) because they are more likely to B-pillar, also consult the tire inflation
primarily to carry passengers and their cargo. become punctured or damaged by road pressure label (if available) on the inside of
Mercedes-Benz does not recommend trailer debris, potholes etc. the filler flap for any additional information
towing with your vehicle. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the pertaining to special driving situations. For
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire more information, see “Important notes on
and Loading Information placard on the tire inflation pressure” (Y page 267).
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a
Information placard example are for
blowout. Overloading the tires can also
illustration purposes only. Tire data are
result in handling or steering problems, or
specific to each vehicle and may vary from
brake failure.
data shown in the following illustration.
Your vehicle is equipped with the Tire and Refer to Tire and Loading Information
Loading Information placard located on the placard on vehicle for actual data specific
driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 262). to your vehicle.
266
Operation
Tires and wheels

leaking from the valves or from around the should wait until the tires are cold before
rim. adjusting the tire inflation pressure.
Some vehicles may have supplemental tire
Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure inflation pressure information for vehicle
are also increased while driving, depending loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle
on the driving speed and the tire load. condition. If such information is provided, it
If you will be driving your vehicle at high can be found on the tire inflation pressure
speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher, label located on the inside of the fuel filler
where it is legal and conditions allow, consult flap.
the tire inflation pressure label on the inside Tire inflation pressure changes by
of the fuel filler flap (if available) on how to approximately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18‡
1 Tire and Loading Information placard with adjust the cold tire inflation pressure. If you
recommended cold tire inflation (10†) of air temperature change. Keep this
do not adjust the tire inflation pressure, in mind when checking tire inflation pressure
pressures excessive heat can build up and result in where the temperature is different from the
The Tire and Loading Information placard lists sudden tire failure. outside temperature.
the recommended cold tire inflation If your vehicle is not equipped with the tire
pressures for maximum loaded vehicle inflation pressure label on the inside of the Potential problems associated with
weight. The tire inflation pressures listed fuel filler flap, contact an authorized underinflated and overinflated tires
apply to the tires installed as original Mercedes-Benz Center for proper tire
equipment. inflation pressure. Underinflated tires
i Driving comfort may be reduced when the G Warning!
Important notes on tire inflation
tire inflation pressure is adjusted to the Follow recommended tire inflation
pressure
value for speeds above 100 mph pressures.
G Warning! (160 km/h) as specified on the tire inflation Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated
If the tire inflation pressure drops pressure label located on the inside of the tires wear excessively and/or unevenly,
repeatedly, check the tires for punctures fuel filler flap. adversely affect handling and fuel
from foreign objects and/or whether air is Make sure to readjust the tire inflation economy, and are more likely to fail from
pressure for normal driving speeds. You being overheated. Z
267
Operation
Tires and wheels

Underinflated tires can Checking tire inflation pressure Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure
Rcause excessive and uneven tire wear when the tires are cold. The tires can be
Safety notes considered cold if the vehicle has been
Radversely affect fuel economy parked for at least 3 hours or driven less than
Rlead
G Warning! 1 mile (1.6 km).
to tire failure from being overheated
Follow recommended tire inflation
Radversely affect handling characteristics If you check the tire inflation pressure when
pressures.
the tires are warm (the vehicle has been
Overinflated tires Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated driven for several miles or sitting less than
tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, 3 hours), the reading will be approximately
G Warning! adversely affect handling and fuel 4 psi (0.3 bar) higher than the cold reading.
Follow recommended tire inflation economy, and are more likely to fail from This is normal. Do not let air out to match the
pressures. being overheated. specified cold tire inflation pressure.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires Otherwise, the tire will be underinflated.
can adversely affect handling and ride can adversely affect handling and ride
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping Checking tire inflation pressure
distance, and result in sudden deflation distance, and result in sudden deflation manually
(blowout) because they are more likely to (blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road become punctured or damaged by road Follow the steps below to achieve correct tire
debris, potholes etc. debris, potholes etc. inflation pressure:
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the X Remove the cap from the valve on one tire.
Overinflated tires can
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire X Firmly press a tire gauge onto the valve.
Radversely affect handling characteristics and Loading Information placard on the X Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire
Rcause uneven tire wear driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires gauge and check against the
Rbe
can overheat them, possibly causing a recommended tire inflation pressure on the
more prone to damage from road
blowout. Overloading the tires can also Tire and Loading Information placard on the
hazards
result in handling or steering problems, or driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 263). If
Radversely affect ride comfort brake failure. necessary, add air to achieve the
Rincrease stopping distance recommended tire inflation pressure.
Check the tire inflation pressure at least every
X If you have overfilled the tire, release tire
other week.
inflation pressure by pushing the metal
268
Operation
Tires and wheels

stem of the valve with e.g. a tip of a pen. Rwhen you are driving in a very sporty i The recommended tire inflation pressures
Then recheck the tire inflation pressure manner (involving rapid acceleration or for your vehicle can be found on the Tire
with the tire gauge. high speeds in curves) and Loading Information placard located
X Install the valve cap. Rwhen you are driving with a loaded roof on the driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 263)
X Repeat this procedure for each tire. rack or heavily laden vehicle or, if available, on the tire inflation pressure
label on the on the inside of the fuel filler
G Warning! flap. The tire inflation pressures are not
Run Flat Indicator (Canada only) When the multifunction display shows the listed in the Operator’s Manual.
While the vehicle is being driven, the Run Flat message Check Tire Pressure Soon,
G Warning!
Indicator monitors the set tire inflation one or more of your tires are significantly
pressures by evaluating each wheel’s underinflated. You should stop and check The Run Flat Indicator does not provide a
rotational speed. This allows the system to your tires as soon as possible, and inflate warning for wrongly selected tire inflation
detect a significant loss of pressure in a tire. them to the proper tire inflation pressure as pressures. Always adjust tire inflation
If a wheel’s rotational speed changes due to indicated on the vehicle’s Tire and Loading pressure according to the Tire and Loading
falling tire inflation pressure, you will see a Information placard or, if available, on the Information placard on the driver’s door
corresponding warning message in the tire inflation pressure label. B-pillar or, if available, on the tire inflation
multifunction display. pressure label located on the inside of the
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
fuel filler flap.
The Run Flat Indicator may function in a causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
restricted manner or with a delay tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel The Run Flat Indicator does not replace
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect regular checks of the tire inflation
Rwhen snow chains are mounted to the
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. pressures since a gradual pressure loss in
vehicle more than one tire cannot be detected by
Each tire, including the spare, should be
Rin the presence of ice and snow the Run Flat Indicator.
checked every other week when cold and
Rwhen you are driving on a loose surface set to the recommended tire inflation The Run Flat Indicator is not able to issue a
(e.g. sand or gravel) pressure as specified on the Tire and warning due to a sudden dramatic loss of
Loading Information placard on the driver’s tire inflation pressure (e.g. tire blowout
door B-pillar or, if available, on the tire caused by a foreign object). In this case
inflation pressure label located on the bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully
inside of the fuel filler flap. Z
269
Operation
Tires and wheels

applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt X Switch on the ignition. After a certain “learning phase”, the Run
steering maneuvers. X Press button ( or & on the Flat Indicator checks the set pressure
multifunction steering wheel to select the values for all four tires.
Restarting the Run Flat Indicator X If you wish to cancel: Press button $
Service menu.
The Run Flat Indicator must be restarted in X Press button $ or % on the or % to select Cancel.
the following situations:
multifunction steering wheel to select TIRE X Press button # to confirm.
Rafter you have changed the tire inflation PRESS.. The previous settings remain unchanged.
pressure X Press button # on the multifunction
Rafter you have replaced the wheels or tires steering wheel to confirm. Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Rafter you have installed new wheels or tires The following message appears in the (TPMS), (USA only)
multifunction display:
X Using the Tire and Loading Information Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure
Run Flat Indicator
placard on the driver’s door B-pillar or, if Monitoring System (TPMS). It measures the
Active tire inflation pressure in the vehicle’s tires
available, the tire inflation pressure label on
Press 'OK' to Restart and issues warnings in case of pressure loss.
the inside of the fuel filler flap, make sure
X Press button #.
the tire inflation pressure of all four tires is The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
correct. The following message will appear in the is equipped with a combination low tire
multifunction display: pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale in the
G Warning! Tire Pressure instrument cluster. Depending on how the
The Run Flat Indicator can only warn you in Now OK? telltale illuminates, it indicates a low tire
a reliable manner if you have set the correct Cancel pressure condition or a malfunction in the
tire inflation pressures for each tire. Yes TPMS system itself:
If an incorrect tire inflation pressure was X If you wish to confirm: Press button RIf the telltale illuminates continuously, one
set, the system will monitor the pressure $ or % to select Yes. or more of your tires are significantly
according to the incorrect value.
X Press button #.
The following message will appear in the
Run Flat Indicator
Restarted
270
Operation
Tires and wheels

underinflated. There is no malfunction in G Warning! vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
the TPMS. Each tire, including the spare (if provided), Please note that the TPMS is not a
RIf the telltale flashes for 60 seconds and should be checked every other week when substitute for proper tire maintenance, and
then stays illuminated, the TPMS system cold and inflated to the inflation pressure it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
itself is not operating properly. recommended by the vehicle manufacturer correct tire pressure, even if underinflation
on the Tire and Loading Information placard has not reached the level to trigger
The TPMS only functions on wheels that are
on the driver’s door B-pillar or, if available, illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
equipped with the proper electronic sensors.
the tire inflation pressure label on the inside telltale.
It monitors the tire inflation pressure, as
selected by the driver, in all four tires. A of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has tires Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
warning is issued to alert you to a decrease of a different size than the size indicated on TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
in pressure in one or more of the tires. the Tire and Loading Information placard or, when the system is not operating properly.
if available, the tire inflation pressure label, The TPMS malfunction indicator is
G Warning! you should determine the proper tire combined with the low tire pressure
The TPMS does not indicate a warning for inflation pressure for those tires. telltale. When the system detects a
wrongly selected inflation pressures. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has malfunction, the telltale will flash for
Always adjust tire inflation pressure been equipped with a tire pressure approximately 1 minute and then remain
according to the Tire and Loading monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates continuously illuminated. This sequence
Information placard or, if available, on the a low tire pressure telltale when one or will continue upon subsequent vehicle
supplemental tire inflation pressure more of your tires are significantly start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
information on the inside of the fuel filler underinflated. Accordingly, when the low When the malfunction indicator is
flap. tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should illuminated, the system may not be able to
The TPMS is not able to issue a warning due stop and check your tires as soon as detect or signal low tire pressure as
to a sudden dramatic loss of pressure (e.g. possible, and inflate them to the proper intended.
tire blowout caused by a foreign object). In pressure. Driving on a significantly TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
this case bring the vehicle to a halt by underinflated tire causes the tire to of reasons, including the installation of
carefully applying the brakes and avoiding overheat and can lead to tire failure. incompatible replacement or alternate tires
abrupt steering maneuvers. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
and tire tread life, and may affect the TPMS from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after Z
271
Operation
Tires and wheels

replacing one or more tires or wheels on Any unauthorized modification to this When you restart the TPMS, the system sets
your vehicle to ensure that the replacement device could void the user’s authority to new reference values for each tire.
or alternate tires and wheels allow the operate the equipment. The TPMS must be restarted when you have
TPMS to continue to function properly. adjusted the tire inflation pressure to a new
Tire inflation pressure warnings
level (e.g. because of different load or driving
If the system detects a significant loss of tire conditions). The TPMS is then recalibrated to
i If a condition causing the TPMS to
inflation pressure in one or more than one the current tire inflation pressures.
malfunction develops, it may take up to
tire, a message appears in the multifunction
10 minutes for the system to signal a Restart the TPMS after adjusting the tire
display. In addition, an acoustic warning
malfunction using the TPMS telltale inflation pressure to the inflation pressure
sounds and the low tire pressure telltale in the
flashing and illumination sequence. recommended for the vehicle operating
instrument cluster comes on.
The telltale extinguishes after a few condition. Tire pressure should only be
minutes driving if the malfunction has been adjusted on cold tires. Observe the
corrected. recommended tire inflation pressure on the
Tire and Loading Information placard on the
i Operating radio transmission equipment driver’s door B-pillar. Some vehicles may have
(e.g. wireless headsets, two-way radios) in supplemental tire pressure information for
or near the vehicle could cause the TPMS driving at high speeds or for vehicle loads less
to malfunction. than the maximum loaded vehicle condition.
Example illustration If such information is provided, it can be
i This device complies with Part 15 of the Restarting the TPMS found on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the X Using the Tire and Loading Information
following two conditions: G Warning!
placard on the driver’s door B-pillar
It is the driver’s responsibility to set the tire
1. This device may not cause harmful (Y page 263) or, if available, the
inflation pressure to the recommended
interference, and supplemental tire inflation pressure
cold tire inflation pressure. Underinflated
2. this device must accept any information on the inside of the fuel filler
tires affect the ability to steer or brake the
interference received, including flap, make sure the tire inflation pressure
vehicle. You might lose control over the
interference that may cause undesired. of all four tires is correct.
vehicle.
272
Operation
Tires and wheels

X Press button ( or & on the pressures are within the system’s specified
multifunction steering wheel to select the range. Afterwards, the current tire inflation
Service menu (Y page 144). pressures are accepted as reference values
X Press the button $ or% on the and then monitored.
multifunction steering wheel to select Tire X If you wish to cancel: Press button
Pressure. L.
X Press button # on the multifunction
steering wheel to confirm. Tire labeling
The following message appears in the
multifunction display: Besides tire name (sales designation) and
Tire Pressure manufacturer name, a number of markings
Monitor can be found on a tire.
Active Following are some explanations for the
X Press button %. markings on your vehicle’s tires:
The following message appears in the
multifunction display: 1 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
Use Current (Y page 279)
Pressures as New 2 DOT, Tire Identification Number
Reference Values (Y page 277)
Press 'OK' to Confirm 3 Maximum tire load (Y page 278)
X If you wish to confirm: Press button 4 Maximum tire inflation pressure
#. (Y page 278)
The following message appears in the 5 Manufacturer
multifunction display: 6 Tire ply material (Y page 280)
Tire Press. Monitor 7 Tire size designation, load and speed
Restarted rating (Y page 274)
After driving a few minutes the system 8 Load identification (Y page 276) Z
verifies that the current tire inflation 9 Tire name
273
Operation
Tires and wheels

i For illustration purposes only. Actual data i For illustration purposes only. Actual data Aspect ratio
on tires are specific to each vehicle and on tires are specific to each vehicle and Aspect ratio 2 is the dimensional
may vary from data shown in above may vary from data shown in above relationship between tire section height and
illustration. illustration. section width and is expressed in percentage.
For more information, see “Rims and General: Depending on the design standards The aspect ratio is arrived at by dividing
tires” (Y page 382). used, the tire size molded into the sidewall section height by section width.
may have no letter or a letter preceding the
Tire code
Tire size designation, load and speed tire size designation.
rating Tire code 3 indicates the tire construction
No letter preceding the size designation (as
type. The “R” stands for radial tire type. Letter
illustrated above): Passenger car tire based
“D” means diagonal or bias ply construction;
on European design standards.
letter “B” means belted-bias ply construction.
Letter “P” preceding the size designation:
At the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire
Passenger car tire based on U.S. design
with a speed capability above 149 mph
standards.
(240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size
Letter “LT” preceding the size designation: designation (for example: 245/40 ZR 18). For
Light Truck tire based on U.S. design additional information, see “Tire speed
standards. rating” (Y page 275).
Letter “T” preceding the size designation:
Temporary spare tires which are high Rim diameter
1 Tire width pressure compact spares designed for Rim diameter 4 is the diameter of the bead
temporary emergency use only. seat, not the diameter of the rim edge. The
2 Aspect ratio in %
rim diameter is indicated in inches (in).
3 Radial tire code Tire width
4 Rim diameter Tire width 1 indicates the nominal tire width Tire load rating
5 Tire load rating in millimeters. G Warning!
6 Tire speed rating The tire load rating must always be at least
half of the GAWR of your vehicle.
Otherwise, tire failure may be the result
274
Operation
Tires and wheels

which may cause an accident and/or Tire speed rating Index Speed rating
serious injury to you or others. G Warning!
Always replace rims and tires with the same V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
Even when permitted by law, never operate
designation, manufacturer and type as a vehicle at speeds greater than the W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
shown on the original part. maximum speed rating of the tires.
Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
Exceeding the maximum speed for which
G Warning!
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the failure, causing loss of vehicle control and
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire possibly resulting in an accident and/or ZR...(..Y) above 186 mph (300 km/h)
and Loading Information placard on the serious personal injury and possible death,
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires ZR above 149 mph (240 km/h)
for you and for others.
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also Regardless of the tire speed rating, local RAt the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire
result in handling or steering problems, or speed limits should be obeyed. Use prudent with a speed capability above 149 mph
brake failure. driving speeds appropriate to prevailing (240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size
conditions. designation (for example: 245/40 ZR18).
Tire load rating 5 is a numerical code To determine the maximum speed
Tire speed rating 6 indicates the approved
associated with the maximum load a tire can capability of the tire, the service
maximum speed for the tire.
support. description for the tire must be referred to.
Summer tires
For example, a load rating of 91 corresponds The service description is comprised of tire
to a maximum load of 1356 lb (615 kg) the Index Speed rating load rating 5 and tire speed rating 6.
tire is designed to support. See also If your tire includes “ZR” in the size
“Maximum tire load” (Y page 278) where the Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
designation and no service description is
maximum load associated with the load index R up to 106 mph (170 km/h) given, the tire manufacturer must be
is indicated in kilograms and lbs. consulted for the maximum speed
For additional information on tire load rating, S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
capability.
see “Load identification” (Y page 276). T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) If a service description is given, the speed
capability is limited by the speed symbol in
H up to 130 mph (210 km/h) Z
the service description. Example:
275
Operation
Tires and wheels

245/40 ZR18 97Y. In this example, “97Y” you use show M+S and the mountain/ any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
is the service description. The letter “Y” snowflake.marking on the tire glad to assist you.
designates the speed rating and the speed sidewall. These tires meet specific snow
capability of the tire is limited to 186 mph traction performance requirements of the
(300 km/h). Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA)
Load identification
RAny tire with a speed capability above and the Rubber Association of Canada
186 mph (300 km/h) must include a “ZR” (RAC) and have been designed specifically
in the size designation AND the service for use in snow conditions.
description must be placed in parenthesis. An electronic speed limiter prevents your
Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99Y). The “(Y)” vehicle from exceeding a speed of:
speed rating in parenthesis designates the RAllmodels except C 63 AMG:
maximum speed capability of the tire as 130 mph (210 km/h)
being above 186 mph (300 km/h). Consult
RC 63 AMG:
the tire manufacturer for the actual
maximum permissible speed of the tire. 155 mph (250 km/h)
RC 63 AMG with increased top speed:
All-season and winter tires 1 Load identification
174 mph (280 km/h)
Index Speed rating i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
The factory equipped tires on your vehicle
Q M+S16 up to 100 mph (160 km/h) may have a tire speed rating above the on tires are specific to each vehicle and
maximum speed permitted by the electronic may vary from data shown in above
T M+S16 up to 118 mph (190 km/h) speed limiter. illustration.
H M+S16 up to 130 mph (210 km/h) Make sure your tires have the required tire In addition to tire load rating, special load
speed rating as specified for your vehicle in identification 1 may be molded into the tire
V M+S16 up to 149 mph (240 km/h) the “Technical data” section (Y page 382), sidewall following the letter designating the
for example when purchasing new tires. tire speed rating 6 (Y page 274).
i Not all M+S rated tires provide special If you are uncertain about the correct reading
of the information given on a tire’s sidewall,
winter performance. Make sure the tires
16 or M+S.for winter tires
276
Operation
Tires and wheels

RNo specification given: absence of any text Manufacturer’s identification mark
(like in above example) indicates a
Manufacturer’s identification mark 2
standard load (SL) tire.
denotes the tire manufacturer.
RXL or Extra Load: designates an extra load New tires have a mark with two symbols.
(or reinforced) tire.
Retreaded tires have a mark with four
RLight Load: designates a light load tire. symbols. For more information on retreaded
RC, D, E: designates load range associated tires, see (Y page 260).
with the maximum load a tire can carry at
a specified pressure. Tire size
1 DOT Code 3 indicates the tire size.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) 2 Manufacturer’s identification mark
3 Tire size Tire type code
U.S. tire regulations require each new tire
manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a TIN 4 Tire type code (at the option of the tire Tire type code 4 may, at the option of the
into or onto a sidewall of each tire produced. manufacturer) manufacturer, be used as a descriptive code
The TIN is a unique identifier which facilitates 5 Date of manufacture for identifying significant characteristics of
efforts by tire manufactures to notify the tire.
purchasers in recall situations or other safety i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
matters concerning tires and gives on tires are specific to each vehicle and Date of manufacture
purchasers the means to easily identify such may vary from data shown in above
illustration. The date of manufacture 5 identifies the
tires. week and year of manufacture.
The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s The first two figures identify the week,
identification mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type DOT (Department of Transportation)
starting with “01” to represent the first full
code” and “Date of manufacture”. Tire branding symbol 1 denotes that the tire week of the calendar year. The second two
meets requirements of the U.S. Department figures represent the year.
of Transportation.
Z
277
Operation
Tires and wheels

For example, “3202” represents the 32nd may vary from data shown in above
week of 2002. illustration.
The maximum tire load is the maximum
Maximum tire load weight the tires are designed to support.
For more information on tire load rating, see
G Warning! (Y page 274).
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the For information on calculating total and cargo
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire load capacities, see (Y page 264).
and Loading Information placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a Maximum tire inflation pressure 1 Maximum permissible tire inflation
blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or G Warning! pressure
brake failure. Never exceed the maximum tire inflation i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
pressure. Follow recommended tire on tires are specific to each vehicle and
inflation pressures. may vary from data shown in above
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated illustration.
tires wear excessively and/or unevenly,
This is the maximum permissible tire inflation
adversely affect handling and fuel
pressure for the tire.
economy, and are more likely to fail from
being overheated. Always follow the recommended tire inflation
pressure (Y page 266) for proper tire
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
inflation.
can adversely affect handling and ride
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
1 Maximum tire load rating
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and
278
Operation
Tires and wheels

Uniform Tire Quality Grading i For illustration purposes only. Actual data service practices and differences in road
Standards on tires are specific to each vehicle and characteristics and climate.
may vary from data shown in above
The Uniform Tire Quality Grading is a U.S. illustration. Traction
Government requirement designed to give
drivers consistent and reliable information Quality grades can be found, where G Warning!
regarding tire performance. Tire applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
manufacturers are required to grade tires shoulder and maximum section width. For
based on straight-ahead braking traction
based on three performance factors: example:
tests, and does not include acceleration,
treadwear, traction, and temperature Treadwear Traction Temperature cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
resistance. Although not a Government of characteristics.
Canada requirement, all tires made for sale in 200 AA A
North America have these grades branded on The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
the sidewall. All passenger car tires must conform to are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent
federal safety requirements in addition to the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
these grades. measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt
Treadwear and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
G Warning!
under controlled conditions on a specified If ice has formed on the road, tire traction
U.S. Government test course. For example, a will be substantially reduced. Under such
tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half weather conditions, drive, steer and brake
(1 1/2) times as well on the government with extreme caution.
1 Treadwear course as a tire graded 100. The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy
2 Traction The relative performance of tires depends road is always lower than on a dry road.
3 Temperature resistance upon the actual conditions of their use, You should pay particular attention to the
however, and may depart significantly from condition of the road whenever the outside Z
the norm due to variations in driving habits, temperature is close to the freezing point.
279
Operation
Tires and wheels

Mercedes-Benz recommends winter tires dissipate heat when tested under controlled i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
(Y page 284) with a minimum tread depth of conditions on a specified indoor laboratory on tires are specific to each vehicle and
approximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four wheels test wheel. Sustained high temperature can may vary from data shown in above
for the winter season to ensure normal cause the material of the tire to degenerate illustration.
balanced handling characteristics. On and reduce tire life, and excessive This marking tells you about the type of cord
packed snow, they can reduce your stopping temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. and number of plies in the sidewall and under
distance compared to summer tires. The grade C corresponds to a level of the tread.
Stopping distance, however, is still performance which all passenger car tires
considerably greater than when the road is must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
not covered with snow or ice. Exercise Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A Tire and loading terminology
appropriate caution. represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum Accessory weight
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may required by law. The combined weight (in excess of those
cause serious damage to the drivetrain
standard items which may be replaced) of
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Tire ply material automatic transmission, power steering,
Limited Warranty.
power brakes, power windows, power seats,
radio, and heater, to the extent that these
Temperature items are available as factory-installed
G Warning! equipment (whether installed or not).
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly Air pressure
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive The amount of air inside the tire pressing
speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, outward on each square inch of the tire. Air
either separately or in combination, can pressure is expressed in pounds per square
cause excessive heat build-up and possible inch (psi), or kilopascal (kPa) or bar.
tire failure.
1 Plies in sidewall
The temperature grades are A (the highest),
B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to 2 Plies under tread
the generation of heat and its ability to
280
Operation
Tires and wheels

Aspect ratio DOT (Department of Transportation) tongue load). It is indicated on certification
label located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
Dimensional relationship between tire A tire branding symbol which denotes the tire
section height and section width expressed meets requirements of the U.S. Department
in percentage. of Transportation. Kilopascal (kPa)
The metric unit for air pressure. There are
Bar GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) 6.9 kPa to 1 psi; another metric unit for air
pressure is bar. There are 100 kilopascals
Another metric unit for air pressure. There are The GAWR is the maximum permissible axle
(kPa) to 1 bar.
14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) to weight. The gross vehicle weight on each axle
1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 bar. must never exceed the GAWR for the front
and rear axle indicated on the certification Maximum load rating
Bead label located on the driver’s door B-pillar. The maximum load in kilograms and pounds
that can be carried by the tire.
The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
The GVW comprises the weight of the vehicle Maximum loaded vehicle weight
Cold tire inflation pressure including fuel, tools, spare wheel, installed The sum of curb weight, accessory weight,
accessories, passengers and cargo and, if total load limit, and production options
Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle has applicable, trailer tongue load. The GVW must weight.
been sitting for at least 3 hours or driven no never exceed the GVWR indicated on the
more than 1 mile (1.6 km). certification label located on the driver’s door Maximum permissible tire inflation
B-pillar. pressure
Curb weight
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) This number is the greatest amount of air
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard
pressure that should ever be put in the tire.
equipment including the maximum capacity This is the maximum permissible vehicle
of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, weight of the fully loaded vehicle (weight of
air conditioning and additional optional the vehicle including all options, passengers,
equipment, but without passengers and fuel, and cargo and, if applicable, trailer
cargo. Z
281
Operation
Tires and wheels

Normal occupant weight handling, tread life and riding comfort. If so Tire load rating
equipped, supplemental information
The number of occupants the vehicle is Numerical code associated with the
pertaining to special driving situations can be
designed to seat, multiplied by 68 kilograms maximum load a tire can support.
found on the tire inflation pressure label on
(150 lb).
the inside of the fuel filler flap.
Tire ply composition and material used
Occupant distribution
Rim This indicates the number of plies or the
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
their designated seating positions. the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
assembly upon which the tire beads are
manufacturers also must indicate the ply
seated.
Production options weight materials in the tire and sidewall, which
include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
The combined weight of those installed Sidewall
regular production options weighing over
The portion of a tire between the tread and Tire speed rating
5 lbs (2.3 kilograms) in excess of those
the bead.
standard items which they replace, not Part of tire designation; indicates the speed
previously considered in curb weight or range for which a tire is approved.
accessory weight, including heavy duty TIN (Tire Identification Number)
brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty Unique identifier which facilitates efforts by Total load limit
battery, and special trim. tire manufacturers to notify purchasers in
Rated cargo and luggage load plus
recall situations or other safety matters
68 kilograms (150 lb) times the vehicle’s
PSI (Pounds per square inch) concerning tires and gives purchasers the
designated seating capacity.
means to easily identify such tires. The TIN is
A standard unit of measure for air pressure.
comprised of “Manufacturer’s identification
mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code” and “Date Traction
Recommended tire inflation pressure of manufacture”. Force exerted by the vehicle on the road via
The recommended tire inflation pressure for the tires. The amount of grip provided.
normal driving conditions is listed on the Tire
and Loading Information placard located on
the driver’s door B-pillar and provides best
282
Operation
Tires and wheels

Tread Rotating tires If applicable to your vehicle’s tire
configuration, tires can be rotated according
The portion of a tire that comes into contact G Warning! to the tire manufacturer’s recommended
with the road.
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tires intervals in the tire manufacturer’s warranty
are of the same dimension. pamphlet located in your vehicle literature
Treadwear indicators portfolio. If none is available, tires should be
If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size
Narrow bands, sometimes called “wear bars” tires (different tire dimensions front vs. rotated every 3 000 to 6 000 miles (5 000 to
that show across the tread of a tire when only rear), tire rotation is not possible. 10 000 km), or sooner if necessary, according
1/ in (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
16
to the degree of tire wear. The same rotation
G Warning! (spinning) direction must be maintained.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards Have the tightening torque checked after Rotate tires before the characteristic tire
changing a wheel. Wheels could become wear pattern becomes visible (shoulder wear
A tire information system that provides loose if not tightened with a torque of on front tires and tread center wear on rear
consumers with ratings for a tire’s traction, 96 lb-ft (130 Nm). tires).
temperature and treadwear. Ratings are Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel Thoroughly clean the mounting face of wheels
determined by tire manufacturers using U.S. bolts specified for your vehicle’s rims. and brake disks, i.e. the inner side of the
government testing procedures. The ratings wheels/tires, during each rotation. Check for
are molded into the sidewall of the tire. Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles and ensure proper tire inflation pressure.
with tires of the same dimension all around.
For information on wheel change, see “Flat
Vehicle maximum load on the tire If your vehicle is equipped with tires of the
tire” (Y page 360).
same dimension all around, tires can be
Load on an individual tire that is determined
rotated, observing a front-to-rear rotation
by distributing to each axle its share of the
pattern that will maintain the intended
maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing
rotation (spinning) direction of the tire
it by two.
(Y page 262).
In some cases, such as when your vehicle is
equipped with mixed-size tires (different tire
dimension front vs. rear), tire rotation is not
possible. Z
283
Operation
Winter driving
Winter driving sure the tires you use show the mountain/ Snow chains
snowflake.marking on the tire sidewall.
General information These tires meet specific snow traction ! Some tire sizes do not leave adequate
performance requirements of the Rubber clearance for snow chains. To help avoid
Have your vehicle winterized at an authorized
Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the serious damage to your vehicle or tires,
Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) and make sure the use of snow chains is
have been designed specifically for use in permissible as specified in the “Technical
Winter tires snow conditions. Use of winter tires is the data” section of this Operator’s Manual.
only way to achieve the maximum Snow chains should only be driven on snow-
G Warning!
effectiveness of your vehicle’s driving safety covered roads at speeds not to exceed
Winter tires with a tread depth of less than systems such as the ABS and the ESP® in 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains as soon
1/ in (4 mm) must be replaced. They are
6 winter operation. as possible when driving on roads without
no longer suitable for winter operation. For safe handling, make sure all mounted snow.
winter tires are of the same make and have Observe the following guidelines when using
G Warning!
the same tread design. snow chains:
If you use your spare wheel when winter
tires are fitted on the other wheels, be For information on winter tires for your RUse of snow chains is not permissible with
aware that the difference in tire vehicle model, see the “Technical data” all wheel/tire combinations (Y page 382).
characteristics may very well impair turning section (Y page 382). RUse snow chains in pairs and on rear
stability and that overall driving stability Always observe the speed rating of the winter wheels only. Follow the manufacturer’s
may be reduced. Adapt your driving style tires installed on your vehicle. If the maximum mounting instructions.
accordingly. speed for which your tires are rated is below
Have the spare wheel replaced by regular the speed rating of your vehicle, you must ! If snow chains are mounted to the front
road wheel with a winter tire at the nearest place a notice to this effect where it will be wheels, they may scrape against the body
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. seen by the driver. Such notices are available or axle components. The tires or the vehicle
at your tire dealer or any authorized could be damaged as a result.
Always use winter tires at temperatures Mercedes-Benz Center. ROnly use snow chains that are approved by
below 45‡ (7†) and whenever wintry road Mercedes-Benz. Any authorized Mercedes-
conditions prevail. Not all M+S rated tires
provide special winter performance. Make
284
Operation
Winter driving
Benz Center will be glad to advise you on G Warning! i For information on driving with snow
this subject. The outside temperature indicator is not chains, see “Snow chains” (Y page 284).
RUse of snow chains may be prohibited designed to serve as an ice-warning device Road salts and chemicals can adversely
depending on location. Always check local and is therefore unsuitable for that affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal
and state laws before installing snow purpose. force may become necessary to produce the
chains. Indicated temperatures just above the normal brake effect.
RDo not use snow chains on the spare wheel. freezing point do not guarantee that the Depressing the brake pedal periodically when
road surface is free of ice. The road may still traveling at length on salt-strewn roads can
i When driving with snow chains, you may be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bring road-salt-impaired braking efficiency
wish to switch off the ESP® (Y page 68) bridges. back to normal.
before setting the vehicle in motion. This If the vehicle is parked after being driven on
will improve the vehicle’s traction. G Warning! salt-treated roads, the braking efficiency
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift should be tested as soon as possible after
in order to obtain braking action. This could driving is resumed.
Winter driving instructions result in drive wheel slip and reduced
G Warning!
G Warning! vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control. Make sure not to endanger any other road
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make users when carrying out these braking
sure snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe The most important rule for slippery or icy maneuvers.
and from around the vehicle with the engine roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid abrupt
running. Otherwise, deadly carbon acceleration, braking and steering
monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control
interior resulting in unconsciousness and system under such conditions.
death. When the vehicle is in danger of skidding, shift
To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, the automatic transmission to neutral
open a window slightly on the side of the position N or declutch in case of manual
vehicle not facing the wind. transmission. Try to keep the vehicle under
control by corrective steering action.
Z
285
Operation
Driving instructions
Driving instructions Drinking and driving longer brake or accelerate. This could lead
to accidents and injury.
Drive sensibly – save fuel G Warning!
To save fuel you should: Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs
and driving are very dangerous Power assistance
RKeep tires at the recommended inflation combinations. Even a small amount of
pressures. alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, G Warning!
RRemove unnecessary loads. perceptions and judgment. There is no power assistance for the
RRemove The possibility of a serious or even fatal steering and the service brake when the
roof rack when not in use.
accident are greatly increased when you engine is not running.
RAllow engine to warm up under low load
drink or take drugs and drive. Steering and braking requires significantly
use. more effort and you could lose control of
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
RAvoid frequent acceleration and anyone to drive who has been drinking or the vehicle and cause an accident as a
deceleration. taking drugs. result.
RHave all maintenance work performed at Do not turn off the engine while the vehicle
the intervals specified in the Maintenance is in motion.
Booklet and as required by the Pedals
Maintenance system. Contact an G Warning! Brakes
Make sure absolutely no objects are
Fuel consumption is also increased by driving obstructing the pedals’ range of movement. Downhill grades
in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic, on Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all ! When driving down long and steep
short trips and in mountainous areas. obstacles. If there are any floormats or grades, relieve the load on the brakes by
carpets in the footwell, make sure that the shifting into a lower gear to use the
pedals still have sufficient clearance. engine’s braking power. This helps prevent
During sudden driving or braking overheating of the brakes and reduces
maneuvers, the objects could get caught wear.
between the pedals. You could then no When using the engine’s braking power, a
drive wheel may not spin for an extended
period of time, e.g. on slippery road
286
Operation
surfaces. This may cause serious damage expected brake effect. Maintain a safe new trip, so that salt residues are
to the drivetrain which is not covered by the distance from vehicles in front. removed from the brake disc
To help prevent brake disk corrosion after
Continuous or hard braking driving on wet or salt-covered roads, it is Brake service
advisable to brake the vehicle with ! The brake fluid level in the reservoir may
G Warning! considerable force prior to parking. The heat
be too low if the red brake warning lamp in
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will generated serves to dry the brakes.
the instrument cluster comes on while the
cause excessive and premature wear of the engine is running and an acoustic warning
brake pads. Salt-covered roads sounds. Observe additional messages in
It can also result in the brakes overheating, the multifunction display that may appear.
G Warning!
thereby significantly reducing their Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may
effectiveness. It may not be possible to A layer of salt on the brake discs and the
brake linings may cause a delay in the be the reason for low brake fluid in the
stop the vehicle in sufficient time to avoid reservoir.
an accident. braking effect, resulting in a significantly
increased braking distance, which could Have the brake system inspected
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive on lead to an accident. immediately. Contact an authorized
for some time, rather than immediately park, To avoid this danger, you should: Mercedes-Benz Center.
so that the air stream will cool down the Roccasionally All checks and service work on the brake
brake carefully when you
brakes faster. system should be carried out by qualified
are driving on salt-covered roads, so that
any layer of salt that may have built up technicians only. Contact an authorized
Wet roads on the brake discs and the brake linings Mercedes-Benz Center.
G Warning! is removed without putting other road Only install brake pads and use brake fluid
users at risk recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
After driving in heavy rain for some time
without applying the brakes or through Rmaintain a greater distance to the vehicle G Warning!
water deep enough to wet brake ahead and drive with particular care If other than recommended brake pads are
components, the first braking action may Rcarefully apply the brakes at the end of a installed, or other than recommended
be somewhat reduced and increased pedal trip and immediately after commencing a brake fluid is used, the braking properties
Z
pressure may be necessary to obtain of the vehicle can be degraded to an extent
287
Operation
that safe braking is substantially impaired. 1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in G Warning!
This could result in an accident. position 0 or 1) when the parking brake is New vehicle brake pads and discs, and
being tested on a brake test dynamometer replacement brake pads and discs may
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: or the vehicle is being towed with the front take several hundred miles of driving until
Only conduct operational or performance axle raised. they provide optimum braking efficiency.
tests on a two-axle dynamometer. If such Active braking action through the ESP® Until that time, you may need to use
tests are necessary, contact an authorized may otherwise seriously damage the brake increased brake pedal pressure while
Mercedes-Benz Center. You could system which is not covered by the braking. Please be aware of this and adjust
otherwise seriously damage the brake Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. your driving and braking accordingly during
system or the transfer case which is not If your brake system is normally only this break-in period.
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited subjected to moderate loads, you should Excessive high-demand braking will cause
Warranty. occasionally test the effectiveness of the correspondingly high brake wear. Please be
brakes by applying above-normal braking attentive to the brake warning lamp in the
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: instrument cluster and brake condition
pressure at higher speeds. This will also
Because the ESP® operates automatically, enhance the grip of the brake pads. messages in the multifunction display.
the engine and ignition must be shut off Especially for high performance driving, it
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or G Warning!
is important to maintain and have the brake
1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in Make sure not to endanger any other road system checked regularly.
position 0 or 1) when the parking brake is users when carrying out these braking
being tested on a brake test dynamometer. maneuvers. The high-performance brake system is
Active braking action through the ESP® designed to operate under the extremely high
Refer to the description of the Brake Assist operating demands required to
may otherwise seriously damage the brake System (BAS) (Y page 67).
system which is not covered by the accommodate the performance capabilities
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. of the vehicle.
High-performance brake system
! Vehicles without 4MATIC: The high-performance brake system is only
Because the ESP® operates automatically, available on C 63 AMG.
the engine and ignition must be shut off
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or
288
Operation
The brakes may produce a squeaking-type ! Simultaneously depressing the Standing water
noise depending on the accelerator pedal and applying the brakes
reduces engine performance and causes ! Do not drive through flooded areas.
Rvehicle speed
premature brake and drivetrain wear which Before driving through water, determine its
Rbrake force applied depth.
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Rambient conditions, e.g. temperature and Limited Warranty. If you must drive through standing water,
humidity drive slowly to prevent water from entering
the passenger compartment or the engine
As with any brake system, the wear of Hydroplaning compartment. Water in these areas could
individual brake system components such as
Depending on the depth of the water layer on cause damage to electrical components or
brake pads or disks strongly depends on your
the road, hydroplaning may occur, even at low wiring of the engine or transmission, or
driving style and the conditions under which
speeds and with new tires. In heavy rain or could result in water being ingested by the
you operate the vehicle. Thus, a driving style
when conditions indicate possible engine through the air intake causing
calling for high-demand braking will cause
hydroplaning: severe internal engine damage. Any such
your vehicle’s brakes to wear more quickly.
X Reduce vehicle speed.
damage is not covered by the Mercedes-
Benz Limited Warranty.
X Avoid track grooves in the road.
Driving off
X Apply brakes cautiously.
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not place
full load on the engine until the operating
temperature has been reached.
! When driving off on a slippery surface, do
not allow a drive wheel to spin for an
off. Doing so may cause serious damage to
the drivetrain which is not covered by the
289
Operation
Driving abroad Only operate the audio system or Refer to the radio transmitter operation
COMAND17 (Cockpit Management and instructions regarding use of an external
If you plan to drive the vehicle outside the U.S. antenna.
or Canada, you should request dealer Data System) if road, weather and traffic
network information for your destination from conditions permit. Otherwise, you may not
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. be able to observe traffic conditions and Emission control
could endanger yourself and others.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph Certain systems of the engine serve to keep
Control and operation of radio (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is the toxic components of the exhaust gases
transmitter covering a distance of 44 feet within permissible limits required by law.
(approximately 14 m) every second. These systems will function properly only
Safety notes when maintained strictly according to factory
G Warning! specifications. Any adjustments on the
Telephones and two-way radios
engine should, therefore, be carried out only
Please do not forget that your primary
responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A G Warning! by qualified Mercedes-Benz Center
Never operate radio transmitters equipped authorized technicians.
driver’s attention to the road must always
be his/her primary focus when driving. For with a built-in or attached antenna, such as Engine adjustments should not be altered in
your safety and the safety of others, we a portable telephone or a citizens band unit, any way. Moreover, the specified service
recommend that you pull over to a safe from inside the vehicle while the engine is procedures must be carried out regularly
location and stop before placing or taking running. Doing so could lead to a according to Mercedes-Benz servicing
a telephone call. malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic requirements. For details refer to the
system, possibly resulting in an accident Maintenance Booklet.
If you choose to use the telephone17 while
driving, please use the hands-free device
and/or serious personal injury. Radio G Warning!
transmitters should only be used inside the Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
and only use the telephone when road,
vehicle if they are connected to an antenna your health. All exhaust gas contains
weather and traffic conditions permit.
that is installed on the outside of the carbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
vehicle. cause unconsciousness and possible
using a mobile telephone while driving a
vehicle. death.
17 Observe all legal requirements.
290
Operation
Maintenance
Do not run the engine in confined areas Maintenance Maintenance service indicator
(such as a garage) which are not properly message
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas Notes
The maintenance service indicator message
fumes are entering the vehicle while The Maintenance System in your vehicle will notify you when the next maintenance
driving, have the cause determined and tracks the distance driven and the time service is due.
corrected immediately. If you must drive elapsed since the last maintenance service,
under these conditions, drive only with at Starting approximately 1 month before the
calculates other maintenance service work
least one window fully open at all times. next maintenance service is due, one of the
required, and calls for the next maintenance
following messages will appear in the
service accordingly.
multifunction display while you are driving or
We strongly recommend that you have your when you switch on the ignition (example
vehicle serviced at an authorized Mercedes- service A):
Benz Center, in accordance with the
Maintenance Booklet at the times called for Next Service A in XXX miles (km)
by the maintenance service indicator. Next Service A in XXX days
i Failure to have the vehicle maintained in Service A Due
accordance with the Maintenance Booklet
and maintenance service indicator at the
designated times/mileage will result in
vehicle damage not covered by the
The type of maintenance service due is

indicated in the multifunction display:
A Basic service
(approximately 1 hour)
B Extended service
Z
(approximately 8 hours)
291
Operation
Maintenance
An additional number or a further letter in Maintenance service term exceeded X Press button % or $ to select
combination with the maintenance type can ASSYST PLUS.
If you have exceeded the suggested
be indicated. This indicates that further X Press button # on the multifunction
maintenance service term, you will see the
auxiliary maintenance work is required. steering wheel to confirm.
following message in the multifunction
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center The maintenance service indicator display
display:
for more information. with the maintenance service deadline
Service A Exceeded by XXXX miles (km)
appears in the multifunction display.
Clearing the maintenance service Service A Exceeded By XXX days
indicator message In addition, a signal sounds when the i If the battery is disconnected, the days of
message appears. disconnection will not be included in the
The maintenance service indicator message count shown by the maintenance service
is cleared automatically Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
reset the maintenance service indicator indicator. To arrive at the true maintenance
Rafter approximately 10 seconds when you service deadline, you will need to subtract
following a completed maintenance service.
switch on the ignition these days from the days shown in the
Rafter approximately 10 seconds when maintenance service indicator message or
reaching the service threshold while driving Calling up the maintenance service maintenance service indicator display.
indicator display
Rafter approximately 30 seconds, once the
suggested maintenance service term has i The menu overview can be found on Resetting the maintenance service
passed (Y page 134). indicator
X Clearing the maintenance service You can call up the maintenance service In the event that the maintenance service on
indicator message manually: Press indicator display at any time to check when your vehicle is not carried out at an authorized
button L or button # on the the next maintenance service is due. Mercedes-Benz Center, you can have the
multifunction steering wheel. X Switch on the ignition. maintenance service indicator reset.
The standard display appears in the The standard display of the control system The automotive maintenance facility carrying
multifunction display. appears (Y page 135). out the maintenance service will find the
X Press button ( or & on the information for resetting the maintenance
multifunction steering wheel to select the service indicator in the maintenance-relevant
Service menu. literature for your vehicle.
292
Operation
Vehicle care
Such literature is available from any Vehicle care Such damage is caused not only by extreme
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or directly and varying climatic conditions, but also by:
from Mercedes-Benz. Cleaning and care of the vehicle RAir pollution
! If the maintenance service indicator was Notes RRoad salt
inadvertently reset, have an authorized
Regular and proper care will help to maintain RTar
Mercedes-Benz Center correct it.
the value of your vehicle. RGravel
Only reset if the proper maintenance and stone chipping
service has been performed. Resetting the G Warning! To avoid paint damage, you should
system without performing the proper Many cleaning products can be hazardous. immediately remove:
maintenance service as called for by the Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
RGrease and oil
maintenance service indicator will result in Always follow the instructions on the
engine damage and/or other vehicle particular container. Always open your RFuel
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz vehicle’s doors or windows when cleaning RCoolant
Limited Warranty. the inside.
RBrake fluid
Never use fluids or solvents that are not
designed for cleaning your vehicle. RBird droppings
Always lock away cleaning products and RInsects
keep them out of reach of children. RTree resins etc.
! When cleaning the vehicle, do not use Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminates
scouring agents. Never apply strong force the aggressiveness and potency of the above
and only use a soft, wet cloth or sponge. adverse influences.
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the More frequent washings are necessary to
surface to be cleaned. deal with unfavorable conditions:
While in operation, even while parked, your Rnear the ocean
vehicle is subjected to varying external Rin industrial areas (smoke, exhaust
influences which, if gone unchecked, can emissions)
attack the paintwork as well as the vehicle Z
Rduring winter operation
underbody and cause lasting damage.
293
Operation
Vehicle care
You should check your vehicle from time to here. In such cases it is best to seek aid at an Tar stains
time for stone chipping or other damage. Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Quickly remove tar stains before they dry and
damage should be repaired as soon as The following topics deal with the cleaning become more difficult to remove. A tar
possible to prevent corrosion. and care of your vehicle and give important remover is recommended.
In doing so, do not neglect the underbody of “how-to” information as well as references to
the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thorough Mercedes-Benz approved vehicle-care Paintwork, painted body components
check is a washing of the underbody followed products.
by a thorough inspection. Damaged areas ! Affixing stickers, magnets, adhesive tape
need to be re-undercoated. Power washer or similar materials to painted body
Your vehicle has been treated at the factory components may damage the paintwork.
! Follow the instructions provided by the
with a wax-base rustproofing in the body Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care should
power washer manufacturer on
cavities which will last for the lifetime of the be applied when water drops on the paint
maintaining a distance between the vehicle
vehicle. Post-production treatment is neither surface do not “bead up”. This should
and the nozzle of the power washer.
necessary nor recommended by Mercedes- normally be done every 3 to 5 months,
Benz because of the possibility of Never use a round nozzle to power-wash
depending on the climate and washing
incompatibility between materials used in the tires. The intense jet of water can result in
detergent used.
production process and others applied later. damage to the tire.
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner
We have selected vehicle-care products and Always replace a damaged tire.
should be applied if the paint surface shows
compiled recommendations which are Always keep the jet of water moving across signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of gloss).
specially matched to our vehicles and which the surface. Do not aim directly at electrical
Do not apply any of these products or wax if
always reflect the latest technology. You can parts, electrical connectors, seals, or other
your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the hood
obtain Mercedes-Benz approved vehicle-care rubber parts.
is still hot.
products at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: X Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick for
Center.
If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of quick and provisional repairs of minor paint
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or
water, and a SmartKey is within damage (i.e. chips from stones, vehicle
damage due to negligent or incorrect care
approximately 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle, it doors, etc.).
cannot always be removed or repaired with
the vehicle-care products recommended could be inadvertently locked or unlocked.
294
Operation
Vehicle care
Engine cleaning Hand-wash ! Do not clean your vehicle in an automatic
X Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle touchless car wash which uses caustic
Prior to cleaning the engine compartment,
in direct sunlight. spray. Caustic spray will damage the paint
make sure to protect electrical components
X Only use a soft, wet cloth or sponge to
or ornamental moldings.
and connectors from contact with water and
cleaning agents. clean the vehicle. If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it before
Corrosion protection, such as MB X Only use a mild vehicle wash detergent, running it through the automatic car wash.
Anticorrosion Wax should be applied to the such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car ! Make sure the combination switch is set
engine compartment after every engine Shampoo. to wiper setting M. Otherwise, the rain
cleaning. Before applying, all control linkage X Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a sensor could activate and cause the wipers
bushings and joints should be lubricated. The diffused jet of water. to move unintentionally. This may lead to
poly-V-belt and all pulleys should be X Do not spray directly towards the vehicle damage.
protected from any wax. ventilation intake. Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in
X Use plenty of water and rinse the sponge exterior rear view mirrors prior to running
Vehicle washing and chamois frequently. the vehicle through an automatic car wash
In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces of X Rinse with clean water and thoroughly dry to prevent damage to the mirrors.
road salt as soon as possible. with a chamois. When leaving the automatic car wash, make
When washing the vehicle underbody, do not Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on the sure the mirrors are folded out.
forget to clean the inner sides of the wheels. finish. After running the vehicle through an
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: automatic car wash, wipe any wax off of the
Automatic car wash windshield and the wiper blade inserts. This
If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of
You can have your vehicle washed in an will prevent smears and reduce wiping noise
water, and a SmartKey is within
automatic car wash from the start. Brushless which can be caused by residual wax on the
approximately 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle, it
car washes are preferable. windshield.
could be inadvertently locked or unlocked.
X To protect the filter system, activate the air
recirculation mode using button , on Ornamental moldings
the climate control panel. X For regular cleaning and care of ornamental
moldings, use a damp cloth. Z
295
Operation
Vehicle care
! Do not use chrome cleaner on ornamental Cleaning the windows and the wiper X Fold the wiper arms forward until they snap
moldings. Although ornamental moldings blades into place.
may have chrome appearance, they could X Clean the windshield and the wiper blade
be made of anodized aluminum that will be
! The windshield wipers must be in a
inserts with a clean cloth and mild
damaged when cleaned with chrome vertical position before folding them away
detergent solution.
cleaner. Instead, use a damp cloth to clean from the windshield. They could otherwise
X Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild window
those ornamental moldings. damage the hood.
cleaning solution on all outside and inside
For very dirty ornamental moldings of Never open the hood when the wiper arms
glass surfaces.
which you are sure are chrome-plated, use are folded forward.
An automotive glass cleaner is
a chrome cleaner. If in doubt whether an X Make sure the hood is fully closed. recommended.
ornamental molding is chrome-plated, X Switch on the ignition.
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz ! Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto
X Turn combination switch to wiper setting
Center. the windshield before turning the SmartKey
u (Y page 107). in the starter switch or pressing the
Headlamps, brake lamps, tail lamps, X With wiper arms in vertical position, switch KEYLESS-GO start/stop button (vehicles
side markers, turn signal lenses off the ignition. with KEYLESS-GO).
X Use a mild vehicle wash detergent, such as G Warning! Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo, For safety reasons, switch off wipers and arm back. If released, the force of the
with plenty of water. remove SmartKey from starter switch impact from the tensioning spring could
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Make sure the crack the windshield.
! Only use window cleaning solutions that vehicle’s on-board electronics have status
are suitable for plastic lamp lenses. 0) before cleaning the windshield and/or ! To clean the window interior, do not use
Window cleaning solutions which are not the wiper blades. Otherwise, the wiper a dry cloth, abrasives, solvents or cleaners
suitable may damage the plastic lamp motor could suddenly turn on and cause containing solvents. Do not touch the
lenses of the headlamps. Therefore, do not injury. inside of the front, rear or side windows
use abrasives, solvents or cleaners that with hard objects such as an ice scraper or
contain solvents. ring. Doing so may damage the windows.
! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts.
They could tear.
296
Operation
Vehicle care
Cleaning the panorama roof with power ! The vehicle should not be parked for an G Warning!
tilt/sliding panel extended period of time immediately after Do not use cleaners or cockpit care sprays
it has been cleaned, especially not after the containing solvents to clean the cockpit or
The rear part of the tilt/sliding panel has a
wheel rims have been cleaned with wheel the steering wheel. Cleaners containing
protective layer on the inside.
rim cleaner. Wheel rim cleaners can lead to solvents will make the surface porous and
X Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild window increased corrosion of the brake disks and
cleaning solution. vehicle occupants could suffer serious
brake pads. Non-approved wheel cleaners injuries from plastic parts coming loose in
An automotive glass cleaner is may also damage the wheel paint if the the event of air bag deployment.
recommended. vehicle is not driven after cleaning.
! Do not use a dry cloth, abrasives, solvents Therefore, the vehicle’s brake system ! Do not use oil, wax or scouring agents.
or cleaners containing solvents. Do not should always be warmed-up before it is
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the
touch the protective layer with hard objects parked after cleaning. Drive your vehicle for
surface.
such as an ice scraper or ring. Never apply several minutes to allow the brakes to dry.
strong force and only use a soft, non- When applying Mercedes-Benz approved Hard plastic trim items
scratching cloth when cleaning the rear Tire Care and Mercedes-Benz approved X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Interior Care
part of the tilt/sliding panel. Wheel Care products, take care not to on a soft, lint-free cloth and apply with light
spray them on the brake disks. pressure.
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the
protective layer.
Plastic and rubber parts
Audio or COMAND display
Light alloy wheels X Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild
detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing ! You must switch off the audio or
If possible, clean wheels once a week. solution. COMAND display and allow it to cool prior
X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care, to cleaning.
X Wipe with a cloth moistened in a lukewarm
a soft bristle brush and a strong spray of solution.
water for cleaning the light alloy wheels. ! Do not use any liquids or cleaning agents.
The surface may temporarily change color. These can damage or even destroy the
! Only use acid-free cleaning materials. If this is the case, wait for it to dry. audio display screen.
Acid may cause corrosion or damage the
clear coat. Z
297
Operation
Vehicle care
X Use a standard microfiber cloth and apply G Warning! Leather upholstery
with light pressure. Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may Please note that leather upholstery is a
severely weaken them. In a crash they may natural product and is therefore subject to a
Steering wheel and gear selector lever not be able to provide adequate protection. natural aging process. Leather upholstery
may also react to certain ambient influences
X Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly such as high humidity or high temperature by
or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved Upholstery
showing wrinkles for example.
Leather Care. Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing X Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth
clothing that have the tendency to give off and dry thoroughly or clean with Mercedes-
Carpets coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause the Benz approved Leather Care.
X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Carpet and upholstery to become permanently
discolored. By lining the seats with a proper ! To avoid damage to leather upholstery:
Fabric Care for cleaning the carpets.
intermediate cover, contact-discoloration will RWipe with light pressure only.
be prevented.
Headliner and shelf below rear window RDo not clean with abrasive cleaning
G Warning! agents such as scouring milk or powder.
X Use a soft bristle brush or a dry-shampoo Only use seat or head restraint covers RDo
cleaner in case of excessive dirt. not soak the leather upholstery.
which have been tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model. As leather is a natural product, it could
Seat belts otherwise harden or become porous.
Using other seat or head restraint covers
may interfere with or prevent the activation RExercise particular care when cleaning
X Only use clear, lukewarm water and soap.
of the active head restraints and/or the perforated leather as its underside
! The seat belts must not be treated with deployment of the front side impact air should not become wet.
chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the bags.
seat belts at temperatures above 176‡ Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Wood trims
(80†) or in direct sunlight. Center for availability.
X Only use water and a damp cloth to clean
wood trims in your vehicle.
298
Operation
Vehicle care
! Do not use solvents like tar remover or
wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as
these may be abrasive.
Chrome-plated exhaust tip

Regular cleaning and care of chrome-plated
exhaust tips will help to maintain their shine
and the classy appearance.
X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Chrome
Polishing Paste each time the vehicle has
been washed, especially during the winter.
! Do not use alkaline cleaners such as
wheel cleaners as they could cause
corrosion.
299
300
Practical hints

Where will I find ...? .......................... 302
Vehicle status messages in the
multifunction display ....................... 305
What to do if … .................................. 336
Unlocking/locking manually ........... 350
Resetting activated head restraints 353
Replacing SmartKey batteries ......... 353
Replacing bulbs ................................. 355
Replacing wiper blades .................... 359
Flat tire .............................................. 360
Battery ............................................... 364
Jump starting .................................... 366
Towing the vehicle ............................ 368
Fuses .................................................. 372
301
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?

Vehicle equipment Where will I find ...? Vehicle tool kit
First aid kit The vehicle tool kit is located in the space
i This Operator’s Manual describes all
underneath the trunk floor.
features, standard or optional, potentially i Check expiration dates and contents for
available for your vehicle at the time of The vehicle tool kit includes:
completeness at least once a year and
purchase. Please be aware that your RCollapsible wheel chock
replace missing/expired items.
vehicle might not be equipped with all RFuse chart
Depending on the equipment configuration,
features described in this manual.
the first-aid kit will be located either in the RJack
open storage department in the trunk or RPair of gloves
behind the cover panel on the left-hand side
of the trunk. RTowing eye bolt
RWheel wrench
X Open the trunk (Y page 81).
X Lift the trunk floor using the floor handle.
X Engage the floor handle on the upper trunk
lip.
! To prevent damage, always disengage the
floor handle from the upper trunk lip and
lower the trunk floor before closing the
trunk.
1 Lock
2 Cover
X Turn lock 1 counterclockwise.

X Fold down cover 2.
The first aid kit can be removed.
302
Practical hints

X Closing vehicle tool kit box cover: Push
vehicle tool kit box cover 3 downward
until it engages into vehicle tool kit box
7.
X Installing vehicle tool kit box: Slide
vehicle tool kit box 7 into the recess of
luggage bowl 8.
X Push vehicle tool kit box 7 downward until
it engages into luggage bowl 8.
1 Tab Collapsible wheel chock 1 Tilt the plates upward

2 Removing vehicle tool kit box 2 Fold the lower plate outward
The collapsible wheel chock serves to secure
3 Vehicle tool kit box cover 3 Insert the plate
the vehicle, e.g. while changing a wheel.
4 Opening vehicle tool kit box cover
X Take the collapsible wheel chock from the X Setting up: Tilt both plates upward 1.
5 Tab vehicle tool kit (Y page 302). X Fold the lower plate outward 2.
6 Vehicle tool kit
X Guide the tabs of the lower plate all the way
7 Vehicle tool kit box
into the openings of base plate 3.
8 Luggage bowl
For information on where to place wheel
X Removing vehicle tool kit box: Pull tab chocks when changing a wheel, see “Lifting
1 in direction of arrow 2 and lift vehicle the vehicle” (Y page 361).
tool kit box 7.
X Remove vehicle tool kit box 7 from
Jack
luggage bowl 8. G Warning!
X Opening vehicle tool kit box cover: Pull Only use the jack supplied with your vehicle
tab 5 in direction of arrow 4 and open to lift the vehicle briefly for wheel changes.
vehicle tool kit box cover 3. If you use the jack for any other purpose, Z
303
Practical hints

you or others could be injured, as the jack Spare wheel
is designed only for the purpose of
changing a wheel. G Observe Safety notes, see
page 360.
When using the jack, observe the safety
notes in the “Mounting the spare wheel” The spare wheel is located in the space
section and the notes on the jack. underneath the trunk floor.
X Removing: Open the trunk (Y page 81).
X Take the jack from the vehicle tool kit X Lift the trunk floor using the floor handle.
(Y page 302). X Engage the floor handle on the upper trunk
lip.
Operational position
! To prevent damage, always disengage the
X Turn the crank handle clockwise. floor handle from the upper trunk lip and
Before placing the jack back into the vehicle lower the trunk floor before closing the
tool kit: trunk.
X Fully collapse the jack.
X Fold in the crank handle (storage position).
Storage position
X Turn the crank handle in the direction of
arrow as far as it will go.
1 Spare wheel
2 Luggage bowl
304
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display

X Remove luggage bowl 2 by turning it Vehicle status messages in the G Warning!
counterclockwise. multifunction display All categories of messages contain
X Remove spare wheel 1. important information which should be
Notes
taken note of and, where a malfunction is
Storing the spare wheel after use Warning and malfunction messages appear in indicated, addressed as soon as possible at
the multifunction display located in the an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Place spare wheel 1 into the spare wheel instrument cluster. Failure to repair the condition noted may
well (Y page 304). Certain warning and malfunction messages cause damage not covered by the
X Secure spare wheel 1 by turning luggage are accompanied by an audible signal. Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or result
bowl 2 clockwise (Y page 304). Address these messages accordingly and in property damage or personal injury.
follow the additional instructions given in this
Operator’s Manual. G Warning!
High-priority messages appear in the No messages will be displayed if either the
multifunction display in red color. instrument cluster or the multifunction
display is inoperative.
Certain messages of high priority cannot be
cleared from the multifunction display using As a result, you will not be able to see
# or L on the multifunction steering information about your driving conditions,
wheel (Y page 131). such as speed or outside temperature,
warning/indicator lamps, malfunction/
Other messages of high priority and
warning messages or the failure of any
messages of less immediate priority can be
systems. Driving characteristics may be
cleared from the multifunction display using
impaired.
# or L. They are then stored in the
Vehicle status message memory If you must continue to drive, please do so
(Y page 144). Remember that clearing a with added caution. Contact an authorized
message will only make the message Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
disappear. Clearing a message will not On the pages that follow, you will find a
correct the condition that caused the compilation of the most important warning
message to appear. Z
305
Practical hints

and malfunction messages that may appear For your convenience the messages are
in the multifunction display. divided into text messages (Y page 307) and
symbol messages (Y page 316).
306
Practical hints

Text messages
Safety systems
Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution

ESP Inoperative In addition, the yellow ESP® warning lamp X Continue driving with added caution.
See Operator's v comes on. X Have the system checked at an authorized
Manual The brake system is still functioning Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
normally but due to a malfunction, the
BAS, the ESP® and the hill start assist
system are unavailable.
ESP Currently In addition, the yellow ESP® warning lamp X Drive a short distance with added caution at a
Unavailable v comes on. vehicle speed of above 12 mph (20 km/h).
See Operator's The self-diagnosis might not be When the message disappears, the ESP® is
Manual completed yet. available again.
The brake system is still functioning If the message does not disappear:
®
normally but without th BAS, the ESP and X Continue driving with added caution.
the hill start assist system available. X Have the system checked at an authorized
Failure to follow these instructions increases the
risk of an accident.
307
Practical hints

ESP Currently In addition, the yellow ESP® warning lamp X Continue driving with added caution.
Unavailable v comes on. When the voltage is above the required value
See Operator's The brake system still functions normally again, the ESP® is operational again and the
Manual but due to insufficient power supply the message in the multifunction display should
BAS, the ESP® and the hill start assist disappear.
system are not available. If the message in the multifunction display does
not disappear:
X Have the alternator and the battery checked.
X Have the system checked at an authorized
ESP Currently If the yellow ESP® warning lamp v As soon as the brakes have cooled off, the
Unavailable flashes while driving and this message Electronic Traction System switches on again.
See Operator's appears, the Electronic Traction System The message in the multifunction display
Manual has switched off to prevent overheating of disappears and the ESP® warning lamp v
the drive wheel brakes. goes out.
308
Practical hints

Front Passenger Airbag Enabled The front passenger front air bag is X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as
See Operator’s activated while driving even though a possible.
Manual child, small individual, or object below the X Engage the parking brake.
system’s weight threshold is on the front X Switch off the ignition.
passenger seat, or the front passenger
X Open the front passenger door.
seat is empty. Objects on the seat or
X Remove child and child restraint from front
forces acting on the seat may make the
system sense supplemental weight. passenger seat and properly secure the child
in rear seat employing the child restraint if
necessary.
X Make sure no objects which apply
supplemental weight to the seat are present.
The system may recognize such supplemental
weight and sense that an occupant on the front
passenger seat is of a greater weight than
actually present.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front
passenger door and switch on the ignition.
Monitor the 56 indicator lamp in the
center console (Y page 52) and the multifunction
display in the instrument cluster (Y page 30) for
the following:
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition
switched on,
Rthe 5/ indicator lamp in the center
console should illuminate and remain Z
illuminated, indicating that the OCS
309
Practical hints

(Y page 49) has deactivated the passenger
front air bag.
Rthe message Front Passenger Airbag
Enabled See Operator’s Manual or the
message Front Passenger Airbag
Disabled See Operator’s Manual should
not appear in the multifunction display at any
time the seat is unoccupied. Wait at least
60 seconds for the system to complete the
necessary check cycles and to make sure
neither message appears in the multifunction
display.
If above conditions are met, you can occupy the
passenger seat again. Depending on the
passenger classification sensed by the OCS, the
5/ indicator lamp will remain illuminated
or go out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not
working properly. Have the system checked as
soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
G Warning! steps, do not have any children 12 years old the passenger seat until the system has
If the 5/ indicator lamp remains out and under and other small individuals use been repaired.
even after performing the above corrective
310
Practical hints

Front Passenger Airbag Disabled The front passenger front air bag is X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as
See Operator’s deactivated while driving even though an possible.
Manual adult or someone larger than a small X Engage the parking brake.
individual is occupying the front X Switch off the ignition.
passenger seat. Forces acting on the seat
X Have the front passenger vacate the seat and
may make the system sense a decrease
exit the vehicle.
in weight.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front
passenger door and switch on the ignition.
Monitor the 5/ indicator lamp in the
center console (Y page 52) and the multifunction
display in the instrument cluster (Y page 30) for
the following:
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition
switched on,
Rthe 5/ indicator lamp in the center
console should illuminate and remain
illuminated, indicating that the OCS
(Y page 49) has deactivated the front
passenger front air bag.
Rthe message Front Passenger Airbag
Enabled See Operator’s Manual or the
message Front Passenger Airbag
Disabled See Operator’s Manual should
not appear in the multifunction display at any
time the seat is unoccupied. Wait at least Z
60 seconds for the system to complete the
311
Practical hints

necessary check cycles and to make sure
neither message appears in the multifunction
display.
If above conditions are met, you can occupy the
passenger seat again. Depending on the
passenger classification sensed by the OCS, the
5/ indicator lamp will remain illuminated
or go out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not
working properly. Have the system checked as
soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
G Warning! front passenger seat even after performing passenger use the front passenger seat
If the 5/ indicator lamp remains the above corrective steps, do not have any until the system has been repaired.
illuminated with an adult occupant on the
312
Practical hints

Driving systems

Cruise Control - - - mph One of the activation conditions for the X Drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h), if the
cruise control has not been fulfilled. For situation allows, and set the speed.
example, you have attempted to set a X Check the activation conditions for the cruise
speed below 20 mph (30 km/h). control (Y page 205).
Cruise Control Inoperative The cruise control is malfunctioning. X Have the cruise control checked at an
and Speedtronic In addition an acoustic warning sounds. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Vehicle

Shift to P You have turned off the engine with the X Shift the automatic transmission to park
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button with the position P.
automatic transmission in neutral position
N and opened the driver’s door.
or
You have attempted to switch off the
engine with the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button with the automatic transmission in
reverse gear R or drive position D.
Shift to P or N To Start Engine You have attempted to start the engine X Shift the automatic transmission into park
while the automatic transmission was in position P or neutral position N.
reverse gear R or drive position D.
Z
313
Practical hints

Tires

Check, Then Restart There has been a warning message about X Make sure the correct tire inflation pressure is
Tire Pressure Run Flat Indicator a loss in the tire inflation pressure and the set for each tire.
(Canada only) Run Flat Indicator was not restarted yet. X Then restart the Run Flat Indicator
(Y page 269).
Run Flat Inoperative The Run Flat Indicator is malfunctioning. X Have the Run Flat Indicator checked at an
Indicator authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
(Canada only)
Check Tire Pressure Soon The Run Flat Indicator indicates that the X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
(Canada only) pressure is too low in one or more tires. abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
Observe the traffic situation around you.
X Check the tires and, if necessary, change the
wheel (Y page 360).
X Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as
required (Y page 268).
X Restart the Run Flat Indicator after adjusting
the tire inflation pressure values
(Y page 269).
Tire Press. Inoperative The TPMS is malfunctioning. X Have the TPMS checked at an authorized
Monitor Mercedes-Benz Center.
(USA only)
314
Practical hints

Tire Pressure No Wheel Sensors There are wheels without appropriate X Have the TPMS checked at an authorized
Monitor wheel sensors mounted (e.g. winter tires). Mercedes-Benz Center.
Inoperative X Have the appropriate wheel sensors installed
(USA only) at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Tire Press. Currently The TPMS is unable to monitor the tire As soon as the causes of the malfunction have
Monitor Unavailable inflation pressure due to a nearby radio been removed, the TPMS becomes active again
(USA only) interference source. automatically after a few minutes driving.
G Warning!
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving
with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
G Warning!
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more
likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and
result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.
315
Practical hints

Symbol messages
Brake

; Check Brake Fluid There is insufficient brake fluid in the Risk of accident!
(USA only) Level reservoir. X Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon
3 as it is safe to do so.
(Canada only) X Engage the parking brake.
X Do not drive any further.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or call Roadside Assistance.
Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the
problem.
G Warning!
Driving with the message Check Brake Fluid Level displayed can result in an accident. Have your brake system checked immediately.
Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be seriously burned.
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below, have the brake system checked for
brake pad thickness and leaks.
316
Practical hints

; EBR, ABS, and ESP The brake system is still functioning X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels
(USA only) Inoperative normally but due to a malfunction, the may lock during hard braking, reducing
3 See Operator’s ABS, the BAS, the EBP and the ESP® are steering capability.
(Canada only) Manual unavailable. X Have the system checked at an authorized
; Release You are driving with the parking brake X Release the parking brake.
(USA only) Parking Brake engaged.
!
(Canada only)
2 Check The brake pads have reached their wear X Have the brake pads replaced as soon as
Brake Pad Wear limit. possible.
! Brake pad thickness must be visually intervals specified in the Maintenance

inspected by a qualified technician at the Booklet.
317
Practical hints

Safety systems

- ABS and ESP The brake system is still functioning X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels
Inoperative normally but due to a malfunction, the may lock during hard braking, reducing
See Operator’s ABS, the BAS, the ESP® and the hill start steering capability.
Manual assist system are unavailable. X Have the system checked at an authorized
- ABS and ESP The brake system is still functioning X Drive a short distance with added caution at a
Currently normally but due to a malfunction, the vehicle speed of above 12 mph (20 km/h).
Unavailable ABS, the BAS, the ESP® and the hill start When the message disappears, the ABS and
See Operator’s assist system are unavailable. the ESP® are available again.
Manual The self-diagnosis may not be completed
yet.
- ABS and ESP The brake system still functions normally When the voltage is above the required value
Currently but due to insufficient power supply, the again, the ABS, the BAS, the ESP® and the hill
Unavailable ABS, the BAS, the ESP® and the hill start start assist system are operational again and the
See Operator’s assist system are not available. message should disappear.
Manual If the message does not disappear:
X Have the alternator and the battery checked.
L Tele Aid One or more main functions of the Tele Aid X Have the Tele Aid system checked at an
Inoperative system are malfunctioning. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
318
Practical hints

= SRS Malfunction There is a malfunction in the supplemental X Drive with added caution to the nearest
Service Required restraint systems. The air bags or authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs)
could deploy unexpectedly or fail to
activate in an accident.
= Front Left SRS Components of the driver’s supplemental X Drive with added caution to the nearest
Malfunction restraint system may not work properly. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Service Required
= Front Right SRS Components of the front passenger’s X Drive with added caution to the nearest
Malfunction supplemental restraint system may not authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Service Required work properly.
= Rear Left SRS Components of the left rear passenger’s X Drive with added caution to the nearest
= Rear Center SRS Components of the center rear X Drive with added caution to the nearest
Malfunction passenger’s supplemental restraint authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Service Required system may not work properly.
= Rear Right SRS Components of the right rear passenger’s X Drive with added caution to the nearest
= Left Side Curtain The left window curtain air bag may not X Drive with added caution to the nearest
Airbag Malfunction work properly. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Service Required Z
319
Practical hints

= Right Side Curtain The right window curtain air bag may not X Drive with added caution to the nearest
Airbag Malfunction work properly. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Service Required
G Warning!
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be operational.
For your safety, we strongly recommend that you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the system checked.
Otherwise the SRS may not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy
unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury.
Vehicle

Y You are driving with the hood open. X Close the hood (Y page 256).
Ê You are driving with the trunk open. X Close the trunk.
$ You are driving with at least one door X Close all doors.
open. The display symbol shows you
which doors are open.
I Key Not The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is not X Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
Detected detected while the engine is running X Search for the SmartKey.
because the SmartKey is not in the Otherwise the vehicle cannot be locked
vehicle. centrally nor can the engine be started again
after the engine is stopped.
320
Practical hints

I Key Not The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is not X Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
Detected detected while the engine is running X Remove KEYLESS-GO button from the starter
because there is strong radio-frequency switch (Y page 85).
interference. X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the
starter switch.
I Key The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is X Change the position of the SmartKey in the
Not Detected momentarily not detected. vehicle.
X If necessary, remove KEYLESS-GO button from
the starter switch (Y page 85).
X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the
starter switch.
I Close Doors You wanted to lock the vehicle but not all X Close doors and lock vehicle again.
To Lock Vehicle doors were closed.
I Don’t Forget This display appears for a maximum of X Take the SmartKey with you when leaving the
Your Key 60 seconds if the driver’s door is opened vehicle.
with the engine turned off and no
SmartKey in the starter switch. This
message is only a reminder.
I Take Your Key You have forgotten to remove the X Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.
From Ignition SmartKey from the starter switch.
I Replace The batteries in the SmartKey with X Replace the batteries (Y page 353).
Key Battery KEYLESS-GO are discharged.
Z
321
Practical hints

I Key Detected A SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO left in the X Take the SmartKey out of the vehicle.
In Vehicle vehicle was recognized while trying to lock
the vehicle from the outside.
I Remove "START" The KEYLESS-GO system is X Remove KEYLESS-GO button from the starter
Button malfunctioning. switch (Y page 85).
And Insert Key X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the
starter switch.
I Obtain The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
A New Key replaced. as soon as possible.
I Key Does Not The SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS- X Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.
Belong to Vehicle GO in the starter switch does not belong
to the vehicle.
322
Practical hints

« Power Steering Power assistance for the steering system X Check whether you are capable to apply the
Malfunction is not available. A considerably higher higher degree of effort necessary to safely
See Operator's degree of effort is necessary to steer the steer the vehicle.
Manual vehicle.
If you are able to steer the vehicle safely:
X Continue driving with added caution.
X Have the system checked at an authorized
If, in any way, you feel that you are not able to
steer the vehicle safely:
X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as
it is safe to do so.
X Apply the parking brake.
X Do not continue to drive.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
W Check The water level has dropped to approx. X Add washer fluid (Y page 259).
Washer Fluid 1.1 US qts (1.0 l).
323
Practical hints

Engine

B Check The coolant level is too low. X Add coolant (Y page 258).
Coolant Level X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the
See Operator’s cooling system checked at an authorized
Manual Mercedes-Benz Center.
G Warning!
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts.
You could be seriously burned.
! Do not ignore the low engine coolant level warning. Extended driving with the message and symbol displayed may cause serious engine
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Do not drive without sufficient amount of coolant in the cooling system. The engine will overheat causing major engine damage.
324
Practical hints

Ì Coolant Low The coolant is too hot. X Stop the vehicle immediately as soon as it is
Stop Vehicle! safe to do so.
Turn Engine Off X Turn off the engine immediately.
X Only start the engine again after the message
disappears. You could otherwise damage the
engine.
X Observe the coolant temperature gauge in the
instrument cluster.
During severe operation conditions and stop-
and-go city traffic, the coolant temperature may
rise close to 248‡ (120†).
G Warning!
Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could
be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the engine hood. Stay away from the engine if
you see or hear steam coming from it.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until
the engine has cooled down.
! The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248‡ (120†). Doing so may cause serious damage which is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
325
Practical hints

Ì Coolant Low The poly-V-belt could be broken. X Stop the vehicle immediately as soon as it is
Stop Vehicle! safe to do so.
Turn Engine Off X Turn off the engine immediately.
X Engage the parking brake.
X Check the poly-V-belt.
X If it is broken: Do not continue to drive.
Otherwise the engine will overheat due to an
inoperative water pump which may result in
damage to the engine. Contact an authorized
X If it is intact: Do not continue to drive the
vehicle with this message displayed. Doing so
could result in serious engine damage that is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
X Observe the coolant temperature gauge in the
instrument cluster.
X Restart the engine.
If this message disappears from the multifunction
display:
X Drive to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center immediately.
If this message does not disappear from the
X Call Roadside Assistance.
326
Practical hints

Ì The cooling fan for the coolant is X Observe the coolant temperature gauge in the
malfunctioning. instrument cluster.
If the coolant temperature is below 248‡
(120†), you may continue driving to an
X Avoid placing heavy loads on the engine (e.g.
by driving uphill) as well as stop-and-go traffic.
X Have the fan replaced as soon as possible.
Í The battery is no longer charging. X Stop immediately in a safe location or as soon

Possible causes: as it is safe to do so and check the poly-V-belt.
Ralternator X If it is broken: Do not continue to drive.
malfunctioning
Otherwise the engine will overheat due to an
Rbroken poly-V-belt inoperative water pump which may result in
Ra malfunction in the electronic system damage to the engine. Contact an authorized
X If it is intact: Drive to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately. Adjust
driving to be consistent with reduced braking
responsiveness.
P Check The engine oil level has dropped to X Check the engine oil level (Y page 256) and add
Engine Oil approximately the minimum level. engine oil as required (Y page 257).
At Next Refueling X If you must add engine oil frequently, have the
engine checked for possible leaks.
Z
327
Practical hints

When the message Check Engine Oil At Visually check for oil leaks. If there are no ! Engine oil level warnings should not be
Next Refueling appears while the engine is obvious oil leaks, drive to the nearest service ignored. Extended driving with the symbol
running and at operating temperature, the station to refill your engine oil to the required displayed could result in serious engine
engine oil level has dropped to approximately level. damage that is not covered by the
the minimum level. For information on approved engine oils Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
The message will be stored in the vehicle contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
status message memory after you have or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
cleared it from the multifunction display.
4 Reserve Fuel The fuel level has dropped below the X Refuel at the next gas station.
Level reserve mark.
4 Gas Cap Loose A loss of pressure has been detected in X Check the fuel cap (Y page 253).
the fuel system. The fuel cap may not be X If it is not closed properly: Close the fuel cap.
closed properly or the fuel system may be X If it is closed properly: Have the fuel system
leaky. checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
328
Practical hints

Lamps

. Check The high mounted brake lamp is X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
Center Brake Lamp malfunctioning. This message will only as soon as possible.
appear if a critical number of LEDs have
stopped working.
. Check Left The left or right corner-illuminating front X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
Cornering Light fog lamp is malfunctioning. as soon as possible.
or
Check Right
Cornering Light
. Check The left or right low-beam lamp is X Halogen headlamps: Replace the bulb as
Left Low Beam malfunctioning. soon as possible (Y page 355).
or X Bi-Xenon headlamps: Contact an authorized
Check Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
Right Low Beam
. Auto Lamp Function The light sensor is malfunctioning. X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
Inoperative Daytime driving lamps come on as soon as possible.
automatically.
To switch off the headlamps (U.S. vehicles only):
X In the instrument cluster control system, set
lamp operation to manual mode (Y page 148).
X Switch on headlamps using the exterior lamp
switch (Y page 100).
Z
329
Practical hints

. Check The left or right rear turn signal lamp is X Replace the bulb as soon as possible
Rear Left malfunctioning. (Y page 355).
Turn Signal
or
Check
Rear Right
Turn Signal
. Check The turn signal in the left or right exterior X Have the LEDs replaced as soon as possible.
Left Mirror rear view mirror is malfunctioning. This
Turn Signal message will only appear if a critical
or number of LEDs have stopped working.
Check
Right Mirror
Turn Signal
. Check The left or right front turn signal lamp is X Replace the bulb as soon as possible
Front Left malfunctioning. (Y page 355).
Turn Signal
or
Check
Front Right
Turn Signal
330
Practical hints

. Check The left or right high-beam lamp is X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
Left High Beam malfunctioning. as soon as possible.
or
Check
Right High Beam
. Check Left The left or right license plate lamp is X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
License Plate Lamp malfunctioning. as soon as possible.
or
Check Right
License Plate Lamp
. Switch Off Lights You are getting out of the vehicle and the X Turn the exterior lamp switch to M or
lights are still switched on. * (Y page 100).
or
X With the rear fog lamp switched on: Push in
the exterior lamp switch to its stop.
. Check The left or right front fog lamp is X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
Left Fog Lamp malfunctioning. as soon as possible.
or
Check
Right Fog Lamp
. Check The rear fog lamp is malfunctioning. X Replace the bulb as soon as possible
Rear Left (Y page 355).
Fog Lamp
Z
331
Practical hints

. Check The left or right front parking lamp is X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
Front Left malfunctioning. as soon as possible.
Parking Lamp
or
Check
Front Right
Parking Lamp
. Check The left or right backup lamp is X Replace the bulb as soon as possible
Left Reverse Lamp malfunctioning. (Y page 355).
or
Check
Right Reverse Lamp
. Check The front left or right side marker lamp is X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
Front Left malfunctioning. as soon as possible.
Sidemarker Lamp
or
Check
Front Right
Sidemarker Lamp
332
Practical hints

. Check The rear left or right side marker lamp is X Replace the bulb as soon as possible
Rear Left malfunctioning. (Y page 355).
Sidemarker Lamp
or
Check
Rear Right
Sidemarker Lamp
. Check Left The left or right tail lamp/brake lamp is X Replace the bulb as soon as possible
Tail and Brake malfunctioning. (Y page 355).
Lamps
or
Check Right
Tail and Brake
Lamps
. Check The left or right brake lamp is X Replace the bulb as soon as possible
Left Brake Lamp malfunctioning. (Y page 355).
or
Check
Right Brake Lamp
. Check The left or right tail lamp is X Replace the bulb as soon as possible
Left Tail Lamp malfunctioning. (Y page 355).
or
Check
Right Tail Lamp
Z
333
Practical hints

Tires

H Correct The tire pressure is too low in one or more X Check and correct tire inflation pressure as
Tire Pressure tires. required (Y page 268).
(USA only) or
The tire pressure of the individual tires
differ from each other significantly.
H Tire Press. One or more tires are deflating. X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
Warning abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
Caution X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 360).
Tire Malfunction
(USA only)
H Check The tire pressure in one or more tires is X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
Tire Pressure already below the minimum value. abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
(USA only) X Check and adjust tire pressure as required.
X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 360).
G Warning!
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving
with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
G Warning!
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more
likely to fail from being overheated.
334
Practical hints

Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and
result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.
335
Practical hints
What to do if …
What to do if … check when switching on the ignition, have
the respective bulb checked and replaced if
Lamps in instrument cluster necessary.
Notes When you switch on the ignition, all lamps
(except high-beam headlamp indicator lamp,
If any of the following lamps in the instrument and turn signal indicator lamps unless
cluster fails to come on during the bulb self- activated) in the instrument cluster come on.
If a lamp in the instrument cluster fails to
come on when the ignition is switched on,
have it checked and replaced if necessary.
336
Practical hints
What to do if …
Brake
Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions

- The yellow ABS indicator The ABS has detected a X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock during hard
lamp comes on while the malfunction and switched off. braking, reducing steering capability.
engine is running. The BAS, ESP® and EBP are also X Read and observe messages that may appear in the multifunction
switched off (see messages in display (Y page 305).
multifunction display). X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
The brake system is still as soon as possible.
functioning normally but without Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
the systems specified above
available.
If the ABS control unit is
malfunctioning, other systems
such as the navigation system or
the automatic transmission may
also be malfunctioning.
- The yellow ABS indicator The ABS has switched off due to When the voltage is above the required value again, the ABS is
lamp comes on while the insufficient power supply. operational again and the ABS indicator lamp should go out.
engine is running. The battery might not be charged X Switch off electrical consumers that are currently not needed, e.g.
sufficiently. seat heating.
X If necessary, have the alternator and battery checked.
337
Practical hints
What to do if …
- The yellow ABS indicator The ABS is temporarily not The indicator lamp will go out after driving a short distance at a vehicle
lamp comes on while the available. The ESP®, the BAS and speed of above 12 mph (20 km/h).
engine is running. the EBP are also unavailable. If the ABS indicator lamp does not go out:
The self-diagnosis has not been X Continue driving with added caution.
completed yet. X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
The brake system is still as soon as possible.
functioning normally but without Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
the systems specified above.
- The brake system is still X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock during hard
v functioning normally but due to a braking, reducing steering capability.
The yellow ABS malfunction malfunction, the ABS, the BAS, X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display
indicator lamp and the yellow the EBP and the ESP® are (Y page 305).
ESP® warning lamp come on unavailable. X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
while the engine is running and an as soon as possible.
acoustic warning sounds. Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
338
Practical hints
What to do if …
; (USA only) The Electronic Brake X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock during hard
3 (Canada only) Proportioning (EBP) switched off braking, reducing steering capability.
- due to a malfunction. X Read and observe messages that may appear in the multifunction
v The ABS, the BAS, and the ESP® display (Y page 305).
The red brake warning lamp are also switched off. X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
comes on while driving. In The brake system continues to as soon as possible.
addition, the yellow ABS function normally, but without Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
malfunction indicator lamp, and electronic support.
the yellow ESP® warning lamp
come on and an acoustic warning
sounds.
; (USA only) You are driving with the parking X Release the parking brake.
3 (Canada only) brake engaged.
The red brake warning lamp
comes on while driving and an
acoustic warning sounds.
; (USA only) There is insufficient brake fluid in X Risk of accident! Do not drive any further. Stop the vehicle in a safe
3 (Canada only) the reservoir. location as soon as it is safe to do so.
The red brake warning lamp X Engage the parking brake.
comes on while the engine is X Read and observe messages that may appear in the multifunction
running. display (Y page 305).
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not add brake
fluid! This will not solve the problem.
339
Practical hints
What to do if …
G Warning!
Driving with the brake warning lamp illuminated can result in an accident. Have your brake system checked immediately if the brake warning
lamp stays on. Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be seriously
burned.
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below, have the brake system checked for
brake pad thickness and leaks.
Safety systems

< The red seat belt telltale The seat belt telltale reminds you X Fasten your seat belts.
comes on for a maximum and your passengers to fasten Regardless of whether the seat belts are fastened or not, the seat
of 6 seconds after starting your seat belts before driving off. belt telltale always comes on and remains lit for 6 seconds after
the engine. starting the engine.
< You hear a warning chime You have forgotten to fasten your X Fasten your seat belt.
for a maximum of seat belt. The warning chime stops sounding.
6 seconds after starting
the engine.
340
Practical hints
What to do if …
< The red seat belt telltale You and/or your front passenger X Fasten your seat belts.
comes on while the vehicle have forgotten to fasten your seat The seat belt telltale goes out.
is standing still and the belts.
engine is running or during
There are items placed on the X Remove the items from the front passenger seat and put them in
driving.
front passenger seat and a safe place.
therefore the system senses the The seat belt telltale goes out.
front passenger seat as being
occupied.
< During driving the red seat The vehicle’s speed once X Fasten your seat belts.
belt telltale flashes and exceeded 15 mph (25 km/h) and The seat belt telltale goes out and the warning chime stops
you additionally hear an you and/or your front passenger sounding.
intermittent warning have forgotten to fasten your seat
chime with increasing belts.
intensity.
There are items placed on the X Remove the items from the front passenger seat and put them in
front passenger seat and a safe place.
therefore the system senses the The seat belt telltale goes out and the warning chime stops
front passenger seat as being sounding.
occupied.
i After 60 seconds with an unfastened seat belt the warning chime stops sounding and the seat belt telltale illuminates continuously. The
seat belt telltale will only go out if both, the driver and front passenger’s seat belt are fastened, or the vehicle is standing still and a front
door is opened.
341
Practical hints
What to do if …
= The red SRS indicator There is a malfunction in the X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
lamp comes on while restraint systems. The air bags or Center.
driving. Emergency Tensioning Devices
(ETDs) could deploy
unexpectedly or fail to activate in
an accident.
G Warning!
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be operational.
For your safety, we strongly recommend that you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the system checked.
Otherwise the SRS may not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy
unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury.
342
Practical hints
What to do if …
v All models, except The ESP® has been switched off. X Switch the ESP® back on.
C 63 AMG: Risk of accident! Exceptions: (Y page 69).
The yellow ESP® warning When the ESP® is switched off it X If leaving the ESP® switched off, adapt your speed and driving to
lamp comes on while the will not stabilize the vehicle if the the prevailing road and weather conditions.
engine is running. system recognizes that the X If the ESP® cannot be switched back on: Have the system checked
vehicle starts to skid or that a at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
wheel is spinning.
The cruise control is deactivated
and cannot be switched on.
v C 63 AMG only: ESP® SPORT is activated. X Switch the ESP® SPORT off (Y page 70).
The yellow ESP® warning Risk of accident! The message ESP On appears in the multifunction display.
lamp comes on while the When ESP® SPORT is activated it
engine is running. will only stabilize the vehicle to a
limited extent if the system
recognizes that the vehicle starts
to skid or that a wheel is spinning.
v C 63 AMG only: The ESP® has been switched off. X Switch the ESP® back on.
¯ The yellow ESP® warning Risk of accident! Exceptions: (Y page 70).
lamp and the yellow ESP® When the ESP® is switched off it X If leaving the ESP® switched off, adapt your speed and driving to
OFF warning lamp come will not stabilize the vehicle if the the prevailing road and weather conditions.
on while the engine is system recognizes that the X If the ESP® cannot be switched back on: Have the system checked
running. vehicle starts to skid or that a at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
wheel is spinning.
Z
343
Practical hints
What to do if …
v The yellow ESP® warning The ESP® is not operational due X Read and observe additional messages that may appear in the
lamp comes on while the to a malfunction. multifunction display.
engine is running. Risk of accident! X Continue driving with added caution.
X Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather
conditions.
X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
v The yellow ESP® warning The ESP® or Electronic Traction X When driving off, apply as little throttle as possible.
lamp flashes while driving. System (ETS/4-ETS) has come X While driving, ease up on the accelerator pedal.
into operation because of X Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather
detected traction loss in at least conditions.
one tire. X Do not deactivate the ESP®.
The cruise control is deactivated.
Exceptions: (Y page 69).
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
Vehicle

4 The yellow fuel tank The fuel level has gone below the X Refuel at the next gas station.
reserve warning lamp reserve mark.
comes on when the engine
is running.
344
Practical hints
What to do if …
Engine

± There may be a malfunction in: X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at an authorized
The yellow engine malfunction RThe fuel management system Mercedes-Benz Center.
indicator lamp comes on when RThe ignition system i Some states may by law require you to visit a workshop as soon
the engine is running.
RThe emission control system as the engine malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Check local
requirements.
RSystems which affect
emissions
Such malfunctions may result in
excessive emissions values and
may switch the engine to limp-
home (emergency operation)
mode.
± A loss of pressure has been X Check the fuel cap (Y page 253).
The yellow engine malfunction detected in the fuel system. The X If it is not closed properly: Close the fuel cap.
indicator lamp comes on when fuel cap may not be closed X If it is closed properly: Have the fuel system checked by an
the engine is running. properly or the fuel system may authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
be leaky.
345
Practical hints
What to do if …
Ì The red coolant There is insufficient coolant in the X Immediately add coolant to prevent engine from overheating
temperature warning lamp reservoir. (Y page 258).
comes on when the engine If this warning lamp comes on X Have the cooling system checked.
is running. frequently, there is a leak in the X If the coolant temperature is below 248‡ (120†), you can
cooling system. continue driving to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If the coolant level is correct, the X Avoid high engine loads (e.g. driving uphill) and stop-and-go driving.
electric radiator fan may be
broken.
Ì The red coolant The coolant temperature has X Stop in a safe location as soon as possible and allow the engine
temperature warning lamp exceeded 248‡ (120†). and coolant to cool down.
comes on when the engine
is running and an acoustic
warning sounds.
G Warning! by opening the engine hood. Stay away ! The engine should not be operated with
Driving when your engine is overheated can from the engine if you see or hear steam the coolant temperature above 248‡
cause some fluids which may have leaked coming from it. (120†). Doing so may cause serious
into the engine compartment to catch fire. Stop the vehicle in a safe location away damage which is not covered by the
You could be seriously burned. from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Steam from an overheated engine can out of the vehicle and do not stand near the
cause serious burns which can occur just vehicle until the engine has cooled down.
346
Practical hints
What to do if …
Tires

H Combination low tire The TPMS detects a loss of X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and
pressure telltale/TPMS pressure in at least one tire. braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you.
malfunction telltale for the X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display
TPMS illuminates (Y page 305).
continuously. If the tire inflation pressure in the respective tire(s) has (have) been
corrected, the combination low tire pressure/TPMS malfunction
telltale goes out after a few minutes of driving.
H Combination low tire There is a malfunction in the X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display
pressure telltale/TPMS TPMS. (Y page 305).
malfunction telltale for the X Have the TPMS checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
TPMS flashes 60 seconds After the malfunction has been remedied, the combination low tire
and then stays pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale goes out after a few minutes of
illuminated. driving.
G Warning! the Tire and Loading Information placard or, tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), if available, the tire inflation pressure label, stop and check your tires as soon as
should be checked every other week when you should determine the proper tire possible, and inflate them to the proper
cold and inflated to the inflation pressure inflation pressure for those tires. pressure. Driving on a significantly
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer As an added safety feature, your vehicle has underinflated tire causes the tire to
on the Tire and Loading Information placard been equipped with a tire pressure overheat and can lead to tire failure.
on the driver’s door B-pillar or, if available, monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
the tire inflation pressure label on the inside a low tire pressure telltale when one or and tire tread life, and may affect the
of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has tires more of your tires are significantly vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
of a different size than the size indicated on underinflated. Accordingly, when the low Please note that the TPMS is not a Z
347
Practical hints
What to do if …
substitute for proper tire maintenance, and combined with the low tire pressure detect or signal low tire pressure as
it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain telltale. When the system detects a intended.
correct tire pressure, even if underinflation malfunction, the telltale will flash for TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
has not reached the level to trigger approximately 1 minute and then remain of reasons, including the installation of
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure continuously illuminated. This sequence incompatible replacement or alternate tires
telltale. will continue upon subsequent vehicle or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. TPMS from functioning properly. Always
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate When the malfunction indicator is check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
when the system is not operating properly. illuminated, the system may not be able to replacing one or more tires or wheels on
The TPMS malfunction indicator is your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.
Lamp in center console

5/ The system is malfunctioning. X Have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorized
The front passenger front air bag Mercedes-Benz Center.
off indicator lamp illuminates and X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display and follow
remains illuminated with the corrective steps (Y page 305).
weight of a typical adult or
someone larger than a small
individual on the front passenger
seat.
348
Practical hints
What to do if …
G Warning!
If the 5/ indicator lamp illuminates
and remains illuminated with the weight of
a typical adult or someone larger than a
small individual on the front passenger
seat, do not have any passenger use the
front passenger seat until the system has
been repaired.

5/ The system is malfunctioning. X Make sure there is nothing between seat cushion and child seat
The front passenger front air bag and check installation of the child seat.
off indicator lamp does not X Make sure no objects applying supplemental weight onto the seat
illuminate and/or does not are present.
remain illuminated with the X If the front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp remains out,
weight of a typical 12-month-old have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorized
child in a standard child restraint Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not transport a child on the front
or less on the front passenger passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
seat. X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display and follow
corrective steps (Y page 305).
G Warning! the front passenger seat until the system

If the 5/ indicator lamp does not has been repaired.
illuminate or remains out with the weight of
a typical 12-month-old child in a standard
child restraint or less on the front
passenger seat, do not transport a child on Z
349
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking manually
Unlocking/locking manually X Move locking tab 1 in direction of arrow. Unlocking the trunk
X Slide mechanical key 2 out of the housing.
Unlocking the vehicle A minimum height clearance of 5.9 ft (1.8 m)
is required to open the trunk lid.
If you cannot unlock the vehicle with the Unlocking the driver’s door
SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, unlock the
driver’s door and the trunk using the
mechanical key.
i Unlocking the vehicle with the
mechanical key and opening the driver’s
door or the trunk will trigger the anti-theft
alarm system.
To cancel the alarm, insert the SmartKey in
the starter switch.
$ Unlocking
Removing the mechanical key
$ Unlocking 2 Mechanical key
2 Mechanical key
X Insert mechanical key 2 into the trunk lid
X Insert mechanical key 2 into the driver’s lock until it stops.
door lock until it stops. X Turn mechanical key 2 all the way
X Turn mechanical key 2 counterclockwise counterclockwise to position $.
to position $.
! The trunk lid swings open upwards
X Pull the door handle to open the driver’s
automatically. Always make sure there is
door. sufficient overhead clearance.
X Turn mechanical key 2 back and remove
X Turn mechanical key 2 back and remove
it from the driver’s door lock.
1 Mechanical key locking tab it from the trunk lid lock.
2 Mechanical key
350
Practical hints
Locking the vehicle i This procedure does not arm the anti-
theft alarm system, nor does it lock the fuel
If you cannot lock the vehicle with the filler flap.
SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, lock it as
follows:
X Close the front passenger door, the rear Fuel filler flap
doors and the trunk.
G Warning!
X Open the driver’s door.
Avoid contact with the vehicle walls as they
X Press the central locking switch may contain sharp edges. Otherwise, you
(Y page 81). could injure yourself while releasing the
The locking knobs of the front passenger $ Locking fuel filler flap.
door and the rear doors move down.
2 Mechanical key In case the central locking system does not
X If the vehicle battery is disconnected or
drained: Press down the locking knobs of X Insert mechanical key 2 into the driver’s release the fuel filler flap, you can open it
the front passenger door and the rear doors manually.
door lock until it stops.
manually. X Turn mechanical key 2 clockwise to
The fuel filler flap release is located behind a
X Exit the vehicle. cover in the right side trim panel of the trunk.
position $.
X Close the driver’s door. X Open the trunk (Y page 81).
The vehicle is locked.
X Turn mechanical key 2 back and remove X Open the fuse box in the trunk
it from the driver’s door lock. (Y page 373).

X Check whether the doors and the trunk are
locked.
X If necessary, lock the trunk with the
mechanical key (Y page 83).
351
Practical hints
Manually unlocking the gear selector X Insert a flat, blunt object into the right edge
lever of gear selector lever cover 1 at the
positions indicated by the arrows.
If the vehicle’s electrical system is
X Loosen gear selector lever cover 1 using
malfunctioning, the gear selector lever could
remain locked in park position P. In this case this object.
the gear selector lever can be unlocked X Pull gear selector lever cover 1 out and
manually, e.g. to tow the vehicle. remove.
X Simultaneously push down release 2 and
move the gear selector lever out of park
position P.
1 Fuel filler flap release The gear selector lever is unlocked.
X Pull fuel filler flap release 1 in direction of i The gear selector lever is locked again as
arrow. soon as you move it back to park position
The fuel filler flap is unlocked. P.
X Open the fuel filler flap (Y page 253).
1 Gear selector lever cover

2 Release
X Engage the parking brake.

! Do not use sharp objects to loosen the
gear selector lever cover in the center
console, as this could damage the gear
selector lever cover or the center console.
352
Practical hints
Replacing SmartKey batteries

Resetting activated head restraints Replacing SmartKey batteries
If the active head restraints have been If the batteries in the SmartKey are
triggered in a rear-end collision, the active discharged, the vehicle can no longer be
head restraints must be reset. locked or unlocked. It is recommended to
You can tell that the active head restraints have the batteries replaced at an authorized
have been triggered when they have been Mercedes-Benz Center.
moved forward and cannot be adjusted. G Warning!
G Warning! Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive
For safety reasons, have the active head substances. Therefore, keep the batteries
restraints checked at an authorized 1 Fold back out of reach of children.
Mercedes-Benz Center after a rear-end 2 Push back If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help
collision. 3 Push down immediately.
G Warning! X Push the head restraint cushion by the G Warning!

When pushing back the head restraint bottom, back as far as it will go 2. SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate
cushion, make sure your fingers do not X Push the head restraint cushion down into material, which may require special
become caught between the head restraint the guide as far as it will go 3. handling and regard for the environment.
cushion and the cover. Failing to do so may X Fold the head restraint cushion by the top, Check with your local government’s
lead to injury. back firmly until it engages 1. disposal guidelines. California residents,
see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
X Repeat this procedure on the active head
i Pressing the head restraint cushion back HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/
restraint for the second front seat.
requires high force. If you encounter index.cfm.
For information on active head restraints, see
difficulties when pushing the head restraint
“Active head restraints” (Y page 57). Batteries contain materials that can harm the
back, please have the procedure
For information on head restraint adjustment, environment if disposed of improperly.
performed at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
see “Seats” (Y page 86). Recycling of batteries is the preferred method
Center.
of disposal. Many states/provinces require
Z
353
Practical hints
Replacing SmartKey batteries

sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for X Insert mechanical key 1 into opening. X Slide mechanical key 1 back into the
recycling. X Press mechanical key 1 in direction of SmartKey.
When inserting the batteries, make sure they arrow. X Check the operation of the SmartKey as
are clean and free of lint. Battery compartment 2 is unlatched. well as the KEYLESS-GO function.
When replacing batteries, always replace X Pull battery compartment 2 out of the
both batteries. SmartKey housing.
i The required replacement batteries are
available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
CR 2025 or equivalent.
X Remove the mechanical key from the
SmartKey (Y page 350).
3 Batteries
4 Contact springs
X Pull out batteries 3.

X Insert new batteries 3 under contact
springs 4 with the positive terminal (+)
side facing up.
X Return battery compartment 2 into
1 Mechanical key
SmartKey housing until it locks into place.
2 Battery compartment
354
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs the lamp and its components. We Bulbs
recommend that you have such work done
Safety notes by a qualified technician.
Safe vehicle operation depends on proper
exterior lighting and signaling to a large i Since replacing bulbs is a technically
degree. highly demanding process, we recommend
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely to have them replaced at an authorized
important. Have headlamps checked and Mercedes-Benz Center.
readjusted at regular intervals and when a
bulb has been replaced. Contact an i If the headlamps or front fog lamps are
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for fogged up on the inside as a result of high
headlamp adjustment. humidity, driving the vehicle a distance with
the lights on should clear up the fogging.
G Warning!
Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot.
Allow the lamp to cool down before
changing a bulb.
Keep bulbs out of reach of children.
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A
bulb can explode if you:
Rtouch or move it when hot Front lamps
Rdrop the bulb
Rscratch
Lamp Type
the bulb
Wear eye and hand protection. 1 Additional turn LED
Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it signal lamp
is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair 2 Turn signal lamp 3457 A
Z
355
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Lamp Type Rear lamps RYour hands should be dry and free of oil and
grease.
3 Halogen headlamp: H7 (55 W) Lamp Type RIf the newly installed bulb does not come
Low beam on, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
8 High-mounted LED
Bi-Xenon D1S-35 W brake lamp Center.
headlamp: Low and i Mercedes-Benz recommends using
9 Side marker lamp W5W
high beam18 Longlife (LL) bulbs.
a Turn signal lamp PY 21 W
4 Halogen headlamp: H7 (55 W) Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following
High beam/high- b Brake lamp, parking 2 x P 21 W lamps replaced at an authorized Mercedes-
beam flasher and standing lamp, Benz Center:
tail lamp RAdditional turn signal lamps in the exterior
Bi-Xenon H7 (55 W)
headlamp: High- c Backup lamp P 21 W rear view mirrors
beam flasher RBi-Xenon lamps
d License plate lamps W 5 W
5 Front fog lamp H11 (55 W) RFront fog lamps
e Rear fog lamp P 21 W
Corner-illuminating H11 (55 W) RFront side marker lamps
(driver’s side only)
front fog lamp RHigh-beam bulbs in the halogen-type and
6 Side marker lamp W5W Notes on bulb replacement Bi-Xenon front lamps
RLicense plate lamps
ROnly use 12-volt bulbs of the same type and
7 Parking and 2 x W 5 W-BV
with the specified watt rating. RFront parking and standing lamps
standing lamp
RSwitch the lights off before changing a bulb RHigh-mounted brake lamp
to prevent short circuits.
! Do not replace the LEDs yourself. You
RAlways use a clean lint-free cloth when could otherwise damage the LEDs or parts
handling bulbs.
18 Vehicles
with Bi-Xenon headlamps: Low beam and high beam use the same D1S-35 W lamp. Do not replace the Bi-Xenon bulbs yourself. Contact an authorized
356
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
of the vehicle. Only have the LEDs replaced G Warning! Low-beam bulb (halogen headlamps
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not remove the cover for the Bi-Xenon only)
headlamp. Because of high voltage in X Turn housing cover 5 counterclockwise
Replacing bulbs for front lamps Xenon lamps, it is dangerous to replace the and remove it.
bulb or repair the lamp and its components. X Pull electric plug off the bulb.
X Switch off the ignition. It is recommended to have such work done
X Remove wire clip from bulb holder 8 by
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position by a qualified technician.
M. pushing down and release from arrestor
hook.
X Open the hood (Y page 255).
X Pull the bulb at its socket out of bulb holder
8.
X Insert the new bulb so that its socket
locates in the recess of bulb holder 8 and
is level to it.
X Fold wire clip back and press it down on
bulb holder 8 to engage it in the arrestor
hook.
X Connect electric plug on the bulb.
6 Bulb socket for parking and standing lamp X Align housing cover 5 and turn it
bulb clockwise.
1 Bulb socket for front turn signal lamp bulb
7 Bulb holder for high-beam bulb
2 Housing cover for parking and standing
8 Bulb holder for low-beam bulb (halogen
lamp headlamps only)
3 Housing cover for parking and standing
lamp
4 Housing cover for high-beam headlamp
5 Housing cover for low-beam halogen or Bi-
Xenon headlamp Z
357
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Front turn signal lamp bulb side headlamp) or lower part (passenger-
side headlamp).
X Turn bulb socket 3 clockwise until it
engages.
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps

Before you start to replace a bulb for a rear
lamp, do the following:
X Switch off the ignition.
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position 1 Tabs
1 Mark M. 2 Connector
2 Handle X Open the trunk. X Disconnect electrical connector 2.
3 Bulb socket X Pull tabs 1 in direction of arrows.
Tail lamp unit X Remove the bulb carrier.
X Turn bulb socket 3 with handle 2
counterclockwise and remove it. X Driver’s side: Lift up the bottom and pull out
X Pull bulb out of bulb socket 3.
the trim panel covering the driver side rear
light.
X Gently press the new bulb into bulb socket
X Passenger side: Open the fuse box in the
3 until the bulb engages.
trunk (Y page 373).
X Place bulb socket 3 back into the housing.
Handle 2 must be in a horizontal line and

mark 1 must be on the upper part (driver’s
358
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades

Other lamps Replacing wiper blades
X Depending on which bulb needs to be
Safety notes
replaced, press gently onto the respective
bulb and turn it counterclockwise out of its G Warning!
bulb socket. For safety reasons, switch off wipers and
X Gently press the new bulb into its bulb remove SmartKey from starter switch
socket and turn it clockwise until it (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Make sure the
engages. vehicle’s on-board electronics have status
0) before replacing a wiper blade.
Reinstall bulb carrier Otherwise, the wiper motor could suddenly
Bulb carrier X Reinstall the bulb carrier and let tabs 1 turn on and cause injury.
3 Side marker lamp (Y page 358) engage.
4 Rear fog lamp (driver’s side only), side X Connect the electrical connector 2
G Warning!
marker lamp (Y page 358) until it engages. Wiper blades are components that are
subject to wear and tear. Replace the wiper
5 Backup lamp X Reinstall trim panel.
blades twice a year, preferably in the spring
6 Tail lamp, brake lamp and fall. Otherwise the windows will not be
7 Tail lamp, brake lamp, parking and properly wiped. As a result, you may not be
standing lamp able to observe surrounding traffic
8 Turn signal lamp conditions and could cause an accident.
Side marker lamp
! Never open the hood when a wiper arm is
X Turn the bulb socket on backside of tail folded forward.
lamp unit counterclockwise and remove Hold on to the wiper when folding a wiper
side marker lamp 3 with bulb socket. arm back. If released, the force of the
X Turn the new bulb with socket on backside impact from the tensioning spring could
of tail lamp unit clockwise until it engages. crack the windshield.
Z
359
Practical hints
Flat tire
Do not allow a wiper arm to contact the X Turn the wiper blade in direction of arrow Flat tire
windshield glass without a wiper blade 1.
inserted. X Slide the wiper blade sideways out of the
Safety notes
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have retainer in the direction of arrow 2. G Warning!
this work carried out at an authorized
The dimensions of the spare wheel are
different from those of the road wheels. As
Installing wiper blades
a result, the vehicle handling
Removing wiper blades X Slide the wiper blade onto wiper arm until characteristics change when driving with a
it locks in place. spare wheel mounted. Adapt your driving
! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts. X Rotate the wiper blade into position parallel style accordingly.
They could tear. to the wiper arm. The spare wheel is for temporary use only.
X Fold the wiper arm forward until it snaps X Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on the When driving with spare wheel mounted,
into place. windshield. ensure proper tire inflation pressure and do
Make sure you hold on to the wiper when not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph
folding the wiper arm back. (80 km/h).
Contact the nearest authorized Mercedes-
! Make sure the wiper blades are properly
Benz Center as soon as possible to have the
installed. Improperly installed wiper blades spare wheel replaced with a regular road
may cause windshield damage. wheel.
Never operate the vehicle with more than
one spare wheel mounted.
Do not switch off the ESP® when a spare
wheel is mounted.
1 Turning wiper blade

2 Removing
360
Practical hints
Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle doors only when conditions are safe to do vertical when in use, especially on inclines
so. or declines.
X Park the vehicle in a safe distance from
moving traffic on a hard, flat surface when The jack is intended only for lifting the
possible. vehicle briefly for wheel changes. It is not
Mounting the spare wheel
X Turn on the hazard warning flasher.
suited for performing maintenance work
Introduction under the vehicle. To help avoid personal
X Turn the steering wheel so that the front
injury, use the jack only to lift the vehicle
wheels are in a straight-ahead position. X Prepare the vehicle as described during a wheel change.
X Engage the parking brake. (Y page 361).
Never get beneath the vehicle while it is
X Shift the automatic transmission into park X Take the following out of the vehicle:
supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet
position P (manual transmission to 1st or Rspare wheel
away from the area under the lifted vehicle.
reverse gear R). Rjack Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient
X Turn off the engine. capacity jackstands before working under
Rvehicle tool kit box
X Remove the SmartKey from the starter the vehicle.
switch. For information on where to find the Always firmly set the parking brake and
respective items, see “Where will I block the wheels with wheel chocks or
or
find ...?” (Y page 302) and (Y page 304). other sizeable objects before raising the
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Open the
driver’s door (this puts the starter switch in vehicle with the jack. Do not disengage the
Lifting the vehicle parking brake while the vehicle is raised.
position 0, same as with the SmartKey
removed from the starter switch). The G Warning! Make sure that the ground on which the
driver’s door can then be closed again. vehicle is standing and where you place the
When jacking up the vehicle, only use the
Open doors only when conditions are safe jack is solid, level and not slippery. If
jack which has been specifically approved
to do so. necessary, use a large underlay. On
by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Remove the
slippery surfaces, such as tiled floors, you
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking should use a non-slip underlay, for example
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button from the up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
starter switch. a rubber mat.
built into both sides of the vehicle. Make
X Have any passenger exit the vehicle at a
Do not use wooden blocks or similar
sure the jack arm is fully seated in the jack
safe distance from the roadway. Open objects to support the jack. Otherwise the Z
take-up bracket. The jack must always be
361
Practical hints
Flat tire
jack may not be able to achieve its load- G Warning! Make sure the jack arm is fully seated in the
bearing capacity if it is not at its full height. Only jack up the vehicle on level ground or jack take-up bracket.
Never start the engine when the vehicle is on slight inclines/declines. Otherwise, the If you do not position the jack correctly in
raised. vehicle could fall off the jack and injure you the jack take-up bracket, the vehicle can
Also observe the notes on the jack. or others. fall off the jack and seriously or fatally injure
you or others.
X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by
blocking wheels with wheel chocks or other ! Do not position the jack on the body of
sizeable objects. the vehicle, as this may cause damage to
One wheel chock is included with the the vehicle.
vehicle tool kit (Y page 302). For
information on setting up the collapsible
wheel chock, see (Y page 303).
When changing wheel on a level surface:
X Place the wheel chock in front of and
another wheel chock or other sizeable
1 Wheel wrench
object behind the wheel that is diagonally
opposite to the wheel being changed. X On wheel to be changed, loosen but do not
Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack on yet remove the wheel bolts (approximately
a level surface. However, should one full turn with wrench 1).
circumstances require you to do so on a hill, The jack take-up brackets are located directly 2 Take-up bracket
place the wheel chock and another sizeable behind the front wheel housings and in front 3 Jack
object as follows: of the rear wheel housings. 4 Crank
X Place wheel chocks or other sizeable G Warning!
X Place jack 3 on firm ground.
objects on the downhill side blocking both The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
wheels of the axle not being worked on. X Position jack 3 under take-up bracket
up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets.
2 so that it is always vertical as seen from
362
Practical hints
Flat tire
the side, even if the vehicle is parked on an Attaching the spare wheel
incline.
G Warning!
Always replace wheel bolts that are
damaged or rusted.
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.
Damaged wheel hub threads should be
repaired immediately. Do not continue to
drive under these circumstances! Contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
call Roadside Assistance.
Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly X Guide the spare wheel onto the wheel hub
tightened wheel bolts can cause the wheel and push it on.
to come off. This could cause an accident. X Insert the wheel bolts and tighten them
X Turn crank 4 clockwise until jack 3 is
fully seated in take-up bracket 2 and the Be sure to use the correct wheel bolts. slightly.
jack base evenly meets the ground.
G Warning! Lowering the vehicle
X Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is a
Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel
maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground. bolts. Other wheel bolts may come loose. X Lower the vehicle by turning crank
counterclockwise until the vehicle is
Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the
Removing the wheel resting fully on its own weight.
vehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle
X Remove the jack.
X Unscrew and remove the wheel bolts. could fall off the jack.
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. X Clean contact surfaces of wheel and wheel
This could result in damage to the wheel hub.
bolts and wheel hub threads.
! To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat
X Remove the wheel. against hub and hold it there while
installing first wheel bolt. Z
363
Practical hints
Battery
i Vehicles with TPMS: Battery
Do not restart the tire inflation pressure
monitor until a full size wheel/tire with Safety notes
functioning sensor has been placed back A battery should always be sufficiently
into service on the vehicle. charged in order to achieve its rated service
life. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for battery
maintenance intervals.
If you use your vehicle mostly for short-
distance trips, you will need to have the
battery charge checked more frequently.
1 – 5 Wheel bolts When replacing a battery, always use a
battery approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly,
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle
following the diagonal sequence illustrated
for an extended period of time, contact an
(1 to 5), until all bolts are tight. Observe
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about
a tightening torque of 96 lb-ft (130 Nm). steps you need to observe.
G Warning! G Warning!
Have the tightening torque checked after Observe all safety instructions and
changing a wheel. The wheels could come precautions when handling automotive
loose if they are not tightened to a torque batteries.
of 96 lb-ft (130 Nm).
Risk of explosion.
X Fully collapse the jack, with handle folded
in (storage position), see (Y page 303).
X Store the jack and the other vehicle tools Fire, open flames and
in the designated storage space. smoking are prohibited
For information on storing the spare wheel when handling batteries.
after it has been replaced by a regular road Avoid creating sparks.
wheel, see (Y page 304).
364
Practical hints
Battery
Battery acid is caustic. Do G Warning! Never touch the battery first. First touch
not allow it to come into Failure to follow these instructions can the outside body of the vehicle in order to
contact with skin, eyes or result in severe injury or death. release any possible electrostatic charges.
clothing. Never lean over batteries while connecting. Do not rub the battery with rags or cloths.
Wear suitable protective You might get injured. The battery could explode if touched due to
clothing, especially Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not electrostatic charge or due to spark
gloves, apron and allow this fluid to come in contact with formation.
faceguard. eyes, skin or clothing. In case it does,
Wear eye protection. immediately flush affected area with water ! As with any other battery, have the
Rinse any acid spills and seek medical help if necessary. battery disconnect at a qualified workshop
immediately with clear A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, or an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center if
water. Contact a which is flammable and explosive. Keep you do not intend to operate your vehicle
physician if necessary. flames or sparks away from battery, avoid for an extended period of time to prevent
Keep children away. improper connection of jumper cables, battery discharge. You may also connect an
smoking etc. accessory battery charge unit expressly
approved by Mercedes-Benz for your
Follow the instructions in G Warning! vehicle model to maintain the battery
this Operator’s Manual. Do not place metal objects on the battery charge. Contact an authorized Mercedes-
as this could result in a short circuit. Benz Center for further information.
Use leak-proof batteries only to avoid the The battery, the battery ventilation hose
Batteries contain materials that can harm the and the lateral plug must always be
risk of acid burns in the event of an
environment if disposed of improperly. Large securely installed when the vehicle is in
accident.
12-volt storage batteries contain lead. operation.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred method Take care that you do not become statically
of disposal. Many states (USA only) or charged, e.g. by wearing synthetic clothing ! Never loosen or detach battery terminal
provinces (Canada only) require sellers of or rubbing against textiles. For this reason, clamps while the engine is running or the
batteries to accept old batteries for recycling. you also should not pull or push the battery SmartKey is in the starter switch or
over carpets or other synthetic materials. KEYLESS-GO button is in position 1.
Otherwise the alternator and other Z
365
Practical hints
Jump starting
electronic components could be severely Charging the battery Jump starting
damaged.
G Warning!
Have the battery checked regularly at an G Warning!
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Never charge a battery while still installed
Failure to follow these directions will cause
Refer to Maintenance Booklet for in the vehicle unless the accessory battery
damage to the electronic components, and
maintenance intervals or contact an charge unit approved by Mercedes-Benz is
can lead to a battery explosion and severe
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for being used. Gases may escape during
injury or death.
further information. charging and cause explosions that may
result in paint damage, corrosion or Never lean over batteries while connecting
personal injury. or jump starting. You might get injured.
i After battery power was interrupted, do
the following: An accessory battery charge unit specially Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and allow this fluid to come in contact with
RReset the automatic exterior mirror fold
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is eyes, skin or clothing. In case it does,
in function (Y page 96). immediately flush affected area with water,
available, permitting the charging of the
RSet the clock (Y page 147). Vehicles with
battery in its installed position. Contact an and seek medical help if necessary.
COMAND: see separate COMAND authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
operating instructions. information and availability. which is flammable and explosive. Keep
Charge battery in accordance with the flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
separate instructions for the accessory improper connection of jumper cables,
battery charger. smoking, etc.
Attempting to jump start a frozen battery
Have batteries charged at an authorized can result in it exploding, causing personal
Mercedes-Benz Center. If you charge the injury.
batteries yourself, follow the operating
Read all instructions before proceeding.
instructions for your charging device.
Only use a battery charge unit with a ! Vehicles with automatic transmission
maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V. and/or 4MATIC:
X Charge battery in accordance with the
Do not tow-start the vehicle. You could
instructions of the battery charger otherwise seriously damage the automatic
manufacturer.
366
Practical hints
Jump starting
transmission which is not covered by the If the battery is discharged, the engine can be that move when an engine is started or
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. started with jumper cables and the fully running.
charged battery of another vehicle or an RShould the battery be drained completely,
! Jump starting should only be performed equivalent starter pack. Observe the let the donating power source charge the
using the jump-start terminals located in following: vehicle for several minutes before
the engine compartment. RAccess to the battery is not possible on all reattempting the starting process.
Avoid repeated and lengthy starting vehicles. If you cannot access the battery
attempts. X Make sure the two vehicles do not touch.
in your vehicle provide jump start power by
Do not attempt to start the engine using a X Switch off all electrical consumers.
an external battery or starter pack.
battery quick-charge unit. X Engage the parking brake.
RJump starting should only be performed
If the engine does not run after several X Make sure the automatic transmission is in
when the engine and catalytic converter
unsuccessful starting attempts, have it are cold. park position P (manual transmission to
checked at the nearest authorized Neutral).
RDo not start the engine if the battery is
Mercedes-Benz Center. X Open the hood.
frozen. Let the battery thaw out first.
Excessive unburned fuel generated by X Slide cover 2 from positive under hood
repeated failed starting attempts may ROnly jump start from batteries with the terminal 3 in direction of arrow.
damage the catalytic converter and may same voltage rating (12 V). Jump starting
present a fire risk. with a more powerful battery could damage
Make sure the jumper cables do not have the vehicle’s electrical system, which will
loose or missing insulation. not be covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Make sure the cable clamps do not touch
any other metal part while the other end is ROnly use jumper cables with sufficient
still attached to a battery. cross-section and insulated terminal
clamps.
RAlways make sure the jumper cables are
not on or near pulleys, fans or other parts
1 Positive terminal of charged battery Z

2 Positive terminal cover
367
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle

3 Positive terminal X Slide cover 2 from positive under hood Towing the vehicle
4 Negative terminal terminal 3 back.
X Have the battery checked at the nearest
Safety notes
5 Negative terminal of charged battery
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Mercedes-Benz recommends that the vehicle
! Never invert the terminal connections! be transported with all wheels off the ground
using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly
X Connect positive terminal 1 of the equipment. This method is preferable to other
charged battery with positive terminal 3 types of towing.
with a jumper cable. Clamp the cable to
positive terminal 1 of the charged battery ! To prevent damage during transport, do
first. not tie down vehicle by its chassis or
suspension parts.
X Start engine of the vehicle with the charged
battery and run at idle speed. If circumstances do not permit the
X Connect negative terminal 5 of the
recommended towing methods, the vehicle
may be towed with all wheels on the ground
charged battery with negative terminal 4
or front axle raised (except vehicles with
with a jumper cable. Clamp the cable to
4MATIC) only so far as necessary to have the
negative terminal 5 of the charged battery
vehicle moved to a safe location where the
first.
recommended towing methods can be
X Start engine of the vehicle with the
employed.
discharged battery and run at idle speed.
You can now turn on the electrical ! Before towing the vehicle observe the
consumers. Do not switch on the following instructions:
headlamps under any circumstances. RVehicles with automatic transmission
X Remove the jumper cables first from and/or 4MATIC: Do not tow-start the
negative terminals 4 and 5 and then vehicle. You could otherwise seriously
from positive terminals 3 and 1. damage the automatic transmission
You can now switch on the headlamps.
368
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle

which is not covered by the Mercedes- Installing towing eye bolt X Press mark on cover 1 as indicated by the
Benz Limited Warranty. arrow.
Depending on whether you are towing a
RDo not tow with sling-type equipment. X Lift cover 1 off to reveal the threaded hole
vehicle or you are being towed, the towing eye
Towing with sling-type equipment over bolt can be screwed into threaded holes for the towing eye bolt.
bumpy roads will damage radiator and which are located behind covers on each
supports. bumper. Removing cover in rear bumper
RTowing of the vehicle should only be The towing eye bolt is supplied with the
done using the properly installed towing
G Warning!
vehicle tool kit, located underneath the trunk
eye bolt. Never attach a tow cable, tow floor (Y page 302). In order to avoid possible serious burns or
rope or tow rod to the vehicle chassis, injury, use extreme caution when removing
X Take the vehicle tool kit out of the trunk.
frame or suspension parts. the rear cover, because the rear exhaust
pipe is extremely hot.
i If the battery is disconnected or Removing cover in front bumper
discharged
Rthe SmartKey will not turn in the starter
switch
RVehicles with automatic transmission:
the automatic transmission will remain in
park position P
RFor more information see
“Battery” (Y page 364) or “Jump
starting” (Y page 366).
RVehicles with automatic transmission: 1 Cover
1 Cover
For information on manually unlocking
the gear selector lever, see
(Y page 352)
Z
369
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle

X Press mark on cover 1 as indicated by the Removing towing eye bolt it can no longer be turned in the switch. In
arrow. X this case, the steering is locked. To unlock,
Loosen towing eye bolt 1
X Lift cover 1 off to reveal the threaded hole remove SmartKey from starter switch and
counterclockwise with wheel wrench.
for the towing eye bolt. reinsert.
X Unscrew towing eye bolt 1.
X Store the towing eye bolt and wheel wrench G Warning!

Fixing towing eye bolt
back into the vehicle tool kit. With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and
steering systems. In this case, it is
Towing with all wheels on the ground important to keep in mind that a
considerably higher degree of effort is
G Warning! necessary to brake and steer the vehicle.
If circumstances require towing the vehicle Adapt your driving accordingly.
with all wheels on the ground, always tow
with a tow bar if: X Make sure the ignition is switched on.
Rthe engine will not run X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the
Rthere is a malfunction in the brake brake pedal and keep it pressed.
system X Vehicles with manual transmission: Shift
1 Towing eye bolt
Rthere
the manual transmission into the neutral
X
is a malfunction in the power
Take the towing eye bolt and the wheel position (no gear selected).
supply or in the vehicle’s electrical
wrench from the vehicle tool kit. or
system
X Screw towing eye bolt 1 clockwise into X Vehicles with automatic transmission: Shift
threaded hole to its stop. This is necessary to adequately control the
the automatic transmission into neutral
towed vehicle.
X Insert wheel wrench into towing eye and position N.
tighten towing eye bolt 1 by turning it Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels X Release the brake pedal.
clockwise. on the ground, make sure the SmartKey is
X If engaged, release the parking brake.
in starter switch position 2.
X Switch on the hazard warning flasher
If the SmartKey is left in the starter switch
position 0 for an extended period of time, (Y page 103).
370
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle

! The vehicle may be towed only for X Vehicles with manual transmission: Shift ! The vehicle may be towed only for
distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a the manual transmission into the neutral distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a
speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). position (no gear selected). speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h).
or
i To signal turns while being towed with the X Vehicles with automatic transmission: Shift
hazard warning flasher in use you can
the automatic transmission into neutral
activate the combination switch for the left
position N.
or right turn signal in the usual manner –
X Release the brake pedal.
only the selected turn signal will operate.
Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard X If engaged, release the parking brake.
warning flasher will operate again. X Switch off the automatic central locking
(Y page 150).
X Switch off the ignition and leave the
Towing with front axle raised
SmartKey in the starter switch.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: Do not tow with X Switch on the hazard warning flasher
the front axle raised. Doing so could (Y page 103).
damage the transfer case, which is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited ! Vehicles without 4MATIC:
Warranty. Because the ESP® operates automatically,
All wheels must be on or off the ground. the engine and ignition must be shut off
Observe instructions for towing the vehicle (SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or
with all wheels on the ground. 1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in
position 0 or 1) when the vehicle is being
When towing the vehicle with the front axle towed with the front axle raised.
raised, the wheels on the ground have to
move freely. Active braking action through the ESP®
may otherwise seriously damage the brake
X Make sure the ignition is switched on.
system which is not covered by the
X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
brake pedal and keep it pressed. Z
371
Practical hints
Fuses
Fuses If a newly inserted fuse blows again, have the Fuse box in passenger compartment
cause determined and rectified by an
Introduction authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. ! Do not use sharp objects such as a
A fuse chart is located in the trunk with the screwdriver to open the fuse box cover in
The electrical fuses in your vehicle serve to
vehicle tool kit (Y page 302). The fuse chart the dashboard. You could damage the fuse
switch off malfunctioning power circuits.
explains the fuse allocation and fuse box cover or the dashboard.
If a fuse is blown, the components and
systems secured by that fuse will stop amperages.
operating.
G Warning! Before replacing fuses
Only use fuses approved by Mercedes-Benz X Engage the parking brake.
with the specified amperage for the system X Make sure the automatic transmission is in
in question and do not attempt to repair or
park position P (manual transmission to
bridge a blown fuse. Using other than
Neutral).
approved fuses or using repaired or bridged
X Switch off all electrical consumers.
fuses may cause an overload leading to a
fire, and/or cause damage to electrical X Turn off the engine.
components and/or systems. Have the X Remove the SmartKey from the starter 1 Fuse box cover
cause determined and remedied by an switch. 2 Remove cover
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Open the
3 Release cover
driver’s door (this puts the starter switch in
A blown fuse must be replaced by an
position 0, same as with the SmartKey X Open the driver’s door.
appropriate spare fuse (recognizable by its
color or the fuse rating given on the fuse) of removed from the starter switch). The X Opening: Using your hands, pull cover 1
the amperage recommended in the fuse driver’s door then can be closed again. in direction of arrow 3 and remove 2.
chart. Any Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad X Closing: Hook cover 1 into the opening at
to advise you on this subject. the front.
i In case of a blown fuse contact Roadside X Press cover 1 back on until it engages.
Assistance or an authorized Mercedes-

! The fuse box cover must be properly
Benz Center.
positioned as described to prevent
372
Practical hints
Fuses
moisture or dirt from entering the fuse box Fuse box in engine compartment ! The fuse box cover must be installed
and possibly impairing fuse operation. properly to prevent moisture and/or dirt
X Open the hood. from entering the fuse box and possibly
impairing fuse operation.
Fuse box in trunk
X Close the hood after checking or replacing
fuses.
1 Clamps
2 Wire
1 Lock
2 Cover X With a dry cloth, remove any moisture from
the fuse box 1.
X Open the trunk. X Opening: Release wire 2 from fuse box
X Opening: Turn lock 1 clockwise. cover.
X Pull cover 2 downward in direction of X Opening: Release clamps 1.
arrow.
X Remove fuse box cover.
X Closing: Press cover 2 backward.
X Closing: Make sure the sealing rubber is
X Turn lock 1 counterclockwise.
positioned properly.
X Press fuse box cover down and secure with
clamps 1.
X Fasten wire 2 on fuse box cover. Z
373
374
Technical data

Parts service ..................................... 376
Warranty coverage ........................... 376
Identification labels .......................... 377
Engine ................................................ 379
Rims and tires ................................... 382
Electrical system .............................. 387
Main dimensions ............................... 388
Weights .............................................. 390
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. ....... 391
375
Technical data
Warranty coverage
Vehicle equipment Parts service Warranty coverage
i This Operator’s Manual describes all All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the
features, standard or optional, potentially maintain a stock of Genuine Mercedes-Benz warranties printed in the Service and
available for your vehicle at the time of Parts required for maintenance and repair Warranty Information booklet.
purchase. Please be aware that your work. In addition, strategically located parts Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
vehicle might not be equipped with all distribution centers provide quick and exchange or repair any defective parts
features described in this manual. reliable parts service. originally installed in the vehicle in
More than 300 000 different parts for accordance with the terms of the following
Mercedes-Benz models are available. warranties:
Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts are subjected RNew Car Limited Warranty
to stringent quality inspections. Each part has REmission System Warranty

been specifically developed, manufactured or REmission Performance Warranty
selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz
vehicles. RCalifornia,Connecticut, Maine,
Therefore, Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,
should be installed. Rhode Island, and Vermont Emission
Control Systems Warranty
! Do not use non-genuine Mercedes-Benz
RState Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon
parts and accessories not authorized by
Mercedes-Benz. Doing so could damage Laws)
the vehicle, which is not covered by the Replacement parts and accessories are
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Also, it covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and
could compromise the vehicle’s durability Accessories warranties, copies of which are
or safety. available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
376
Technical data
Identification labels
Loss of Service and Warranty Identification labels
Information booklet
Should you lose your Service and Warranty
Information booklet, have an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a
replacement. It will be mailed to you.
Example certification label (U.S. vehicles)

2 VIN
1 Certification label (on driver’s door 3 Paintwork code
B-pillar)
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) can
be found in the following locations:
Ron the certification label
Rembossed underneath the carpet in the

front passenger footwell (Y page 378)
Ron the lower edge of the windshield
(Y page 378)
Example certification label (Canada vehicles)

2 VIN
3 Paintwork code
Z
377
Technical data
Identification labels
i Data shown on certification label are for
illustration purposes only. These data are
specific to each vehicle and may vary from
data shown in the illustration. Refer to
certification label on vehicle for actual data
specific to your vehicle.
6 Emission control information label,

includes both federal and California
certification exhaust emission standards
7 Engine number (engraved on engine)
8 VIN (on lower edge of windshield)
i When ordering parts, please specify

4 Carpet
vehicle identification and engine number.
5 VIN
X Move the front passenger seat backward

as far as possible (Y page 87).
X Fold carpet 4 backward.
VIN 5 is now visible.
378
Technical data
Engine
Engine
Model C 230 (204.052)19,20 C 300 (204.054)19

C 230 Sport (204.052)19,20 C 300 Sport (204.054)19,21
C 230 4MATIC (204.085)19,20 C 300 4MATIC (204.081)19
C 230 4MATIC Sport (204.085)19,20 C 300 4MATIC Sport (204.081)19,21
Engine 272 272
Mode of operation 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders 6 6
Bore 3.46 in (88.00 mm) 3.46 in (88.00 mm)
Stroke 2.69 in (68.40 mm) 3.23 in (82.10 mm)
Total piston displacement 152.3 cu in (2 496 cm3) 182.8 cu in (2 996 cm3)
Compression ratio 11.4:1 11.3:1
Output acc. to SAE J 1349 201 hp/6 100 rpm (150 kW/6 100 rpm)22 228 hp/6 000 rpm (170 kW/6 000 rpm)22
Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349 181 lb-ft/2 900 rpm - 5 500 rpm 221 lb-ft/2 500 rpm - 5 000 rpm
(245 Nm/2 900 rpm - 5 500 rpm) (300 Nm/2 500 rpm - 5 000 rpm)
Maximum engine speed 6 500 rpm 6 500 rpm
19 The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.
20 Canada only.
21 USA Z
only.
22 Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
379
Technical data
Engine
Model C 230 (204.052)19,20 C 300 (204.054)19
C 230 Sport (204.052)19,20 C 300 Sport (204.054)19,21
C 230 4MATIC (204.085)19,20 C 300 4MATIC (204.081)19
C 230 4MATIC Sport (204.085)19,20 C 300 4MATIC Sport (204.081)19,21
Firing order 1-4-3-6-2-5 1-4-3-6-2-5
Poly-V-belt 2 404 mm 2 404 mm
380
Technical data
Engine
Model C 350 (204.056)23,24 C 63 AMG (204.077)23
C 350 Sport (204.056)23,25
C 350 4MATIC (204.087)23,24
Engine 272 156
Mode of operation 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders 6 8
Bore 3.66 in (92.90 mm) 4.02 in (102.20 mm)
Stroke 3.39 in (86.00 mm) 3.72 in (94.60 mm)
Total piston displacement 213.5 cu in (3 498 cm3) 378.8 cu in (6 208 cm3)
Compression ratio 10.7:1 11.3:1
Output acc. to SAE J 1349 268 hp/6 000 rpm (200 kW/6 000 rpm)26 450 hp/6 800 rpm (336 kW/6 800 rpm)26
Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349 258 lb-ft/2 400 rpm - 5 000 rpm 443 lb-ft/5 000 rpm (600 Nm/5 000 rpm)
(350 Nm/2 400 rpm - 5 000 rpm)
Maximum engine speed 6 500 rpm 7 200 rpm
Firing order 1-4-3-6-2-5 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Poly-V-belt 2 404 mm 2 360 mm
23 The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.
24 Canada only.
25 USA Z
only.
26 Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
381
Technical data
Rims and tires

Rims and tires dimensional variations and different tire not available as standard or optional
deformation characteristics that could factory equipment, but can be purchased
Notes cause them to come into contact with the from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
! Only use tires which have been tested and vehicle body or axle parts. Damage to the Equipping your vehicle with winter tires
approved by Mercedes-Benz. Tires tires or the vehicle may be the result. approved for your vehicle model may
approved by Mercedes-Benz are developed require the purchase of two or four wheel
i Further information on tires and rims is rims of the recommended size for use with
to provide best possible performance in
available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz these winter tires. This depends on vehicle
conjunction with the driving safety systems
Center. A placard with the recommended model and the standard or optional factory-
on your vehicle such as the ABS or the
tire inflation pressures is located on the equipped wheel rim/tire configuration on
ESP®. Tires specially developed for your driver’s door B-pillar. Some vehicles may
vehicle and tested and approved by your vehicle. For more information contact
have supplemental tire inflation pressure an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Mercedes-Benz can be identified by finding information for driving at high speeds or for
the following on the tire’s sidewall: vehicle loads less than the maximum
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original
loaded vehicle condition. If such
equipment tires information is provided, it can be found on
Using tires other than those approved by the placard located on the inside of the fuel
Mercedes-Benz may result in damage that filler flap. The tire inflation pressure should
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz be checked regularly and should only be
Limited Warranty. adjusted on cold tires. Follow tire
manufacturer’s maintenance
! Using tires other than those approved by recommendation included with the vehicle.
Mercedes-Benz can have detrimental For information on recommended tire
effects, such as inflation pressure and supplemental tire
Rpoor handling characteristics inflation pressure information for special
Rincreased noise driving situations, see (Y page 266).
Rincreased fuel consumption i The following pages also list the approved
wheel rim and tire sizes for equipping your
Moreover, tires and rims not approved by
vehicles with winter tires. Winter tires are
Mercedes-Benz may, under load, exhibit
382
Technical data
Rims and tires

Same size tires
Model C 23027 C 30028 C 35027 C 63 AMG

C 230 4MATIC27 C 300 4MATIC28 C 350 4MATIC27
Rims (light alloy) 7 J x 16 H2 7.5 J x 17 H2 7.5 J x 17 H2 8 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset 1.69 in (43 mm) 1.85 in (47 mm) 1.85 in (47 mm) 1.77 in (45 mm)
All-season tires29 205/55 R16 91H M+S 225/45 R17 91H M+S — —
Winter tires29,30 205/55 R16 91H 225/45 R17 91H 225/45 R17 91H 225/40 R18 92H XL
M+S. M+S. M+S. (Extra Load) M+S.
27 Canada only.
28 USA only.
29 Radial-ply tires. Z
30 Not available as factory equipment.
383
Technical data
Rims and tires

Mixed size tires
Model C 230 Sport31 C 35031

C 230 4MATIC Sport31 C 350 Sport32
C 30031 C 350 4MATIC31
C 300 Sport32
C 300 4MATIC31
C 300 4MATIC Sport32
Front axle Rims (light alloy) 7.5 J x 17 H2 —
AMG rims (light alloy) — 7.5 J x 17 H2
Wheel offset 1.85 in (47 mm) 1.85 in (47 mm)
All-season tires33 225/45 R17 91H M+S 225/45 R17 91H M+S
Rear axle Rims (light alloy) 8.5 J x 17 H2 —
AMG rims (light alloy) — 8.5 J x 17 H2
All-season tires33,34 245/40 R17 91H M+S 245/40 R17 91H M+S
31 Canada only.
32 USA only.
33 Radial-ply tires.
34 Must not be used with snow chains.
384
Technical data
Rims and tires

Model C 30035 C 63 AMG
C 300 Sport36
C 300 4MATIC35
C 35035
C 350 Sport36
C 350 4MATIC35
Front axle AMG rims (light alloy) 8 J x 18 H2 8 J x 18 H2
Summer tires37 225/40 ZR18 92Y XL (Extra Load) 235/40 ZR18 95Y XL (Extra Load)
Rear axle AMG rims (light alloy) 8.5 J x 18 H2 9 J x 18 H2
Summer tires37,38 255/35 ZR18 94Y XL (Extra Load) 255/35 ZR18 94Y XL (Extra Load)
35 Canada only.
36 USA only.
37 Radial-ply tires. Z
385
Technical data
Rims and tires

Spare wheel
! Compare the recommended tire inflation pressure for your vehicle with the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label located on the spare
wheel rim.
If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim differs from the values given in this Operator’s Manual, inflate the
tire to the recommended tire inflation pressure given on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim.
i Please note that the tire inflation pressure of the spare wheel differs from the tire inflation pressure of the road tires.
Model C 230 (all models)39 C 350 (all models) C 63 AMG
C 300 (all models)
Rim (steel) 3.5 B x 16 H2 3.5 B x 17 H2 3.5 B x 18
Wheel offset 0.79 in (20 mm) 0.79 in (20 mm) 0.79 in (20 mm)
Minispare tire40 T 125/90 R16 98M T 125/80 R17 99M T 125/70 R18 99M
Recommended tire inflation pressure 61 psi (4.2 bar) 61 psi (4.2 bar) 61 psi (4.2 bar)
39 Canada only.
386
Technical data
Electrical system
Electrical system
Model All models except C 63 AMG C 63 AMG

Alternator 14 V/150 A 14 V/180 A
Starter motor 12 V/1.4 kW 12 V/1.7 kW
Battery 12 V/74 Ah 12 V/95 Ah
Spark plugs Type Bosch Y 7 MPP33 NGK ILZKAR 7A10
Electrode gap 0.031 in (0.8 mm) 0.039 in (1.0 mm)
Tightening torque 15 lb-ft - 18 lb-ft (20 Nm - 25 Nm) 14 lb-ft - 18 lb-ft (19.5 Nm - 24.5 Nm)
387
Technical data
Main dimensions
Main dimensions
Model C 23041 C 230 4MATIC41

C 30042 C 300 4MATIC42
Overall vehicle length 180.4 in (4 581 mm) 180.4 in (4 581 mm)
Overall vehicle width, exterior rear view mirrors folded out 79.5 in (2 020 mm) 79.5 in (2 020 mm)
Overall vehicle height 56.9 in (1 444 mm) 56.9 in (1 445 mm)
Wheelbase 108.7 in (2 760 mm) 108.7 in (2 760 mm)
Track, front 60.7 in (1 541 mm) 60.7 in (1 541 mm)
Track, rear 60.8 in (1 544 mm) 60.8 in (1 544 mm)
41 Canada only.
42 USA only.
388
Technical data
Main dimensions
Model C 230 Sport43 C 63 AMG
C 30043
C 300 Sport44
C 300 4MATIC43
C 350 (all models)
Overall vehicle length 180.4 in (4 581 mm) 186.1 in (4 726 mm)
Overall vehicle width, exterior rear view mirrors folded out 79.5 in (2 020 mm) 79.5 in (2 020 mm)
Overall vehicle height 56.3 in (1 429 mm) 56.6 in (1 438 mm)
Wheelbase 108.7 in (2 760 mm) 108.9 in (2 765 mm)
Track, front 60.4 in (1 533 mm) 61.8 in (1 569 mm)
Track, rear 59.6 in (1 514 mm) 60.0 in (1 525 mm)
43 Canada Z
only.
44 USA only.
389
Technical data
Weights
Weights
Model All models

Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
Trunk load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
390
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.

Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. For information on tested and approved For health reasons, you should prevent
products, contact an authorized Mercedes- service fluids from coming into direct
Capacities Benz Center or visit www.mbusa.com (USA contact with your skin or clothing.
Vehicle components and their respective only). If a service fluid is swallowed, contact a
lubricants must match. Therefore only use G Warning! physician immediately.
products tested and approved by Mercedes- Comply with all valid regulations with
Benz. respect to handling, storing, and disposing
of service fluids. Otherwise you could
endanger persons or the environment.
Keep service fluids out of the reach of
children.
Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Engine with oil filter All models except C 63 AMG 8.5 US qt (8.0 l) Approved engine oils
C 63 AMG45 9.0 US qt (8.5 l)
Manual transmission C 230 (all models except 4MATIC)46 1.3 US qt (1.2 l) MB Manual Transmission Oil
C 300 (all models except 4MATIC) 1.6 US qt (1.5 l)
45 Engine Z
with oil cooler.
46 Canada only.
391
Technical data

Automatic transmission C 230 (all models)46 9.5 US qt (9.0 l) MB Automatic Transmission Fluid
C 300 (all models except 4MATIC)
C 350 (all models)
C 300 4MATIC (all models) 10.3 US qt (9.7 l)
C 63 AMG47 9.6 US qt (9.1 l)
Front axle C 230 4MATIC (all models)46 0.63 US qt (0.6 l) Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90
C 300 4MATIC (all models) 1.2 US qt (1.1 l)
C 350 4MATIC46
Rear axle C 230 (all models)46 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90
C 300 (all models)
C 350 (all models) 1.2 US qt (1.1 l)
C 63 AMG 1.3 US qt (1.2 l) Fuchs Titan EG 5010 D
Power steering 0.9 US qt (0.8 l) MB Power Steering Fluid
(Chevron Texaco PSF 9109)
Brake system 0.53 US qt (0.5 l) MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4+)
Cooling system All models except C 63 AMG approx. 5.1 US qt (4.8 l) MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
C 63 AMG approx. 12.4 US qt (11.7 l)
46 Canada only.
47 Automatic transmission with oil cooler.
392
Technical data

Fuel tank, 17.4 US gal (66.0 l) Premium unleaded gasoline
including a reserve of (Minimum Posted Octane 91
All models except C 63 AMG 2.1 US gal (8.0 l) [Avg. of 96 RON/86 MON])
C 63 AMG 3.7 US gal (14.0 l) C 300 and C 300 Sport48 with
automatic transmission:
Flexible Fuel Vehicles (identified by a
label reading Premium gasoline or
E85 only! on the fuel filler flap).
Alternative fuel: Ethanol fuel (E85)
Air conditioning system — R134a refrigerant and special
PAG lubricant oil (never R 12)
Washer system 3.7 US qt (3.5 l) MB Windshield Washer
Concentrate49 (Y page 400)
Washer system and 6.3 US qt (6.0 l)
headlamp cleaning Washer fluid mixing ratio
system (Y page 400)
48 USA Z
only.
49 Mixed with water or commercially available premixed washer solvent/antifreeze.
393
Technical data

Approved engine oils Use the table below to determine the Viscosity grades for engine oils
MB sheet number.
Engine oils are specifically tested for their Using the chart below, select oil viscosity
suitability in our engines and durability for our Model Engine MB sheet according to the lowest air temperature
service intervals. Therefore, only use type number expected before the next oil change.
approved engine oils and oil filters required
for vehicles with Maintenance System. C 230 (all models)50 272 229.5
For a listing of approved engine oils and oil C 300 (all models) 272 229.5
filters, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only). C 350 (all models) 272 229.5
! Using engine oils and oil filters of a C 63 AMG 156 229.551

specification other than those expressly
required for the Maintenance System, or
i MB sheet numbers are printed on the
changing of oil and oil filter at change
outside of oil containers.
intervals longer than those called for by the
Maintenance System will result in engine or
emission control system damage not
Warranty.
Please follow Maintenance System
recommendations for scheduled oil
changes. Failure to do so will result in
engine or emission control system damage
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Mercedes-Benz recommends MOBIL OIL.
50 Canada only.
51 Restriction: Only SAE 0W-40/SAE 5W-40 engine oils may be used.
394
Technical data

Engine oil additives Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced If premium unleaded gasoline is not
regularly. Refer to your vehicle’s available and low octane gasoline is used,
! Do not blend oil additives with engine oil. follow these precautions:
Maintenance Booklet for replacement
They may damage the engine. Damage or interval. RHave the fuel tank only partially filled
malfunctions resulting from blending oil
additives are not covered by the Mercedes- with unleaded regular gasoline and fill up
Only brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz
Benz Limited Warranty. with premium unleaded gasoline as soon
is recommended. Any authorized Mercedes-
as possible.
Benz Center will provide you with additional
information. RAvoid full throttle driving and abrupt
Air conditioning refrigerant acceleration.
R134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG RDo not exceed an engine speed of
lubricating oil are used in the air conditioning Premium unleaded gasoline
3 000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded with a
system. G Warning! light load such as two persons and no
! Never use R 12 (CFC) or mineral-based Gasoline is highly flammable and luggage.
lubricating oil. Otherwise damage to the poisonous. It burns violently and can cause RDo not exceed 2/3 of maximum
system will occur. serious personal injury. accelerator pedal position if the vehicle
Never allow sparks, flames or smoking is fully loaded or operating in
materials near gasoline! mountainous terrain.
Brake fluid
Turn off the engine before refueling.
G Warning! Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid
During vehicle operation, the boiling point inhaling fumes and any skin or clothing
of the brake fluid is continuously reduced contact. Extinguish all smoking materials.
through the absorption of moisture from Direct skin contact with fuels and the
the atmosphere. inhalation of fuel vapors are damaging your
Under extremely strenuous operating health.
conditions, this moisture content can lead
to the formation of bubbles in the system, ! To maintain the engine’s durability and
thus reducing the system’s efficiency. performance, premium unleaded gasoline Z
must be used.
395
Technical data

Fuel requirements Flexible Fuel Vehicles between the two different fuels should be
avoided if possible.
Only use premium unleaded gasoline. The C 300 and C 300 Sport52 with automatic
When switching fuels, make sure:
octane number (posted at the pump) must be transmission are Flexible Fuel Vehicles.
91 min. It is an average of both the Research RFuel level is below half full.
Flexible Fuel Vehicles are identified by a label
Octane Number (RON) and the Motor Octane reading Premium gasoline or E85 only! on RFuel level is above reserve (fuel tank
Number (MON): (RON+MON)/2. This is also the fuel filler flap. reserve warning lamp is not lit).
known as the ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
These vehicles are designed to operate on RAmount of added fuel is more than
Reformulated gasolines (RFG) and/or premium unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel 5 gallons (20 liters).
unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates (E85), or on any mixture of these two. Ethanol
such as ethanol, TAME, ETBE, IPA, IBA, and RIgnition is off during refill.
fuel (E85) is a mixture of approximately 85%
TBA can be used provided the ratio of any one ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. RImmediately after refueling engine is
of these oxygenates to gasoline does not started and operated for at least 5 minutes.
exceed 10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%. G Warning!
Ethanol fuel (E85) and its fumes are highly These precautions and recommendations are
The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not supposed to prevent any difficulties when
exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents. flammable, poisonous and burn easily.
Ethanol fuel can cause serious injuries if starting and operating the engine which
Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is not otherwise may be experienced before the
ignited or if you come into contact with it
allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10% engine has fully adapted to the different fuel.
or inhale fumes of it. Avoid inhalation of
ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be If in spite of these recommendations the
ethanol fumes and skin contact with
used. engine does not perform properly, adding
ethanol. Extinguish all open flames before
These blends must also meet all other fuel refueling. Never smoke or create sparks more gasoline (at least 3 gallons [12 liters])
requirements, such as resistance to spark close to ethanol. to the fuel may improve the engine behavior.
knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.
Switching fuels Fuel consumption
For best performance and driveability it is E85 fuel contains less energy per gallon than
recommended to use either one or the other gasoline. To ensure that engine performance
fuel. A refueling pattern that alternates with ethanol fuel is similar to that when using
gasoline, the engine must burn more ethanol
52 USA only.
396
Technical data

fuel. As a result, it is to be expected that the accompanied by a rough idle following the Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
fuel consumption will increase when using start. or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only) for a
E85 compared to gasoline operation. listing of approved product(s). Follow
directions on product label.
Gasoline additives
Maintenance Do not blend other fuel additives with fuel.
A major concern among engine This only results in unnecessary cost and may
Please inform your authorized Mercedes-
manufacturers is carbon build-up caused by be harmful to the engine operation.
Benz Center if you use or have used E85 fuel
gasoline. Mercedes-Benz recommends only
when your vehicle is delivered for ! Damage or malfunction resulting from
the use of quality gasoline containing
maintenance or repairs. poor fuel quality or from blending additional
additives that prevent the build-up of carbon
deposits. fuel additives other than those tested and
Cold weather performance approved by us for use on Mercedes-Benz
After an extended period of using fuels vehicles are not covered by the Mercedes-
It is possible that starting times will without such additives carbon deposits can Benz Limited Warranty or by any pre-owned
significantly increase at temperatures below build up, especially on the intake valves and or Extended Limited warranties.
32‡ (0†). At low temperatures the use of a in the combustion area, leading to engine
block heater is recommended (contact an performance problems such as:
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further RWarm-up hesitation Coolants
information). Rough idling may also be
RUnstable idle The engine coolant is a mixture of water and
experienced at such temperatures before the
anticorrosion/antifreeze, which provides:
engine is fully warmed up. RKnocking/pinging
RCorrosion protection
! E85 fuel is unsuitable for use when RMisfire
RFreeze protection
ambient temperatures fall below 14‡ RPower loss
(-10†). RBoiling protection (by increasing the boiling
In areas where carbon deposits may be point)
Hot weather performance encountered due to lack of availability of
gasoline which contains these additives, The cooling system was filled at the factory
At ambient temperatures above 95‡ (35†) Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of with a coolant providing freeze protection to
start times may increase and be additives approved by us for use on approximately -35‡ (-37†) and corrosion
Mercedes-Benz vehicles. protection. Z
397
Technical data

! Add premixed coolant solution only. contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center If you are not sure about the water quality,
Adding water and MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/ or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only). contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Antifreeze separately from each other, To provide important corrosion protection, Center.
could cause engine damage not covered by the solution must be at least 50%
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. anticorrosion/antifreeze (equivalent to Anticorrosion/antifreeze
If the antifreeze mixture is effective to -35‡ freeze protection to approximately -35‡ Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum
(-37†), the boiling point of the coolant in the [-37†]). parts. The use of aluminum components in
pressurized cooling system is reached at If you use a solution that is more than 55% motor vehicle engines necessitates that
approximately 266‡ (130†). anticorrosion/antifreeze (freeze protection anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant used in
The coolant solution must be used year round to approximately -49‡ [-45†]), the engine such engines be specifically formulated to
to provide the necessary corrosion protection temperature will increase due to the lower protect the aluminum parts. Failure to use
and increase boil-over protection. Refer to heat transfer capability of the solution. such anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant will
the Maintenance Booklet for replacement Therefore, do not use more than this amount result in a significantly shortened service life.
interval. of anticorrosion/antifreeze. Therefore, the following product is strongly
Coolant system design and coolant used If the coolant level is low, water and MB 325.0 recommended for use in your vehicle:
determine the replacement interval. The Anticorrosion/Antifreeze should be used to MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze agent.
replacement interval published in the bring it up to the proper level (have cooling Before the start of the winter season (or once
Maintenance Booklet is only applicable if system checked for signs of leakage). Please a year in hot southern regions), you should
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze solution make sure the mixture is in accordance with have the anticorrosion/antifreeze
or other Mercedes-Benz approved products label instructions. concentration checked.
of equal specification are used to renew the The water in the cooling system must meet The coolant is also regularly checked each
coolant concentration or bring it back up to minimum requirements, which are usually time you bring your vehicle to an authorized
the proper level. satisfied by normal drinking water. Mercedes-Benz Center for service.
For information on other Mercedes-Benz
approved products of equal specification,
398
Technical data

Model Approximate freeze protection
-35‡ (-37†) -49‡ (-45†)
Cooling system All models except C 63 AMG 2.5 US qt (2.4 l) 2.8 US qt (2.6 l)
C 63 AMG 6.2 US qt (5.85 l) 6.8 US qt (6.4 l)
399
Technical data
Washer system and headlamp

cleaning system
G Warning!
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly
flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/
antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it
may ignite and burn. You could be seriously
burned.
X Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate

“MB SummerFit”.
X Mix with water for temperatures above
freezing point.
X Mix with commercially available premixed
washer solvent/antifreeze for
temperatures below freezing point.
Washer fluid mixing ratio

For temperatures above freezing point:
1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts water
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to 1 gal
[4.0 l] water)
For temperatures below freezing point:
1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts solvent
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to 1 gal
[4.0 l] solvent)
400
Service and Literature Therefore, information, illustrations and
descriptions in this Operator’s Manual might
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has differ from your vehicle.
trained technicians and Genuine Mercedes- Reprinting, translation and copying, even of
Benz Parts to service your vehicle properly. excerpts, is not permitted without our prior
For expert advice and quality service, contact authorization in writing.
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Press time May 26, 2008
If you are interested in obtaining service GSP/OIS
literature for your vehicle, please contact an Printed in U. S. A.
We consider this the best way for you to
obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the
Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com
(USA only) or www.mercedes-benz.ca
(Canada only).
G Warning!
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely
careful when performing any service work
or repairs. Improper or incomplete service
or the use of incorrect or inappropriate
parts or materials may damage the vehicle
or its equipment, which may in turn result
in personal injury.
If you have any questions about carrying
out any type of service, turn to the advice
of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
We reserve the right to make changes in
design and equipment.
É2045844581ÄËÍ
2045844581
Order no. 6515 0642 13 Part no. 204 584 45 81 Edition 2009 A

2009 C300sport C300sport4matic C300lux C300lux4matic C350sport 1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2009 C300sport C300sport4matic C300lux C300lux4matic C350sport 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

C-Class

! Highlights hazards that may result in

i Helpful hints or further information you

Safety and security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Practical hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

1, 2, 3 ... Emergency call upon deployment . 241 Anti-theft systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Emergency operation (limp-home Bar (air pressure unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Bulbs

Defroster Locking/unlocking from outside . . . 76 Driving systems

Roadside Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Engine coolant Exterior view of vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Four-wheel drive Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 130 Generator

High-beam flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 I Interior rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Messages in the multifunction Lamps, indicator and warning Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Manual headlamp mode (Low- Multifunction display messages SmartKey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

O P Power assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Push-start Refueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 S

Selective setting Side marker lamps Steering wheel

Rtraffic rules and regulations

Reporting safety defects

Vehicle data recording

Exterior view ....................................... 26

2 L Left turn signal

Multifunction steering wheel

Multifunction steering wheel

• to select submenus • to start the quick

4 Front passenger front air 49, b Seat heating, driver’s side 92

Overhead control panel

Door control panel, seat adjustment

Vehicle equipment .............................. 42

Fastening the seat belts

Installation of infant and child restraint

Driving safety systems

Driving safety systems

Driving safety systems

Driving safety systems

Driving safety systems

Driving safety systems

Driving safety systems

Canceling the alarm

Vehicle equipment .............................. 76 Automatic transmission ................... 121

Locking and unlocking

Locking and unlocking

Locking and unlocking

Locking and unlocking

Locking and unlocking

Locking and unlocking

Opening the trunk

Locking and unlocking

Locking and unlocking

X Lower the trunk lid using handle 1 or 2.

Starter switch positions

Starter switch positions

i AMG vehicles are equipped with a seat

Multifunction steering wheel

Multifunction steering wheel

Headlamp cleaning system

Rremove the SmartKey from the starter Emergency lighting

! If the windshield wipers leave smears on

1 X Right rear reading lamp on/off

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: interrupt the extending procedure.

Driving and parking

Driving and parking